Mark

Mark Made Friends

Once, there was a clever and sweet boy named Mark. He lived in a beautiful candy house. His candy house was made out of all kinds of candies: caramel on the right side, jelly candy on the left, and the top part was made out of Candy Milk.

Mark’s parents invented the Candy Milk. It was very sticky so it stuck on the roof. The door was made out of strips of Apple Mint Candy, and the front of the house was made out of Jelly Water, which Mark’s parents made too.

Mark had a red and white lollipop-swirled head and caramel eyes, a dark chocolate nose and a sweet ketchup mouth. Mark had a sticky french fry body which smelled greasy. But, whenever people saw him they ran to him and took a picture of him because it was funny. P.S sometimes they took selfies with him too.

He also had lollipop sticks for arms and the lollipop sticks could bend and stretch. His arms were also made out of bendy metal! Mark was born with no arms so the doctor had to make an injection and inject Mark’s arm with some sticky gooey stuff so they could stick the metal in! But, Mark had normal hands because he had to use them to do stuff.

Mark’s rude classmates and mean teachers didn’t like Mark. Mark did not like the way they acted. Mark felt sad and terrified, his classmates always bullied him. They wanted him to get scolded, so in class, his classmates always asked him to lie on the table so the teacher would see him and scold him. Mark wanted to make friends so he thought, “Maybe if I listen to them they’ll like me.”

When it was time for the classmates’ turn to sweep the classroom floor, they asked Mark to do it for them. Mark thought the teacher didn’t deserve to teach in the school.

Once, when somebody pushed Mark on the floor, the teacher blamed Mark. There was another time that the teacher lied to him that she liked him, but after she lied to Mark, she scolded him. Poor Mark had no friends because he looked different.

April 24th was the day Mark went into 3rd grade. The day before he wished that he would have good new friends who would play with him even though he smelled like a french fry.

The next day, a classmate, Michael, saw him all poor and sad, and Michael went up to Mark and said, “Hi, what’s your name? I am Michael, the leader of the class. Can we be friends?” Mark said, “Please be my friend!”

The next day he met Gabriel, who went up to him and said, “Sorry I was sick yesterday, but I am the assistant of the leader, Michael. Michael told me that he made friends with you, that means that I also am going to be friends with you, too.” Mark shook hands with him and said, “It is my pleasure to be friends with you.”

The next day a new girl came in and she said, “Hi, I was sick the day before yesterday, and yesterday I was at a singing competition where I got the first prize. I am a friend of Gabriel’s, assistant of the leader Michael. I heard that they are your friends, so I have to be friends with you too.”Mark said, “Nice to meet you!” He bowed to her.

Mark started to wonder who could make such a thing happen? Mark thought and thought and thought ”I have to meet that person.” So he asked his parents who would be able to do that. His parents were curious why he asked because he never asked those questions.

They replied, “Fairy godmothers and the mighty Lord.” But Mark never heard about them before, so he didn’t know that Fairy godmothers do not exist. And he didn’t know that he couldn’t see the mighty Lord.  

He began searching for Fairy godmothers until one day he fell into a deep hole while he was on his search. He landed in the underworld where phantoms live. He also had never learned about phantoms.

He asked them, “Do you know Fairy godmothers?”

The phantom gasped and replied. “You don’t know that Fairy godmothers don’t exist? Only the Tooth Fairy does!”

Mark said ,“Okay, but can you help me get up?”

The phantom said, “Yes, there is a staircase straight ahead. Turn left, then turn right, and you will see it. Just walk up and turn right, then turn left, then walk straight ahead, then go up the other staircase, and you are there.”

Mark replied, “I can’t remember all that, I’m only a kid!”

The phantom said, “We don’t know about kids down here.”

“Do you have any paper so you can write the instructions down for me?” Mark asked.

Then the phantom said, “What is a paper?”

Mark said, “A paper is white and-”

The phantom interrupted him and said, “We only know the colors pink, brown, and black. We don’t know this white you speak of.”

“It is rude to interrupt people, especially kids.” Mark said.

“Just remember in your brain!” The phantom said “Go to the staircase. If you walk straight ahead, turn left and you will see it. Just walk up the stairs and turn right, then turn left, then walk straight ahead, then go up the other staircase, and you are there.”

Mark said, “Okay, I don’t have time, goodbye.”

Then he began walking straight ahead, just like the Phantom said. Then he said, “The Phantom said the staircase was just here, or did I forget to turn left or right? I forget! I don’t know the way back to the phantom, what should I do!”

Suddenly, a flash of light appeared and then an old man walked out with a white robe. There were lots of flying men and women with harps, some with long hair, some with short. Mark didn’t know who the old man was, but he knew that even though he didn’t know the old man, he could not be rude to him. After that, he asked “Who are you, did you give me all of my friends?”

The old man replied, “My name is God, and yes, I did.” Then Mark opened his mouth and kneeled down because he was shocked. God said, “Do not worry, Hakuna Matata.”

Then Mark asked, “What is Hakuna Matata?”

God began to sing a song, “Hakuna Matata, what a wonderful phrase…”

Mark began to sing with God too. “Hakuna Matata…” Then a flash surrounded Mark and he heard voices shouting “Hallelujah!”

Suddenly he was back to his old house. He high-fived himself and then pinched himself because his lollipop-stick arm hurt. Then he closed his eyes for a second and……

Love War

Once upon a time there was a animal and that animal’s name was Rosy Loopyflower. She was a nice little fox and she loved to do things for her friends. She was always there for her friends. She always wanted to have  good impressions. She wanted them to like her and they did. And so one day she met these mean wolves at the park and she did not like them. They wore big metal rings and had metal clothing. Their teeth were big and yellow. And then she saw one out of the corner of her eye pickpocketing someone. And then she saw all of them group together and then spread apart. Then they all walked onto streets and they were stopping traffic, making all of the cars smash together. Then she heard a wolf talking about this really powerful machine that was so powerful that it could wipe out like five armies at the same exact time. And then she heard him talking about what was sort of a big like tank, a big like gun type tank that was super duper big, and then she got really scared. So she ran off to go fetch her friends and tell them all about the new machine. And she thought they were going to attack her with the machine. So she went to get get her friends to tell them all about this big machine to see if they knew anything about this big machine and anything about if they were going to attack the foxes. So then she said, “Do you guys know anything about this machine?”

And they said, “I have no idea Rosy.” So later that day it was nighttime and she was getting ready for bed. She heard the doorbell ring, so she went to the door and opened it.

She said, “Oh good, it’s the newspaper!” And then the said, “Ok then. Well, I guess I could read this newspaper even though it’s a little late.” So she read the newspaper and she came over something that was rather odd. There was a column that said There is a machine that is really big and it’s a gun type tank and it was just invested by our great scientist Dr. Russiansnot. Then two minutes later she got dressed and she went out the door to tell them about this amazing machine and how she thought that they were going to attack her but she was wrong. The foxes would be the attackers. Five minutes later she got to her friends’ house. It was very dark so it was hard to tell that it was their house. But she knew the house anywhere. Then she realized that her friend might be asleep. But she didn’t care, she was going to tell her friend that she was right about that tank – right and wrong about that tank. Because she was right about there’s a big tank, but she was wrong about that they were going to attack the foxes when the foxes were really going to attack. So she knocked on the door. And the door opened.

It was her friend, and Amy said, “So nice to see you Rosy! Why are you here?”

“Oh, well, I was going to tell you about the big, big, big tank!”

She said, “Oh, I already heard about that.”

And she said, “How?!”

And then Amy said, “Oh, I saw it in the news.”

And then Rosy said, “Well then, hehe, okay, could you tell our other friends about that. Y’know, the tank thing? I’m going to go back to my house now. Have a good night and see you in the morning.”

Amy said that she would tell them. Ok, so that night, when she got in bed, Amy had problems sleeping. She couldn’t fall asleep, and Rosy couldn’t either. Rosy thought what if those mean wolves attacked right now? Or while I’m sleeping? Amy thought I don’t think I can handle this, this is so much pressure, they could attack anytime, we would be defenseless, we don’t have enough tanks to take them down!

So then in the morning, Rosy and Amy met in the park to talk about how the wolves and the foxes were going to attack each other. Rosy and Amy saw each other. They ran towards each other – they both had so many questions they had to ask each other. Then Rosy said, “Let’s go and ask one of those wolves over there if they’re really going to attack us, but first we have to dress up as wolves so they don’t think we’re foxes. So they went into the local theater to go into the dressing room, and they found lots and lots of wolf costumes.

So they put on the costumes and they walked up to the wolf and said, “So is the rumor true? Are we actually going to attack the foxes?”

And they said, “Yes, we are going to attack the foxes.”

 

Chapter 2

 

And then Rosy and Amy ran back to the theater to change back into their normal clothes.That night the newspaper said that the wolves were going to attack tomorrow morning. The newspaper found out about this by stalking them. Everyone was panicking, running, growling, screaming, and doing crazy stuff. In the morning, everyone was getting into the tanks and ready to attack the wolves. Two hours later, they were already on the prairie, zooming around in their tanks ready to attack!

 

Over the horizon, they saw the wolves turning towards them. They were running towards them. They were fast runners. Then everyone started screaming “Attack!” All the tanks started zooming towards the other side and some tanks even started shooting at them. The wolves looked really scared, but they kept running towards them shooting with their guns.

 

The next day, everyone was waking up. They thought back and how good they fought, or how badly they were defeated. The wolves kept shooting them, the foxes kept on going down one by one. They were lying on the ground. Little Rosy stood up and looked down on them lying on the ground. She thought at least fifty-five of them were dead. She felt so sad. She got hit in the arm and it had really hurt for the last day of fighting. And she thought ‘Well, at least I have hope.’

Then Amy started getting to her knees. She saw Rosy. Rosy was running towards her towards the wolves. The wolves were coming out of their tents and Rosy was running towards them. Amy thought she might be seeing hallucinations.

Then Rosy saw that there was this boy wolf sitting at the campfire of the wolves. And he looked sad and depressed and he didn’t really know what to think. Rosy ran up to him. She said “What’s wrong?”

The boy said, “My parents died in the war.”

And she said, “Well, I never met my parents. I bet they were nice and caring parents.”

The boy says, “Let’s talk about something good, like jam. I really like jam. I also like bread. Bread and jam are my favorite. I like lots of sweets. My mom liked sweets, too. She used to cook a lot in our kitchen. We used to cook together. I also like to take pictures and go back on things and making them rhyme. My dad and I used to write poems together.”

And she said, “MY dad used to write poems with me, too! And I like jam, too. Sometimes I like it on bagels and french toast. And sometimes bread. It’s just sometimes, though. I’ve always liked cooking but I only like cooking pastries. One thing I like is making clothes for other people because they try it on and I see them wearing this beautiful thing and I see them smiling.”

Days and days went on of fighting, and more and more animals were dead. Each night, Rosy came back to the little boy. He was always sitting by the campfire waiting for her. Soon they fell in love.

Then one day, he took her up this hill. It was in the middle of the day, so Rosy was scared that someone would see them. So she kept on going up the hill, but the boy was leading her so she wasn’t scared. She looked down the hill. It was actually kind of a cliff! She saw everyone fighting and everyone was fighting, but she thought, These wolves can be nice and kind. We just have to know them better and they might be nice to us. If we can just be nice to them, maybe they will be nice to us.

Every day, she kept on coming back and one day, Amy followed her. She saw them together and realized that this was a time of war and she was with a wolf!

Amy ran back to the foxes’ campsite and she told her older brother. Her older brother accepted that she was with a wolf, but he was a little shocked at first. Amy’s brother told Amy that he would always be there with her and never die.

Rosy said to the boy, “I never knew your name. What is your name?”

The boy said, “My name is Thompson Riddle.”

Rosy said, “That’s a wonderful name.”

Chapter 3

Later that day, they were walking in the forest together. An egg dropped from the trees. It had flame marks on it and the egg was burning hot and it was also red with white flame marks on it.

The boy and Rosy took care of the egg for many days and then one day, the egg started to crack. Inside, it looked like a lizard, but then Rosy noticed that it had wings and Thom said, “Oh my god, it’s a dragon.”

Rosy said, “We need to name this dragon! It’s a new species.”

They said, “Let’s have a vote on it. We’ll never decide on it.”

And then Rosy said, “Are you thinking what I’m thinking?”

And Thompson said, “I think so.”

And then they both shouted at the same time, “This dragon’s name is Flame!!”

So Rosy took it back to her campsite and showed all the remaining foxes. She put it in a little cage and decorated the cage by painting it red. She fed the dragon next by giving it some water and a little fire.

Every night, she would take the dragon over to the hill to show Thompson. And every day it grew bigger and bigger. One day, it grew so big that it had instincts and started to fly and they thought it was a phoenix dragon. But they knew it was a flame phoenix dragon, not just a phoenix dragon. Flame was a nice little dragon, but now he was a big nice dragon.

Every day, the battle was super duper intense. Everyone was getting hurt, even if they were in the tanks the entire battle. One battle was very intense. It turns out the wolves got new bazookas, and they started attacking more intensely than with the guns because they thought they had a chance. So one day, Flame broke out of his cage in the middle of a really intense battle with the bazookas against the tanks. And then flame burst out and jumped in front of the tanks and sprayed all the bazookas and some of the wolves into ash with his fiery breath.

Rosy leaped into action. She was looking for someone and that someone was Thompson. She called, “Thompson! Thompson! Where are you?”

And out of the smoke and the steam, she saw Thompson walking towards her. “Thank god you’re alive.”

But then she noticed that it wasn’t Thompson. It was a big bad wolf. Rosy was scared. She didn’t know what to do.

She called out, “Thompson! Save me! There’s a bad wolf”

She saw Thompson running towards her. He was panting. He was injured. He had a burned arm. She said, “Thompson, are you alright?! Please help me!”

The big bad angry wolf flung his sharp claws at Rosy. Thompson got in the way and saved Rosy by putting his arm out. The big bad angry wolf struck Thompson on the arm that wasn’t burned. Rosy screamed. “How could you sacrifice the other arm that wasn’t injured?! You don’t need two arms that are injured!”

Thompson said, “I will do anything to protect you. You are my love and I will not deny it.” Then Thompson said, “I don’t think we can have that dragon around anymore. He can get into trouble, and plus, he’s hurting everybody.”

Chapter 4

“Some of these wolves are nice. Some of these wolves are my friends. I don’t want to hurt my friends with that dragon!”

Rosy said, “We’ll get rid of the dragon. We’ll put it where it belongs and he’ll be happy but we’ll be safe.”

Rosy said, “We’re on different teams here. We shouldn’t be meeting up like this. I’m sorry, I have to go, okay?”

Thompson said, “Where are you going?! Wait, don’t go! I don’t know where you’re going. Be safe! More wolves will come after you because you’re the reason why the dragon burned everyone. Everyone has to be mad at all of you foxes. They’ll kill you!”

Rosy didn’t hear him. She was already running towards the campsite. She was crying. She was feeling really sad, but she didn’t know what just happened. She thought that she’d talk to Amy about this. She ran towards Amy’s tank. She knocked on the door of the tank. Amy opened the door and said, “What happened? Are you crying?”

Rosy said, “Yes! I did something that I should not have done.”

Then she told Amy all about Thompson and what she had done and what she had said to him. And Amy said, “I knew about that. I followed you up the hill once.”

Rosy said, “I think it was good that I can’t be with him because he is a boy wolf.”

That night, she had a lot of trouble going to bed. She goes to the wolves’ campsite. She sees Thompson. She says, “I’m sorry, but I really can’t be with you. I’m taking Flame back to the forest now. Do you want to come with me? It will be our last meeting.”

“I’m gonna bring some bread and jam, so you can have that if you want.”

Rosy and Thompson take Flame to their special place on the hill, tears in their eyes. Watching over the battle, they remembered that Flame was their friend, but they knew they had to let him go to be with his kind. He deserved to be happy. Though they think he liked them, he was in a cage, and dragons needed to be free. They don’t know where his kind lived, but they trusted the dragons would find their lost baby flame phoenix.

Flame tries to stay with them, his eyes watering, but decides he wants to try to find his family.

“I guess he didn’t like us,” Rosy said, and she and Thompson watched Flame disappear into the forest.

They sat on the edge of the hill, looking down on the battle, and feel sad that they’re breaking up.

Rosy stood, crying, and ran away with her tail between her legs. Thompson’s pained, sorrowful howl echoed through the forest as the hope of love vanished in the dark.

TWO DAYS LATER

Rosy looked up from the battlefield and saw Thompson on the hill, staring down at the skirmish. Two days of longing was enough. The pain of her broken heart radiated from her chest to her feet, and before she realized what was happening, she was running up the hill, back to Thompson, and gazed into his piercing hazel-green eyes.

They couldn’t help crying at the sight of each other. They wanted to be together, but the wolves would never allow their love to thrive while the war was on. Unless… maybe Rosy and Thompson could convince them to stop fighting!

They climb down the hill to the battlefield, grab the biggest horn they can find, and shout to their friends and enemies to STOP THE FIGHTING!

Their cry is ignored, and the fighting increases.

Amy and her brother helped Rosy and Thompson scream, but the war was too loud, and the warriors were too stubborn.

“What are we going to do?”

A high-pitched roar broke through the noise of war. Flame raced in with one little water dragon and two large dragons by his side: a little sister, and a mom and dad. Flame had found his family!

While his family looked on in pride, Flame propelled fire from his belly and surrounded the two armies with a circle of fire. The wolves and foxes had nowhere to run. They had to listen.

“FLAME, my boo-bee-boo! You’re back!” Rosy shouted from outside the fire ring.

“He did like us after all!” Thompson cried.

Flame landed on the ground, and they hopped on top of his back. He whisked them to the top of the hill, where Rosy and Thompson hold hands.

“Alright, people, listen up!” Rosy said. “You need to stop fighting. We’re in love, and love is more important than war.”

“But you can’t be together!” a wolf screams from below. “You’re too different.”

“Because it doesn’t matter what kind you are. It only matters that you love each other.”
“We’ll never love each other,” wolves and foxes shouted, snarling.

“Then you have to accept your differences. Besides, never loving each other is something you have in common,” Rosy said.

“Rosy is right. You have to accept your difference for who you are. You have more in common than you think. A lot of you are nice, and a lot of you are mean, but we’re all exceptional in our own ways,” Thompson said. “Even if you can’t, we’re not going to stop loving each other. Ever, ever, ever!”

The armies lowered their weapons. They fell to their knees and said, “Rosy and Thompson are right! We might never get along, but we’re ending this war for the sake of love–which is a war in itself.”

Flame’s little sister extinguishes the fire-circle, and the foxes and wolves mingle, offering apologies and first aid.

A FEW DAYS LATER

All the wolves had moved into the foxes’ city, and they realized it was pretty beaten up and old. They all came together to rebuild the city, make it fresher and more welcoming.

A FEW YEARS LATER

The town was done, and it was new and famous and people were coming from worldwide just to see the beautiful and welcoming town of Jamtown. Every year there is a festival celebrating Rosy and Thompson. And also, there is a new surprise to the town: Rosy and Thompson have a daughter named Fern! She is a hybrid wolf-fox.

The town is more modern, and there are more and more festivals, and more animals come in, and the town gets bigger and bigger. There are kitty-cats, oxen, more wolves, friendly wolves (lots of friendly wolves), there’s deer, and there’s dolphins (who have to stay in the local aquarium, located in Animal Square). Flame is bringing in more and more dragons. His family grew more, and he married a cute blue dragon and had five eggs, but only three of them hatched. He fried the other two in a frying pan and ate them. He lit the fire with his own breath because he knew those two would go to waste if they never hatched, and they didn’t, so he ate them, and they were smelly, really smelly. Dr. Russiansnot has a new lab now, and he’s inventing new stuff every day.

Rosy and Thompson have to sign autographs all the time. Rosy is a clothes designer and Thompson is a famous poetry writer. He writes about his suffering about not being with Rosy during the war, and losing his parents in the war. That’s why his poetry is so depressing, and that’s why he’s so famous. Amy owns a pastry shop, and Amy’s big brother opened a school. Amy makes chocolate pastries with strawberries, and pastries with marshmallows, and pastries of all types.

Then all of a sudden the book ends.

THE END

 

`

London

 

Introduction

I am traveling a far distance around the world running from a person who you probably won’t want to meet, or at least who I never want to see again. Her name is Regina. She shows hatred in her eyes and is one of the most unforgettable (in the bad way) people that I have ever come across of. We have a bad history and she will do whatever it takes to destroy my life.

Anyways, my name is London and I have no parents, no house, no family. My parents were killed by Regina and I was an only child. I am traveling with my only friend who is a boy. His name is Jax. He is the most important person in the entire world to me. I am also a witch (a good witch with good magic) and I can use my magic but I prefer not to.

Right now I am on my way to the north-eastern part of Europe. I shall be staying with a family that I have known for many years. They will keep us safe for as long as possible.

I am going on a long journey, a dangerous journey full of magic and mysteries.

November 30th

I drop my bag down on the train. I am sitting beside Jax, and leaning my head on his shoulder weeping and crying about my life. We are on the train about to get to the harbor where we will board a boat that will take us to north-eastern Europe. In my mind I am thinking about what It would be like to have a life and a living and a family. I fall asleep on Jax’s shoulder and sleep, just sleep.

When I get up from sleeping we are nearly at the harbor so I get up and walk to the exit and hang on the pole until we get to the station. With Jax standing beside me, I know that one way or another we will find peace, together.

We arrive at the harbor and we board the ship, eager to sit after all the standing and I am also eager to eat. We have not have food for two days straight and I am starving. Jax, on  the other hand, can probably go for three days without food and not be hungry. Anyways, the attendant shows us to our room and we drop our bags down, sit on the bed and eat the food that the attendant gives us.

December 3rd

  When we get to the harbor in Poland, we meet the family. They are kind people who have two kids and a lovely home. It is cold here in Poland. Anyways, they show us their house and give us a tour of the city. They show us to our room. The family that lives here are witches and wizards just like I am. They put a protection charm around their house to ward of dark magic, witches, and wizards. Regina is a dark witch who is trying to destroy all good magic. I am apparently told that I am the most powerful witch with good magic living, and I am the only one who can destroy her.             

December 11th

Today is my birthday, and unfortunately today we will be leaving Poland. We need to go because Regina has fond where we were staying and we need to get back to safety.The mother of the family who is actually named Margaret, baked me a cake and we celebrated in the morning before Jax and I had to go to the airport. It was really tough letting go to this family who cared and nurtured us for about a month.

On the flight back to America I knew that I must destroy Regina before she destroys anyone else or me. On the plane I take out my phone and headphones and listen to music, because I actually love music. I also love to sing. When I was younger I played guitar and I loved to sing.

My parents named me London because we lived in London when I was a little girl. I still have the accent.

December 20th

We are now back in the united states and in NYC, where Jax has an apartment. I am staying with him and eager to get out and kill Regina and her army. “I need to use the bathroom,” I tell Jax. “Two doors down to the right,” said Jax.

When I get into the bathroom I look in the mirror and Regina is there. In the mirror!! “Hello,” she says in an evil sort of way. She is going on and on about me meeting her behind the apartment building tomorrow at 7:00. “Will do,” I say. Then she goes away in the mirror and I think about destroying her.

December 20th

Tonight I will be fighting Regina. I hope to destroy her and stop all of the darkness that she brings to this land. I am ready. I was practicing all night and I am very nervous. Regina is very powerful and I can’t take the risk of more people losing their lives. I must defeat Regina if my life depended on it.

I read my clock, 6:55. I head downstairs and go outside behind the apartment building. Regina is there and she is waiting. Before she can even see me I shoot indestructible ice out of my hand that not even she can break. She is trapped. All I have to do is send a laser beam shooting through her heart. But something stops me, she does not deserve to be killed just banished. So I open a portal and send her to a whole nother soler system which she can never escape from.

When I walk back into the apartment I come rushing to Jax and just kiss him. I don’t care what he is feeling inside. All that I know is that I love him and I hope that he loves me too. We stop kissing and we both say that we love each other at the same time. “Did you defeat her?” asks Jax. I nod my head and he hugs me. But then I hear a loud bang. Regina. We weren’t done with her yet. We were forgetting that she still has an army of dark witches and wizards. What are we going to do?!

This is insane. I don’t understand why there is a war. I just want there to be peace and have everything be calm, except for enthusiastic persons. But I have to fight. The world is depending on me and I will not let them down because dark witches and wizards want to cause violence.  

So I step out of the room and go on and face those witches and wizards at my own gut.

The army is getting closer so I shoot fire and ice out of both of my hands so that half of them will get burned and half will be frozen forever. But it is not enough. I need to do something else that can defeat all of the army in one way. So I do something that I have never been able to master. Shooting light out of all parts of my body, that can disintegrate anything that comes your way, while shooting out ice and fire. And I actually did it. The army is shooting all sorts of things at me, but I just keep going. As I am firing, I see all of these people disintegrating and disappearing. Bang!!! I did it. I actually did it, the monsters are actually defeated!

15 years later

    Jax is now my boyfriend and he has been for the past ten years. Today he is taking me out to lunch. I am very excited. I am 25 and I am wondering when or if he is going to propose. On our walk there we take a walk by Central Park and we go under a little gazebo on the water. He gets down on one knee and asks me if I will marry him!

“Yes,” I say.

Lester the Leopard

Lester was a leopard. He was a kid. Lester’s least favorite thing was school and his favorite things were ice cream and school breaks. He was in first grade and he went to Leopard Academy. The principal was named Mr. Marks and his teacher was Ms. Penny. Leopard Academy went from kindergarten to 12th grade and his sister and brother also went there. Lester had an older sister and an older brother. Lester was 7 and he was going to turn 8 in a few months. His sister was 13 and his brother was 15. Lester’s sister’s name was Scarlett and his brother’s name was Josh.

Lester woke up one morning and he had his breakfast–leopard krispies–and got dressed and went to school. His first subject was math. They were learning multiplication. Lester didn’t really like multiplication. He thought it was kind of boring. He would rather be doing addition. But if he had his choice he wouldn’t have math at all.

His next subject was recess. Lester was building a house with blocks with his best friend Marcus. Recess was half an hour. Lester and Marcus went inside their house and they talked a lot about when they would have a playdate.  

When recess was done they had snack and then they went to science. Science was his least favorite subject. He really didn’t like anything except recess and lunch. The class was dissecting squids. It smelled really bad when they were done with it. Lester forgot to wash his hands after he dissected his squid and it also smelled up his class. Lester washed his hands and they smelled much better. He said that he felt sick so his teacher, Ms. Penny, told him to go to the nurse. Lester was faking because he wanted to go home. The nurse took his temperature and said, “Nothing’s wrong, Lester. You have to go back to class now.”

Then they had lunch but Lester forgot to bring his lunch so he had to go home and get it. By the time he came back lunch was over, so he had to eat really quickly in the cafeteria. He was late to history. After history he had to read for a little silently and then after that he went home. He was so happy the day was over.

When he got home his sister and brother weren’t there because they had longer school than him, but his parents were not there either. This was normal. His babysitter Charlotte was there though. Lester asked her if she would help him with some pranks that he wanted to pull on his brother and sister. Charlotte said that she would help a little. Charlotte and Lester got some string (aka long grass for leopards) and Lester made a trip wire in front of the doorway, so when his sister and brother got home they would trip.

Since Lester was really good at pranks he was always thinking about new ones to pull. Then he got slime that he had found outside. He filled his sister’s pencil case with it so that when she picked up a pencil to do her homework it would be covered in slime. He did the same one on his brother.

Then he asked Charlotte to blow up two balloons and tie them together, so she did. The balloons weren’t too big because Lester put them under his brother and sister’s pillows so they would pop and make a big popping noise when they put their heads down on them. He got some fake bugs and some dead bugs and put them on his mom and dad’s bed. He actually put them there for his mom because she was pretty afraid of bugs.

Five minutes later, his brother and sister came home together. They said hi to the babysitter and had a snack and started doing their homework. Lester’s sister screamed when she felt the slime but his brother was only like, “Ew Lester, did you put the slime in?” They cleaned out their pencil cases and Lester laughed a lot. Lester’s parents didn’t usually didn’t come home until 6:00. It was only 4:00.

At 6:00 Lester’s parents came home, and when his mom saw the bugs, she also screamed. “That is not funny Lester,” she said. He then took the bugs away and started laughing really hard again. Lester did pranks a lot so they were all kind of used to them, but his mom and his sister still screamed a lot when Lester did pranks like those. They had dinner, and then they went to bed. He heard two popping noises and started snickering. Then his sister came into his room and said, “You can’t keep doing those things,” and went back into her room. Lester didn’t actually go to sleep, he just kept reading a book till 1:00am, so he didn’t sleep a lot. He was really tired the next morning so he slept late and he had to get dressed and brush his teeth and then just eat a granola bar on his way to school.

When Lester got to school he felt really happy because he remembered that he had a half day. This was because, for the rest of the day, the teachers had meetings and conferences. The first thing he had was PE, which lasted for 45 minutes. The class played dodgeball. Lester actually loved playing dodgeball, so he was kind of happy. Then, they went back to class and had their snack and read their books. Lester sat next to his best friend Marcus and another girl in his class named Rachel. Then they went to art.

Their art teacher said, “Today we’re starting our clay unit. We’re going to get some clay from those buckets, and then you’re going to sculpt statues or make different things, like small containers. But then you’re going to have to wait a week or two before they’re all done and they’ve hardened.” The class started to sculpt their statues. Lester made a box to put some of his things in.

Half an hour later they left art and went home because of the half day. Most kids were really happy about the half day. They went home and Lester and Charlotte, his babysitter, had lunch. Lester was really hungry so he was happy to eat lunch. He had a ham sandwich and some water. After, Lester played a game with Charlotte  two times, and Lester won one of them and Charlotte won the other round. Then they raced each other a lot. Lester’s sister and brother came home when they had raced 12 times. “I have extra homework today,” Lester’s sister groaned. “There had better not be any more slime in my pencil case Lester.” Lester went to ask Charlotte if she would go race with him more but she said it was way too tiring. Then Lester decided to play outside for a little. Thirty minutes later, he came back to his house.

Lester’s parents came home at 6:00 that evening and then they had dinner. After dinner, Lester went to bed and then the next morning he remembered that he didn’t even have school that day because they were still doing parent-teacher conferences. Lester had pancakes for breakfast and then Lester had a playdate with his best friend Marcus, who came over at 11:00am. When Marcus came they played outside for half an hour and then they had hot dogs for lunch. When they finished lunch they went back outside to play for another hour and they played soccer outside. Then they went back inside to play for another hour inside Lester’s house. Marcus had to go at 2:30pm, so he left, and then Lester just relaxed in his room. Lester really wanted to be on the soccer team so he practiced outside a little more. At 4:00, Lester and his brother and sister and parents went to a Chinese restaurant for dinner. Lester and his sister had dumplings and his parents both had dim sum and his brother had some chicken and rice. After they finished their dinner they had green tea ice cream but Lester did not like green tea ice cream so he had chocolate ice cream. They went home and they went to bed. The next morning, Lester had to go to school and it was Thursday. He had his breakfast and he went to school. Before he went to his class, he went to the principal’s office to ask if he could be on the soccer team.

The principal said, “you have to try out for the soccer team in the gym room at 1:30pm every Thursday and Friday. So today and tomorrow you can go. Just put your name down on the soccer tryouts that is on the wall of the gym.”

“Okay,” Lester said, “But when will I actually get on the soccer team?”

“You might not get on the team, but the gym teachers will tell you if you get on. Just tell your teacher that you need to go there.”

“Great,” said Lester. “I’ll go to the gym today and tomorrow at 1:30. Bye!” He said, and then he walked to his class.

When he got to his classroom, his teacher Ms. Penny told him to hurry up because they just left for P.E. Lester told his gym teacher that he wanted to go for the tryouts for the soccer team, and then they started their class. Gym was half an hour like always, and after gym they had some snack and then they had history. After history they had recess and his best friend Marcus was sick that day so Lester played with another few boys in his class and then built a fortress with blocks. Right after they finished building it they had to go back to the classroom and they were disappointed they couldn’t play in it. Then they had lunch and after lunch Lester was really full. The next subject was social studies but in the middle of it Lester had to go to the gym for his tryouts for the soccer team. Lester got some water and went into the gym and a two other kids were there for tryouts also.

They played some soccer and there were two gym teachers there for the tryouts and they practiced dribbling the ball. When they were done, Lester went back to his class and he was really tired so he got some more water. And then they ended social studies and now they had to go home. Lester went home that day and his sister and brother came home about a half an hour later. That night at dinner he told his family about how he had tried out for the soccer team and how he did in tryouts. His dad was really happy about it but his mom said, “Are you sure Lester?”

And he said, “Yes.”

After dinner Lester showed his parents some of his soccer moves. He went to bed that night and had a dream about being on the soccer team and it was really good. In the dream, they were playing a game of soccer and it was really close and their team scored a goal so they won the game. When he woke up, he realized that he had soccer tryouts again that day. So that day when he got to school, he put a note on his locker that said, “Soccer tryouts Thursday and Friday 1:30” so that he didn’t forget. That day, after lunch, he went to his soccer tryouts again and the same people from the day before were there too. They did the same thing as yesterday and also a few new things, and when he was done he had to go back to his class. At the end of the day he had social studies and then they had to go home. He went home and he played a lot with Charlotte his babysitter and with his sister because she didn’t have as much homework that day. At dinner he told his family all about the tryouts that day too. Lester was so glad that it was the weekend the next day on Saturday. He relaxed that day and all of Sunday, too.

Monday, Tuesday and Wednesday seemed to go by really quickly, so Lester was happy that he could go to his soccer tryouts on Thursday. He went to his tryouts and did a few new things but also some things from last week, too. Lester was really tired after, so he had 2 cups of water and then read his book  for a while in the class. Then he had to go home.

His sister and brother didn’t have homework that day so they were really happy and they were in a really good mood, They all played Monopoly together. Then Lester’s parents came home and they all had dinner together. Lester told them about his tryouts that day and he thought that was his best tryout yet. He went to bed really hoping that he got on the soccer team.

The next morning he went to the kitchen and had his breakfast. Then his parents came in and told them they got a letter and it said that Lester had got on the soccer team! Lester was really happy. That day at school he had to go and meet the team, and they told him about it a little. Lester was so excited. That day after school he told his babysitter Charlotte and she was also really happy for him. Lester started to like school a little more since now he got to play on the soccer team.

The End!

 

Larry, UFO, and Boston

“Hey Boston, what are you barkin’ at?” asked Larry.

“What the heck is that?” Larry said again. WHOOSH! “That’s a UFO!” exclaimed Larry.

Boston walked up as he got sucked in and Larry jumped and grabbed him and got sucked in too. WHOOSH! They were sucked in by a blue light.

***

Larry and Boston walked around the spaceship and Larry said, “Maybe this isn’t so bad.” They heard an alien noise getting louder towards them.

Larry and Boston ran and jumped behind a weird-looking orange bush with black stripes. They heard the aliens saying, “I think we picked up something from the planet Earth.”

Larry whispered, “Woah…they speak English.”

As the two aliens walked away, Larry and Boston kept walking. They were in deep space. Boston tripped on this thing sticking out of a bookcase and the bookcase opened just a little bit! Larry helped Boston up and pushed the bookcase open and saw a bunch of gadgets.

There were blasters, guns, and other weird things. Boston saw something that looked like a bone. He jumped up and bit it and it blasted through the bookcase.

Larry yelled, “WOAH! Don’t touch that, Boston!”

A familiar voice said, “Who said that?”

“Evan, is that you?” Larry said into the darkness.

“How do you know my name?” the voice said back.

“Evan, it’s me! Larry!”

Evan yelled, “Larry!”

Evan looked over and saw Larry and Boston. They did their secret handshake. They gave each other high-fives and fist bumps.

“The last time I saw you was when we were still in middle school,” Larry said. “I thought you were on vacation since I didn’t see you for a month. I started looking for you.”

***

“Bye Evan. See you tomorrow,” said Larry when he last saw him.

”Do you remember Boston?” asked Larry.

“Yep,” Evan said.

Evan showed Larry and Boston to a room in the spaceship that looked a living room on Earth. “Wow!” Larry said.

“I found this place when I first got here,” Evan said.

“Let’s go over plans,” said an alien nearby.

Larry and Evan both said, “THE PLANS!”

Evan, Larry, and Boston followed the alien undetected to the control room where they saw the leader of the aliens. He had a square head with a normal alien body. His body was green and his head was blue.

The leader alien said, “FDG YIU ASDXZWH GFXDN.”

Evan and Larry realized that the leader alien didn’t speak English and he had a translator who told the aliens what to do

Translator alien said, “GET THE WEAPONS READY.”

“DRFPT GTY DRGFEW,” the leader said.

“Moragh said, THANK YOU SMORGLF,” Smorglf said.

***

Evan, Larry, and Boston raced down the hall and jumped behind a yellow bush with green and black stripes. Aliens walked behind them towards where they met in the UFO.

“Where we were must be where the weapons are!” said Evan.

***

They all raced to where the weapons were. They got there before the aliens and they took all the weapons and ran to a secret room that only the head alien knew about. They got in by stepping on a panel.

***

The aliens saw that the weapons were gone. They looked everywhere except the room that Evan, Boston, and Larry were in because they didn’t know about it.

Moragh said, ¨NJN UIO CDFV ZA FTG GYFDDR BHUJ?!¨

Smorglf said, ¨Ooooo.”

Another alien said, ¨What did Moragh say?¨

¨Shut up Bloghj, no Moragh, and Moragh said DID YOU LOOK IN THE SECRET ROOM?” Smorglf said.

“SE FTGH JIK HUJ KIOLJU DRF?!¨

Smorglf started to say ¨Mora…¨

“WHAT DID HE SAY,” Bloghj said.

Moragh slapped his forehead.

“Like I was going to say before I was rudely interrupted,” eyeing Bloghj, Moragh said, “SO WHAT ARE YOU WAITING FOR?!”

They raced off.

Meanwhile Boston, Evan and Larry were overheard. They raced out.

***

They found them face to face with all of the aliens on the UFO. They blasted most of them with the gadgets that they figured out how to use. They pressed buttons and they fired but they didn’t know which button did what though. They took about half of the aliens out. The other half avoided the shots and attacked but they took half of that half out too. Boston bit most of the aliens that were alive. Two were left. It was Smorglf and Bloghj.

***

They ran to Moragh.

He said, ¨FTG CDR ASP CWQI?!¨

Smorglf said, ¨Moragh said,’ WHY ARE YOU HERE?!’¨

¨Oh we’re here because every other alien was killed by people from the planet earth with the gadgets, SIR,” said Bloghj.

¨Fgh nj awsedf,¨ Moragh said.

¨Get out his armor,¨ Smorglf told Bloghj.

Bloghj got it out quick.

***

Meanwhile Evan, Boston, and Larry turned the UFO around on a path to earth. A few hours later, Moragh was wandering the UFO with his armor on when he saw Larry.

He said, ¨GHUJ RFTG!!!¨

Larry said, ¨WHAT??!!¨

Evan said, ¨HE DOESN’T SPEAK ENGLISH!! RUN!!¨

***

Boston barked and ran in front. They shot Moragh in the ankle with A-K4-7’s that the aliens had. Moragh fell down.

¨He’s only down for a brief moment, let’s move, move, move!¨ said Larry.

They found Smorglf and Bloghj and they said they hated their life and they wanted to go home with Larry and Evan. They said maybe.

They tagged along.

“Hey, do you know that our planet stinks, it is always cold, wet, and dirty. It’s a horrible place. Far less place to live, I mean it just stinks,” said Smorglf.

“Wow that stinks, really stinks,” said Larry.

“No joke. It stinks. Very very far from perfect,” Bloghj sadly said.

“Is that why you tried to take over earth?” asked Evan.

“Yes,” Smorglf and Bloghj said.

CRASH.

“What was that?” Evan asked as he slammed into a wall.

“IT’S THE ATMOSPHERE!!” yelled Bloghj.

“AHHH,” they all yelled.

***

“We’re not dying on my watch,” Larry said. ”Come on, Boston.”

Larry and Boston ran to the control room. They put on the atmosphere shield just in time. THUD.

THUD. THUD. THUD. Larry and Boston ran to the others. When they got there, Moragh arrived.

“GYHU GHUJI SEDR!!!!!” Moragh said.

Smorglf said, “‘‘YOU’RE GOING DOWN,’ Moragh said.”

Larry shot Moragh in the head. Moragh died from the bullet. Larry, Evan, Boston, Bloghj, and Smorglf got off. The UFO they were safe.

THE END

Read the sequel “THE UFO.”

Katherine and Tammy

Katherine:

One sunny morning, a 6-year-old named Katherine woke up in Minnesota at 7:00 and remembered at 3:50 in Vancouver there was a race for dogs and owners. She had a dog named Tammy and she felt like she had to go there too. But for now she wanted to read.

Tammy:

On the same sunny morning, a puppy named Tammy sat up, sniffed and licked Katherine’s face. Katherine looked nose to nose with her.

The parents:

Katherine’s parents were still snoring asleep. Katherine sprang up into their room, pounced on her mom Neve, and along with it Tammy slobber licked her dad Max. And the two gloomy parents, half asleep, woke up. Max asked in his big deep voice, “What is it honey?” Katherine said, “Dad, today there was a contest.”

Vancouver:

Katherine and her parents took an airplane to Vancouver. First she started by watching her friend Holly finish the last part of the race. After that it was her turn. Her dad said good luck. There were hoops and dog limbo spins, jumps and a tunnel to the sea to jump over.

Too soon to jump! Boom! Crash! There were shouts everywhere. Every second. Those shouts filled the stadium.

But Tammy jumped so soon, she landed right on Katherine! Katherine slid right into the tunnel, barely made the hoop and…everything went back…

Crash! Pow! There was a streak of light, there were a tiny island smack in the middle of the ocean. That’s all. Nothing else around the small tiny island.

The parents:

Katherine’s parents were waiting and waiting for Katherine in the race. But they never saw her. They thought she might have ended up in the tunnel in the sea. They were very worried. They waited and waited for Katherine to come but Katherine never came. At the end of the race, they went to the judge because they were expecting Katherine to come before everyone, but instead she didn’t come at all.

“Where are we?” Katherine said. Katherine glanced around and saw they were on an island of sand. Tammy yelped. Katherine looked all around them. They were surrounded by water. Tammy thought: Are there sharks in here? Katherine thought: How are we going to get home? They were terrified and curious. The fur on Tammy’s back stood up. Tammy sniffed the ground. There was a strong scent of salt water. Katherine was thinking and thinking about the times Tammy and she won races, and she was wondering how she could have failed and ended on this island.

Katherine and Tammy both looked out at the sea and saw that the tunnel was gone. They thought and thought until they thought of a plan. We’ve got to get home.Tammy and Katherine finally knew.  They saw land on all fours sides of them so they would swim home. But what about  ? Katherine said we’ll build a raft. But there were no trees. So they decided to swim home. Swim. Katherine had 20 bottles of water for the race because it would be hot, and it was far because the they had to squint to see the land. There were little islands that they would rest on. So, Katherine jumped in the water facing her fear of sharks, squid and octopus. She swam and every island she came to she took a rest because Tammy was on her back. Tammy weighed 12 pounds.

Home at last! At last Katherine made the five-mile trip home. Tammy sat on Katherine’s back. Phone too.

And Katherine called her parents and said, “Right now, we are on sandy island beach.”

So, their parents drove there and asked, “Where have you been?”

Katherine said, “I swam 5 miles all the way home.”

“But weren’t you tired?” asked mom.

“Yes, but now Tammy isn’t afraid of water, right, Tammy?” Katherine asked.

Tammy barked.

THE END

 

Larry the Purple Turtle

 

Neptune 7028 AD

Chapter One: The Introduction

Larry was a purple turtle who has super powers. He could turn invisible, had laser eyes and frost breath, but he couldn’t fly. He lived in a treehouse — the tree was in the ocean but the house was above the water. He had an arch nemesis, a green dolphin who had a horn like a unicorn that made people into jellyfish. The dolphin was called Steve. When Larry was three, Steve turned Larry’s dad into a jellyfish. Larry kept getting armies, but Steve kept turning them into jellyfish. They all work for him except for Larry’s dad, because Steve was keeping him prisoner.

Larry had three friends. One of them was a red starfish called Bob. One of them was a pink giraffe called BiIly, and one of them was a yellow seahorse called Max. Bob had a superpower of flight and hypnotizing people to do whatever he wants. Max had a superpower of fire fart.

Steve had henchmen that were hippopotamuses. They could breathe underwater, and they had poison spit. One of them was called Bobo, and one of them was called Moopu.

Steve lived in a sand castle under the sea. Jellyfish surrounded the castle, and there were more inside, protecting Steve on his throne. His throne was made out of crabs. He had a gun that shot out poisonous octopus suction cups that made people into jellyfish. Steve also had a rainbow unicorn horn that turned people into jellyfish.

Chapter Two: The Meeting

One night, in the treehouse, it was very silent except for Billy the jokester giraffe. Billy was doing magic tricks for the others. They were supposed to be having a meeting to decide what to do with Steve.

Larry said, “Let’s get to serious business.”

Then Bob the starfish said, “Why don’t we have an army of turtles to eat the jellyfish?”

Then Max suggested putting big billboards in the ocean away from Steve’s sandcastle. The billboards would say: COME TO STEVE’S ALL-YOU-CAN-EAT BUFFET FOR JELLYFISH. The billboards were invisible because the turtles could see invisible things.

Chapter Three: The Attack

At four in the morning, the turtles went out to Steve’s All-You-Can-Eat Buffet to get their jellyfish. There were about three thousand of them. But there were Bobo and Moopu standing in front of the doors, and the turtles couldn’t eat them. Only four hundred of the turtles had laser eyes, but Moopu and Bobo had poison spit. So everything went terribly wrong, and only two thousand of the turtles were left. Moopu and Bobo were very badly injured.

The turtles kept trying to eat the jellyfish, but they only ate three thousand of them, so there were two thousand left. The turtles retreated and went back to the treehouse.

Larry, Max, Bob, and Billy were very sad. They had no chance to beat the evil Steve.

7328 AD

Chapter Four: The Bunnies

Three hundred years later (because they were immortal), about three thousand bunnies came to the treehouse (because they could swim). They all had big muscles, even the lady bunnies. At night, Larry and his friends had a plan to finally win against Steve. They would all attack the jellyfish because there were only 2,000 of the jellyfish left.

Early in the morning, they set out to Steve’s All-You-Can-Eat Buffet! They attacked most of the jellyfish, but most of the jellyfish attacked the bunnies. Some bunnies were very badly injured and there were only 1,000 bunnies left and the four friends. They finally got past all the jellyfish and were at Steve’s throne made out of crabs. But he was not there! He had security cameras in the “kitchen” so he could see when they were coming or if somebody was there. The hippos Bobo and Moopu were there, waiting for the four friends and the bunnies. They had attacked Bobo and Moopu and they finally won against them. Now they only had Steve left.

Chapter Five: Feelings

Steve left a trail of rainbow bubbles behind him so it was easy for the friends to find him. After a long chase, the bubbles stopped and they went back to the treehouse. They were wondering why the bubbles had stopped. Max said, “Maybe someone or something ate him.”

Billy said, “Maybe a clown came and tricked him into doing clownness.”

Then Bob said, “Maybe we should just leave you here.”

Then Billy started crying and getting really sad.

Then Larry said, “Maybe we should leave you here.”

And then Billy started going to the mainland.

A few hours later, Larry and his friends started swimming to the mainland to find Billy.

Max said, “Maybe he’s in the zoo, because I saw a sign that said ‘Looking for Rare Animals for the Zoo.’”

Then Larry said, “So maybe he’s in the zoo.”

Chapter Six: Dave’s Story

Back at the mainland, Billy was walking down the street to hitchhike. Then Billy saw something that looked like Steve further down the street. Billy walked up to what he thought was Steve and said, “Why are you in the street, Steve?”

The dolphin said, “I’m not Steve. Steve is my son. My name is Dave. I’m his father. I’m a good guy. He’s turned evil because when he was a kid we never gave him what he wanted and so one day he jumped out the window and broke all his bones. At the hospital he said he’d leave the house when he was better and was going to become evil. One day he went to an elephant witch’s hut and said, ‘Give me a horn like a unicorn that can make people into jellyfish.’ So then he built a sandcastle in the water and he called it Steve’s All-You-Can-Eat Buffet to trick people into coming there so he could make them into jellyfish.”

Then Billy said, “So he would’ve been a good guy if you gave him what he wanted?”

“Yes,” said Dave. “Well anywhoo, I need your help to save society from Steve turning people into jellyfish. My superpowers are out and I cannot do anything to help you, but I could find you some very helpful dolphins that were Steve’s friends once.”

7352 AD

Chapter Seven: The Friends

Larry and his friends were already on the mainland looking for Billy and Steve. Larry and his friends went to the zoo to find Billy. They asked the zoo guards if they had gotten any new animals. They said, “No, we haven’t.”

So the friends went out in the city to find Billy and Steve. They went to the mall because they knew there was a circus there and Billy is part of the circus in the mall — that’s his part-time day job.

Meanwhile, at the circus, Billy and Dave were at the circus, and it was Billy’s  act. His act was shooting from a cannon into a ball pit.

Next were Steve’s friends, but Billy did not know that.

Larry and his friends were finally at the circus, and were looking at Steve’s friends’ act. They asked the guards if they could go see Billy. The guard said sure, and they went to go see Billy and Dave.

Larry said, “What are you doing with Steve? Are you becoming a bad guy?”

“No, this is not Steve. This is Dave, his father,” Billy said.

Dave said, “Hey guys!”

The friends went to go sit and watch Steve’s friends. Then, at the end of their acts, the friends went back to the tent to ask for help from Steve’s friends.

The friends introduced themselves to Steve’s friends. One of them was called Doody. He is a brown dolphin that has sonic scream. One of them was Steve’s ex-girlfriend called Mary and she was a gray porpoise that had hypnotizing powers. One of them was an orange whale that could split in half so it can go faster but it still weighs the same. His name was Heeho. Then there was a yellow crab called Yopo. He could shoot out baby crabs from his pinchers.

They said that would be the best thing that ever happened to them, if they could get revenge on Steve. Then Larry says, “Okay, so let’s meet at my treehouse in the middle of the ocean at twelve thirty-eight in the morning.”

Chapter Eight: The Plan (Part Two)

At twelve thirty-eight in the morning, they all met in their treehouse. Larry said that he was gonna need some really good engineering, and Max, Bob, and Heeho were the engineers. He was going to build vehicles. So for the rest of the night, while the rest of the friends were talking about the plan, Doody, Mary, Larry, and Yopo were talking about building a weird lazer gun that shoots out Yopo and then Yopo would shoot out the baby crabs from his pinchers.

They tried to build the gun, but they thought of a better idea. They put Yopo in Heeho’s mouth, and then Yopo would come out from his blowhole and shoot out the baby crabs from his pinchers. But what they hadn’t thought about was the fence. They never knew if Steve was going to get a new army and attack them! So they all started building a fort made out of fish and whales and sharks and junk and seaweed and that’s it.

Chapter Nine: Blah Blah and Blah Blah the Goblin Sharks

Blah Blah met Blah Blah and Blah Blah and Blah Blah were twins. Larry and his friends saw what Blah Blah and Blah Blah were sharks that were very weird. They were goblin sharks. Larry and the friends were astonished when they saw what Blah Blah and Blah Blah could do. Blah Blah and Blah Blah could be the distractions.

Larry and the friends decided to call them Blah Blah One and Blah Blah Two. They would know who Blah Blah One was because he had a white spot on his chest, and Blah Blah Two had scars on his nose. Blah Blah Two said that they did not want to be the distractions and they had some super-powers, just like the rest of the friends. Their super-powers were that they could shoot magic out of their noses, and the magic would make people unconscious. So they decided that Blah Blah and Blah Blah could be people that attack.

Chapter Ten: True Love

The seven friends (not including Billy) were setting out to go find Steve. Doody was able to find Steve because dolphins had sonar. Steve saw the group of friends and said that he did not want to be evil anymore. Steve and Mary gazed at each other with sparkles in their eyes. And then Steve said, “I think that I want to be good again.”

Then Dave came and said, “I’m sorry that me and your mom didn’t give you what you wanted. You can have a very big mansion-house-thing in the trees.”

Chapter Eleven: The Ending

One night Dave went out to the grocery store but he felt a tingling pain in his back. He saw a boat and men pulling him up from the ocean. He thought they were whalers and he was right — they were. And then the police come with helicopters surrounding them and big boats and jets all around the whalers. The police said, “You have the right to remain still! You are under arrest. Give us the dolphin and we will try to help it as much as we can.”

So Dave went to the animal hospital with all the friends but they could not help him. Dave was about to say goodbye when Steve’s mom’s ghost came and kissed him goodbye. Dave’s soul came up like in the movies and now he said that he would follow Steve around everywhere he went.

The next day, Steve and Mary got married in the ruins of Steve’s old sandcastle. Then Dave and Ann’s ghosts were there at the wedding spectating.

The next day Steve and Mary went the Caribbean on their honeymoon, and they lived happily ever after.

Larry and the friends were finished crime fighting and had retired. They were going to his treehouse when they saw a weird fairy and the fairy said, “Why are you guys here? You should be in the ocean.”

But then Yopo just shot the fairy because the fairy didn’t make any sense. Yopo and Heeho remembered about their weird gun thing and Heeho and Yopo went to the gun range and the rest of the friends went bowling and go-carting and they all lived happily ever after.

THE END

 

I Think They Were Twins

“I think they were twins.”

“Are you sure?” says my brother.

“I am pretty sure,” I say, then I walk away to our house.

My name is Dave and I am 16. My brother is Sammy, and he is 14 and annoying. But he and I need to rob to make a living because we are poor. We live in the Netherlands and right at this moment, we are thinking of how to rob the twins.

“So I think that we should go down the chimney,” I say.

“Well, I think that we should pick the lock and walk right in,” says Sammy.

“It would be less dangerous if we went through the chimney, because less people would be looking at us.”

“But it would be way easier to get the stuff out through the door than out through the chimney.”

“Well, we could just go through the chimney and then take the stuff out the door.”

Eventually we just end it by flipping a coin, our only coin. He takes tails and I take heads. It lands on tails. So, the next night, we end up picking the door lock, going inside and stealing their TV. When we are coming out, the cops see us.

They say, “Put down the TV and stand there!”

I’m feeling nervous. They’re pointing a gun at us. My heart is beating really fast. They come over and put us in handcuffs and shove us into their cop car. My brother doesn’t say anything. Soon, we get to jail. The next day we find out that we’re going to have a trial.

When we get into the court, we are really nervous. We don’t say anything. We look at the judge and everyone around us. The judge starts talking. The judge asks us to speak.

”We live in a shack with one bed and it’s tiny. We needed money. There’s nothing to really do except flip our only coin. So can you please understand,” my brother and I both say.

At the end of the trial we end up winning and I feel so good and I say to my brother that he should do what I suggest.

“Ok.”

PART TWO

(Sammy’s perspective)

When we are in the twins house it looks like a mansion compared to our house. The T.V. is so big, it is amazing! But when we get caught my heart’s on fire.

I want the T.V. not just for money but also to have something to do. All we can do is flip a coin all day. In the twins house we are talking, “ I think when we get this thing in the house we should sell the next day,” says my brother.

“I think that we should keep it at home and watch T.V. whenever we want!” I say.

“We will flip when we get home,” says my brother.

I wish I could just sit down on the bed in our house and watch T.V. I’d watch any show. I’d watch the news to see if people are trying to find us and put us in jail. After I get the T.V., maybe the next night we could get something different and disguise to sell it. I wish I could have a big house with anything I wanted to do and a lot of money and a car.

We get caught, and we find out we’re getting a trial and after the trial we end up winning but we have to give back the T.V.

We are thinking about robbing a different place with different people. But it has to be smaller so we can bring it back more easily. Maybe a little phone or something. We are nervous, because if we get caught, we’ll most likely not win a trial because we’ll have been caught for the second time.

I think we should wait a little longer, but my brother doesn’t. I wish my brother would always agree with me and do what I say. But after that trial I agreed to do what he said.

We’re thinking of robbing some place with a brother and sister because there’s probably more stuff there than if it was an only child. We walk and take the subway a couple times until we end up at the home. The parents are out, so it is just the brother and sister. The brother ends up awake and comes down the stairs and sees us there and we say, “We are friends of your sisters.” He goes back upstairs and we take some of their phones and leave the house. When we get home, we take the phones out and I say, “When are we going to get a charger?”

My brother says, “We will soon!”
“Ok,” I say.

I think we should go to a different place because if they do see us, they’ll know we’re not friends since we stole from them.

I wish sometimes that we could be a regular family. We could live in a regular townhouse and not have to rob people to survive and we could hang out with friends.

Well anyway, I think that in a couple of weeks we should get some chargers.

A couple weeks later, we rob a family with an only child, because all we need is a charger and it’s far away from the other family we robbed. But we have to cross the ocean to get there. We want to go far away from our neighborhood so it will seem like someone else had done it. We sell one of the phones to get a raft and an oar. We sell Dave’s phone, so we’re going to share my phone now. We get the raft and ask them to inflate it there and we bring it home. The next night we go out on the ocean, which is pretty dangerous in a teensy little blow up raft.

We feel like we are going to fall into the ocean and die. Dave says, “I want to sell the phone charger and the phone to get money so we could get a big home to live in.”

“But I want to keep the phone and the phone charger to entertain ourselves!”

“Well then how are we going to get the money to get food and have a bigger house?”

“First we should start with something more entertaining than flipping a coin!” I say.

“We’ll decide when we get home.”

A big wave comes and flips us over. We lose the oar. We get back on the raft and we have to paddle back with our hands. We feel like we are icecubes. We think that we will try it the next day and sell our other phone to get more oars. When we get back to our house I say, “Do you think we should really sell our phone? We could just rob around here and not sell our phone to get a phone charger. I think that we should just get a phone charger around here.”

Dave says, “I think we should get the phone charger in the neighborhood but that we should sell it after.”

I say, “We’ll decide now.”

So we flip a coin and he wins.

I feel sad, because I just want to entertain myself. I start thinking that my brother could rob a place while I rob another one so we can get more stuff at the same time.

The next day, we walk around and talk quietly about which places we’re going to rob tonight. We decide we’re going to rob a pretty big house with a lot of fancy carvings on the outside. It has a really nice prickly lawn. Dave’s going to rob this one. I’m going to rob a regular townhouse with two kids.

I feel like it will be unfair, since my brother gets to rob a big fancy mansion and I’m just robbing a regular town house.

Dave’s Perspective

Tonight I will be robbing this nice place and Sammy’s going to be robbing a regular townhouse because he wants to keep the stuff so he can get a phone and phone charger. I think we should just sell all of it, but he’ll have a phone and phone charger and then we’ll sell the rest.

When I get to the house I’m robbing, I climb up the roof and then go through the chimney and then come out of the chimney and I see this beautiful gold-lined and velvety red wallpaper. I see a really big flatscreen T.V. and a really nice kitchen with a marble floor and in the living room there are a bunch of antique couches and another huge flat screen T.V. There’s a huge bureau with a whole bunch of electronic stuff. It’s around midnight, and I keep it dark because I think that the dad and kid are home. I’m having a hard time deciding what I’m going to take and what I’m going to leave. I can’t take a T.V. because I don’t have a helper. So I decide I’m going to take two phones, a phone charger, an iPad and an iPad charger. I fit everything in my pockets that I could and then I carry the rest out the door.

I go out and I see Sammy coming out of his townhouse with a phone and phone charger and an iPad, just no iPad charger.

We run down the block and I get inside the house, but Sammy doesn’t.

SAMMY

I got caught by the cops again! I’m thinking about what I saw in the house. I saw toys on the floor and family pictures on the wall and I felt sad. I miss my parents. I wish I had a big happy family, even if we had to live a little shack.

I am in the same jail cell as I was in when we were caught the first time. They come in the next day and say, “You are going to be hanged and then shot.”

I look at the two guards that came to talk to me.

“Follow us,” they say.

I follow them outside to a huge crowd. I can see Dave in the crowd. He’s crying. I see three ropes. Two smaller ones for the hands and one for the head. The sun feels hot, I’m sweating. I hear cheering and crying. My body is collapsing. They put me into the ropes. There is a guy who is just about to shoot me. I feel a burning pain.

Dave

I’m watching and crying and I don’t know who’s going to rob with me and I’m going to miss him a lot. I see the bullet go into him and x’s in his eyes and he’s gone–gone–gone!!

I go home and jump on my bed and start crying. I start playing on my iPad so I can get a little bit happier. I try to forget for a moment, but I can’t. I wish I didn’t have to rob anymore.

THE END

Jack and the Diamond Sword

Once, long ago, there was a boy named Jack. He was a regular guy. He liked to pretend to play with pretend portals. He would pretend to have a gold sword, but he would use a wooden sword. One day, he saw a little portal in the ground. Then he touched it and it got bigger and bigger every time he touched it. Then it was big enough for him to jump in. He jumped through and there was a whole other world. He saw a powerful diamond sword with emerald spikes on it. He really wanted it, but all the monsters were guarding it. There were zombies with gold swords,  skeletons with diamond bows and diamond arrowheads, and skeletons on spiders with gold axes. The spiders could spit poison at you. Jack was scared of the world so he jumped out and then made the portal smaller and put it in a box in his room so that when he got better weapons he could go back in.

 

He asked his mom if he could borrow her car to go two blocks down the street to the weapon shop to get more powerful weapons. Finally he arrived at the weapon shop and he walked in. There was an old guy standing at the counter. Jack said, “Can I please borrow a gold sword just for three days?”

 

The old man said, “Yes. Yes, you can. But you must pay $15 dollars. If you keep it for more than three days, then you will have a battle with me and the weapons.”

 

Jack got the sword, went to his room and took the portal out of the box. He made it big enough to jump through. He jumped in with the sword. He saw all the monsters getting closer to him. The portal was closing, getting smaller and smaller every second. He didn’t have a choice — he had to fight the monsters.

 

The monsters were getting closer and closer. The skeletons were pulling their arrows back. The spiders were gathering poison from the ground. The zombies were sharpening their swords for the last time, and the skeletons shot their arrows. Jack deflected it with his sword, then chopped off the skeleton’s legs, and the spider started spitting out the poison. He ran from the spider and the zombies were getting near him. They were having a battle — him vs. ten zombies. The zombies all threw the swords out of their hands at him. He deflected them all with his sword. The swords went flying into the wall of poison and broke it. The poison was spilling out. Jack had to open the portal bigger again. He opened it too big and all the monsters got out, but not him. The portal almost closed, but he put his sword in the middle of it. It didn’t close.

 

He ran back to get the diamond sword and then he took his sword out of the portal and jumped through. He reached his room but the portal was destroyed. He could never go back in that world again, but neither could the monsters. The time went too fast when he went to that world. It had already been two days.

 

The monsters were in his room, trying to open the door, but they could not. They were stuck in the room. They were going to have a battle. The zombies had no weapons. The skeletons only had nine arrows left. And the spiders barely had any poison left. The zombies did not want to go in the battle because they had no weapons. So all ten skeletons hopped on all ten of the spiders. Jack did a flip over all the skeletons and spiders and killed all the zombies. So now the battle began: Skeletons on Spiders vs. Jack and a diamond and a golden sword.

 

Jack had his diamond-and-emerald-spiked sword in his right hand and the gold sword in his left. Then the skeletons fired all of the arrows they had left. The spiders spit out their poison onto the diamond arrowheads. Jack jumped to the side. He dropped his swords when he jumped and the spiders walked over for the skeletons to pick up the swords, but the spiders had bad eyesight and thought they were farther away, but they were stepping on them. The swords cut their feet off, and the skeletons fell backwards and their bow and arrows flew out of their hands.

 

Jack picked up both swords. He had one minute to return the sword or he would have to battle. The time was ticking down. He asked his mom to borrow the car with 30 seconds left. He hopped in the car with 15 seconds left. He arrived when he was three seconds late. He had to battle without the gold sword against the old man and his weapons.

 

He walked through the door and the old man said, “Hand over the golden sword and let’s battle.”

 

He handed over the sword. Jack did not see that the old man had a sword in his hand because it was underneath the counter. When Jack handed over the golden sword, the old man threw up the other sword. Jack lifted the diamond sword up to block the old man’s sword, but the old man threw the golden sword down at his feet because his hands were high and he was not looking. The gold sword didn’t really hit Jack. He was not such a good thrower. It cut off one of his shoelaces and the edge of the shoe but did not hit him.

 

The old man was mad that he missed. He unleashed what he really was. He was not an old man — he was an evil giant wizard with eight arms. He had a big cape surrounding his body that had stars and moons all over it. His brown hair stuck up like lightning. Jack saw a weak spot on the top of his forehead, where he did not have any hair.

 

He took a bow and arrow with two of his arms so he had six arms left. He took another bow and arrow for his other two arms on one side, so he had four arms left. And he had four golden swords, including Jack’s, on his other arms. So he had two bow-and-arrows, and three gold swords, and one wizard wand. He had all powers in the end of his wand.

 

He used electric power from his wand. He lowered his swords and shot both of his arrows at Jack. Jack ran down the street. The shop was broken down because the wizard was on top of it. He had as many bow and arrows as possible. He could just make more whenever he wanted with his wand.

 

Jack ran down the street. The wizard ran down the street too, breaking all the houses down. He was right behind Jack. Jack turned without the wizard looking, because he was too tall to see down low. He thought he was still running forwards because Jack was before. Jack turned to the wheat land. He ran through the tall grass, cutting the wheat with his sword. Then the wizard saw a line of cut-down wheat and knew that was Jack. He threw one of his swords down. The sword was so big that Jack could not get to the side of it or hop over it. He was stuck there. The swords were all blocking him in a triangular shape. The wizard surrounded the swords with arrows so that if Jack reached the top of the swords the poison would sink down on him. The wizard had taken the bow and arrows from the skeletons. He used a powerful spell to make a circle shield around it so that Jack could not get out. Good thing Jack had brought a bunch of really good working shovels. So he tried to dig his way out through the bottom. He finally reached out right behind the wizard. The wizard saw him and turned around and while Jack was trapped he was thinking of different ways to destroy Jack. He had one way to jump up and down on the street when Jack arrived so that Jack would get hurt hitting the street really hard. He started doing it and Jack got hurt but didn’t break any bones.

 

Jack had bruises and cuts all over his body, but there was no blood. But Jack did not give up. Then Jack ran towards the wizard, jumped as high as he could, threw the sword at the wizard’s weak spot, and the wizard exploded, and then he disappeared while in the air. Jack had beat the wizard and Jack could keep the diamond and gold swords and all the wizard’s weapons forever. And all the weapons shrunk to normal size. Jack had the wand. He fixed all the damage that had happened. Everybody in the village was so happy that they shot fireworks up. There was confetti. It was a great celebration.

THE END

Is There Really A Witch?

There is a pig named Plumpy McStuffed. He really wants a little banana as a friend, but he can’t, only because there is a really frightening house right in the front of where the banana lives. Nobody ever goes near the house because people say that there is a really bad witch named Boiled McSpoiled who lives there. There is a big grave from all the hunters who tried to kill her. The only way the little banana cannot be killed by the witch is because he is so small nobody will notice him.

But then Plumpy McStuffed has an idea: I will… Never mind, that won’t work, he thinks. But then he has another idea, one that might work.

One day Plumpy finds the little banana’s phone number in front of the barn and he saved it, so now he can use it…if his phone number is still the same. Well it’s worth the try ‘cause it could still be the same.

Okay, he thinks.      

Ring ring ring .

It was silent. Then a little funny voice answers.

“Hi.”

“Oh, hi. Umm, my name is – wait for it, wait for it.” Plumpy turns on music and he starts singing his name.

“My name is PLUMPY MC STUFFED. Yeah!”  

Then when he starts singing on the phone and sounding really bad, the little banana hangs up like any normal banana, food, or animal would do to save their ear drums. So then he calls the little banana again and he is ready.

Ring ring ring, the banana answers again.

“Hi.”

“Hi.”

”Who is this?”

“This is Mr Porky, sir,” says Plumpy, trying to trick the banana so he wouldn’t hang up again.

“Oh nice to meet you. What can I help you with?”

“Can you fly your jet ten miles in the front of the Witch’s house? You will see a tall red brick house and a orange fence around it.”

“What witch’s house? There is only a nice lady that lives in an old house. I visit her every day. I can prove it.”

“Hi I’m the old lady that lives in that house. I’m so sick of people calling me a witch.” (She leaves, pretending to cry)

“So what about the gravestones in  front of her yard?”

“Those are just Halloween decorations that she put up and never took down because they are too much  work.”

“Oh, so never mind, I’ll walk to your house. Bye.”

“Bye.”

(Five minutes later)

“Hi Mr. Small. I’m Mr. Porky my last name is Chop. When I walked by the nice lady’s house I heard her say that she is ploning to eat you, so I was wondering if you wanted to team up to stop her and be friends because I don’t have any?”

“Sure, because I don’t have any friends either.”

Then Plumpy and the little banana heard that she was putting a poison outside at the time nobody was around. When the witch left to have supper, Plumpy stole it and then little banana helped Plumpy get it onto the roof of the house for their plan.

Then when the witch comes out she sees that the poison for the banana was gone and said

“Who dar…” and then at that moment they dump the poison on her head and she turns into a pile of dust. Then Plumpy and the banana are rewarded with whatever they want.

So then at the end Plumpy Mc Stuffed or should it be Mr Pork Chop plays with the little banana and become best friends. THE END  

Hide and Seek

My name is Caroline Jones. I live in Boca, Florida. I started a game of hide and seek and someone went missing. Let me tell you how it all started.  

It was a dark and stormy night. Just kidding — it was actually a hot summer day. Me and my cousins, Tommy, Timmy, and Tammy wanted to play hide and seek. We started with Tammy as the seeker and she counted to fifty slowly.

She said, “Ready or not, here I come,” like you play. There weren’t a lot of places to hide outside, but Tommy found this really cool place somewhere between a table and a few trees.

I tried to argue with him to switch places, but he said, “No way.” So, I just found this place behind a tree. It was a regular, small tree, so I thought I’d probably be found first.

But I said, “Whatever, it’s fine. It’s just a game of hide and seek. I’ll hide in Tommy’s place next time.”

It turns out, I was right. I was found first! Then Timmy. But not Tommy. We heard a scream, but didn’t know at the time who it was from. Tammy tried to look for him, but she couldn’t find him. I tried to not say where he was hiding, but I couldn’t hold it in. I told her he was in one of the shelves next to the table, so Tammy went there. But Tommy wasn’t there.

We started to think of really weird ideas. Like, maybe there was a hole in one of the shelves and he fell down to the ground.

But then I said, “No, we just got those shelves yesterday.”

Then Timmy said, “Maybe he just switched places.” Then we looked all around again. But we still couldn’t find him. Things started to get really weird. At first, we thought he could be playing a joke, but it wasn’t like him.

We started to look inside the house. We didn’t tell our parents right away because we didn’t want them to get all worried and call the police. We couldn’t find him inside the house either, so then we got worried. We decided to tell our parents, so they could call the police.

The police said, “We’ll do an overnight search, and we’ll give you a report tomorrow.” Tommy’s mom was the most  worried.

For the rest of the day, Timmy and Tammy and I decided  to play Monopoly. I was the car, Timmy was the dog, and Tammy was the horse. But we were distracted by thinking about Tommy.

“What if he never comes back?” asked Tammy.

“Our family reunions won’t be full!” said Timmy.

“We shouldn’t have played hide and seek in the first place,” I said.

It was time to go to bed, but no one could go to sleep. We were in different houses, but they were all thinking about Tommy.

The next morning, the police came. “We found nothing,” they said.

Tommy’s mother started to cry. “No, this is horrible! Why did this happen to me? Why couldn’t it have happened to my cat?”

All the moms tried to comfort her with a nice cup of tea, but it didn’t work. Everyone was depressed. No one could do anything. Not even blink their eyes. It was crazy and it was all my fault. If I told Tammy where he was sooner, we would have found him.

The day was coming to an end and me Timmy and Tammy wanted to have a sleepover. It was a good way to not think about what was going on. We decided to figure out where Tommy went.

The first thing we figured out was that it took about 10 minutes between when we started playing the game and when I told Tammy where he was. So, whatever happened  to Tommy happened quick.

We started to look out the window to see if anything happened, and guess what? We saw a man with a duffle bag. He seemed like he was just a regular man, but he could have been in disguise. We all thought that the guy took Tommy, but then we realised more people were coming and it turned out to be a bunch of teenage girls getting off the bus from camp.

“Rats, how could this happen?” I said

“Do you know how annoying this is?” Tammy said.

“I think we all know,” Timmy said.

“Let’s go to bed. It’s getting late,” Tammy said.

The next day the weather report was horrible. They said that there was going to be a hurricane. Tommy’s mother started to cry so hard that she could fill a whole tank of water.

She started to say, “This is horrible, what am I going to do? He is not going to live in that weather! Why couldn’t this just happen to my cat?” she said, weeping her eyeballs out. Again we tried to comfort her with tea but it still didn’t work.

It was my turn in the family to check the mail. I was going through the mail like I always do and something caught my eye it had to do with Tommy. I ran upstairs to show everybody.

When I got upstairs everybody was silent. I showed them the letter. It said:

Dear Family and Friends of Tommy,

Tommy is safe. The reason he is not with you is because he seemed to have a lot of arguments with you, so he ran away. Trust me, I am not lying. I have sent this letter for you to fetch him. He is in London right now on Perry Road.

Sincerely,

Police Chief Charlie Kunkle

 

Everyone screamed with excitement, especially Tommy’s mom. We all bought tickets for London. Everyone was so excited to see Tommy, even the cat. The next day everyone started to pack. My mom sent me to go get my mail and I went through it (like I always do) and something caught my eye. It was another letter about Tommy:

 

Dear Friends and Family of Tommy ,

We have found out that the Tommy we found isn’t the Tommy we thought he was.I am so very sorry.

Sincerely,

Police Chief Charlie Kunkle

 

I showed this to everybody. Tommy’s mom started to cry again and everyone was silent. They stopped what they were doing. It was a mess. Timmy and Tammy were blank. No one knew what to do. They had to cancel their tickets to London, or sell them, and that was hard because the plane flight was supposed to be today. They had been planning this since yesterday. Also, they were leaving because the hurricane was supposed to come the next day. So, they unpacked their clothes and took out all their batteries and flashlights and radios. They turned on the news to see what was happening. It turned out that Tommy was famous! But not for a good reason.

The bottom of the screen said, “Child Missing: Hurricane Coming Tomorrow. What is He Going to Do?” Everyone started to panic, even if they didn’t know Tommy. They were still worried about him because he was a living child. Neighbors came up to them like somebody died and that they were sitting shiva and gave them food.

One person who was a yoga teacher came over and gave them an idea to do yoga to get their minds off of Tommy. But it didn’t work. One person tried scented steam meditation. But that didn’t work. Another person said just to sleep. So they tried to go to bed. But they couldn’t sleep. Then someone said the hurricanes aren’t that bad because you’re in the city and not next to an ocean.

Most of the neighbors suggested things, but none of them worked, so they just decided to sit there and wait for the hurricane and see if Tommy came with it. Then, I suggested trying to call him, because Tommy would probably bring his phone. So we tried to call him, Facetime him, and text him. But none of them worked.

Tommy’s mother said in a deep low voice, “We’re never going to see Tommy again, and we shouldn’t worry about him. I’m sad but I can’t be sad forever.”

My mom said to her, “You can’t say that. We have to keep trying.” So we called the police and said, “You need to help us. The hurricane is almost coming. We need to find Tommy.”

The police replied, “But — but — we can’t go it, it’s a hurricane! We’re going to get killed. A tree is going to fall on us!”

And we say, “If you’re not going to help us, we’re going to do it ourselves.”

“No, you can’t do that, it’s too dangerous! It’d be my responsibility if I let you go out.”

“So?”

“I can’t let you do this, ma’am.”

And then we hung up the phone. Tommy’s mother got up on the chair and made an inspirational speech. “We need to do this! We are all the friends and family of Tommy George Finkleheim. We need to do this! Power is us.”

So we got on our raincoats and hats and boots and flashlights and walkie-talkies (because they’re really cool) and went out. There was wind and a light drizzle, but we still went out. And we knew it was going to turn out to be a big storm with lightning and thunder, but we were prepared. We asked a scientist to get us lightning-proof clothes before we knew this was going to happen. We just thought it was useful in case something like this might happen. We thought that it wouldn’t happen, but it did. So we went to go find Tommy. We split up into groups. Me, Tammy, my mom, and Tammy’s mom were one group. Timmy, Timmy’s mom, and Tommy’s mom was another group. And the pets were the last group.

So we started the search. One went East, one went West, and one went North. We knew that he couldn’t go South, because the gate between us and our rich neighbor was locked. Unless, he climbed over, which probably didn’t happen because there was high tech security. I went North because I know the whole part of the North side of the neighborhood. We started the search to find Tommy.We asked our neighbors if they seen anything about Tommy but they all said no. It was hard we were out there for almost three hours and we couldn’t find anything.

We all decided that we would go back home at 1:30 because the person who took Tommy might come out late at night. It was 1:29 and still couldn’t find anything. So we went inside and went to bed.

The next morning, it was pouring outside. Trees were falling down on the road, cars were stopping. The hurricane started. My mom said to Tommy’s mom, “We can’t go out like this! We’re all gonna die!”
“Well, Tommy’s gonna die if we don’t find him.”

“Maybe we should do it later today, because maybe it’ll get quieter,” said Tammy’s mom.

“Okay. Let’s stay in and listen to the radio and see what the weather is like.” So they turned on the radio and Tommy was on the radio again.

We all came close and the broadcaster said, “There’s been one sighting of the missing boy. Police are going out to find him. Don’t be worried, we’ll get him home safe.” Tommy’s mom screamed with excitement. She started dancing with the cat. His mom was so happy that they made a pie. And that’s very rare to make a pie in our family. The pie was very good; it was apple pie with vanilla ice cream on top. We saved a piece for Tommy for when he got home — that is, we hoped he would get home. A minute later, the lights went out.

“We need to get our flashlights and turn them on so we have light.” We played hide and seek in the dark, and some other fun games.

“I have to admit it,” said Tammy. “This is kind of fun.”

“It sure is, except it’s pouring outside,” said Timmy.

“I wonder what it would be like if this was everyday,” I said.

“We could make this everyday if we turned off the lights and closed the shades. The only difference is that it wouldn’t be pouring outside,” said Timmy.

We went back to playing our games. And then, boom! The lights went back on. We started to sigh. We liked it when it was dark, and when all of the lights in the whole city were dark. Then the radio turned on.

“We’ve seen a second sighting of Tommy! We hope we will give you a report about seeing him a third time, or a fourth time tomorrow, or maybe later today.” Again, Tommy’s mother started to scream with excitement. She baked another pie. This time, it was blueberry pie with coffee ice cream on top. We saved another piece for Tommy. And then, the power went out again.

Me, Tammy, and Timmy started to scream with excitement, and started to say to Tommy’s mom, “You should bake another pie because we love it when the lights go out.”

“Maybe you do but I don’t. That’s not a reason for someone to bake a pie.”

“Fine, I’ll starve for pie. And I’ll die, and it’s all because you never made a pie! So sad, so sad.”

My mom said to me, “That’s not gonna happen.”

“How do you know it won’t? I once heard a story about a girl who wanted a pony, and she kept asking her parents and her parents kept saying no, and then she died.”

“That was just a tale, it’s not gonna happen.”

“Okay, but it’s not my fault when you see me dead in my room one time when you wake up.”

And then, boom, the lights went back on! It was another sad time. We really wanted them to go back off, except for the mothers of course. Then, the phone rang. It was our fathers. They’d been on a men’s day out because they all had a business trip on the same day. Tommy’s dad just heard the news. He started to cry. But they couldn’t do anything about it; they couldn’t get on a plane and come back because the hurricane was happening. They had to wait until it was over.

And then the radio turned on. “Good news!” Tommy’s mom was shrieking, crossing her fingers and holding her heart to see if it was Tommy that they found. But, no. They just said that the hurricane was going to be over. Then they said, “Another good news! We have found the person who took Tommy! Now we just need to find Tommy and he’ll be alright!”

Now, Tommy’s mother made another pie. It was the most delicious pie ever! It was strawberry and apple with blueberries and vanilla ice cream on top. This time, we saved two pieces for Tommy. So now we basically had a full pie but with different flavors. It was towards the end of the day and everyone got tired. Everyone decided to go to sleep.

The next morning there was no more pouring rain, and there were no more trees falling down. The hurricane was over. We all turned on the news, and guess what the news anchor said?

“The police have found Tommy.”

Tommy’s mother cried tears of joy. She called her husband and told him the good news. She was met with a lot of questions. “Is he home yet? Did he get hurt? I’m going to be home soon, I’m getting tickets right now.”

“I don’t know anything! He didn’t come home yet. But I’ll tell you when he does.”

Before she could say another word or make another pie, the doorbell rang.

Tommy came in. His mother ran up to him and hugged him so tight that he almost suffocated. “Tommy! Sweetheart! What happened? Where were you?”

“Well, you know how I went to the store to buy milk two days before we played hide and seek? I stole the milk because I didn’t have enough money. So the store owner got really upset. He said ‘This is one more warning you better not do this again but there might be something coming your way.’ He didn’t really do anything to me, I was just working in the back of the store. I tried to leave one time, but there were no windows in the basement.”

“Oh my god, how could he do this to you? Was he arrested? I need to make sure he was arrested.”

“Mom, what do you think the police are just gonna let him go?”

“No, just go back to the story.”

“Okay. So I tried to go through the door of the basement, but if I got caught he would turn me in for stealing so I couldn’t. I just waited for someone to figure out I was missing and take me out of this mess. And it worked!’’

“Oh Tommy I missed you so much! Let’s call your daddy.”

Tommy’s dad was already on the bus when he got the call. “That’s so amazing! Tell me the story when I get home. I am so happy he came home!”

When his dad came home Tommy told the story. After that, he ate his pie and went to sleep. And it was happily ever after.

THE END! I hope you liked the story of Tommy.

                                                       

Hearts And Horses

Chapter 1

 

My name is Charlotte Elizabeth Gavigan. I am ten years old. I have a mom named Kate, a dad named Shawn, an older sister named April who is 14, a younger sister named Piper who is five, and a baby brother named Mikie who just turned one. Oh, and I can’t forget my puppy dog Beau who is a shorkie (a shi-tzu yorkie mix).

A couple weeks before the end of school, my mom signed me up for this camp called “Hearts and Horses” and I was psyched to go because I love horseback riding. I wished school would just end so I could go the week after when we went to Bridgehampton for the summer. It was also a good thing for my family because my mom and dad wanted me to get “exercise.” And horseback riding was exercise, I guess. I was hoping that I’d meet someone new because I wouldn’t get to see my best friend Haley for the entire summer except on weekends and we usually saw each other everyday. I was hoping that Hearts and Horses was actually going to be a good camp.

 

Chapter 2

 

I couldn’t wait for the day of school to end. I was stuck in history class and I didn’t know what to do.

“…blah blah blah Franklin Delano Roosevelt blah blah blah…there was the rich and the poor blah blah blah…” said Mrs. Heffley.

I was whispering to my best friend Haley during this boring session.

“Bing!” the bell rang and everyone went running out. Some kids got pushed around because everyone was excited for summer to start. I said goodbye to Mrs. Heffley and I ran off with Haley.

We ran to my house and we planned out our secret escape so we could at least see each other a little bit, because she was going to Bridgehampton too, but not the same camp, so we’d only get to see each other on weekends and we usually saw each other every day. So we planned where we would have our secret room so we could just hang out for a while so we didn’t have to hear my dad with the TV on, and my mom reading to my little sister, and my older sister texting, blah blah blah.

“Okay, what are we going to do now?” I asked.

“Don’t know,” Haley said.

“Let’s spy on people,” we said together.

“Why do we always say things at the same time? I think we have a problem, we must be sick,” said Haley.

We both giggled and then put on black turtlenecks and black pants and tied up each other’s hair into a ponytail with black rubber bands and put black headbands on.

“Ready?” I asked.

“Ready Freddy,” Haley replied.

We went out of my room, which was a secret room, and we started spying. I heard my mom talking to my dad about Hearts & Horses, my camp.

“Are you kidding? I don’t know if a little girl like her is ready for that kind of pressure,” said Mom.

“She’ll be fine,” Dad said.

“No, she’s not ready for that kind of jumping competition. We shouldn’t let her enter,” Mom said.

“Well, we’ll talk about it at dinner with her, okay?” Dad said.

“Okay, Shawn,” Mom said.

I looked at Haley. She looked at me and we looked at Beau and Beau looked at us. And the three of us ran off into my room.

 

Chapter 3

 

Before dinner, my mom asked if Haley’s family wanted to join us for dinner. They said yes. Then the ten of us (my family, Haley’s family including her older brother Sam, her dog Elle, and Beau) would all drive off in my family’s car and Haley’s family’s car to Bridgehampton.

At dinner, my mom said, “Okay, I need a moment for a family meeting, just with me, your father, and you, Charlotte.”

I was chewing my steak and suddenly stopped chewing it and held it in my mouth, and my eyes also widened up, when I heard “Charlotte.”

I swallowed my piece of steak and then whispered in Haley’s ear: “Say you have to go to the bathroom even though you really don’t and I’ll tell my mom and dad that I want to talk about the thing near the bathroom,” I said.

“So what you want me to do is go to the bathroom but really listen to what your parents are saying?” Haley asked.

“Exactly,” I said.

Then I stopped whispering to Haley and said, “Just telling Haley our new secret handshake. Since it’s secret, I don’t want anyone to know.”

“Okay,” said Mom. “Let’s go.”

Once we got to the bathroom, I stopped and started talking to my parents. Earlier, Haley snuck in the bathroom and I assumed she was now listening.

“Look, your father and I have been talking, and there’s this big jumping-”

“I listened,” I said. “I was spying with Haley earlier today and I heard you and Dad talking earlier and saying that I wasn’t good enough to be in the jumping competition for camp.”

This is not what I was expecting, Haley thought.

“That’s not what we were saying,” Dad said. “We just didn’t know if you could handle that much pressure.”

“What am I, five?” I said. “I can handle this! I’ve been doing horseback riding for like, a really long time! Like five years, and you think I can’t be in the jumping competition? Come on! I know how to jump with my horse. It’s not that hard, okay? Are you worried I’m going to get hurt or something? You just don’t know what it feels like because you and Mom haven’t been horseback riding for like, a really long time.”

“We just want to make sure you’re safe,” Mom said.

“I will be safe. I won’t break a leg or anything. I’ll be okay,” I yelled.

Then I stormed off to the backyard and Haley followed me, and Beau came along and so did Elle (Haley’s family brought Elle).

“Charlotte, Charlotte, hey Charlotte! Wait up,” Haley said.

When she found me, she came running with the dogs following her from behind and saw me sitting on the top of the monkey bars.

Haley said “Stay Here” to the dogs and climbed up the ladder and sat next to me.

“Well, that’s not what I was expecting,” Haley said.

“I just had to tell them that I could do the jumping competition,” I said. “But apparently they think I’m going to get hurt or I’m not ready. You’re lucky. Your parents would allow you in a tennis competition.” (What Haley did was tennis camp).

Haley and I looked at each other, both making a kind of sad face.

 

Chapter 4

 

When we went off to Bridgehampton, I did my secret handshake with Haley and she went into her car and I went into mine. I turned on the TV which was in the car and I put in the DVD “Pretty in Pink,” and Haley got in her car and put in the DVD “Pretty in Pink” too because we both had TVs in our cars. Usually I would turn the TV off for a little bit to talk with my family and so would Haley, but this time we didn’t.

I heard my parents whispering. I didn’t know what they were whispering about.

“This isn’t like her,” Mom whispered.

“Maybe she’s tired, Amy. Relax. It was a long last day of school for a fourth grader like her,” Dad whispered.

“I guess you’re right,” Mom whispered back.

When we got to Bridgehampton at my house, I said goodbye to Haley. We did our secret handshake, and I said that I’d come to her house at 1 o’clock to talk about this entire situation. It was Friday night, and I was wrecked, so I grabbed some Oreos, put them in a cup, and went straight to my room and turned on my TV and watched “Dog with a Blog.”

When my Mom and Dad came in to kiss me goodnight, I said, “You still don’t believe in me?”

“Look, we’re sorry,” said Mom.

“Okay,” I said. “Love you.”

 

Chapter 5

 

Since I had a late lunch, after lunch I went off to Haley’s house. I got on my bike, put my helmet on, and rode down to Dune road. I put the kickstand down so it wouldn’t fall, ran to Haley’s house and rang the doorbell. Haley opened the door.

“Hi Bestie,” she said.

“Hi Bestie,” I said.

We did our secret handshake and then she said, “Do you want a snack or anything?”

“No,” I said. “I just had a really late lunch.”

So we ran to her room and then I told her what happened last night.

“That’s a hard one,” Haley said. “I don’t know how to deal with that one.”

“What do we do?” I said.

“Let’s take a little bike ride and get some fresh air. Maybe we’ll get an idea. Omg, omg,” they said together.

So I went outside and put my helmet on and waited for Haley to get her bike out of the garage. She put her helmet on and put the kickstand up and I put the kickstand up and we both rode a little and talked.

“I think I should just give them another chance,” I said.

“I agree,” Haley said.

“It just feels awkward and I don’t know why,” I said.

So we were about to turn the corner and we saw a boy fighting with his parents.

“I’m good enough to be in the soccer championship. Why do you think I can’t do it?” the boy said.

“We don’t want you to get hurt,” said the mom.

“It’s just like you and your parents!” said Haley.

“Let’s stay and listen,” I said.

“I won’t get hurt, I’ll be okay,” said the boy. Then he ran off.

“The only reason why we don’t want to allow him in the competition is because our baby is getting older,” said the mom to the dad.

I looked at Haley and then she looked at me and we both went back to her house, biking quick.

 

Chapter 6

 

“What are we gonna do?” Haley asked.

“Well, maybe my parents are worried because they don’t want me to get older,” I said.

Just then I heard a doorbell. I ran to the door with Haley and Haley opened the door. It was my mom.

“It’s time for dinner, sweetheart. Say goodbye to Haley,” said my mom.

“Bye Haley. Bye Mrs. Presner,” I said. I did my secret handshake with Haley and my Mom and I put on our helmets and rode our bikes back together.

 

Chapter 7

 

On the first day of camp, I was kind of nervous but mostly excited. So when I woke up I brushed my teeth and was still thinking about why my parents wouldn’t want me to enter this jumping competition. Maybe it WAS because they didn’t want their baby to do all that. Maybe the real reason they don’t want me to enter was because they cared about their baby.

At camp, I was riding my horse that I got, Peppermilk, and I was talking to her about what my parents were talking about the jumping competition. On Friday night, since it was movie night, I didn’t have camp the next day so I told my parents that I just needed to use the bathroom for a second. I was thinking about if I should ask my parents if they were worried that their baby was getting older. When I was washing my hands I told myself that I would do it.

I went up to my mom and dad and said, “Mom, Dad, can I talk to you in private for a second?”

They said, “Sure.”

So I said, “Is the reason why you don’t want me to compete in the jumping competition because you are sad that your baby is getting older and doing something like this?”

“How did you know?” Mom said.

“I took a bike ride with Haley on Saturday when I went over to her house and we saw this boy and his parents talking about that; his parents didn’t want him to enter this soccer competition because their baby was getting older and they were sad about it.”

“The reason we didn’t want you to enter is because this is your first jumping competition and it’s a big milestone in your life. But I want you to enter. I want you to be happy,” said Mom.

“Me too,” said Dad.

“Thanks guys,” I said. “But I’ll always be your baby.”

“Thanks,” they said.

So we went back in the living room and finished the movie Pretty In Pink.

 

Chapter 8

 

The day of the competition came and my family came and so did Haley’s family to support me. My family even brought Beau and Haley’s family even brought Elle.

“Go Chawit. Go Chawit!” said Piper and Mikie.

Even my sister April was supporting me after all those years of being mean to me. She was holding up a sign that said,”You can do it, Charlotte!”And Haley and her brother were holding up a sign that said, “Hooray Charlotte.”

I was neck in neck with a guy who usually bullied me in camp named Chris Waters. And then I thought, Not this time, Chris. And then rode Peppermilk faster and I won!

Chris’s eyes widened up and then he ran off. Everyone went and congratulated me and my parents gave me a big smile and I gave them a big smile back. I knew from the start that this was gonna be the best summer and it was.
The End

Goopy Dogs Save the Day!

Once, long ago, there was a smelly boy who wore rags. His name was Joe. He had five really gross and goopy dogs that ate bricks, but they had no teeth. They snored like zzzZZZzzz.. It was so loud. Last night, they snored the loudest they had ever done. It was like this. “ZZZZZ.” It was the loudest ever, it was crazy!!!

They were also detectives who made detective gear and weapons and vehicles. They were really good at it. Yesterday they made one called rocket 700. It will be launched into space tomorrow at 9:00 p.m. on July 4th. When it is still in Earth it will shoot fireworks of red white and blue. There will be astronauts inside. They will have a lot of shrink rays in their hands and they will shrink the moon.

When they are done, they will bring the moon back down to Earth at 10:00 p.m. They will show everybody the tiny moon. The rocket has 700 fire blastin’ rocket boosters that are so powerful. They were made they were made in a building that they randomly found that said something that they could not read. It was all smothered ink on the door it said: S e, then smothered, then r e, then smothered, then L b and that was all that was on the door. So then they went in.

It looked so creepy, it had spider webs with spiders on them. They put hi-tech metal underneath so it would be safe to build the rocket, or else the rocket boosters would burn the place down. Then, after the goopy dogs finished building, there was an evil villain named Emerald Enemy because he had a emerald sword. The place looked different, there were foot prints leading outside of the base. The door was pried open and there were more foot prints leading down to Joe’s house.

Only Joe was home, so he opened the door and he walked in with his electric sword and saw Joe playing video games on the Xbox 1. Joe heard someone come in, so he grabbed the remote as a weapon and turned around and said, “Take me on like a man!” Joe did not know it would be such a big and fierce bad guy! But Joe had a wooden sword in his room. He was scared of the bad guy, and he would break the remote if he used it. So he went to his room and grabbed the wooden sword. The bad guy lifted his emerald sword to kill Joe but then the goopy dogs jumped in and exploded the house. The good guys survived and Emerald Enemy died and the Rocket 700 shot off and was glorious! They brought the moon down to Earth. Everybody loved it! It had been a fun day!

The End!

Going Up To The Bigs

 

Chapter 1: Starting Baseball

Someone yelling “Home run!” outside his window woke him up at 6:30 in the morning. People were playing stickball, same thing as baseball.

“Lucas,” called his mom.

“What?” Lucas ran down the stairs thinking of what his mom was going to say.

“We are going shopping at Target soon,” his mom said. So Lucas had some breakfast, and off to Target they were.

When they were there, Lucas wanted a wiffle ball bat and a wiffle ball.

“Where are you going to play, since we live in the city?” asked his mom.                               

“Please,” said Lucas.

“Fine,” said his mother, “but that’s all you are getting.”

“You are the best mom ever!”

“I know.”

So right when they got home, around 10:00 a.m., Lucas started playing wiffle ball in the street with a couple of friends.

He did pretty well for his first time. Even though he had never played baseball before, he always knew he would like it. He went 2-4 with one double and one triple. He also got two strikeouts. He played stickball or wiffle ball almost every day now. He was always the first batter.

Then, his mom put him on a team. Lucas was really excited! He was 9 and he was playing with 12-year-olds. He was on the Brooklyn Stingers. His first game was on Saturday. They had practice on Thursday and Coach Garret told him he was batting first. When the game began at 7:00, the lights were shining, and he was surrounded by people with their eyes peeled on him. Lucas was batting and in front of 1,000 people. Lucas, stepping up to the plate with goosebumps, was as scared as if a monster was creeping up on him and almost killed him. Lucas got in his batting stance and took the first pitch. It was almost 80 mph!

The next pitch Lucas swung and CRACK Lucas hit a double down the line. Everyone was cheering for him. His coach was screaming, “That a boy, Lucas, that a boy, Lucas.” Lucas was pumped up. The next batter hit a single and Lucas was so fast he beat the throw home and they were already winning 1-zip.

Lucas got a strikeout next, but then, his third time at bat he hit a grand slam! He hit the ball 250 feet! Everybody in the stands had their jaws open.

They won the game 6-1 and Lucas was the MVP. Lucas was very happy about his first game.

Chapter 2: Getting Older and Better

Lucas’s birthday was in a week and he was turning 10! His birthday party was in two days and Lucas was really excited. They were going to play video games at Lucas’s party, but they switched it to playing baseball because Lucas started playing baseball.

Lucas had another baseball game tomorrow and he was ready for anything. But when he was in bed, he had a bad dream that he would get hit and break his leg, and when he woke up after that, he couldn’t sleep. When he was at his game, he hit 1-5 because he was scared he would get hit by a pitch.

After the game, Coach asked him, “What happened today?”

“I was just scared I’d get hit. My body was just scared.”

Coach answered, “If you get hit, it won’t hurt.” That made Lucas feel less scared.

His birthday party was later that day and Lucas was so excited. It started at 3:00 and ended at 7:00. They were going to have a five-foot-high cake! Lucas was looking at the time every minute, and he wanted his friends to come this second.

Lucas invited nine people so they could play a five on five matchup. When all his friends came, they were having fun playing a baseball game, and then Lucas’s dad yelled, “Someone is here for you.”

They walked over slowly and sadly, and then they saw Derek Jeter and perked up with their jaws opened.

“Hi guys,” Derek said. They were all too amazed to talk. Lucas finally said, “Can you play baseball with us?”

“Sure,” answered Derek.

Lucas’s team got Derek and the other team got two players from their team.

Lucas’s team creamed his friend’s team 21-4. Lucas went 10-10 and after the game they dunked one gallon of gatorade on Lucas and even got season tickets for the Yankees.

Chapter 3: Baseball Baseball Baseball

Lucas played baseball all day in the summer and went to Yankees games almost every day. When school started, he couldn’t go to as many games. His mom said two times during the week and two times during the weekend.

Lucas had a game the next day and hit 4-5. He got one triple, two singles, and a grand slam!

He had the best average on the team and he had the most homers on the team. His average was 555 and he had two homers! Then the next day he went to a baseball game and the Yankees lost. The good part was that he was right field and he was in the first row.

In his mind, he was saying that this was the going to be the best week of his life. The next day, he was just hanging out and played video games, played stickball, slept late.

But when he played stickball, he was running and slipped, and it looked like he was dead but wasn’t. One second, he was playing stickball the next he was in the hospital. In the hospital, he was thinking about what he said last night. He said in his mind that it was the best week of his life, but he took that back. Now he was in a cast for six weeks.

He was thinking of how boring it’ll be sitting around all day doing boring stuff, then BINGO he could go to the Yankees game. In his mind, he was actually excited to go to Yankees games every day.

He was even more excited because Yankees were doing well this season. They were in first place with a 61-49 record. The Yankees were playing the Indians and the Indians were bad this year so the Yankees did have a good chance of winning so Lucas was super duper excited! They went to the game and the Yankees won 5-2. The next day, Alex Rodriguez was up and he hit the ball right to Lucas. He stuck his mitt out and felt something plop in his mitt.

He looked in his mitt, and it was a nice shiny ball. Lucas had caught a ball, his dad cheering, “My kid caught a ball, my kid caught a ball.”

He was on the jumbo screen. Lucas was so happy he was crying.

After the game Alex Rodriguez came up to him and said, “Want to hang out in the dugout together?”

“Sure.”

That’s how their relationship started. His mom and Alex got in touch, and Alex started babysitting Lucas about once a week.

Chapter 4: Boring School Starting

Lucas’s school was starting in three days. Lucas was not that excited because he was going into 4th grade and all they do is work, work, and more work. The worst part is that Lucas got Mrs. Harvin, who is the worst teacher ever.

Even if you pass a test– “Lucas,” yelled his mother.

“What?” answered Lucas.

“Get dressed for baseball.”

Lucas finally had his cast off so he could play.

Never mind school, off to baseball. At the game, they let Lucas be the starter pitcher. Lucas pitched 7.1. He let up one run and they won the game 5-2 because the relief pitcher let up one run. Lucas was the MVP again.

Lucas’s coach said they would have to go to Staten Island for their next game. Coach Garrett secretly told Lucas that he was the best player on the team.

Lucas really already knew, but it was nice that his coach was actually saying it.

When he came back to his house, he had a playdate with his friend Robbie. Robbie was also very good at baseball. Robbie was 14, but Lucas was still better than him.

After the playdate, he went to sleep and then he went to school. Mrs. Harvin was always nice the first day, but then the next day, it was like magic. She got mean.

The second day of school, she gave them tests and all that boring stuff. Even if you passed a test, she yelled at you. It’s like she was a bully and she was a teacher. The only good thing about her was that she rarely let them get extra recess. At least she even let them have extra recess.

She seemed like a friendly teacher, but she was the exact opposite.

After school, he went to his baseball game. His team lost 12-10. Lucas did his part because he went 5-5. All his hits were doubles. There record was 3-1 and they were in first place in their division.

The next day, they took a 100-page test and she yelled at Lucas for getting a 99/100. “Stupid, right.” The next day the principal fired Mrs. Harvin because she saw her yelling at everyone!!!

“Hip hip, hurray,” everyone yelled. Their substitute teacher let them have a dance party. Everyone had the best day ever.

Chapter 5: Fun Fun Fun

Everything in Lucas’s life was fun. Baseball, school, and everything else you can think of. In baseball, they were in the World Series, and in school, they didn’t do any work. Lucas was turning 11 next month!

Who wouldn’t like Lucas’s life right now? When Lucas’s birthday came next month, he was going to play with a hard ball. They were going to play at Pro Swing. Lucas just loved his life so much.

When his team was in the World Series, Lucas got the walk-off hit and his team won 7-6. Lucas went 4-5 with three homers. He was totally the MVP.

Lucas was so good he played with high school kids. Lucas’s birthday was the best! He hit 7-7 and hit four homers.

His mother said, “When you get to be 14 I’ll put you in college.” If he could do that, it would be amazing. He would be famous!

Everybody followed Lucas everywhere. He knew how major leaguers felt now.

“Lucas! Lucas! Lucas! Lucas!” It was getting really annoying now.

Chapter 6: College to the Majors

When Lucas turned 14, he went to Duke University and he did phenomenally.

The Duke baseball coach said, “You are so good you could be called up any time. While you’re on our team, try your best and we’ll put you first in the batting order every time.”

Lucas did so well that he couldn’t go to school, so at college he went to someone who taught his grade. Lucas played outfield and the Yankees needed an outfielder. So it was perfect timing, but manager Joe Girardi thought he should stay in college one more month and in that month he hit 950. That was the best average ever in one month and in the draft the Yankees selected Lucas Griench from Duke University. Lucas was so excited to be in the majors with his favorite team.

Frogs Are Awesome

What makes frogs awesome is how they are slimy,

how they have a backbone, how the Tomato Frog can puff itself up

until it’s so large nothing can eat it.

And how the One Eye frog has one eye on the top of its head,

and two eye-like things on its bottom,

and anything that sees it thinks it is a monster.

And how the Camouflage Frog blends in with rocks, the bark of a tree.

And how the Poison Arrow Frog spits poison the way people spit

on the ground in Switzerland. If the Poison Arrow Frog

made its way to Switzerland, it might begin to eat schwabenbrotli:

white, soft bread. What is awesome is the skin of a green frog–

soft, white dots on its back, the frog leaping in the grass.

Fire Emblem

“Bonus Page”

 

Chrom – The Leader

Roy – The Fire Hero

Marth – The Speedy Gonzalaz

Ike – The Fearless knight

Robin – The magic witch

Lucina – The Antagonist

Lucina’s Minions – The Minions of Lucina

The Civilians – The Civilians

Xander Mobus – The Announcer

 

“Introduction”

 

So this is a story about five young warriors, Ike the fearless knight, Robin the magic witch, Marth the speedy fighter, Roy the flaming hero, and Chrom the British leader of the team. They all try to kill the evil queen, Lucina. Why? Because she has trapped the other warriors in dungeons. I don’t think they should kill her and just, well… lock her up instead of the warriors. Okay, enough about them and more about the story. Hope you enjoy it.

 

“Ahh! What-a lovely day,” said Ike as he was at the pub. While Chrom was at his part-time job as a blacksmith, he noticed Ike was supposed to be with him because he was a blacksmith as well. And Ike was not there! After a few seconds of looking around he knew two things. He snuck out of work and he was busted. Chrom knew he was at the pub. He felt annoyed because Ike loved beer and he always went to the pub.

Meanwhile at Marth’s place, Marth and Robin were ready to kill Queen Lucina but Roy, Chrom, and Ike were not. “I’m glad I am 12, because I’m the youngest in the group, ha!” said Roy randomly as he was watching his favorite childhood TV show, SpongeBob. Than Ike came home to Roy and helped him get ready for battle and gave him many fighting tips some that he knew already. Someday Chrom was thinking, his 2-year-old son would get ready for battle. Roy was glad he was the youngest because he didn’t have the fear of dying of old age.

 

Meanwhile at Queen Lucina’s kingdom, her minions were rushing around in the trash and found a newspaper. They read it because it was the only “entertainment” they had. And it said the Fire Crew (Roy, Marth, Robin, Ike, And Chrom) were going to kill Queen Lucina. The minions had to warn Lucina right away! So this just basically caused havoc over the city. Lucina jumped to action and went straight to Fire Crew’s City. The ground started rumbling and-

“AHH,” said Marth.

“C’mon everybody, go go go!” said Chrom.

“Yes sir!” said Robin.

 

The minions started coming and invading everybody’s houses for weapons so they could fight the Fire Crew, but there was a downside. Lucina’s minions don’t know where the blacksmith shop was and everybody’s houses only had silverware. Lucina’s minions didn’t know what weapons were and they just thought that silver objects were weapons. But there was about ten million minions and the six of them were as strong as Ike’s sword.

 

“Bonus Page”

 

Lucina’s minions looked like purple chubby bears but with a suit of gold armors on and had blue diamond swords about the size of two normal-sized adults that smelled like rotten donuts.

 

So Lucina’s minions searched and searched until they found some…silverware. “ATTACK!” said Lucina’s minions.

“Wait, wait, wait, you guys are using silverware,” said Chrom. “Silverware, what’s that? We have weapons,” said Lucina’s minions.

“Just because they’re silver doesn’t mean they’re weapons,” said Ike.

“Yeah, you have to go to the blacksmith shop to get weapons,” said Marth.

“Where is that exactly?” said Lucina’s minions.

“Oh just make a left on Viagra street,” said Marth.

“Thanks,” said Lucina’s minions, rushing to Viagra street.

“MARTH! Why did YOU do THAT?!?!” said Chrom in a deep voice.

“Sorry sir,” said Marth in a scared voice.

“Well, well, well, look who it is,” said Lucina.

“How did you get here?” said Roy and Robin at the same time. Then Lucina’s minions rushed into battle with real weapons this time.

“3…2…1…Fight!” said Xander Mobus.

 

Chrom Vs. Lucina’s Minions

Chrom slashed his sword and since Lucina’s minions don’t know how to use “swords” yet, Chrom won by default. And the minions gave up.

 

Roy Vs. Stronger Minions

Roy lost against the stronger minions, maybe because he’s twelve?

 

Marth Vs. Lucina’s Decoy

Marth won because Ms. Decoy messed up. Because if robot make one mistake they lose and Lucina needs her minions but if she doesn’t have her minions she’s pretty much poop.

 

Ike Versus 9 million minions!

It was a tie. They both gave up because it was too hard. Lazy people.

 

FINAL ROUND

Chrom Vs. Lucina Queen of the Darkside

Chrom won! The whole city is saved!

 

But there was one more thing they needed to do…

Save the other warriors!

Except they lost Marth’s sword because it broke during the battle.

 

So they rushed to Lucina’s Kingdom In a snowstorm.

“Uhh…I feel sick,” said Ike.

“We have to save the other warriors, Ike. C’MON, MAGGOT!” said Chrom.

“Don’t you think thats a bit harsh for Ike,” said Roy.

“He’s right, Ike is only 34 years old that acts like a 19 year old,” said Marth.

They noticed something in particular, Where’s Robin?

“Your right, where is Robin, Narrator?” said Ike. You’re not supposed to talk to the Narrator! Uhh…they break the fourth wall every time.

“If we weren’t busy arguing, we would have stayed with Robin. Everybody run as fast as you can!” said Chrom.

 

Meanwhile at Lucina’s Castle, Robin was freeing the warriors and 31 minutes later the rest of the Fire Crew appeared and they helped free the warriors too.

After that they were UNSTOPPABLE!

 

THE END

Finding the Perfect House

I  walk up to Colin’s room, feeling nervous. I knock, and then he opens the door.

“Hey, what’s up?” he says to me.

I say, “I want to still  to live in California but I don’t want to live in San Francisco.”

Colin says, “When I was younger I used to want to move too but mom and dad weren’t even close to saying yes.”

“We need to come up with a plan to get them to move.”

“What do you think would convince them?”

“Maybe we could sneak out tonight and go to the park to talk about plans.”

So we did. Our house is very close to the park, but there aren’t a lot of crosswalks. Since we are just kids, we have to walk around a bunch of houses because they have the crosswalks.

In the park, we sit on the swings and swing, talking. I say, “How about we say to mom and dad that we still want to live in California, but more south toward the beaches? We can say, can we first look at the houses down south and maybe that will change their mind?”

“Let’s ask them in the morning.”

We go back home and go to sleep. The next morning it is our mom’s birthday. Colin and I  bring her breakfast in bed.

Colin says, “Allison and I want to still live in California but move down south. Can we please just look at the houses down there and see where we get?”

“Fine, but you have to wait a few weeks until your dad gets home from a big work , I trip.”

Well, it’s not the worst thing, I think. She could have just said no.

“Thanks, mom,” we say to her.

Three weeks later, when our dad gets home, we run and give him a hug and a kiss.

“Dad!” I say. “Three weeks ago, we asked mom if we can look at the houses down south.”

Their dad says, “Absolutely yes.”

So the next day we drive down south. We look at a house that was right on the coast between north and south. The house inside had a big kitchen, a patio, a backyard with a swing set, a front yard. There were two floors and an attic. There was a dining area, tv area, and this house was so different from our house because it is so much bigger. We each would get our own room. In our own house, Colin and Jeremy have to share a room. And our house didn’t have a basement, and this house did. When we are cooking in our own house, we are all squished together. When we make different dishes, but this house’s kitchen has an island, two sinks in different locations, six burners, a lot of storage areas, a refrigerator and freezer. The island also had chairs around it so you could sit there too, not just in the dining area.

Allison says, “What do you think?”                      

Her parents say, “I really like it but we do not have the money right now.”

“We need to get jobs that make more money,” the mom says. Right now, she is an editor of baby books, but she only makes $20 per book and has to give half of that money to taxes, so she only comes home with $10. Our dad works in adult books and makes $40, so he only comes home with $20. Between the two of them, they only make $30 each day, so not enough for the house.

The mom and the dad want to get new jobs to make more money. Because they really like the house too and they also think that it would be way better too. The brothers had jobs that paid $15 a day, so every weekend, our family takes all the money they made and put it together and see if it’s enough money for the house.

That isn’t enough so I want to also get a job, but I can’t find one, I asked my mom and dad, “Can I help you with your jobs?”

Together, my family decides to work part time at their jobs and then open a bakery. So we started to build a bakery. It turns out great. We found out that the bakery made more money than our regular jobs, so we quit our old jobs. We focused on our bakery. My job is to sell the pastries. My favorite thing to make is the sugar cookies. Two months later, we finally had all the money we needed for the house.

I  was so excited, I was bursting with happy tears. I couldn’t wait to move down there and make new friends. And go to the beach. Finally we moved into the house.

* * *

Two years later we are so happy in our new house. I have made a lot more friends than in San Francisco. I like to go to the beach now. I like my new school better than my old school since it is bigger and nicer. Now that we have a garage, we bought bikes and have been going out on bike rides. We’ve been walking around streets because it’s more of a neighborhood.

We still have the bakery in our old neighborhood, but we only go down there every weekend to see how it’s going. It’s been going very, very well, more money than we thought we would. It’s so big and famous! My specialty is my sugar cookies because they were so soft and creamy.

Two weeks later, we finally get on the news and go down in our suits and dresses to talk to the reporters about it.

“How come you started this bakery?” the reporters asked us.

“We started this bakery because we wanted to buy a house down south and we wanted to see how much money we could make. If this goes really well, we might start a bakery in our hometown now.”

The reporter said we just found out that  if this bakery does really, really well this bakery might be able to be all over the country. My family is so excited!!      

         My mom says, “Allison you were right about moving.”

                                      THE END

Excerpt from Leah’s Adventure

Chapter 1:

 

Leah

 

Once upon a time, there was a girl named Leah. Leah was twelve years old. She had blonde hair and blue eyes. She was a very nice girl and very smart. She loved playing football. She also loved a lot of hobbies, traditionally associated with boys. She loved to wear T-shirts and jeans. Leah lived in Orlando. She loved to go to Disney World. Leah’s favorite ride in disney world was Rock’n Roller Coaster. Leah’s favorite roller coaster was very cool. It went up and down and was very long, and went very fast. At some moments you were upside down. It was a little scary.

It was so fun!!!

Leah always loved traveling around the world. She loved to travel in lots of different places like China and Japan. But the place she most wanted to go was Africa. She always wanted to go into Africa because she loved animals. Animals were one of her favorite things to do. Leah did not have siblings, but Lea always wanted a sister. That was why she loved animals. Leah wanted to go in the jungle of Africa to see all the animals.

 

The next morning she ate breakfast. Then she went to school. She returned to school from summer vacation. There were a lot of people. She saw a guy…

Find Them

Chapter 1

Glory

 

It had been three hours before Glory realized he had lost Marvel.

Glory had been hiding from the Supreme Police, when he had noticed he was alone.  He had spent some precious time checking the trees for Marvel, but no, Marvel wasn’t there.  Glory was lost.

Glory now sat huddled in his blanket as he scanned the horizon for his brother.  The woods were silent, unfortunately.  Was running away not a good idea?  Maybe telling Tyler and Taylor first would have been better…

It was getting dark. The sun was fading quickly, and it was getting hard to see fifteen yards in any direction.  If the Supreme Police were going to kill him now, now was the time.  Glory was in a clearing with absolutely no protection to conceal him.  For all he knew, the Police was watching Glory as he struggled to get sleep.

The nocturnal animals were starting to rise from their daytime sleep.  Every now and then, Glory would jump from the sound of an owl snacking on a mouse.

“I know you’re here.”  A voice whispered from above.  Glory stayed silent, because maybe some crazy hunter was going into the woods to hunt for game.  After all, most of the people in the nearest town hunted in these woods.  That’s how the Supreme Police found him.

“Stop trying to hide, Glory.  This is a horrible place to hide.”  The voice spoke again, and this time Glory sat up and threw off his blanket.

“Who are you?”  Glory said into the night sky.  “If you’re a part of the Police, I suggest that you get out.  I have a knife.”

The person who had spoken before laughed.  “Yes, I know.  You have a small pocket knife that was your brother Tyler’s when he was six.  Although I sincerely compliment you on the way you stole that knife from your brother’s safe.  Almost as good as when I steal things.”

“Haven’t you ever heard of answering a question?”  Glory asked.  “Who are you?”

“Haven’t you ever heard of concealing your identity?”  The person asked.  Glory could now tell that it was a boy.  “You’re a feisty one.  Do you even know why I’m here?”

“I don’t care.”

“Well then, I’ll have to give you the usual,” said the boy, and out of nowhere, a tall person dressed in red jumped into the clearing and pinned Glory down.  

Glory screamed.

 

Chapter 2

Marvel

 

Marvel knew that Glory was a goner as soon as the Supreme Policemen went in pursuit of him as they split up.  He also knew that he had to go save him.  He didn’t really want to, but if Marvel came back alive and Glory was dead and Marvel told everyone why Glory was dead, he was never going to hear the end of it from Tyler and Taylor.  

It had been three hours since they had split up, and Glory was still running, with Marvel at his heels.  Marvel sighed quietly.  Glory didn’t even know that the Supreme Policemen wasn’t even near them anymore.  Glory never looked over his shoulder as he ran.  Marvel was smarter than Glory, and he knew it.

Marvel stopped running, but Glory kept going.  Marvel didn’t care.  Glory was slow, and Marvel could easily catch up to him later.  Right now, Marvel needed a place to make camp.

If you are in the woods, it shouldn’t be too hard to find a good place that has enough space to sleep in and has plenty of trees to conceal yourself.  It wasn’t too long before Marvel found the perfect place.

Marvel looked at his watch.  It was about 8:30 at night.  At 4:30 in the morning, the Supreme Police would go around the woods to check for runaways, illegals, poachers.  Naturally, Glory didn’t know that, so Marvel would have to wake up at 3:30 to go get Glory so together they could get out of the woods.  This would result in about seven hours of sleep.  This was better than yesterday, when Marvel and Glory were forced to get only two hours of sleep because of a surprise Supreme Police attack.  

Marvel took his blanket out of his pack and lay down.  He kept his eyes and ears ready in case of an emergency.  He was glad that Glory wasn’t there to annoy him while he slept.  Soon he found himself dozing off.

Four hours later, Marvel awakened to someone screaming.  His instincts drove him to stuff his blanket into his pack and run towards where the noise was.  As he ran, he realized something; the scream belonged to Glory.

Knowing this, Marvel didn’t really want to run to the scream.  But, of course, if Marvel made it back alive and Glory was dead, and Marvel told everyone why Glory was dead, he would never hear the end of it from Tyler and Taylor.

SInce Marvel was fast, he quickly reached the scream.  He tore through the grass that was the boundary for a small clearing.  Right there, in the middle of the clearing, was a boy pinning Glory to the ground.

“Oh, no,” Marvel whispered.

 

Chapter 3

Rhys

 

Glory screamed, so Rhys used his other hand to cover his mouth.  “Shut up!”  Rhys hissed.  “You’re attracting people!”

Glory’s answer came out muffled, and Rhys could hardly catch it, it was so quiet.  “My brother’s here.  He’s going to rip the snot out of you.”

Rhys turned around.  Standing at the entrance to the clearing was a boy that was younger than Rhys but almost as tall.  

Rhys turned to face Glory again.  “No problem.”

Glory’s brother (Marvel, maybe?) began to walk towards Rhys.  Rhys ran and tackled the boy, who ended up unconscious.  

Rhys brushed off the dirt and walked back over to Glory.  “Do you know who I am?”  He asked.  

“Of course I do,” Glory seethed.  “You are a disgusting, smelly, moron who likes to injure people physically.”

Rhys chuckled.  “Am I?  I am Rhys Reagen, leader of the Reagen Troop, fellow trillegal.”

“What’s a trillegal?  Is it something you made up, you big loser?”  Glory said angrily.  “I wouldn’t be surprised if you did.”

“Do you honestly not know what a trillegal is?”  Rhys asked.  “You are a trillegal.  You violate all three of the Superstition Laws, which means that you are not an only child, and you have an “r” and a “y” in your name.”  

“Liar,” said Glory.  “All those years, I haven’t been arrested or anything.  I’m normal, just like you.”

“You are foolish, oblivious, not ready for the real world,” said Rhys coldly.  “Haven’t you noticed that somewhere during the afternoon, your mother ushers you quickly back to the house?  Do you even know what I’m saying?”

“He’s right, Glory,” said someone at the entrance.  Rhys spun around and saw Marvel standing up and brushing the dirt off his clothes.  “You shouldn’t call the legend of illegal people a liar or a moron.  You should respect him.  He is the Rhys Reagen.”

“Ah, good morning, Marvel,” said Rhys.  “How are you today?”

“Quite fine, Mr. Reagen,” said Marvel.  What brings you in the woods this lovely day?”

“I recently picked up the files of you and your siblings and I realized that you were illegals.  I like illegals.  Therefore, I invite all four of you, even you, Glory,” Rhys eyed Glory, “a chance to

become a part of the Reagen Troop.”

Nobody spoke.  Not even Glory said anything.

“However,” said Rhys.  “There is a test involved with getting in.  I just might have to get the Supreme Police chase you again.”

 

Chapter 4

Marvel

 

A boy was leaning on the doorway of the Reagen Headquarters when Rhys, Marvel, Glory, Tyler, and Taylor walked in. Glory, Marvel, and Rhys had stopped and picked up Tyler and Taylor along the way.  The boy stood up.  “Rhys?  Just the usual level one?”

Rhys smiled.  “Sure.  These are the ones that we’ve been searching for earlier this year.”    

The boy grunted.  “These ones?  Do we need them?  They’re so small.”

Marvel spoke up.  “Please don’t judge us by our size.  We’re just small for our ages.  We can’t help it or anything.”

“Don’t worry, Ryan, if they pass the test, we can find a job for them to do.  They’ve lived all this time.  They’ve been on the run for a pretty long time.  Why shouldn’t they belong here with us?” said Rhys.

Ryan sighed.  “Whatever, Rhys.  I’ll get the equipment ready while you explain what’s going to happen.”  He backed out the doorway.

“Okay,” said Rhys to Ryan, and turned to Glory, Marvel, and their brother and sister, Tyler and Taylor.

“So, you guys, here’s what happening right now.  You’re taking a test to see if you’re worthy of becoming part of the Reagen Troop.  What’s going to happen is that you’ll be placed into a simulator where there will be some Supreme Police CPUs that are chasing you.  You have a knife, a bottle of water, and a small box filled with twelve crackers.  You need to escape the Policemen and stay alive.  You’ll have a hunger and thirst bar that can’t drain out.  Use your supplies to get to the big portal at the end.”

“How did you get the simulator?” Marvel’s brother Tyler asked.  “Did you buy it?”

Rhys squared his shoulders.  “I, well, I actually made it myself.  It took countless hours for me to build it, but it’s well and working, and it’s pretty high quality, too.”

“This is a simulation, right?”  Taylor asked.  “We won’t die if we screw up, right?”

“Of course not, Taylor!  You know what a simulation is, right?” said Rhys.  “Hopefully you do.  But the answer is no, if you get caught in a fire, you won’t actually burn to death or something.”

“That’s a big relief,” said Glory.  “When you were testing your simulator, did the thing threaten to kill you?”

“No, of course not.  It’s all programmed into the computer,” said Rhys.  “C’mon now, let’s go.  There’s a test you have to take, and we’re already running out of time.”

 

There was only one simulator, so Tyler, Taylor, Marvel, and Glory had to take turns doing the test.  Tyler went in first.  Rhys’s brother, Ryan, pressed some buttons, and Tyler’s test had begun.  Marvel heard a lot of crazy noises as the little room covered in black drapes shook about.  “Is this safe?”  Marvel heard Taylor ask Rhys and Ryan.  Marvel felt scared for Tyler, who most likely wasn’t ready for the test.

After a really long time, and after a lot of shaking, the simulator stopped buzzing, and Tyler came out of the simulator, covered in sweat and face very pale.

“Congratulations, Tyler Set, you passed the test with flying colors,” said Rhys.  “You are officially a part of the Reagen Troop.  You must be ready for missions, risking your neck, and enduring torture.  You are to stay here at the headquarters to begin your training.  Ray?  Take him to the gym.”  Another boy came into the room and led Tyler up a staircase.

Next it was Taylor’s turn.  Taylor also passed, and now it was Marvel’s turn.  

Marvel stepped into the simulator and found that it was all dark.  Soon a light came on, and a man’s voice came on.

“Welcome to the Reagen Troop Simulator, or the R.T.S.  Today you will be chased by some computer-programmed Supreme Policemen.  Please just act like they are real.  Use the environment around you to not only escape the Police and make it to the portal at the end, but save the dying people that you will find on your way.  You have a knife, a bottle of water, and a box filled with twelve crackers.  Just note that you might have to use your water and food to heal your patients.  Use your wits and supplies wisely, and make sure to keep your hunger and thirst bars high enough.  Good luck.”  

Soon Marvel had faded away into a hot desert filled with cactuses and things.  Marvel looked over his shoulder (something Glory would never do) and saw a large group of Supreme Police soldiers about fifty yards away running quickly at him.  

Marvel began to run in the direction of some mountains, hoping to find a hiding spot to hide in.  The soldiers were almost within shooting range, and they had drawn their guns.  Marvel kept on running and soon reached a hill leading to the top of one of the smaller mountains.  He also kept an eye out for dying people that he would have to take care of.

The soldiers seemed farther away than before, but Marvel kept at it.  He raced up the hill and climbed up the mountain.  His hunger bar was decreasing the least bit, so he ate half a cracker and took a sip of water.  But as he got to the top of the mountain, he realized something.

He was on a cliff, and he couldn’t get down.

Marvel knew he would have to jump the cliff, but he was forty feet above the ground, and if he jumped, he would definitely die and flunk the test, so he looked for something to jump onto.  

Soon, he had come up with a large nest of moss and leaves, and he had used sticks to put it together.  He crouched down low so the soldiers wouldn’t see him, and then he dropped the nest down to the ground below.  

Luckily, there was no wind, so the nest dropped down to exactly where Marvel needed it to be.  Marvel then picked where he needed to jump, muttered, “Please, don’t die” over and over again, and jumped.  

It was a great moment.  It kind of felt like he was flying and the world around him had stopped.  

Marvel fell straight into the nest.  Once he landed, he immediately got up and started running again.  The ending portal was in sight.  Marvel just kept running, and running, and running until he reached the portal and bright lights showered over him…

And then he was back in the black simulator, and the man’s voice was saying, “Thank you.  You now may exit the R.T.S.”  Marvel walked out.

“Tremendous job, Marvel,” said Rhys as Marvel walked out.  “In all of these times I’ve stood here, I’ve never seen such a good job.”

“I thought that there were going to be dying people,” said Marvel.

“Well, there is supposed to be, but you took a route where there were no dying people to interrupt you.  And the nest you made?  That was almost as good as mine.”

“Thank you,” said Marvel.  “It’s a real honor to be here.”

“Time to train!  Ray, take him away,” said Rhys, and the boy (Ray) took Marvel by the arm and led him up the staircase.

 

Chapter 5

Taylor

 

The training at the Reagen Headquarters was absolute chaos, but Taylor and Tyler and Marvel managed to get through it.  Here’s a picture of what it was like:

The gym wasn’t crowded, only filled with three or four other people, but the floor was covered with gym equipment.  Everyone there was shouting and there was a lot of sweat involved.

When Taylor had walked into the gym, a boy had walked up to her.  

“Hi,” said the boy.  “I’m Rich Reagen, Rhys’s brother.  I look after the training gym for him.”

“Hello, Rich,” Taylor replied.  “Is there some sort of routine we have to do?”

Rich shook his head.  “Each day, you have to train for four hours throughout the day.  You can split it up however you want.  You could just do four hours straight, split it into two different groups of two hours, whatever you need to do.  It’s about 2:30 in the afternoon right now, so you should start now.”

Taylor glanced around for a minute and saw Tyler at the rolling station, where you have to take a knife, roll, and get up quickly in time to slash off the head of the nearest dummy before it knocks you out.

Taylor walked over to the station and found Tyler recuperating over on the sidelines as he watched the other kids train.

“Hey, Taylor,” said Tyler.  “This is a painful experience.”

Taylor let out a small laugh.  “Are you okay?  I feel like there should be some sort of beginner tour or something.”

Tyler sighed.  “I feel kind of sick.  It’s very tiring, this training.  You should start now.”

Taylor nodded and got in line.  A boy turned around to face her and grinned.  “You scared?”  He asked.

Taylor nodded vigorously.  “It’s crazy, this station.”

“Don’t be scared,” said the boy.  “I’m Matthias Casillas.  I’m a second child.  If you fail, it’ll just push you off to the side.  They never changed the sign where it says you get knocked out, but they altered the dummies ever since I got hit and didn’t wake up for three days.”  Then he turned around and completed the exercise perfectly.  

Taylor was good at these kinds of things, so she did it with ease.  But she kept wondering, is this place dangerous?

 

At around 6:30, a bell rang and all of the people there started to file out the gym.  Suddenly Matthias was standing next to her.  “C’mon, I’ll lead you to the dining hall,” he said.  They started to walk down the staircase Taylor had walked up with Ray four hours earlier.  “You just passed the test today, didn’t you?”

Taylor nodded.  “Did you think it was hard?  The dying people were annoying.  I’m not much of a healer, but somehow I made it to the end.”

Matthias shrugged.  “I used to live in Spain before I came here.  Ever since the Superstition Laws were established, Spain has been drowned in epidemics.  My family were more on the richer side, so I got vaccinated along with the rest of my family.  Most of the other rich families just went on with their normal lives, but our family, they like to help people.  I’m a healer-in-training.  I just used the environment around me to heal the people and then I just ran to the portal.  I’m not bragging or anything, I just know how to do that stuff.”

“Do we learn how to do things like that here?”  Taylor asked as they walked into what looked like some sort of cafeteria.

Matthias nodded.  “But only during your special lessons with the Reagen family.”

Taylor turned to face Matthias.  “Thank you for taking me here.  I have to go find my brothers now.”

“It was my pleasure,” said Matthias.  “You and I can become good friends.”  He nodded goodbye and walked away.  

Tonight’s dinner was mac and cheese that Rhys had made.  It must have been really good because most of the kids in the cafeteria were getting seconds already.  

Taylor got her food and as she did so, she glimpsed Tyler and Marvel sitting and talking together alone at a table.  She walked over to their table.

“Hi, guys.  Where’s Glory?”  She said.  Glory was not in sight.

Then she realized it.  And when she looked at their faces, her guess was confirmed.

Glory hadn’t passed the test.

 

Chapter 6

Tyler

 

Tyler was absolutely sure that Taylor would burst into tears when she heard that Glory hadn’t passed the test.  Surprisingly, she didn’t.  She just sighed and sat down with her mac and cheese.  Maybe she was too tired to cry, and she’d cry later.

Rich had dropped the news on him two hours into training.  

“Um, Tyler?”  He had said to him as he was training at the PvP (player vs. player) station.  Tyler had stepped out of line.

“Hey, Rich.  What’s up?”  Tyler had said, shaking Rich’s outstretched hand.  

“Well, Rhys was busy cooking for dinner tonight, so he told me to pass along the message that Glory didn’t pass the test,”Rich had said.  “I wanted to tell you earlier, but you looked so into the training activities, which is great, that didn’t want to stop you with the bad news.”

“Can’t he take the test again?”  Tyler had asked.  “Or does he need to be invited?”

“He would need another invitation from Rhys,” Rich had said.  “And Rhys told me he knew that Glory wouldn’t pass the test and that he didn’t need a little ten-year-old.”

“I bet Ryan was furious, because he had to stand out there longer than he actually need to,” Tyler had said.  “But the age doesn’t matter really, does it?  I thought he needed young children.”

“Ryan wasn’t as mad as you think.  He just has to press the start button, correct the level knob, and make sure the thing doesn’t malfunction,” Rich had replied.  “And I think Rhys doesn’t want Glory in his army, not because of his youth, but because he naturally doesn’t like him.”

Doesn’t like him, Tyler had thought at the time.  Why wouldn’t Rhys like Glory?  He’s just annoying sometimes, that’s all.  “What would cause Rhys to not like Glory?”  Tyler had asked.  “He’s just annoying sometimes.”

“Glory called him a liar and a moron,” Rich had said.  “You wouldn’t like someone calling you that, would you?  Now, run along.  You’re wasting training time.”

 

Tyler then forced Rich to not tell Taylor.

It was 7:00 at night when people started leaving the dining hall.  Tyler copied people who were putting away their dishes and then walked out of the room.  As he left, he looked over his shoulder and saw Taylor walking and talking with this blond-haired boy.  Taylor’s friends with someone already?  He thought.  Taylor’s so much better at socializing than I am.

Directly across from the exit to the cafeteria, was a sign that was headlined, DORM ROOMS.  A couple of people were looking at it, so Tyler went up to read it.  It said:

 

Room 1:  Peter, Matthias M, Taylor, Conor, Tyler, Matthias C

Room 2: Rhys, Ryan, Ray, Marvel, Jason T, Jason C, Rich

Lights out at 9:00

 

Tyler figured out that since he and Taylor were in the same dorm room, he should follow her and that boy she was with.  Soon, he was in a large room with six cots that were spaced wide apart.  Next to each bed was a small drawer.  And a bathroom with two stalls were spaced off in a far corner, and next to it, there was a shower.

“Do we just hang out here until 9:00?”  Tyler asked a boy who was sitting on one of the beds.  “I’m new.  I just passed the test today.”  As he said this, he thought, even though Glory didn’t.

The boy nodded.  “Congratulations.  You must be Tyler, then.  I”m Matthias.  Matthias Marquis, not Matthias Casillas.  We were good friends even when we lived in Spain, so people always can’t tell which one is which.”

“Interesting.  And yes, I’m Tyler,” Tyler replied.  He noticed the bed next to Matthias Marquis’s bed was empty and unclaimed.  “May I take the bed next to you?”

Matthias nodded.  “Sure.  We could become good friends.”

“I guess,” said Tyler.

 

When it was time for lights out, Tyler lay in bed, thinking.  I wonder if I like this place.  Do I?  I don’t really know.  Will I?  Possibly.  I’ll have to find out more…

 

Chapter 7

Glory

 

Thoughts raced through Glory’s mind as Rhys’s private jet soared as they flew back to Antarctica.  It was so unfair.  Why couldn’t he get reinvited?  Rhys had said that under normal circumstances, he would’ve gotten another chance, but only he couldn’t get another chance.  Rhys didn’t know that fairness was an important thing in life to remember.

Glory sighed and put on his jacket.  The plane was landing soon, and Glory needed to get adjusted quickly to the colder climates.  “If not for Rhys, I wouldn’t have to ride this stupid plane,” Glory muttered.  “I’m going to hire someone to kill Rhys the instant I get off the plane.”

Kevin, Rhys’s non-illegal  brother, heard him and said, “There’s no need.  Most people want to kill him already, so all you need to do is send an anonymous letter to a Supreme Policeman telling him to try harder to kill him if you really need to.  But I’d advise you not to, because Rhys has saved your butt at least a hundred times without you realizing it.”

“You aren’t an illegal.  Why can’t you kill him for me?”  Glory asked.

“I may not be an illegal, but Rhys is my brother.  Would you seriously kill Marvel or Tyler or Taylor just because they might be a royal pain in the neck sometimes?”

“Is Rhys annoying to you?”  Glory asked.  “Or are you just one of those rebels who give blind devotion to Rhys Reagen, the saviour of all, who actually didn’t do anything?  Are you trying to persuade me to stop my plan?  Well, if you are, then it’s not going to work.”

“I’m not trying to talk you out of it,” said Kevin.  “You won’t be able to do it, Glory.  For one thing, you don’t know where he is.  For another, he could kill you in two seconds.  And finally, he would know you were coming.  He can see us talking right now.”

The plane landed and Kevin led Glory off the plane.  Glory began to think again.  Will Mom and Dad be mad?  Or will they be happy because at least one of their sons is home with them?  Will they say that they didn’t want me anymore?

Glory’s mother and father were standing by the stairs.  They greeted Glory with a hug.  

“Hi, Glory.  Good to see you again,” said Glory’s dad.

“Why aren’t you mad at me?”  Glory asked.  “I didn’t pass Rhys’s test.”  

“You don’t have to succeed in everything,” said Glory’s mom.  “The Rhys Reagen test is very difficult.  It’s not your fault.  You’re great just the way you are.”

Chapter 8

Taylor

 

It had been three days since she passed the test, but Taylor was just as confused as the first day.  Matthias just really made her head spin sometimes.  Did Matthias have a crush on her?  Possibly.  There were a lot of times when Taylor caught Matthias just looking dreamily at her.

At the moment, she was sitting on the roof alone with Matthias.  Matthias turned to her.  

“You know, you’re really pretty,” he said.  

“Thank you,” Taylor said.  

He took her face in both hands, and it looked like he was going to kiss her, but then he moved back.  “We’re so alike,” Matthias said.

“You have a little brother, don’t you?”  Taylor said, struggling to change the subject.  “Jason, I recall.”

“Yes, I do,” said Matthias.  “He’s a pain.  He sounds a bit like your brother Glory that you always talk about.”

“Oh, yes, Glory,” Taylor said with a little sigh.  No matter how confused about her life Matthias made her, the fact that Glory had been forced to return to the cold climates of their home in Antarctica haunted her each day.

“Did you know that my father’s a hypnotist?”  Matthias asked.  “He used to use his powers to get women to love him until he realized how horrible it was.”

“That’s horrible!  Why would you ever think that it was okay to do something like that?”  Taylor asked.  

Matthias shrugged.  “My family is powerful without them even knowing it.  My father didn’t know he was hypnotizing his girlfriends until they banded together and started a protest in the main square at home. For all I know, I could be hypnotizing you into loving me right now.  Don’t get mad.  Just tell if I am.”

Taylor thought for a minute.  Was Matthias hypnotizing her?  Is that why she felt so confused around him?  “How does it feel to get hypnotized?”  She asked.

“My father used hypnotism on me and my siblings as a punishment.  It feels like the world’s drowning out of your sight and you black out.  I don’t think I’m hypnotizing you.”

And next thing she knew, Taylor woke up.

 

Chapter 9

Rhys

 

Rhys was frustrated.  Something he was working on was going horribly wrong.

There was a double-crosser in Rhys’s Headquarters.  

Rhys had no idea who it was.  He had no leads, he had no clues, and he had no proven suspects. The only thing he knew was that someone in his troop was destroying inner defenses and barriers that Rhys and Ryan had spent hours building and putting up.  Rhys was furious.

Rhys paced the halls, wondering who it could be.  His top suspect was his latest addition, Marvel Set, but that kid looked only about twelve, so it might not be him.  His next guess would be Tyler Set, and it seemed more realistic than Marvel, since Tyler was fifteen and was pretty strong.

Rhys thought about screaming at the top of his lungs, but then he remembered it was ten o’clock and that people were sleeping.  

“Why,” Rhys said through gritted teeth, “Why can’t I figure this thing out?”

 

The next morning, Rhys decided to interrogate who he thought was a traitor.  He knew he couldn’t have a traitor in his army if he was going to be the leader of the rebels.  Rhys shuddered as he remembered a time when he added an adult named Peter Pevensie into the group for a couple of weeks.  But Rhys had kicked him out after a while because Rhys’s brother Peter had informed him that the other Peter’s dream was to betray someone or something.  

Breakfast was at 7:00, and all of the kids were sleeping.  Rhys snuck into Room 1, but it just happened to be that Tyler’s bed was empty.  That meant that he was probably in the gym, but it was 5:30 in the morning.  Who would ever go train that early in the morning?  

It was extremely dark, and Rhys couldn’t find the light switch, so Rhys had to use the walls to get around.  Slowly but surely, Rhys made it up the staircase to the gym.  The light was on, and Tyler was working out.

“I know what you’re here for,” said Tyler.  He didn’t look at Rhys.  “I’m not a traitor or anything like that.  I’m in the gym early right now because I’m loyal to you, and I’m putting in my commitment.”

Rhys’s accusations swallowed in his throat.  Tyler was right.  He wouldn’t have gone out there that morning if he didn’t actually want to be there.  But then again, to draw attention away from himself that he was the double-crosser.

“If you really want to know who it is, I can tell you,” said Tyler.

“Who?”  

Tyler raised his finger and pointed across the room and around the corner.  Rhys looked and saw a blond haired boy with headphones tapping out a message on a computer.  Rhys instantly knew what that boy was doing.  

It was Matthias Casillas.

 

END OF BOOK ONE

Emily and the Land of Exbow

 

Emily was walking through her front yard and humming absentmindedly until she tripped on a stone.

“That’s funny- I never noticed that stone before,” said Emily.

She slowly picked up the stone and angled it at the sunlight so that she could see it better. It had a gray sheen that was almost white and it sparkled several colors of the rainbow. Suddenly a rainbow sprang from the stone. In surprise Emily dropped the stone, and the rainbow disappeared.

“What was that?“ Emily said to herself.

Emily picked up the stone again, and the rainbow returned. But this time, Emily touched the rainbow carefully, and to her surprise, it was solid. Then, not knowing why she was doing it, she slid onto the rainbow. Then suddenly, a strong wind whisked her away. Terrified, Emily clutched on to the rainbow as she slid on it. It winded around and around and around like a slide in a playground, and then there was a sudden up. She stopped at the top for a moment to look down at the beautiful scenery of the buildings lining up and the rolling green hills. Then suddenly, she went down fast like a rollercoaster, and the kind of thrill in her stomach was the same kind of terror and thrill in your stomach. Then, she went down so near, her feet grazed the top of a roof. And then up again into a white cloud (they’re much more cold and wet than you think they are). Down down down down, faster than she had ever gone before, so fast she wasn’t able to give the breath to scream. She saw, coming up, a gray stone wall. How do I stop it? How do I stop it? How do I stop it? Was all Emily thought right before she crashed into the wall. But it wasn’t a regular wall. She went through it and spiraled in a white light, her body morphing and reforming. With a bright flash she hit solid ground.

Emily groaned as she stood up, and as she looked around, she noticed that she wasn’t in Westchester. Emily also felt like she wasn’t in any other place on the planet earth. Emily felt like she was in a different universe. As Emily looked around she noticed that this planet was much brighter than earth and much less polluted than the cities Emily had visited. The air was fresher and horses that seemed to glow unnaturally grazed in the fields ahead of her. A stream of fresh water up to Emily’s knees rolled past her. She heard the crashing of a waterfall below. The fish in this land were very different. It seemed they had both lungs and gills. All of them sparkled in three different colors, and each of them had a pair of underwater wings that could be used for both sky and water. Some of the fields were strangely flat, and some were rolls and rolls of green hills. Tucked in each hill were little towns, looking so small from where Emily was. But then, far away, the valleys turned dark and shriveled, as if darkness had taken over that place. Another weird thing was that instead of birds flying around in the daylight, there were bats instead, except the bats’ voices sounded exactly like the chirp of a bird. One thing that stuck out most to Emily was a valley that seemed to go on forever like it was endless, with the same flowers blossoming, the same clouds moving, and the same bats chirping. The endless valley seemed strangely too good.

“Strange,” Emily said.

But just as Emily was taking this new world in, a big beefy hand grabbed her by the shoulder. Emily started to scream, but another beefy hand wrapped an old piece of cloth around her mouth and tightly knotted it. Both hands were wrinkled, green, and hairy.

“QUIET,” said a gruff voice.

And she came face to face with a what looked like an ogre from a children’s story. Its skin was green and it had boils all over its body with bloodshot eyes, a pointy nose, stringy hair, and bits of mold around its body. It was plain ugly. All it wore was a dirty brown cloth that must have had a color a long time ago, but had gotten much too dirty for appearing. Emily also noticed that there must have been more of the cloth draped around his body, but it had rotted away with time. Then she was thrown into a smelly sack . After that Emily forgot what happened next because she fell into a restless sleep.

 

        When Emily awoke she found herself in a cold cave surrounded by ugly ogres and all of them grabbing for her and moaning and saying things like:

“I get to eat her brain- that tastes the best.”

“No no no, I get to eat her brain!“

“Can I eat her toe nails?”

“Leave the eyeballs to me.”

Emily crawled away from the crowd of ogres, her stomach turning around and around as the ogres got closer and closer, until she was cornered. Then, one orge that looked like the leader reached forward for Emily with one grubby hand. Emily could not help herself with all the fear building up inside her, and she screamed. The ogre reaching for her took his hand away as if surprised. This gave Emily time to think, and the first thing that Emily thought was RUN! And Emily ran and ran and ran. She ran past the leader ogre and Emily dodged the other ogres reaching for her. Then one daring ogre ran in front of her as she was running, and, not having time to think, Emily dove under the tough looking ogre.

“Oooohhhh!” groaned the ogre.

“After our food!” roared the leader, “or you get no food.”

Emily quickly scurried over the boulder blocking her path. There was a wall made of stalagmites that was blocking her path, and the only way to get through was by going up and over it. Not wasting any time, Emily jumped up on it and started climbing, but a small child ogre grabbed her foot.

“I got food!” he cried.

Emily kicked him in the face, but instantly felt bad as he started crying.

“Sorry!” she said as she started climbing higher and higher.

She could feel the ogres huffing and puffing as they climbed up the stalagmites. One more ogre jumped on. Emily heard a creaking sound, and one of the ogres on the ground yelled, “Too much weight!” and the stalagmites crashed to the ground. As they crashed down with Emily at the top, her leg fell forward, scraping a stalagmite and making a small wound on her leg. Biting back her pain and her fear, Emily kept running. There was one boulder blocking the entrance.

“Haha!” roared an ogre, “Our food is blocked.”  

But what the ogres didn’t know was that Emily or any other human could easily squeeze past the sides of the boulder. So Emily pressed herself against the wall and squeezed past the boulder into the cold night air.

Emily looked around. The first thing she saw was a structure that looked like a house. She started running/limping toward it until she heard a big BOOM. She turned around and saw the ogres had pushed down the boulder and were filing out. Turning on her heel, she started running as fast as she could to the structure. At last she got there and it turned out it was a stable.

“Must be an abandoned stable,” muttered Emily to herself.

Slowly, she opened the door as it creaked open. Then, with one last look behind her, she closed the door. Emily walked around cautiously until she found an old patch of hay. Right before she went to bed, Emily washed her wound in the stream. Then, she snuggled down deep inside the hay. Her dreams were filled with ogres grabbing, screeching, groaning, wanting to eat her.

And the leader saying in a too-sweet voice, “Come to me, Emily. Come to me.” And reaching his gnarled hand toward her. Emily awoke many times with cold sweat.

 

Sunlight streamed into the stables, making the hay Emily was sleeping in seem pure gold. Emily blinked a few times, and she felt something soft nuzzling her cheek.

“Get away, get away! Stop it ogre,” mumbled Emily.

Then, something licked her cheek.

“What?” Emily said, and this time fully opened her eyes.

To her surprise, there was a white stallion nuzzling her cheek. Emily blinked a few times, and she got up, groaning as she dragged her leg behind her.

“I guess this isn’t a completely abandoned stable,” she whispered into the stallion’s ear. “You’re a beauty,” she said, stroking the stallion’s mane.

It was a pure white horse with a glossy white coat and a thick bushy tail. With big chocolatey brown eyes. And as Emily was stroking its back, she noticed something different. It had huge white wings folded up by its sides, shining with a silvery sheen.

“A pegasus,” Emily whispered, amazed.

She stared into the horse’s eyes for a while, and finally she broke from the phase.

“Well, I better go,” Emily said, and she peeked at the door.

The field looked deserted.

“Good,” she said, and she started out on her way.

 

Emily had been walking for a while, and her leg had turned a sickly green color. The scenery hadn’t changed at all. She was still in what seemed like a neverending field of green grasses and small streams. Flowers bloomed brightly in the morning sun. Suddenly, she heard the sound of a horse trotting behind her. She turned to look and saw the beautiful stallion had been following her.

“What are you doing here?” she questioned.

It gently nuzzled her chin.

“Well I guess you’re gonna stay with me, so I better name you,” Emily said, “I think Snowy will be good, since it suits your pure white color.”

Suddenly, the stallion stretched out its big, white wings as if stretching his arms. Emily turned and started walking again, but the stallion stayed there.

Emily turned around and asked, “Aren’t you coming with me?”

The stallion held his head high and lifted his wings even higher.

“You want me to go on your back?” she asked.

The stallion nodded his head. He got down on his knees, and Emily jumped onto him.

“Ow!” she flinched as the pain in her leg intensified.

Snowy put her down and started licking her wound.

“Oh don’t do that, Snowy. It’ll probably make it worse!”

But to her surprise, when Snowy was done her wound had completely healed.

“You have healing powers?” Emily said, shaking her head. “This place really is crazy.”

Emily jumped on again. Then Snowy held his wings out and started running as fast as his legs could carry him. Faster and faster and faster, until they were lifted into the air. Emily clung onto his neck and looked down at the valley. It looked beautiful from up here. And she floated past clouds in the blue sky.

 

It was nighttime and they were still flying past the stars and the moon. Emily grew drowsy soon, and slept comfortably on Snowy’s back as he landed gently on the grass. Then, he too nuzzled up beside her and closed his eyes. But he opened his eyes quickly, sensing the danger around them, and instead stood pacing around Emily, protecting her all night.

 

Snowy neighed and awoke Emily.

“What is it?” Emily said, and she opened her eyes.

As she stood up, she saw a tall, lean boy with a red mop of hair, brilliant blue eyes, and a lopsided grin. Snowy protectively stood in front of Emily, separating her from the redheaded boy.

“Who are you?” Emily said with a tinge of cautiousness to her voice.

“My name’s Jack,” he said, spit on his hand, and put his hand out to her.

“Um hi?” she said, and waved her hand shyly, NOT accepting his hand.

Jack, getting the message, quickly put his hand away.

“Now we better be going,” he said and jumped onto Snowy.

“What do you mean?” Emily asked.

“A long time ago,” he said, “a prophecy was made about a girl from the human world who would stop the ogres from eating the innocent people in our towns. “

“Me?” Emily said, her eyes widening. “But I almost got eaten myself!”

“Eaten or not, you’re the girl from the prophecy. But no time to chat. Come on. Quickly!” Jack said, lifting her onto Snowy.

“Away from here! Wherever we are,” said Emily.

 

Finally, Snowy landed for a break in the endless field.

“Do you want something to eat?” said Jack.

“I’m okay,” said Emily, but her stomach growled in protest.

“Seems like you’re hungry to me,” said Jack.

“You win. I’ll take a little bit,” said Emily

He handed her a fresh cob of corn. Emily munched on it happily.

“So tell me more about the prophecy,” Emily said as she munched on her corn.

“Well, it is really simple, the prophecy. It was made 16 years ago when I was just a wee baby. It was made by an old wizard whose name is long forgotten. One day he fell into a phase that lasted for days. He wouldn’t eat or drink for days, and all he did was stare into his magical orb that held all his powers. While he was staring at this orb, evil spirits seemed to be dancing outside of his workshop, taunting him, but he listened to none of them.  And when he got out of his phase, he was never the same, but still he did have some good in him and went straight to the king of Exbow.

“The king of Exbow?” Emily asked.

Jack looked at Emily like she was some evil creature that disgusted him. “You don’t know the king of Exbow? The king of Exbow is a fair leader who rules this land. King Exbow at once made the prophecy official, so that every knows about the prophecy. It is said that a human girl riding a pure white stallion with wings is to defeat the ogres terrorizing the innocent people.”

“WOW, this place really is magical,” said Emily, amazed.

“That’s the only thing that makes us different from your world- everything here is magical. Even you are, when you are in this world. Every one of us has a power here. Now, I would like to know what yours is,” said Jack, eyeing her suspiciously, with one eyebrow raised.

“W-what? I h-have no idea what y-you are talking about,” Emily stuttered as Jack’s eyes bore deep down into her. It was as if he could read her mind, and it made an uneasy feeling in the air.

“Let me show you what I’m talking about,” said Jack with a touch of distrust in his voice.

Emily watched Jack as he closed his eyes, then suddenly, he disappeared. And a moment later, he was right next to her.

“What was that?” said Emily, staring into space.

“My power is that I can teleport myself.”

“This place is more like Superhero land than fairytale land,” Emily said.

`I can even do that with other people,” he said, “I’ll do it with you.”

“No no no no no,” Emily said.

“Too bad,” said Jack with a slight grin.

Emily felt a warm tingling go up from her spine into her head till it felt like her head was floating with warm liquid.

When Emily opened her eyes she was far behind in the stables where she had met Snowy. She heard the sound of an ogre’s grumbling right outside the stable.

It said, “She’s wounded. She can’t get far.”

Emily crept down and hid, but one ogre saw her.

“It’s her!” he growled.

“What are you talking about?” said the ogres, “We checked ten times remember? Last time it was a bat.”

“Well if you’re not gonna check, I’m going to,” said the ogre, and he shoved the door open.

“Jaaack, now would be a good time to leave,” Emily said, hoping Jack would hear even though he was miles away.

Just as the ogre was reaching to grab for her, Jack appeared right next to Emily.

“Let’s go!” said Jack, and tightly gripped her hand.

The tingling sensation was back, but Emily didn’t notice it as she saw the ogre’s eyes widen as he reached a little bit farther.

“Alert the ogres more up west!” he yelled.

Then, they reappeared in the field with Snowy.

“How did you do that?” she said.

“Magic,” Jack answered.

“But now they know we’re up west,” said Emily.

“Probably not too up west. Nothing to be worried about,” said Jack, patting her gently on the back.

Suddenly, a rumbling was heard, and when Emily and Jack looked up a rampage of ogres was thundering toward them.

“Yeah. Nothing to be worried about,” said Emily.

“Run! Hide!” Jack cried.

He scurried behind a tree. Emily looked around for a hiding place, but she saw nothing to hide behind. Emily saw Jack beckoning her from behind the tree, but she knew they would be too big together, and it would only put him in more danger. Emily shook her head at Jack and grimaced. Emily started running, but it was too late, an ogre had already grabbed her by the shirt.

“Get off me!” Emily cried.

Jack jumped out of his hiding place.

“Hey! Nananana booboo!” he yelled to the ogres more behind.

One of them leapt out and grabbed Jack.

“Aaawww,” whined the ogre, “He’s not the girl.”

He dropped him roughly on the ground,

“Ugh,” Jack groaned as he landed hard on his backside.

“You stupid murderer,” Emily said, not thinking.

“Enough!” cried the ogre, and he bopped her on the head so hard that Emily felt the vibrations through her whole body.

All the blood in her body went to her head.

Emily felt dizzy and the images in her head blurred.

Emily forced her eyes open and saw the blurred features of a orge.

A cold laugh filled the field, and everything went black.

 

When Emily woke up, she found herself in what seemed like a jail cave. There was some kind of hardened liquid as the bars around her. The ground was cold, but Emily could feel the pulsing of the earth beneath her hand. The jail was dimly lit with one torch. A bowl of mushy, green stuff that looked disgusting was by her feet.

“I need to get out of here,” whispered Emily.

She tried breaking the liquid bars, but they were surprisingly hard. Emily heard a cry and looked up. There were bats hanging from the ceiling in her cell.

 

Jack crept out of his hiding place. He saw Snowy easily walking toward him.

“Emily, come on out!” he said.

Snowy pointed his head toward where the ogres had headed.

“Oh no,” said Jack. “Come on,” he said turning his head to Snowy. “Their traps are still on the ground we’ve got a long journey ahead of us.”

 

Emily heard a moaning in the cell next door. “Who’s there?” said Emily, her voice echoing in the hallway.

“Meeeee,” moaned the voice.

“Show yourself,” said Emily.

“It’s just meeee,” moaned the voice again, and this time, it sounded like it was right behind Emily.

“What?” said Emily, and she whipped around. In front of her, she saw something light and wispy. Emily put her hand through it, and it felt like she was going through cold air. “You’re a ghost?” she said.

“No, a spirit,” said the spirit.

“Okay, spirit. What were you before?” said Emily.

“I was a girl like you,” the spirit said.

Emily looked at the spirit. “Not meaning to be rude, but you look a little bit more like a cloud.”

“I cannot be in my boooooooody,” the spirit said. “for I died a long time ago. My boooooody is in the cell next door if you want to see it.”

“Um, no thank you,” said Emily. “But I would like to know what your name was as a girl.”

“I forgooooot, it was such a long time ago,” said the spirit.

“One more question, if it doesn’t bother you too much,” said Emily, “How do I get out of here? I mean, you seem experienced enough.”

“You have to unlock your inner power,” said the spirit, and it started to dissolve into thin air.

“Wait! What do you mean, ‘unlock your inner power’? What? No! Don’t leave!” Emily said.

But the spirit was already gone.

“Thanks for the help!” said Emily, a little bit sarcastically.

“Unlock your inner power? What does that even mean?” said Emily. “Unlock your inner power? Unlock your inner power?” Emily kept saying to herself. “Unlock your inner – POWER! Of course! My power that Jack was talking about, like some kind of psycho!”

“But how do I do that?” said Emily. “Oh, great,” said Emily, throwing her hands up in the air. “I know what to do but I don’t know how to do it.”

Emily sat on the cold floor, sulking. Soon her thoughts drifted off to how mean the ogres had been to the innocent people in their towns. All their bloody hatred was boiling inside of her, making her head hurt and her cheeks red.

“I am getting out of here no matter what, and I’m going to say what I want to say to those jerko ogres,” Emily said, grinding her teeth.

With all this anger building up inside her she felt the same tingling sensation up her back. The same tingling sensation when Jack had unleashed his powers. And, for some reason, she looked at the bars and stared deep down at them. She imagined the bars breaking apart by her command, and then she heard a cracking sound and looked up. The bars looked like they had been pried apart and Emily easily stepped through. With her newfound power, Emily found confidence in herself and started walking toward the door. Until she came across a metal bolted door in front of her. Knowing how to use her power, she used her power to open the door. An ogre guard was standing in front of her. He raised his hand to punch her on the head again. But she moved his metal helmet above his head and dropped it on him before he could move a muscle.

“Ooohhhhhhh!” the ogre screamed.

Emily turned on her heel and started running. Suddenly, she saw something that didn’t look like an ogre with a red mop of hair and its back turned from her. Must be a really short ogre, Emily thought. And she lifted a torch until it was touching the ogre’s fingers.

“Hey! Ow!” said the ogre, and he turned to face her.

“Jack?” Emily said.

“Oh my gosh, Jack! You’re here?” said Emily, and she flew into his arms.

“Come on, Emily! We have to go now!” said Jack as he sucked on his fingers.

“Sorry about the torch,” said Emily as they started running. “I thought you were an ogre.”

“Did you think I looked like one?” said Jack.

“Hey,” said Jack, a new realization coming to him. “You found your power! But … it’s fire?” said Jack, looking confused.

“No! said Emily with a laugh. “I can move things without touching them. Hey, where’s Snowy?”

“Well, he’s supposed to wait outdoors to fly away with us, but I don’t think he really liked the idea of doing that.” Suddenly they heard a crash, and Snowy leaped through the window.

“Snowy!” said Emily and Emily ran forward, about to embrace the stallion, not knowing that a big ogre was right behind her with a pan raised above her head. Snowy and Jack both shoved her out of the way, at the same time making them tumbling into a ball together with Jack sprawled on top of Snowy.

“Run!” Jack cried, as he and Snowy got up.

And Emily ran. Emily turned to see Snowy and Jack fighting against the ogres, but she could also see that they were outnumbered. Ogres kept blocking her path, but she kept burning them with torches. Suddenly Emily saw light and had hope – until the leader ogre grabbed her by the neck. He squeezed and Emily started coughing as he choked her. Without being able to focus Emily couldn’t move things.

“Emily!” cried Jack, and he threw her a dagger that he had disarmed from an ogre.

But right after that, an ogre tackled him to the ground. And poor Snowy had cuts covering his body. Without thinking, Emily took the dagger and stabbed it into the leader ogre’s eye.

“Aaaaahhh!” the ogre screamed. And he dropped Emily on the floor.

Emily watched in horror as he evaporated into the air. All the ogres turned to her in horror, but when Emily thought they were about to attack her, instead they bowed down deep to her.

“Am I missing something?” said Emily, looking around, confused.

One of the toughest looking ogres said to her in a deep, gruff voice, “Whoever kills the leader of our tribe is the new leader. What must we do for our new queen?”

“Um,” Emily said, about to tell them to stop eating innocent people, but then she heard Jack coughing, with a cut on his forehead, and Snowy whimpering on the ground.

“Help my friends,” Emily said.

Soon Jack and Snowy were all healed by a magical antidote that only the ogres knew. Emily had ordered the ogres not to eat innocent people from neighboring towns, and now the ogres ate good meals of berries, nuts, fruits, and the occasional deer. Emily also didn’t forget her debt to the spirit, and had the spirit set free. Emily did feel some happiness as she watched the spirit spiraling out and whooping with joy. But as one of her ogre servants handed her an outfit to wear that day (a white blouse and jeans), Emily said, “I can’t stay here. I have to go back to my home.”

“You cannot,” said the gruff voice of her servant, “Now that you are our queen you cannot leave us without us having a new ruler.”

But already an idea was forming in Emily’s head.

 

The next day an announcement had been made that Jack would be the next king of the ogres.

“And from now on,” said Emily, “instead of killing each other to be leader, you will choose who will be the leader. But I have to leave.”

Jack handed her a stone that looked exactly like the one in her backyard.

“It’s your only way back home,” he said with a slight bit of sorrow in his eyes.

So then, they went out into the great field. As Emily held up the stone to the sun for a moment she paused.

“Goodbye,” she said to the ogres.

She and Jack hugged, and she nuzzled Snowy and gave him a sugar cube. Then Emily held up the stone to the sky and the rainbow sprang up. Emily slid on it and the wind whisked her away.

“I’ll be back!” Emily cried as the wall came up.

Emily hit it with confidence, and she went through the portal back into her backyard. Holding the stone tightly in her hands, she heard her mother call her.

“Emily! Dinnertime!”

“Coming!” Emily said, and she slipped the rock into her pocket.

 

THE END

 

Short story about snowy

 

Once the mythical animal, Pegasus, had a small colt, but sadly the colt was weak and sickly. One day, the colt went out on a walk alone, and there was a earthquake. The colt was badly hurt and almost died. The only way for the delicate colt to live was for it to go to a different planet, for that was the only planet that had the medicine. It was called Exbow. But that meant never coming back home for the colt, because once the colt went to the new world, he could never come back. The colt grew big and strong with the good raising of a humble farmer, but when the young stallion bothered the other farmers, the farmer was forced to let the stallion into the wild. Luckily, he survived and became Snowy years later.

Different Girl

 

Chapter 1

Samantha was bored, bored waiting to get her test knowing that she failed and she knew she was going to be in trouble. She had not studied even though she had two weeks to study but did not study.

“Samantha.” Uh oh that was the teacher. Samantha went up to the teacher’s desk and got her test. In black letters it said 73%. She was in trouble big trouble. RIIIIIIING

Chapter 2

CLICK

Samantha opened the door and called, “I’m home.” Her mother rushed down the stairs all dressed up in a dress. “Mom why are you all dressed up?”

Mom said “I have found a man I like. He can be your father.” Now you can tell that Samantha’s father died. Luckily for Samantha her mother forgot about the test… for now.

Samantha raced into the kitchen grabbed a snack and a black marker and raced upstairs. Once she was upstairs she closed the door and ate her snack. Then took out the paper and uncapped the pen, scriggled out the 73%, and wrote 100%. Samantha stuffed the paper in her bookbag and went to bed.

Chapter 3

When Samantha woke up she found her mother and this stranger man which Samantha thought was the man her mom went out with. Samantha got breakfast and went to get her backpack and on the way out of her house to school the test paper fell out and Samantha did not realize it.

At school, a girl was handing out invitations for a party at her mansion. Samantha walked up to the girl and held her hand out.

The girl said, “What do you want? I did not invite you because you are weird. Oh and everybody else is invited but you.” Samantha turned away and walked to her desk.

Chapter 4

Samantha trudged home and opened the door and walked in to find her mother with a frown and holding her test paper and her phone which said Samantha=73% because the teacher had sent the test grade. The paper said 73% scrapped out and a 100% instead. Her mother grounded her. Samantha had to study that was her punishment. She ate dinner took a shower and went to bed. Samantha woke up earlier to go to her cousin’s house across the street. Samantha’s cousin is usually awake at 5:00 to get ready for work, which starts at 8:30. Samantha told Martha about her problem. Martha just listened.

Chapter 5

Her cousin Martha said she would talk to Samantha’s mom about how Samantha didn’t want to get in trouble but wanted a good grade. Samantha went to school happy and got good grades at school and impressed her mom. School finished and Samantha got good grades and over the summer Samantha’s mom got married and Samantha, her mom, and new father were happy. Samantha’s new father surprised Samantha by bringing her to the movies on her birthday. Samantha liked the new guy.

THE END

DJ Fly

One day, DJ Fly was walking to work through the noise of the traffic. He was working at a teacher but he was really a superhero. DJ Fly’s mom and dad were superheroes and sometimes they helped DJ Fly but usually they didn’t because they wanted DJ Fly to be a real superhero like them. DJ Fly was only a junior superhero. They all had secret identities. The mom and dad lived together in California and DJ Fly lived in the sewers in New York City. He fought Ground Man and Air Man. Even if two hundred buildings fell on them, they were still alive. Sometimes DJ Fly wished he could be normal because sometimes when he fought one hundred bad guys he became really exhausted.

When DJ Fly was walking to work, he saw something weird. The ground was shaking. When he saw the ground shaking, he remembered that happened yesterday, too. The ground was shaking because the bad guy, Ground Man, was underground, using a gadget to make it shake. Ground Man and DJ Fly used to like each other, but then they didn’t. They were mad at each other because a month ago Ground Man stole money from DJ Fly’s bank since he didn’t have any more money left. That night a month ago, he was going to steal from a different bank that Ground Man didn’t like, but by accident he went to DJ Fly’s bank and stole the money. DJ Fly was mad.

DJ Fly wanted to teach his students because it was the last day of school. Ground Man was stopping him from getting to school because he didn’t want him to see the students. Ground Man didn’t want him to see the students because he wanted to get DJ Fly’s superpowers: strength, lasers, and flying. Ground Man was jealous – he wanted to fly, but he can only make the ground shake. He had always been jealous. Even on DJ Fly’s birthday he said, “Could I have your powers?”

DJ Fly flew to the school but, after school started, DJ Fly came back and the ground was shaking. Ground Man was disguising himself as DJ Fly’s friend, Dino. DJ Fly went underground to fight Ground Man. When he got there, he was surprised to see Dino. Immediately, DJ Fly realized that this wasn’t Dino because his costume was falling off. There was an error in Ground Man’s plan. Ground Man got confused. He thought he was in his own underground lair, but he was really in DJ Fly’s lair, so it was easy for DJ Fly to trap him. When they both got in DJ Fly’s lair the doors locked. DJ Fly went out and locked Ground Man inside with no food. Then Ground Man found a little food but it was actually covered in something. The food was actually a jewel with some of DJ Fly’s powers in it!

Then Ground Man found a key because of the superpowers, so the key opened the locked doors to get out. When Ground Man got out, he opened another locked door, and then he finally unlocked the door to get out of the lair. When Ground Man got out of the lair he realized that DJ Fly tricked him. The jewel was actually Ground Man’s power! So then Ground Man’s power, when he performed it, made the ground shake, and he fell inside DJ Fly’s lair and he got trapped on purpose, by a net! He did it to himself!

When Ground Man got trapped, he had a plan. He got out of the trap and the net fell on DJ Fly. But then DJ Fly realized he could use one of his superpowers! Lasers! So DJ Fly used his lasers to break the net open.

Now that he broke the net open, he realized he hadn’t seen his Mom and Dad for five years. He started to miss his Mom and Dad. He tried to visit them every day by flying or going underwater. But every time he tried, a crime would start and he would have to come to the rescue.

So he flew to California. This time, he was successful in seeing his parents, but he could only stay for a year. This was because the last day of the year he spent with his parents – June 1 – they told him that Air Man and Ground Man were actually robots they made to teach him how to be a real superhero. So DJ Fly was surprised. He was even more surprised when he came home to the lair and saw Air Man and Ground Man frozen still. DJ Fly’s parents did this for him so he could break Air Man and Ground Man up into little pieces and he could be a real superhero. Regular superheroes just help people but real superheroes fight. And so he became a real superhero.

 

Dear Miss Fairy Godmother Sincerely, Her Majesty.

Dear Miss Fairy Godmother

Sincerely, Her Majesty

June 11, 1982.

Early in the morning, just at the crack of dawn, I got out of bed. I walked into the attic to work on the inventory. My mother started an inventory of our house, she says that with the baby on the way we need to throw out whatever we don’t use. She also says our house is unnecessarily messy. I on the other hand don’t, our house is perfect, it’s cosy. I want one thing right now, I want to take a chill pill. However if you know my family you would know that my mom is boss no matter what anyone else thinks. The thing is that you don’t, so let me introduce myself.

I am April Joplin, I don’t know how you got this diary but now it is yours. I read a lot of books, they have given me inspiration. One of those sparks of inspiration in my life was to write a diary. A diary so people of the future will know how life is now. Other than that I would like to tell you more about my life. I have two younger brothers named Levi and Alex, I also have another sibling on the way; I want it to be a girl. We live in a neighborhood called Quail Hill. There is an apartment complex, houses, a shopping center with a lot of restaurants and an elementary school which I currently go to. By the way I am 9 years old, Levi is 6, and Alex is 4. Our family owns a horse stable where people can have lessons. Therefore all of us are pretty attached to horses. Actually horses and steam engines are our main modes of transportation. I think I’ve introduced myself enough, let’s get on with the story.  

So I go upstairs to the attic and started to go through them. Soon I had finished the shelves, now time for the boxes. I started moving paintings and frames around and my eyes fell upon a chest. I pulled it towards me. I found the lever and opened it. Had I not known that magic was not real I could have sworn a rush of magic went straight through my heart. Unfortunately, I know magic is not real. So I decided to kick out those magical feelings and get back to work. I peered inside, and inside were a lot of envelopes that were unsealed. I pulled each one out and when I was done I started to read them. The first one I read said this:

Dear Miss Fairy Godmother,                       December 22 05M

It has come to my attention that you live in a place unlike any other. I would wish to visit this place. If you could kindly reply as soon as possible, saying that transportation arrangements need to be made.

Sincerely,

Her Majesty

Well that’s a very weird letter, I said to myself, I wonder what the next one says? So I opened the next one and this one said.

Dear Her Majesty,                                Jan. 1st 06M  

Unfortunately as the fairy-godmother I cannot have any strangers enter my kingdom. To make sure the decision I have made is fair I have discussed this problem with the fairy council and they also agree that my final decision should be NO! Another thing I would like to ask is how did you come to know about my kingdom? As you should know being the Fairy Godmother is somewhat like being a queen and it is my number one priority to make sure the citizens feel comfortable and safe.

Sincerely,

Miss Fairy Godmother

So let me get this straight, there is a queen who wants to visit a Fairy Godmother’s kingdom, but the Fairy Godmother does not want to let the Queen in and neither does this Fairy Council thing-a-ma-bob. Also what is up with that date, on the first letter it said Dec. 22 05M and on the second one it said 06M. When it comes to modern times I only know 2 measures that start with M: minute and millennium. Maybe it’s one of them? My curiosity got the best of me and I decided to read the next one, the next one was from the Queen to the Fairy Godmother. It said:

Dear Miss Fairy Godmother,                                     Jan. 25 06M

I expected you to be a little bit more kind and considerate of the fact that I asked you first. Since you have been so rude I shall no longer ask for permission instead I will barge in. Give me the directions and I will come and give a gift, something which we like to call a PUNCH. And if you dare not give me the directions then it shall be off with your head. That brings me to the second matter: Where did I come to know about the kingdom. I know because I know, I know everything and it is none of you business anyway.

Sincerely,

Her Majesty

Now the fairy had to have a lot problems with that letter; it was not at all constructive. And let me be honest with you, I normally don’t pick sides but this time I agreed with the Fairy Godmother. Suddenly I heard Mom calling from downstairs. I put all the letters in the box and rushed down stairs to help her with breakfast.\

After breakfast Mom told be to go back to the attic and continue the inventory while she tackled the second floor. So, I said to myself, I won’t get caught reading the letters anymore because mom will think I’m doing the inventory, which I am not ever going to do again in my life!!!

At the attic again I dumped out all the letters and kept aside the ones I had already read. I picked up one and it said:

Dear Her Majesty,                                      Feb. 2nd 06M

For your information I was considerate of the fact that you asked for permission, that is why I also asked the Fairy Council for advice on the matter. Secondly if you do not tell me where you found out about this kingdom from, then I shall not directly hand you the directions. Enclosed with this letter is a loose leaf that has a code. Decode it and you have the directions. Also if you ask me or anyone for help I shall be off with your head. And remember if you decode the directions, you can come to my kingdom.

Sincerly,

Miss Fairy Godmother

Wait, what??? First the Fairy Godmother says her final answer was no, and now she says yes only if the Queen decodes the directions. This is confusing, but I don’t want to set high expectations. What if the Queen never decoded them? So I pulled out the loose leaf paper here was what was written:

మీరు చెక్క చేరుకోవడానికి వరకు వెస్ట్ వెళ్ళండి. తిరగండి మరియు రెండవ ఆపిల్ చెట్టు. మీరు చూడండి ఐదవ ప్లం మీద అడుగు. లోపల దశలను డౌన్ వెళ్ళండి. మూడవ స్థాయి వద్ద ఆగుతాయి. కుడి చెయ్యి అప్పుడు కుడి అప్పుడు ఎడమ అప్పుడు వదిలి. హాలులో లోకి వెళ్లి ఏడవ తలుపు మారిపోయాయి. Gat లోపల వెళ్లి మీరు చూడండి మొదటి సైన్ వద్ద ఎడమ వైపు తిరగండి. ఇప్పుడు మీరు నా రాజ్యంలో గేట్ చూస్తారు LandiniaMagina

I thought to myself, I have seen this text before, it was used in the South of India in war zones. I learned all about it in school. I even have a conversion chart. So let me convert it and I will get the directions. Here is what I found out:

Go west until you reach the wood. Turn at the second apple tree. Step on the fifth plum you see. Go down the steps inside. Stop at the third level. Turn left then right then right then left. Go into the hallway and turn into the seventh door. Go inside the gate and turn left at the first sign you see. Now you will see the gate to my kingdom Landinia Magina.

I have to admit those were some pretty complex directions. But I also am starting to wonder why were these letters in my attic. Was I related to the Queen or even the Fairy Godmother? I wanted to ask my mom badly but I didn’t want her to know about the letters. So what should I do???? I decided to read the next letter, so I opened it but to my surprise there was no letter inside. Instead was another code and it looked like this:

Gdy dojdziesz do bramy trzeba jechać prosto, gdy widzisz Gemini będzie na moje oko, bo tu leży mój grób dla będę martwy na długo zanim mnie znaleźć. Ale jest ktoś, czekając na terenie zamku, który przyleciał na was. Wejdź do środka i szmaragdy znajdziesz w mojej dziewicy oczekiwania. Dla niej jest z karą będziesz recive, gdybyś poprosił o pomoc w tej podróży do mnie. Lot będzie slayed, rozmawiać będzie uwięziony i zachować spokój, kara czeka, to jest dilemma więźniowie, to sam powinien rozwiązać, nie być pojedyncze śmiertelny kara czeka. Pamiętaj, że jesteś sam, jesteś sam, jesteś sam!

That is definitely not a code, that is actually a language, what should I do??? I can definitely not ask my mom. But at the same time I cannot do it by myself. Should I do the right thing or should I do the wrong thing? Tell don’t tell. Right or wrong, tell don’t. These words started to coagulate my mind and I was overwhelmed. I immediately decided what I needed to do, go for option “RIGHT”!

“MOM,” I screamed loudly.

My mom answered with “WHAT COME DOWN HERE AND TELL ME!”

So I went down to her room where she was going through piles of clothes I started to narrate everything from the first letter all the way to the code. Ok I have to say she took it well, all she said was, “Let me come up there and look at this myself.”

So both of us went upstairs together. There I showed her chest and all the letters I read plus the two codes. She read through each of them with extreme care and caution. And in the end she concluded that the second code/language thing was written in Polish, she also said that I had decoded the first code well and that was exactly what it meant. Then she told me to get some rest and go back to the inventory of the attic tomorrow. I guess I am going to have to say goodbye diary, for today. But I also have to say I am starting to believe that magic is real and the kingdom might have actually existed.

June 12 1982

Again I woke up at the crack of dawn, but this time I did not go straight to the attic. Instead I went to my mom and dad’s room and woke up my mom. She was a little grumpy at first but then I convinced her to come up with me to the attic, to look at the letters. Mom again read through the code once again and started to decode the second one, this is what she said:

When you get to the gate you have to travel straight, when you see the Gemini you will be upon my eye, for here lies my grave for I will be dead long before you find me. But there is someone waiting for you inside the castle that has flown upon you. Go inside and you will find Emeralds the maiden in my waiting. For with her is the punishment you shall receive, had you asked for help on this journey to me. Flew you will be slayed, talk you will be jailed and keep quiet, punishment awaits, this is the prisoner’s dilemma, you alone shall solve, fail to be single, a deadlier punishment awaits. Remember you are alone, you are alone, you are alone!

“Interesting,” she said to herself. “You know what would be fun?” she said suddenly. What I asked hoping she would say go for a swim or something. But instead she said something that surprised me even more. She said to go find this kingdom.

“WHAT???” I said in surprise.

“Yes,” she said, “The whole family could go on horseback. Put all the luggage in the wagon along with the tent and set off.”

“Let’s do it,” I said.

So mom and I started to wake up everyone and pack. We also loaded the wagon and took the supplies the horses would need. Then it was decided that we would leave tomorrow at dawn and we would take Rocko and Merlin (the two horses). While mom and dad are packing all the food it’s time for me to say goodnight dear diary, I’ll see you again tomorrow.

June 13 1982

Time to leave, have we got everything, it does not matter let’s leave. Those were the words that I kept hearing, but finally we were all in the wagon.

Our wagon’s front is open and there is a  plank of wood for the person who is steering the horse and one other. My Mom and Dad are sitting there, while Levi, Alex and I are sitting on the back plank. All the luggage is behind us, the back has a door and the whole wagon is covered including the front plank. After a while everyone except my parents were asleep and I don’t know how long I was asleep but when I woke up it was lunch time. Mom had packed sandwiches earlier in the morning which were really delicious. Since we had brought the chest Mom told me to reread the first code as well as the second one. So I did and Dad concluded that we were about one and a half hours away from the wood. And today we should camp outside the wood for today.

After what seemed like one minute all of us could see the wood, and I could definately not agree with Dad that we should camp outside the wood for tonight; I want to continue on our adventure. Levi, Alex, and I helped Dad get the tent and fire set up while Mom started preparing for dinner. She brought quite a few pots, pans, knives, and cutting boards as well as plates, bowls, and silverware. Since my mom is very strict about having healthy meals she has done a lot of cooking courses and she makes awesome food. So for dinner we had some delicious pumpkin soup with garlic croutons. When we were done Levi, Alex, and I washed the dishes in a small pond nearby. After all of that was done Mom (being a typical mom) said: Time for bed. So all of us changed into our jammies and got our huge family-sized tent. This tent is huge I mean it can fit about ten people, so we all were pretty comfortable. Now all I can say is goodnight dear diary, hope you enjoyed today.

June 14 1982

Finally we have hit the road again, after a breakfast of french toast and fruit. We are right now going through the forest and so far we have seen zero apple trees. If you remember the directions it said: Go west till you reach the wood. Turn at the second apple tree. I guess it is going to be a long day. After what felt like 500 years, we found one apple tree. Then after what felt like another 500 years we saw the second, so we turned right. And soon we saw a lot of plums, all of us carefully counted and we got Rocko and Merlin to step on only the 5th one. Suddenly we felt our carriage going down, down, down. Then without any warning whatsoever, we stopped! And with a thud we hit the ground. Mom told me to read the code again and these were the directions we needed to follow:

Stop at the third level. Turn left then right then right then left. Go into the hallway and turn into the seventh door. Go inside the gate and turn left at the first sign you see. Now you will see the gate to my kingdom Landinia Magina

So we stopped at the third level, and it was pretty obvious as there was a sign.

“Now all we need to do,” I said in a relieved tone is “Turn left then right then right then left. Go into the hallway, turn into the seventh door. Go inside the gate and turn left at the first sign we see. And we’ll be there.”

“Ok,” said my dad “But according to the time on the wagon clock it will take at least half an hour, it may take even more, so I suggest that you all sleep and I will wake you up when we reach there.”

“Fine” I said, I hadn’t realized how sleepy I was until now because as soon as I closed my eyes I entered slumberland.

I don’t know how long I was asleep, but finally my dad woke me up, we had officially reached our goal. My dad. Now it was time to read the second code. We went straight until we saw the Gemini. And now we know we are upon the Fairy Godmother’s eye. So we went straight inside the castle that had flown upon us, I had already warned everybody to keep quiet when we reached Emeralds. And soon we did, not by eye but by ear.

Emerald said, “We have waited a long time for you, Alisha,” she said to my mom. “Ever since you were born we have been watching you. Your daughter was the one that found the letters, it was meant to be your destiny.”

Slowly, we saw her emerge. She was wearing a long emerald gown with a black belt. Her shoes we also black and so was her hair. Her hair was twirled up in a bun and her piercing green eyes stood out.

She came to us and said, “Congratulations, to all. You have worked hard and it all started with an inventory.” Then she gave my parent handshakes and fistbumps and high fives.

Then again she said, “We have a surprise for you.” She snapped her fingers, and a beautiful lady appeared. She was dressed in sky blue robes and her hair was all styled up. She also held a crystal wand that was fully transparent. With a wave of her wand a family tree appeared and all of us were on it! She was the Fairy Godmother! That’s what she meant by we.

She (the Fairy Godmother) explained to us that my mom’s mom was her daughter. And she married a man from our world. But she did not want her daughter (my mom) to grow up with magic. She felt it ruined people’s character. So my mom grew up without knowing she was actually the next Fairy Godmother. And so did I until now. So that means Levi, Alex, the new baby and I are all part Fairy. That also means that The Fairy Godmother is our Great Grandma. And guess what, she is offering Levi and I magic lessons, which are totally happening, she also said that Alex will be able to have lessons in one year. And when the new baby is born they can have lessons once he or she turns five. YAY!!!!! We can live right here in Landinia Magina. This is AWESOME!! And more good news I will be the next Fairy Godmother and Levi and Alex will be my apprentices and maybe even the new baby. This day and adventure has come to an awesome end. But only one thing is left unanswered, what happened to Her Majesty, nobody knows and nobody really cares either. And now all I can say is goodbye dear diary I will see you again in my next adventure.

The End  

Csend-o

Book 2

 

Jason and Squitai were eating at lunch when they suddenly got attacked by voodoo! Voodoo shot a dark mega-plasma ball at them that was dark purple. Then he used his beam of plasma and shut the whole building down. The lights were still on, but all the building was broken. The wizard used his magnetic power to pick up all metal things and threw them at everyone. The people ran away and Jason pulled out his special gun kept in his pocket for one year. He used the gun to shoot poop on the wizard! The wizard was really mad! He fell over and disappeared into the ground. It made the ground rumble at the place he disappeared. Then Jason and Squitai went home. The next day their home was destroyed and the wizard was about to shoot Jason with his plasma gun, when Squitai shot the wizard with his ink gun (because he was half squid and half man).

He has a human body but the color of a squid, has one big eye, has ten arms, and he has legs twice as big as a human’s leg because a squid has two giant tentacles. He has a mouth on the bottom of his head under his chin, and he has a point on the top of his head instead of hair.

The wizard was blinded by the ink because Squitai shot it in his eye. Then, the wizard started shooting his plasma gun everywhere! It destroyed everything that was one mile away. BANG BOOM CRASH! Then, the wizard disappeared into thin air except the ink. And then the ink fell down on the ground.

 

The End

 

To be continued…

Bubbles the Hamster

Once there was a hamster named Bubbles. He lived in the woods. One day, he was scavenging around when he heard some rustling in the bushes. He turned around to see what it was, but it was too late. He was captured! He looked up and saw a wrinkly, old, dirty looking man. The man put Bubbles into a humongous red truck. It was very noisy inside the truck, and there were a lot of unusual animals. Then the truck started moving. Suddenly, a woman picked him up very gently and put him in a cozy cage. He looked in the next cage and saw a weird looking reptile sitting on a small plant. Bubbles looked in the back of his cage and saw a brownish, orangish, white-ish ball of fur. Bubbles went to the back of his cage to figure out what it was. When he got closer, he heard a snoring sound. He had never seen this creature before. He surrounded the ball of fur. Every step he took, he got closer and closer to the ball of fur until he touched it!! He ran to the other corner of his cage. He saw one eye look at him then another one. The creature started walking toward him until Bubbles’ back was against the wall

“Who are y-y-you?” Bubbles asked.

“I’m a guinea pig — and who are you?” said the guinea pig.

“I’m a hamster,” said Bubbles.

“I guess we have to share this cage. By the way, I’m Chewy,” Chewy said.

“Well, I’m Bubbles. Do you know anyone around here? I’m sort of new you see, I don’t know anybody here,” said Bubbles.

“Well, you know me. Oh I know I can give you a tour of the pet store,” said Chewy.

“That would be great,” said Bubbles.

“So, first there’s Jose the chameleon. Then there’s Bongo the frog. Oh and you can’t forget Tee the turtle — he is the fastest turtle in the world and tha- oh wait, I almost forgot the new fat-tailed leopard gecko named Link and that’s pretty much all I know,” said Chewy.

“Thanks for the tour. I really appreciate it,” said Bubbles.

“You’re welcome,” said Chewy.

Then, the woman returned and picked Bubbles and Chewy up. She placed them in a room with a whole bunch of toys. The woman also placed the animals that Chewy was talking about right beside them.

“Okay, hi guys, this is Bubbles the hamster,” said Chewy. “Okay, Bubbles this is animal fitness.”
Chewy puts on his headband and gets his whistle and says, “Ok, all you creatures out there let’s get moving. We will start with some jumping jacks. Then drop down and give me twenty.”

After the lesson was done, they were placed back in their cages. Bubbles went to the corner of his cage to take a nap. He was fast asleep when somebody tapped him on the shoulder. It was Chewy. He wanted to eat crackers with Bubbles. So, they went over to their food bowl to eat crackers, until Bubbles remembered that he needed to get out of the pet store.

Bubbles said, “Chewy, I have a mission for you, can you get me out of here.”

“Well, I have tried to get out at least 20 times, but I do know a way that might work for you. I’ll tell you the plan at midnight,” Chewy said.

So, they waited till midnight, and Chewy called all of his friends to come to the playroom. They all did. He told them the plan, and they went into action. First, Jose went into the office and turned off all the secret cameras, and then Bubbles rode on the back of Tee, and Link used his tail to open the flap door, and then Bubbles was out of the pet store. He was so happy, until the man, who had first gotten Bubbles, went outside to look around because he heard something in the bushes. He looked and he saw Bubbles. The man was furious, and he put Bubbles back in his cage. The man also saw all the animals out of their cages and he put them back into their cages.The next day, Bubbles was so sad, until he saw a big face at the side of his cage.

Suddenly, he was being taken out of his cage by the woman who first placed him into it and she placed him into a girl’s hand. She was a nice girl named Callie and she really wanted a pet hamster.

Bubbles heard Callie say, “I want this one.”

Then he was even more sad. He was being adopted by a girl, how worse could this get? Chewy started crying, and Jose stopped eating flies and Link lost his tail and T stopped being a fast turtle. They were all so sad. Then, Callie put Bubbles in her mother’s car and drove him home to her house where he was set on a cabinet in her room. After three days, Bubbles was lying around bored in his cage. At the pet store, something else was going on.

There was a boy staring at Chewy and at the woman, who picked Bubbles up, picked Chewy up and put him into a boy’s hands.

Chewy heard the boy say, “I want this one.” Then, Chewy was placed in a new cage, and put in the car and put in the boy’s house. Apparently, Chewy saw another cage inside the boy’s house, and there was a hamster inside.

Chewy said, “Excuse me, do you know how to get out of here? I really need to get out. I am not supposed to be here.”

Then the hamster looked up at him and said, “I feel like I know you.”

Chewy said, “Me too.”

Then the hamster said, “I’m Bubbles, who are you.”

“I’m Chewy. Oh my goodness, Bubbles it’s you!! Remember me who used to live in the cage you lived in? I guess the person who got you was a sibling of the person who got me!” said Chewy.

The boy was named Tom, and he took Chewy out of his cage, and Callie took Bubbles out of his cage, and they put the two pets in a big cardboard box together.

“I think they know each other,” said Tom.

Then after the two pets played together, they were put into their cages, but in a different room. In that room, there were a lot of animals. The animal that lived in the cage next to Bubbles was a humongous cornsnake. The one living in the cage next to Chewy was a tiny komodo dragon.

Bubbles and Chewy were invited to Callie and Tom’s dinner (they were literally allowed to be on the dinner table).

They heard Kyle and Tom’s parents saying, “Since your birthdays are coming up. You are going to have a very big surprise. So, we have decided that you can have three pets from the pet store, but you have to decide which ones you want together.” On the weekend, they went to the pet store, and got a chameleon, a fat-tailed gecko and a turtle.

They brought them home, and when they saw a guinea pig and a hamster Jose said, “I feel like we know those people.”

Then T said, “I feel like we helped that Hamster get out of the pet store. I wonder what happened to him after that?”

Then they asked, “Hey guys what are your names, we think we know you two?”

Chewy and Bubbles asked, “Are you talking to us?”

“Yes we are talking to you,” the new pets said.

“Well, I am Bubbles and this is Chewy,” said Bubbles.

Then Jose said, “I knew it was you guys. Remember Jose, T and Link? That’s us.”

Then Chewy said, “Oh yeah, hey guys.”

Then after Callie and Tom’s lunch they went to play with all five of their pets, and put them in a cardbox.

Tom said, “I think they all know each other.”

Callie said, “Yeah, I feel like they do. Hey, maybe they can be our mascots at our birthday party on Sunday.”

It was their birthday party and five of their friends came over: Sam, Lisa, Lizze, Max, Xavier. They all played duck duck goose and they all got to pet the pets. They had so much fun at the birthday party, Tom said, “This is the best birthday party in the whole wide world.”

During dinner, their parents said, ”We’re moving and all of your pets can come with us too. We’re going to move to Hawaii.”

Callie said, “Yay! Now I can take all of my pets to the beach.”

When they got there they all figured out their fortune, Chewy became the best swimming guinea pig in the world. Bubbles was the best sand castle builder, and he built a famous one of him out of sand, and Jose went into a contest of catching flies and he caught 20,000 and Link found out that he had the fattest tail in the world and T got into a race with a Bugatti and he won.
(P.S. they found Bongo lying in a coconut tree drinking coconut water and he also found out that he could play the ukulele).

And that’s it.

Book 1 and 2 of the Bob and George

Bob and George

BOOK 1

One day Bob and George were playing Monopoly. They were two years old. The game was going on for hours, but Bob had to go to the doctor. So George went home.

Bob went to the doctor with his mom. He had to go to the bathroom, but it was time for his appointment. So he ran to the bathroom. But he just remembered that he wasn’t potty trained, so he went in his pants. He was scared. So he ran home to change his pants. His mom was wondering where he was. Meanwhile Bob was running to the doctor’s office. By the time he got there, it was time for dinner. As soon as he got there, he had missed his whole doctor’s appointment. He had wasted a whole hour. But he felt fine. So he went home, showered, and then he got into his pajamas. Meanwhile, his mom was making dinner — meatballs with pasta. George came over to Bob’s house for dinner. They finished all the food, and Bob’s mom had to make more, but by the time she had made food, it was time for their bed time. She was so furious that she had wasted a half an hour, just making another batch, so she and her husband had to have an extra lot of meatballs. George and Bob were laughing by the time they went to bed.

George went home, and Bob went to bed, and Bob dreamed a peaceful dream about him killing a dragon, and blowing up a palace. The end.

BOOK 2

After he blew up the castle, he dreamed about his friend George. He had won the monopoly game against George. But before he could finish his dream, his mom called, “Time to wake up!”

So Bob got out of bed, got dressed, and then got back in bed but did not go to sleep so that he was ready and could wait for breakfast.

But then his mom called, “April Fools!”  

Bob was wondering, “What’s going on?” So Bob got his pajamas back on, and went back to sleep.

Two hours later, Bob’s parents moved Bob from their bed to his bed, and swapped beds, so that when he would wake up he would be in his parents bed, but his parents made the wrong decision because his bed was skinnier than theirs. So his parents were squished together, and then they started screaming.

Bob woke up, and said, “Why am I in my parents’ bed?” It was still dark in the house, and Bob crashed into a few walls. But Bob was fine. By the time he reached his bedroom, his parents were fast asleep in his bed. So he shouted, “What is going on here!”

And his parents woke up and said, “This is our room.”

And Bob was like, “No, I was just in your room.”

And his parents said, “Why were you in our room?”

Bob said, “Is this another April Fools trick?”

Then his mom was like, “Uh yeah. Duh.” Then his parents got out of the bed, and back into their own bed, and Bob got back into bed.

Now his mom was like, “Bob! Time to wake up!”

So Bob woke up, got dressed, and then he got back into bed, ready for breakfast. Two minutes later, his mom said, “Time for breakfast!” so he went down, and his mom gave him a can for breakfast. Usually he had cereal, and a springy snake jumped out at his face, and he ran into his room screaming, got into pajamas, and went back to bed. He was really mad at his mom. Bob threw tantrums when he was mad.

Then finally his mom as like, “It’s time to wake up!”

He said, “Is this an April Fools trick again?”

She said, “Noooo. Here’s your bowl of cereal.”

And he was like, “Whew.” And he started eating cereal. When he got to the bottom he started eating these squirmy things, and he said, “What are these?”

His mom was like, “Gummy worms!”

He was like, “Yay! Gummies!”

Then it was time for school, so his mom drove him to school, and he went into class, and on the calendar it said, “April Fools’ Day tomorrow,” so all the kids were like, “Get ready to set something on the teacher.”

One of the kids asked, “But is the calendar an April Fools trick?”

And then Bob said, “It has to be! This morning my mom made a bunch of April Fools tricks on me.”

But then when he gets home from school, his mom said, “April Fools! It’s not really April  Fools!” And then the mom was like, “All along the teacher told us to fake out April Fools.”

The End

Bolt and Snowflake

There was a White Shepherd dog named Bolt. He had a collar, a dog tag and a home, but he went out for a little walk — by himself. In those days, it was only him. He lived with 11-year-old Katie Daniels. Katie just stared out the window, hoping for Bolt to come back before dusk.

Meanwhile, there was a female Eskimo dog called Snowflake. She was a stray dog since she was six weeks old. Some people gave her half their food — but sometimes, it was DISGUSTING.

Bolt met Snowflake at noon. Snowflake was trying to get hot dogs from a hot dog stand.

“Ah. Seems like the hot dog guy won’t share. He doesn’t share so often. I’ll talk to that Eskimo over there,” said Bolt sneakily. He continued, “Hey, Eskimo, you gotta learn more about the streets. It’s either a mystery or everyone knows it. But I know about the streets. I’ll get hot dogs from a stand.”

“Okay,” said Snowflake. “So when are we going to get the hot dogs?”

“Right. Now,” Bolt said quietly, not exactly whispering. Bolt got the hot dogs and ran.

Bolt and Snowflake were beginning to cross construction. Bolt had the hot dogs wrapped around his chest, but some were going between all his four legs.

“So when are we going to eat?” asked Snowflake. She got angry because Bolt was running away from her. “HALF OF THOSE ARE MINE!” cried Snowflake angrily.

“Why Should I Worry? Why Should I Care? I may not have a dime, but I got street savior-faire! Why Should I Worry? Why Should I Care? It’s just be-bopulation, I got street savior-faire!” sang Bolt. He sang it all the way home. A pack of dogs was waiting for him at the basement, which is actually some remains of the RMS Titanic. But what Bolt DIDN’T know was that Snowflake had followed him.

Bolt was about to eat the last hot dog when Snowflake BROKE out of the hole between basement ceiling and the sitting room floor. EVERYONE stared at her like how the heck she got here. “I wanted half the hot dogs, but your ‘friend’ just ran away from me.” Nobody said a word until Katie came into the basement. When she saw Snowflake, she said nothing, other than “Hey puppy. I’ll name you-”

“Snowflake,” said Snowflake in a barking noise.

“Alright,” Katie responded. “I guess I’ll just have to get you things for dogs.”

The next day, Snowflake had a collar with a dog tag that said: Snowflake. 50th Street. Between 8th and 9th Avenue, a food/water bowl, a newspaper as a toilet, and toys — perfect for a dog only 14 weeks old.

That night, Bolt turned the radio on. The guy on the radio said, “It’s bumper to bumper on the highway to the beach.”

“Thanks,  Mr. Obvious,” said Snowflake sleepily. She yawned.

“What? A yawn? Am I boring you?” asked Bolt.

“No,” said Snowflake. “But I want to see what the TV does.” Once Snowflake hit the remote control, Disney Channel appeared on the TV. She and Bolt slept through all the commercials and whatnot, and when the fifth commercial appeared, Bolt and Snowflake were already dreaming. When the sun rose and all the alarm clocks were ringing, Katie could see that Disney Channel was on. “I wonder if dogs are THAT smart,” wondered Katie. It was true. She went to school and her parents went to work.

“Staring contest. I bet you can’t beat me,” bet Snowflake. But before it even STARTED, Buzz Mccallister, a cat that belonged to Katie’s classmate, jumped on Bolt and Snowflake’s bedroom window and talked about his dream.

“I had a dream that I had a big boat, JUST like Stampylongnose’s. And I had a big hot water river that I could bathe and sail in. And I had chickens no taller than my knee to make the boat sail. And I had…I had…”

“You had a good kick in the butt, Buzz Mccallister. Remember those April Fools pranks you laid on me?”

Flashbacks:

“We’re gonna get Charlie back. I’ll put this fake helmet on in case he smells bad.” (Everyone laughs) “Very funny, Buzz Mccallister.”

“I see a GIANT FLYING SHEEP!” (Everyone laughs) “Buzz Mccallister!”

“Oh. My. God. Misty. (On his flank, there is a paper saying: THIS SPACE FOR RENT. Everyone laughs) “Darnit, Buzz Mccallister!”

Flashbacks end here.

“You see? That is why we are BEGINNING to have you as a pet peeve! Snowflake, get that doofus!” Bolt yelled. You would think his entire body would catch on fire.

“Fine,” replied Snowflake. She teased, “THIS is the garbage truck that leads to an incinerator. THIS is where we send ALL the troublemakers.”

“We?” asked Buzz Mccallister.

“The creepiness will start in a moment. EVERYBODY, COME HERE!” replied Snowflake. All the dogs she knew (including Bolt) came and threw Buzz Mccallister out the window and in the garbage truck. “We’ve burned dozens and dozens of rats that almost ate party cookies. And now we’re gonna burn a cat that annoys us!” But Buzz Mccallister was actually alive. He saw Ryder Adams’ apartment and made a dash for it.

About 20 minutes later, everyone was bored. No one did anything but sleep. Then, an idea burst in Bolt’s head. “I know! Let’s cause some mischief at a rundown fishing boat that dates back to the 1950’s!”

“Alright?” asked Snowflake to herself.

When they arrived at a fishing boat, it is probably obvious why it is called a ‘fishing boat,’ because there were at least 500 fish in the boat. The only other thing there was is a garbage bin.  What they didn’t know was that the garbage truck was less than a mile away from the fishing boat.

Misty found the garbage bin full of rotten fish. There was a big rat that owned the boat. Bolt found a claw. He picked up the rat with the claw. “Let go of me, you IDIOT!” shouted the rat. It was too late. Bolt made the fingers open WIDE, making the rat fall into the garbage bin. “SAVE ME!” cried the rat.

“Okay?” responded Snowflake. EASIER SAID THAN DONE. Snowflake ended up in the garbage bin with the rat. The garbage truck’s back wheels were already touching the dock. Charlie, a puppy that lives at the Bark Park Adoption Center, ran screaming all over the place, fearing he was almost touched by a human child. “Seriously?” asked Pixel to herself. Pixel was another puppy who lived at the Bark Park Adoption Center.

“Oh boy,” Bolt gasped. “We better get Snowflake outta there, STAT. Stat means PRONTO. Pronto means LICKETY-SPLIT. Lickety-Split means QUICKLY. Quicky means FAST. AND THAT MEANS NOW!” The dogs almost got Snowflake when she and the garbage bin went in the garbage truck. So did all the other dogs.

The garbage truck reached the dump. Everyone went “HHHHAAALLLPPP!” deeper in the dump. Everyone except Bolt and Snowflake. They managed to leap over the hole, leading to an unknown place. “We have to work as a team to save them,” whispered Bolt to Snowflake. Bolt jumped in the hole, while Snowflake grabbed his ankles.

Actually, everyone was trying to get out the way they got in. Luckily, everyone — even tiny Pixel — got up and sighed in relief. The garbage truck was departing. “Come on, let’s work together!” announced Snowflake.

The smallest ones went first. Then the ones between big and small went second. The biggest ones went third. Finally, Bolt and Snowflake hopped on the garbage truck. “LET’S GO HOME AND ENJOY OUR LIVES!” yelled Bolt to everyone.

The Bark Park Adoption Center puppies hopped off quickly with the help of Bolt and Snowflake when they saw their home (not adopted dogs often called the dog shelter they lived in ‘home’). When Misty and her pack saw their home, they got off with the help of Bolt and Snowflake. Once Wink and the others found home, they got off. Despite being huskies, Bolt and Snowflake helped them off. When Bolt and Snowflake found their home, they jumped off by themselves. They ran to Katie. Katie opened the door and hugged Bolt and Snowflake. Then, she went to bed. The dogs went to their room and slept.

And what happened to the rat? Well, he ended up being burned in the incinerator.

Back at Katie’s home, Snowflake said, “I am starting to enjoy this place. If we get a third pet, who knows what will happen?”

Two months later, they got Jessie, the spotted kitty with a red and white collar.

THE END.

 

Bobgoblin Adventures

Bobgoblin In the Land of Luck (Part 1)

It was gone, all gone. The leprechauns had taken the gold. The goblin’s gold! So the prince of the goblins, Bobgoblin, sent men to get the gold back. He waited and waited, but they never returned. Ransoa, the king of the babies, sent 40,000 strong babies and 49,000 baby goblins to show their power. Little arrows and spears were everywhere, some golden arrows and some iron. The stakes were high in the little war.

Then Bobgoblin took matters seriously, so he took himself and his friend Boblin and another friend Boboblin, and started marching to the leprechaun dimensional portal. But there was a lepredragon guarding the portal. The lepredragon was like a big fluffy leopard with wings, but he was completely green because he was part leprechaun. He breathed lucky clovers and gold. But Bobgoblin was smart. He brought his dragon Gobdragon, who looked like a rabbit with feet like a wolf and giant wings, and he could breathe rocks and gold. There was a big battle, but finally Gobdragon won by turning Lepredragon into solid stone and gold. And then Lepredragon turned into a gold four-leaf clover.

Then, they entered the dimension. It was full of four-leaf clovers– four-leaf clover mountains, four-leaf clover fields, four-leaf clover flowers. It wasn’t called the luckiest dimension for nothing! But then, Bobgoblin found this giant leprechaun tower, bigger than all the four-leaf mountains, even Mount Lucky. Mount Lucky contained golden luck. So of course there was a four-leaf clover tower there too, but there was a four-leaf clover wall surrounding both the tower and the mountain. But then, suddenly, King Jochaun came. King Jochaun was a short leprechaun, not with a leprechaun hat but with a clover crown. He was the luckiest in all five dimensions, but he wasn’t the richest. The goblins were the richest.

Jochaun pulled out his clover mace and clover shield. Bobgoblin pulled out his golden sword. Then, they started battling. Then, Gobdragon changed the leprechaun king into gold. Then, Boblin said, “Free my cohort and give me the gold back!”

Jochaun said, “We don’t have it.”

Then Boboblin and Boblin started searching the entire clover castle, but they didn’t find it. And then Jochaun said, “We stole it but then the mountain giants took it from us.”

To be continued…

Bobgoblin On The Rocky Road (Part 2)

Panting, they finally got to the giant portal. But then they had to get past Stragon the stone dragon. But first they took a night off just to get a rest after all that luck. Then the next day, Bobgoblin realized his two artifacts, the crystal clover and the golden goblin, could defeat the dragon. Two artifacts together can defeat dragons. In the morning Bobgoblin and Boblin combined the two together and suddenly the blinding light froze Stragon. Then they entered the mountain giant dimension. So they just had to follow the rocky road to the rocky fort on top of Mount Megamount, the tallest mountain in all nine dimensions. But suddenly they heard big thumps; then the rocks started moving and–“Mountain giants!” Boblin yelled. Gobdragon snarled. Then Bobgoblin said, “We need a clover wall! Now!” So Gobdragon created a clover wall, but the giants crushed that. Then Bobgoblin said, “Clover soldiers, attack!” But they were crushed. Literally crushed. So they had to use his artifact again. Then they finally got to the castle where a really, really big giant met them and squished them, but they survived. Then Stoking, the king of the mountain giants and the biggest in all nine dimensions, challenged them to a fight with his giant weapons, the granite mountain club and the granite shield. Around his neck was the giant gem. “You challenge me to get your gold and my gem, my precious gem!” he crackled. He sounded like a rockslide. But Bobgoblin had an idea. He got on Gobdragon and whispered to Gobdragon, “Fly around him in circles, but close to his head.” So Gobdragon started to do that. Then Bobgoblin climbed on one of his wing while Boblin steered. And Bobgoblin waved his sword, cutting right through Stoking. Finally Stoking yelled. It sounded like a big avalanche, which crashed into rocks and created a rockslide with giant balls of snow coming in too. So then Stoking said, “Fine, take your stupid gold and my poor, precious gem. But why did you come for my gem?” “I didn’t, but thanks.” And then Bobgoblin said, “Also, can you give Gobdragon the rock powers?” “Fine, anything, anything!” Later, when they returned home to the goblin kingdom, the goblins ran out weeping. They all said, “The dwarves stole our weapons! Boo hoo hoo. Sniff sniff.”

To be continued…

Bobgoblin in the Land of the Silversmiths (Part 3)

“Wait, take this dogragon he can lick gold, stone, luck, and snow.”

“She’ll be nice addition” said Bobgoblin.

“Here take herculin the goblin.”

“Cool” Boboblin said. lets go.

When they got there there was a shining ball of metal. It was Silgon, the guardian of the dwarves’ portal. They sent Gobdragon to get him, but after a few minutes Gobdragon was tossed back. He crashed against a rock, and he was really hurt. “Plan Number Two,” said Bobgoblin. “Artifacts.” But turns out he didn’t have the right artifacts. He needed the northern fallen artifact and the mountain giants’ artifact, and he didn’t have them.

So he sent Gobdragon to get him, and he licked Silgon into luck. Silgon began to transform into a giant four-leaf clover, but then he took the form of a dragon with a four-leaf clover necklace. Then, suddenly, Herculin said, “Run!” So they ran through the portal.

When they got through, they began to walk. Then, THUMP THUMP THUMP. “The mountain giants are after us!” Boboblin yelled.

But Boboblin was not totally right. It was golden colossals and colossdrakes, which were machines that the dwarves made and used. These shining giants suddenly grabbed them. But then, the last thing they saw was the little dwarves who were powering this machine. Then, the next thing they knew, they were in a dungeon. There was a little light, but they were behind bars. Dun-dun-da-dun! A trumpet played. “Welcome one and all!” someone said. “To the First Ever Prison Dungeon Death Duel!”

Suddenly the gates opened. “Out! Out!” a small robot said.

Then, suddenly, the goblins were pitted against twenty golden robotic lions with titanium armor. They had to fight them. They were given their weapons. Herculin, the youngest of them all, was also the bravest of them all, because he was related to Hercules. So, with his club he just ran up at six lions, bashing them up, but that did not work. He was thrown back.

Then, the second youngest of them all, Boblin, charged at the same lions, stabbing them with his spear. Finally, when he hit it in the mouth, the lion was destroyed. But there was another nineteen left. Then little Boblin said, “Poke them in the mouth! Then they’ll be destroyed!” in his little baby voice.

Then Herculin came back. He said, “You’re hungry, eh? Have my club!” and stuffed the club down the lion’s mouth, and then spinned around another hit, and when he turned around, another hit, and then both fell in a boiling lava circle surrounding the arena.

Seventeen left. Then Bobgoblin started stabbing them in the mouth. But Boboblin wasn’t much of a fighter, so he just kept being chased by lions. Poor guy.

Then, Herculin had jabbed his club into the mouth of a lion, and then he was on the back of another lion. Herculin, for some reason, always had a screwdriver. Then he unscrewed the lion’s titanium armor, then unscrewed his golden skin. Under it there wasn’t anything there. It was just open space.

Then he decided to go into the open space so he could control the lion. He started using the lion as a battering ram. Then the lion re-took control. Herculin fell out. But the lion drove himself right to his death with another ten lions. All the lions were gone.

Then two other silgons came. “Beat these and you and your dragons will be free!” said the king of the dwarves, Dwarvy.

So he would have to fight two more of them. This time, Herculin pulled out a red cloth and said, “Ole! Ole! Uh…Silvy?”

A silgon came down from the sky but it missed Herculin and fell in the lava. And then all four of them went for the second one. When the second one landed, all the goblins got on and started hacking the top of it. But this one was a little different. It had a titanium vest too. Sadly, Herculin dropped his screwdriver. But then Bobgoblin came up and asked for Herculin’s club and then started bashing the windshield of the robot dragon. Then, finally, when he got through, they all jumped in. The three dwarves inside panicked and ran, so they crashed into the locked door.

Then Bobgoblin did something a little mean. He let them fall out of the window. But they had parachutes, and they parachuted into the lava. Then they landed the silgon and pushed it into the lava too. Then Dwarvy said, “Fine, you have won that. You are free, but leave us.”

“No!” squeaked little Herculin. “Give us the armor and weapons!” he squeaked again. “And for good keeping, all your gold.”

“No, you’ll have to fight us for that.”

“Fine, let us free then,” squeaked Herculin again.

So they were let free, but they didn’t leave. They came back but they were met with a fleet of elite fighter jet submarine tank things led by Dwarvy and his soul-son Darvy. They had to beat that too.

THUMP THUMP THUMP came from behind them. “Hello!” said Stoking. Then came Stragon the stone dragon. Then another twenty mountain giants and two hill giants (or baby giants).

Then there was a big battle. Colossals dueling with mountain giants, and a lot of mountain giants and colossals falling, and goblins trying to get through this maze. Finally, when they got through the battle they had to breach the electric fence wall thing. They did that by hitching a ride in a rice vendor. Once they got in, they ran to the armory. “Give us our golden armor back!”

“Golden armor? Oops. Well, the babies stole it a few minutes ago,” said the blacksmith.

Will they get it back, or not? To be continued…

Bobgoblin in Babyland (Part 4)

Bobgoblin was outraged. One adventure after another. When could he finally sleep?

He was on his way to Babyland. He was wearing two heavy artifacts and two light ones. Then they got to the baby portal, the youngest of all portals, and the youngest of all dragons, the Baby Dragon. He was cute. His hair was really curly, and he made voices like “Ga ga goo goo, goo goo ga ga.” Then Bobgoblin said, “This is gonna be easy. All we need to do is make him laugh, make him go to sleep, and we will run through the portal.”

Bobgoblin’s plan took a really long time. Finally, when Bragon, the baby dragon was sleeping, they made a run for the portal. When they got in, what they saw was crazy. There were little saplings but no trees, little everything, little goblins running around, a nursery… There was nothing there to stop them from getting their weapons, but suddenly a bunch of nipple spears came flying in their direction. The nipple spears didn’t hurt, they just paralyzed them. They made them quiet because they went in their mouths.

Suddenly all the babies became evil. They started running towards them, and when they got there they started doing little punches, little kicks, little slaps, little everything. But the baby dwarves weren’t that bad robotics makers. They had made little colossals and there were little hill giants. So soon they were taken to the king of the babies, Gaboo.

Gaboo sentenced them to be sent to the baby arena and the baby prison, but the bars weren’t that hard to break because they were made out of little wood. The room was too small because it was meant for babies. Then the next day, the little babies would have to fight Bobgoblin and his friends to prove their worth. If the babies won, they would be sent to their kingdom. If they lost, they would stay in baby land till the next tournament, which was once a year. When they were in the prison cell there was a little baby goblin weeping there.

Herculin squeaked, “Why are you crying?”

“Because they sentenced me to be put in yail till the pournament,” the little baby cried.

“Don’t worry, we’ll let you back to the land of the goblins with us. What’s your name?” said Boblin.

“My name is Jeflin.”

“Come on, let’s do the tournament together!”

“Fure!” Jeflin answered.

The next morning was the day of the tournament.

“Day of truth, Jeflin,” Herculin said.

“Yah, I guess you’re right,” Jeflin answered.

Then, the gates opened. They had to crouch to get through the gate because it was also meant for babies.

“Gaaaa gaaa gooo gooo!” the babies screamed together.

They would have to be facing ten dwarves, three hill giants, and ten goblins, who decided to join Bobgoblin. Then it was the goblins vs. all. Luckily, Gobdragon and Dogragon were with them, but they were all unarmed. So, they decided to get on the dragons and fight. Both could fly, but Gobdragon was better. So they flew higher than the hill giants. Then they dived in. Gobdragon licked the head of two of the hill giants, turning them into clovers. Then, Gobdragon turned the other one into clovers with his magical powers, and it was the dwarves left, but the dwarves had their silver colossals, which were smaller and weaker than golden ones, but still pretty strong. So Gobdragon used his horns as a battering ram against the windshield. Herculin jumped on another while Dogragon licked a few. Finally, when the collosdrakes were gone, there were no pools of lava, so the dwarves escaped. The dwarves had emergency sledge hammers, and the dragons couldn’t beat the sledgehammers. So it was up to the goblins. The goblins just jumped on the babies, and sadly Jeflin was bashed up and died.

But the goblins won the tournament, so they could go home with their armor and tools turned back to gold.

Will they save Jeflin or not? To be continued…

Bobgoblin in Shadow Castle (Part 5)

“Come on! Get up boys!” said Bobgoblin, “We’re going to the shadow castle.”

“So early.” Herculin said

“Herculin has a point there,” said Boboblin.

“So what? Let’s go!” said Bobgoblin.

So they left, but they left the baby goblins behind. When they finally got to the gate, Bobgoblin forgot they needed the Northern Fallen Kingdom gem to enter. So they left for the skyship port at the end of the Sky Island. When they got there, the sky ship manager told them it would cost 90 pens. Bobgoblin hesitated and gave the manager the pens.

They headed off. They wanted to go the short way, but had to take the long way to the Northern Fallen Kingdom to avoid sky monsters. Sky monsters are basically dragons, but they don’t have to land; they can float around forever. Finally when they got to the Northern Island, they told the pilot to wait for them. The pilot told them it would be 40 extra pens. When they got to the castle, they had to pass the dragon that caused the defeat of the Northern Fallen Kingdom. He was a big, black and dark red fire dragon. They took turns fighting him, but all were beaten. Then, they tried to fight him together, coming from all sides. Finally, the dragon flew away. “He’ll be back soon. Let’s hurry!” said Bobgoblin. They hurried into the castle where they were safe… in some rooms.

They split up to search the castle. “I FOUND IT!” Herculine screamed, “Come on let’s go!”

They went back to the skyship. When they got there, Boboblin said, “Turn on the engines! We’re out! The short way! I don’t care about the monsters!”

That’s when they discovered that the pilot wasn’t there. They saw a trail of blood that led back to the castle. “The dragon got the pilot! Someone turn on the engine!” Boblin cried. Herculin turned on the engines. They returned to SkyShip Port. “Sorry about the pilot,” they all said.

“Don’t worry about it,” said the manager.

They left to go back to the Shadow Castle. When they got there, they were prepared to fight a dragon, but there wasn’t one. People were so scared to go to Shadow Castle because the rumor was that if you went into Shadow Castle alive, you wouldn’t come out alive. They placed the Northern Fallen Kingdom gem into the keyhole and the dimensional portal opened. They entered. Sulah, the evil queen, said, “Muahahahaha you all will never make it out alive. You won’t even make it out dead muahahhaha.”

They looked around for Jeflin. They saw Jeflin was standing up and staring at them from a dark and gloomy corner. “Jeflin, come on! Let’s go!” Herculin whisper screamed.

Bobgoblin in the Land of Golden Light (Part 6)

“Oh God! Let’s go! We have to meet them up at the gates of Heaven, but first we have to get the Southern Fallen Kingdom gem,” said Boboblin. So they left for the SkyShip Port. When they got there, they had to again negotiate with the manager about the cost of a SkyShip rental. Finally, they got it for 80 pens and 40 pins.

When they left, they flew full speed ahead.  When they got to the Southern Fallen Kingdom, the same dragon from the Northern Fallen Kingdom! They had to pass him again. This time, they knew what to do. All they had to do was charge him together, and then tickle him to death. Then, they went inside the castle. They knew where the gem was, and grabbed it. They returned home and went to the Meeting Port with the gem. Bobgoblin led his army of goblins through the gates of Heaven. They were met by the Heaven army, and surprisingly, all the people from Shadow Castle were there too. Then, there was a big battle- a lot of yelling, crying and death. Finally, Bobgoblin and his goblins broke through the lines and started to stab Susu to death.

Finally, there was peace in all of the lands again. The people returned to all of their kingdoms and there was Peace in every dimension.

THE END.   

 

Beth’s Journal

 

July 7th

Dear Journal,

I hope I’m doing this right. When I asked my mother what a journal was she said it was like a diary but it wasn’t a diary. But then she couldn’t finish because the phone rung and so she raced over and answered. Like, wow Mom. Thanks! That helps a lot.

Summer vacation has started. I’m truly, honestly sad. Well now isn’t that bizarre. You wait and wait and wait and wait for something, and then you feel sad.

So, Journal, since we’re going to be together for a while, my name is Beth. I’m 10, and I can’t quite solve the problem of who I am yet.

Today I went on a plane ride by myself. No mother, no father, no annoying siblings! I was going to my grandparents.

I was super scared. I got on the plane. It smelled like my little brother’s socks that he filled with stinky cheese and left to rot, then put it in my sock drawer. Remembering that, my stomach felt like a boiling pot of oatmeal. When climbing onto my assigned seat I held my breath. I couldn’t have done that forever. From holding my breath so long I had slumped into the seat and I was feeling dizzy.

“Are you okay, ma’am?” one of the helpers had said. Awakening to my senses I said that I was and took another gulp of air. At that point it smelled so bad that I remembered that I had “borrowed” some of Mother’s perfume for my visit, for my grandparents’ house smelled of bitter baby wipes.

After that, it was a pretty peaceful plane ride. I got off, hugged my grandparents, and you can pretty much imagine the rest.

Before I climbed into bed this night, I wrote in you.

Beth ♡

July 8th

Hiya Journal,

You won’t believe what happened today!!! Just listen. Or read. Or something.

Mother, Father, and all of my other siblings called. Mother and Father said I could stay an extra two days! And, I got this sparkly blue pen! I’m using it to write in you! Grandpa is grumpy. And he still wants to invent a cigarette out of cheese. I told him it would smell horrible in a couple of days. He just said “BAAAAHHHH!” The cheese had reminded me of my little brother, Dennis. He’s one of those — first he’s sharing his secret stash of candy with you, then he’s putting his stinky smell blue cheese socks in your drawer — kind of little brother. Yup!

Mom and Dad are your average lousy parents.

Meg, the oldest sister, is your bossy girly girl.

Today was probably the rainiest day yet. But hey, you know what that means! Grandma and Grandpa took me to see a movie.

It was a mix of action, adventure, and comedy.

There was this part where me and Grandpa burst out laughing. Then Grandma said we were a bunch of goofy howler monkeys.

When we had gotten home Grandma taught me how to knit. Before I had knew it, it was already 9:30. A.K.A. bed time!

Beth ♡

July 9th

Journal. Guess what.

Did I say yesterday was the rainiest day? Well, today is the rainiest day ever in the universe of universes.

(Gramps and Grandma didn’t let me see another movie.)

Signed, a very sad Beth.

July 10th

Journal!!!!!

The rain continues. :(

I’m making a sewing project. It’s, well, it’s GOING to be a picture of 3 sheep, 1 tannish and whitish, 1 white, 1 gray and black, and they’re all going to be in a meadow.

That’s what I worked on for most of the day.

At dinner, there was some gossip. Imagine this —

(a nice quiet family eating dinner.)

Gram = How was work today?

Gramps = BAAAAHH!!

Me = BAH? What kind of answer is…

(Gram had interrupted me.)

Gram = Uh oh.

Me = Uh oh? What?

Gram = What happened?

Gramps = Jack got fired.

Me = Jack? Who’s Jack? What’s…

(Gram interrupted.)

Gram = Why don’t you put your dishes away and get ready for bed. Then read until I tuck you in. Okay Beth?!!!

I did just that. When Grams came in and turned out the light I asked her who Jack was.

Gram said, “Just a friend of your grandpa he met at work. A really good friend.”

Beth ♡

July 11th

Journal! The rain stopped!

I woke up at 10:41am. Yup! I checked the clock. After that, I worked on my sheep picture. I learned cross stitching, rug hooking and even rug latching or whatever it’s called. I’ve been using that kind of really dense cross stitching. I didn’t see Grandpa today. When I asked Gram about that she didn’t hear me. Or at least she pretended to not hear me. Sigh. My wrist is starting to hurt…Geez, after you start writing for a while every night, you get sick of it really fast. Well, good night Journal.

Beth ♡

July 12th

Jornal,

It’s so hard to write, so sleepy. Tell you tomorrow.

Beth ♡

July 13th

Hey Journal!

Here, let me explain about yesterday. First I had pricked my finger on the needle for the sheep cross stitch. Then I was so tired from working on my sheep cross stitch that I took a nap.

Do you know one thing I didn’t tell you? Well, I’m so glad that Gram and Gramps live in the country and not the busy loud noisy city that I live in.

So, yesterday after I took a nap I played in the nice cool country. In other words, I went outside. My head had been up feeling the cool air but then I tripped on a root and fell into a little puddle of mud. It had smelled worse than the plane.

So I went to take a shower but the only soap they had was some baby soap that smelled like carrots, beans, and peppers. Which wasn’t that bad, but believe me, you don’t want to smell like that.

So, I went to bed.

Today, news = Well, I pretty much cross stitched my sheep. I’m  two thirds done!

I played outside. This time with my head down.

Beth ♡

July 14th

Dear Journal

I woke up to the sound of music. Opera. Blah. One day Meg had tricked me into going to an opera show thing.

That’s why, if you’re wondering, I hate opera.

Buckwheat pancakes were cooking in the kitchen. I could smell it. Gram was GF A.K.A. gluten free so we have buckwheat pancakes a lot.

Today I read a book about karma. I thought about that a lot.

There was a picture in the book that was a man sitting on the ground.

There was a ring of dominoes around him. Actually he was part of the ring. He had pushed one end of the ring.

Thought about that.

Beth ♡

July 15th

Journal,

Nothing spectacular happened today. My sheep project is coming out perfect. I have finished the meadow. I look on the back of the masterpiece. This is exactly what I saw.

Tangled knots, loose strings. Droopy cross stitches!??

Ma ma mia.

Beth ♡

July 16th

Hiya Journal,

I’m leaving to go home tomorrow. Gramps’ eyes were red when I saw him this morning. He suggested me and him to go for a walk together since this was going to be the last full day with him.

Sunlight had streaked through the leaves on the trees, making the world look like a greeny golden. I could hear leaves rustling. Twigs and sticks cracked as we stepped on them.

In the mud Gramps pointed out some deer tracks. I’m going to try to add some dialogue here.

Gramps = Jack was a…a good friend.

Me = A really good friend. Right?

Gramps = Yup.

Gramps = Yup. Yup Yup.

Me = Yes, you were.

(Gramps’ eyes were a bit watery now.)

Gramps = …yup.

(A long silence.)

(In a whisper) Gramps = Get down low.

Me = Why?!!!

Gramps = Shhhh!

I got down low through the golden green. A deer gracefully cautiously stepped one by one through a clearing and kept on walking until I couldn’t see it anymore.

We finished our walk. When I got home I lied down on my bed and thought what it would be like to be a deer.

Beth ♡

July 17th

Dear Journal,

At 8:30 AM I had to get up to get to the plane. It smelled fine. It was just that other plane that had smelled.

I stared out the window the whole time watching the country turn into the city. And wondered worryingly about Grandpa.

Beth♡

Baby Unicorn

Once upon a time, there was a little princess baby unicorn and everybody believed in her. Everybody believed in her parents, everybody believed in unicorns. But one day, this alien moved from a far distant planet to earth and he never believed in unicorns and he told everybody nasty rumors about unicorns, especially baby unicorns. He said they were the worst.

One day, everybody just hated unicorns and that alien said, “Yes! Nobody likes unicorns! Now this place can be dark and no more unicorns can exist!”

But there was one person who still loved unicorns. And her name was Olivia. She thought all those nasty rumors were lies and he was just trying to make sure unicorns never exist. She knew that every time someone doesn’t believe in unicorns, the unicorns start to fade. And when they’re all faded, the world will go dark and darkness will cover the earth for 300,000 years.

And Olivia, she visited the unicorns everyday, telling them that she always believed in unicorns and that aliens started nasty rumors about unicorns. And so she told them a plan that with all the magic that they had left, they would defeat the alien and then everybody would believe in unicorns again and then they wouldn’t be in darkness for another 300,000 years.

So Olivia walked up to that alien and said, “Whatcha doin’ here?”

And the unicorns said, “Uhh-huhh.”

And she yelled, “CHAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAARGE!!!”

And magic was everywhere and Olivia was punching and kicking because she took Tai-kwon-do. And the alien had very quick reflexes so he flipped and twisted and rolled, but the baby unicorn had these future powers, so she knew where he would move next. And she let out one bolt of magic right where he was going next and he fell to the ground in despair, and he was dying and everything was light again.

And then everybody believed in unicorns again. And it was all like Yay!

 

The End.

 

Animal Breakout

There once was a pig named Lisa and she lived on a farm. Lisa the pig always wore her violet bow. One day, Lisa was eating her food and she saw a key that was in her bowl. She wondered what it was for.

She asked the horses what the key was for. The horses just said, “Naay ask the cows! They must know.” She asked the cows what the key was for. The cows said, “We don’t know, ask the sheep.” She went to the sheep, but the sheep said, “This looks like a person dropped it in your bowl on accident. It must be for opening up all the pens!” Then all the animals got really excited.

So, Lisa took the key and opened up everyone’s cage, including her own. The farmer walked outside and said, “How did everyone get out of their pens? I must have dropped the key somewhere.” Then the farmer saw all the animals running towards the village. The farmer said, “Oh no! Everyone is going to get mad.” The farmer ran towards the village and tried to catch all the animals. He knew that it was a long way to the village, but the animals were almost there. The animals finally got to the village. All the animals were scared at first, then all the villagers said, “It’s ok, we will not hurt you.”

The farmer was near and the animals were all trying to hide, but they could not find a spot, so the villagers helped them. The farmer looked and looked and could not find the animals. He was very confused. He asked all the villagers where the animals could be. The Villagers stated, “What animals?” This made the farmer even more confused then before. He then left to go back to the farm.

The animals then came out of their hiding spots and were so happy, they had a celebration! All the villagers picked one as their own. The villagers were happy. Lisa, her owner, and all the other animals were very happy, they had a celebration.The farmer was on the way back to the farm, he heard all the noise and thought he should go get the animals. The farmer then took them all back to the farm. This made the animals and villagers very unhappy. Back at the farm, he checked out the situation. When he arrived, he was surprised to see they all wondered where his key was. Lisa the pig realized she had the key in her bowl!!! When the farmer left, she took out the key and freed all the animals. All the animals went back to the village. When the farmer came back he could not  believe his eyes, the animals escaped again! He did not care anymore. He just went to the village and all the animals were really sad. But to their surprise he said, “You can keep the animals but you need to pay.” Then all the villagers agreed. And the farmer went back to his farm with all his money and everybody lived a happy life.

An Army of Robots

Chapter 1

Once upon a time, Mack went to Jake’s house. Mack has freckles and has a mohawk. Jake has a plain hairstyle and he is a regular person. They go upstairs to Jake’s room and they see a little crack in the wall. They open the crack. They see a workshop with plans. They don’t read the plans because they see a purple-then-blue portal that looks like a cylinder. They look at potions in the workshops. The potions have labels.

“Shaving cream potion,” says Mack. “Should I drink this?”

“No Mack, drink this tuna can,” says Jake.

They both drink the potion. They turn into tuna. They see a potion on the floor that says NORMAL and Jake rolls into a ball and rolls to the potion. He drinks it. Jake is now normal. He gives the potion to Mack. Mack is now normal.

Jake says, “How old do you think this laboratory is?”

“Maybe a thousand years,” says Mack.

They go into the portal. They feel like they’re stretching and all of their weird dreams come alive. Mack’s dreams is putting shaving cream on but can’t get it off and then his face turns white. Jake dreams that Mack has turned him into a frog. They see monsters chasing after them in the portal. They run for their lives from the monsters and Jake extends himself to kick the monsters back and they run to the end of the portal. They are running so fast that they have to slow themselves down because they see the top of a volcano in the distance.

They land on top of the volcano. When they are on top, the volcano is about to explode. They start running, but Jake trips with the magic key in his hand. He drops the key and slides down the mountain. It is too late to go back for the key. The volcano is about to blow. They have just enough time to escape before the volcano explodes. They are sad that the key was lost in the lava. How will they get home without the key? What they don’t know is that the key isn’t actually lost in the lava. The evil Dr. Lavaface had faked the volcano explosion. Dr. Lavaface’s laboratory is under the volcano and he had pulled a switch to make Jake and Mack think the volcano had erupted. Now the key is in Dr. Lavaface’s hands. He plans to unlock other worlds and have his evil robot army take over each world: Clowntown, Waterworld, Cloudworld, Haunted World, Fairy Land, and Superhero Land. The evil robot army is made up of one billion blue and red robots. The red robots look like Dr. Lavaface with their helmets melting down their faces. The navy blue robots wear dark cloaks with tall boots. Dr. Lavaface had spent five months getting the army together. Dr. Lavaface himself has a red helmet with a microphone that allows him to tell the entire army what to do. For practice, there is a plastic world with puppet people. Dr. Lavaface would tell the robot army to warn the plastic puppet people that if they didn’t run, they would have their world destroyed. Dr. Lavaface switches the fake lava with 500 gallons of real, smoking hot lava. It is nearly impossible to escape.

Jake and Mack invent a robot. It is red. They’re gonna see what happened to the key and they want to find it. He goes in to pretend to be a red robot and then he breaks another robot. And when he does that, the robot falls down a trap door and tumbles down the volcano. Jake and Mack think it’s their robot that got broken. They fix the robot. And then the robot tries to explode them. They run from the robot, and Jake has a little gun he finds on the floor and he picks it up and aims it at the robot and shoots it and it falls to the ground.

They go to the volcano and there’s a secret door they push open. The robot is trying to find the key. Dr. Lavaface says, “Get back into your place or you will serve me some snails!”

And then it refuses to do anything, so the robots lock him up in the dungeon. And they take away the battery. Now he just looked like a robot that had been thrown out.

Jake and Mack go into the hall. They see a lot of dungeons and they open each one. Dungeon 5 actually holds the robot but they don’t know the battery got taken away and they look identical. There are ten dungeons.

Chapter 2

There’s a giant snail machine down the hall. First comes a giant snail pit. Then the snails get washed off in boiling water and the robots put them on plates. Then Dr. Lavaface calls out a number and the robot brings him that plate.

Jake and Mack’s plan is to follow one of the robots down the hall to Dr. Lavaface’s laboratory. There’s a little door to their left. They follow one of the robots but the trouble is, if the robot hears them, they get caught. And they get caught! The robot tries to explode them with his laser eyes. Jake recognizes their robot’s battery in this robot, but Dr. Lavaface programmed it to be bad. They run for their lives, and then they get chased by more robots. There’s one more room before Dr. Lavaface’s laboratory. It’s the lava room, where he keeps the 500 gallons of lava. There are little rocks Jake and Mack have to jump on in order to get to Dr. Lavaface’s laboratory, but Mack trips. Mack gets caught by a robot, and Jake says, “Now I have to find a robot and Mack? What’s next, I get caught?”

Jake looks down the hall — there’s a room with a sign that says ARMY ROOM. It’s white with conveyor belts marching on the ground. There are a thousand robots marching on the ground, and leading them is Dr. Lavaface. There’s a big robot-maker taking up half the room. Jake thinks, “If all these robots catch me, I am dead!”

He pretends to be a robot by walking mechanically. Mack and Jake always played robots. Jake thinks to himself, Mom’s gonna be so mad at me. It’s almost time for dinner.

Jake is able to blend in because he’s wearing a red shirt. He takes a step out of the army to see who’s leading it. Jake thinks to himself, It looks like Dad!

Then he walks up to the front of the army to talk to his dad. “Hi Dad!”

“Huh? What? Where?” said Dr. Lavaface.

Jake thinks to himself, That’s why he’s always late for dinner.

“Jake? What are you doing here?”

“Dad, we found the key in the backyard.”

“You did? Now we’ve got a little secret from Mom.”

Jake thinks to himself, I’m gonna get in so much trouble because Mack is supposed to be home by now.

“Five more minutes until my place shuts down and I go back with you.”

And then Jake said, “What about Mack?”

Chapter 3

“You brought Mack too?”

“Yes. I went to his house because I thought it was just a key and then he unlocked it and the portal appeared and we just came in the portal, and were captured by the robots.”

“The robots will never let me in the dungeon room,” Dr. Lavaface says. “They’re programmed to guard it.”

“Dad, what are you going to do with all the robots?”

“Make a movie! Mom knows that I’m a movie director, but she doesn’t know I’m doing this. When this turns into a movie, I’ll be famous. You can be famous with me. You can be in my movie. You can be the kid running down the hall with Mack, and I can be the evil Dr. Lavaface. But I’m making my movie in one week so I’m practicing it right now. That’s why I go off every day. The portals are just to shoot my movie everywhere. The robots have a movie program too so everywhere they go they show the movie. And that’s why I always eat late dinner. But we gotta go find Mack immediately because it’s going to shut down and everything’s going to be dark.”

“We have a new robot who’s good,” Jake says. “We made it.”

His dad says, “He can be in my film. He can be the only good robot and we can pretend to destroy him.”

And then Jake says, “So Dad, what are you gonna do with all the robots after you shoot your movie?”

“Make more of them.”

But as they’re running down the hall, Mack is in Dungeon 11 because that’s where humans go.

“Where is Dungeon 11?” said Jake.

“First you take a right, then you take a left, then you take a right, then you take a left, then you go straight, then you take a right, then you take a left, and then you’re there.”

“How long is that gonna take?” says Jake.

And then Dr. Lavaface says, “About, maybe, three minutes. I have a map of the dungeon. Here you are.”

“How long does it take to get out?” says Jake.

Chapter 4

“About two minutes from there,” says Dr. Lavaface.

“Do you think we can make it in time?” asked Jake.

“Maybe you can,” says Dr. Lavaface.

Jake gets confused with all the turns, but looks at the map and finds his way.

“Here we are in Dungeon 11.”

“Oh no,” says Dr. Lavaface. “What says Jake!”

“I left the dungeon key back at my office.”

“Stay here, I’ll throw you the key. You can get out with Mack even if I don’t make it out.”

Jake says, “Ok so go now.”

Dr. Lavaface started running.

“Here Jake, here’s the key,” says Dr. Lavaface.

“I caught it,” says Jake.

“Hurry up, we’ve only got 30 seconds!” yells Dr. Lavaface.

Jake unlocks the dungeon, but only the volcano shuts down. Jake quickly unlocks it, grabs Mack by the hand, and before Mack can say anything, “The doors are closing in ten seconds!” yells Dr. Lavaface. “Five seconds!” “One Second!” Jake and Mack dive for their life. They make it out, barely. Mack’s shoe falls off in the building but it’s too late to go back for it. Jake says, “Mom is going to be so mad at me. It is bedtime already.” Mack also thinks that too. They get the key out of Jake’s pocket and unlock the portal. They jump in the portal but they land on Cat Street, but they need to get to Dog Street. But first they need to go through Fish Street, which is very long. Jake says, “I should have brought the robot that I invented.”

“What can we do. We have walk to Fish Street. That’s gonna take forever!” said Mack.

“Maybe not,” says Jake

“We could stay in the other portal for one night and then we could open it and then go with our robot.”

“We’re already on Fish Street, we would have to go all the way back.”

Chapter 5

Mack said, “Oh no, we would have to go all the way back to the portal. Do you think Mom would be mad at us?”

“Maybe not, I’ll go in alone,” said Jake. “Mack, run back to the house and tell your mom and my mom that Jake and my dad are staying at a hotel. I’ll spend the night with Dr. Lavaface.”

Mack says, “How are you going to get in?”

Jake says, “The top of the volcano is fake lava. I hope he hasn’t switched it out yet or I’ll be dead.”

“Ok, now run,” says Mack.

Jake unlocks the portal with the key. He lands on the top of the volcano again. He’s about to jump in. Dr. Lavaface has a special material that can break the doors open and then he runs up the volcano. When Jake is about to jump into the volcano Dr. Lavaface jumps out and saves Jake before he dies. Dr Lavaface is hanging from the volcano with one hand and is about to fall in the lava, and he is slipping. His fingertips are on it now. “Jake I want you to know something. I have been planning the movies for 20 years. You can take over the business for me.”

“I can’t do that, it’s your business and I’m only a kid,” Jake says.

“Whatever you do, don’t tell mom about it,” says Dr. Lavaface.

Dr. Lavaface falls in. Jake is sobbing. Jake jumps over the hole in the volcano and into the portal. He runs down the streets to his mom. “You gotta see this! Come here!” He grabs his mom by the hand before she can even respond. He jumps into the portal with his mom. He says, “Dad is making a movie and he said I need to take over the business because he fell in the volcano.” And then Mom says, “Son, I want to tell you something. He told me about this a long, long time ago. And I forgot the secret. He said he wanted to pass it along to you someday. He forgot he told me the secret. His helmet is lava-proof so he’s not dead. He is coming.”

“You should hide! It’s the robots,” said Jake.

The mom hides behind a rock and the robots come out. There are four of them and two of them grab each arm, and the other two grabs each leg. They are holding him as Dr. Lavaface comes up. Dr. Lavaface had seen Jake and his mom from the computer in his laboratory. And then the robots say, “Obey us now or we’ll drop your son in the volcano.”

“Ok, I’ll obey you,” says Dr. Lavaface.

“Sych it,” says the robots.

The robots drop Jake, but the good robot comes out and saves him. The good robot flies out of the volcano. Jake jumps off of the good robot’s back, but just then, the good robot’s battery dies and it falls back in. Jake makes it safely, but with a little scrape on his back from falling down the volcano. Jake pulls out his gun and shoots the four robots. All the robots fall into the volcano. The mom and dad jump in the portal and Jake is the only one in the portal’s world. He looks at the world. The robots had a spell and the four robots were the most powerful so the world changes into a good world. All of the people come out from their houses that the volcano had destroyed. Jake jumps back into the portal. They have a feast dinner. They invite Mack but not Mack’s mom and dad because they didn’t want them to know about the secret chapter seven because Mack would be grounded. At the party they dance and have a big feast. They make a movie about it but it only belongs to Jake’s family.

19 years later, Jake’s makes a movie and his dad is retired but he watches the movie every day.

Adventure 1

Momo-Mickey is looking for regular dynamite and diamonds. He gets attacked by Luishead. Luishead uses a thing on his hand that can make mega-fireballs. Momo-Mickey uses his dynamite to make a very loud noise that knocks Luishead out and he find Obsidian in Luishead’s pocket when it felt out.

Momo-Mickey uses another of this dynamite to blast onto a building and then jump away. His hands, his right foot, his left leg and the right half of his hair and his left ear were the parts of him that were monster.  

He gets back to his base and finds sugar canes. Now he can make a book. He uses the book to make an enchanting table. He enchants all the diamonds he has. He enchants his diamonds to dynamite. Now he enchants his dynamite and takes his jet outside of the universe. Suddenly he gets attacked by Luishead. This time, Luishead has his staff and uses it to destroy Momo-Mickey’s jet. Momo-Mickey uses his mini jet to go to the  universe and he gets away and sets the dynamite and makes his new world.

The End

A Race for Friends

I stood nervously at the top of the mountain waiting for my turn.

“Aria Albright.”

My dreaded turn came up for the race. I took one last breath before doing the slope perched a foot away. I started the slope, making sharp turns, my long brown braided hair flying in the wind getting little snowflakes stuck in it. My poles bouncing off the gates swinging back. My turns cutting through the powdery snow leaving a wisp behind me. My skis going over the moguls (moguls are bumps of snow that are scattered everywhere). I fell on one of the moguls. Someone was shouting my name.

“Aria, are you okay?”

It was my twin sister Mackenzie who was shouting my name from the top of the mountain. I was okay. When I got up, I zoomed past everything in sight leaving a trail of sugar looking snow behind me (one time when I was little I thought the snow flying behind my dad was sugar and I ate it. It left a cold watery surprise in my mouth). Finally finished, I heard a faint voice from the top of the mountain call out, “Mackenzie Albright.” I knew she, just like I had, dreaded her turn, but all I have to say is she did all the same things that I did.

After the race, Mackenzie and I went home. Then I got an email that said me and Mackenzie were invited to have a sleepover at Stephanie’s house. When we arrived at Stephanie’s house, she was waiting at the door with three cups of hot chocolate. I looked down at the floor.

“Thanks,” Mackenzie said, “I owe you.”

“Yeah, me too,” I chirped in, looking down at the floor. Then we all burst into laughter.

“C’mon, follow me,” Stephanie said.

Stephanie invited us into her room. Her room was perfect for winter sleepovers because she had a fireplace that we roasted marshmallows in. She had a TV, video games, a laptop, and everything else you would need for a sleepover.

“So what are we going to do first?” Stephanie asked.

“How about we watch some TV first?” said Mackenzie.

“Ok,” Stephanie said, and she pulled up her favorite channel, Nick at Night.

And her favorite show was on, Full House. It was mine and Mackenzie first time watching Full House. But after about ten minutes we could tell why Stephanie really liked that show. Eventually, we got a little bit bored of watching TV.

Stephanie shouted at me all of a sudden, “Aria, you’re such a selfish brat.”

I was offended. “Oh yeah, am I?” I yelled back.

I was so angry with Stephanie I packed my sleepover bag and before anyone could say anything. I ran all ten miles home.

“How did you do in the race?” it was mom.

“You know,” I said.

“Honey, c’mere,” mom said her outstretched supporting arms hugging me.

“Mom,” I sobbed into her sweater. She didn’t seem to care. “I quit because I suck at skiing.”

“Aria, ,just ‘cause you fell doesn’t mean you suck at skiing,” mom said sweetly.

“Then why did Mackenzie not fall?” I yelled.

“This isn’t about Mackenzie,” mom replied.

Finally I decided to tell her about the sleepover with every single little detail.

“Sorry about Stephanie, her parents have always been so snotty, that’s probably why, and anyways, nobody’s perfect.”

Mom always cheers me up. And I guess she’s right, nobody’s perfect. Not me, not my friends, and definitely not Stephanie.

Mackenzie ran down the stairs and hugged me and then she said, “Come upstairs, we got a puppy.”

We raced upstairs. When we got upstairs a cute little pug puppy started licking me.

 

THE END

A Spell of Good

In the year 5018, once a month all the witches in New Paltz met up in a little shack. The shack had two rooms, one room was a potion room and the other one was a bedroom. These meetings were called GSWMs, which stood for Grand Secret Witch Meetings. The leader of the GSWM was named Gretel Lipe. She had two assistants. Their names were Lereta Scott and Joan Tuck. There were 50 witches but the witches split up into 25 and 25. Half went into a shack with Ms. Lipe and the other half split up into five groups. Five arranged the bedroom which had triple-decker bunk-beds and one regular bed. The other five dug out a bathroom hole and five went to the Bronx and spied on Ms. Lipe’s evil sister who had another group of witches.

Cornwall Connercobb stayed in the Bronx Riverdale with her 24 witches and split them up into three groups. Eight spied on and guarded the area. Eight had a meeting and drank butter-beer. Eight just chilled. In Miss Connercobb’s meetings, she tried to solve how to not look like corn so much. She was straight like a pencil and had yellowish skin. She had the silk that corn has for hair, but only a few strands of it. She always wore a wig. Sometimes the wig fell off. Then blue drool came out of her mouth. All the witches exploded into peals of laughter. Cornwall said she was very appalled at their impudent childish behavior. Afterward all the witches stopped laughing except for one or two.

“I’ll take your wands away if you two don’t shut up soon,” said Cornwall in her most witch-like voice after she cackled. Her cackle sounded horrible. It sounded like a dog with a bad cough.

Dear Miss Lipe,

I will get you. You know who I am. I shall plant a curse on you in your G.W.S.M. You will be under a trance, where you will be good forever. If you try to harm me, you will fail. I will have your wands taken away, before the night of the duel. Don’t bring anything but yourself. My spies will have taken away your wand. Buy a plane ticket to Hungary. I’ll send the money. If you don’t come, my spies will get you. My spies have magical powers. They could turn you into a roach and put you in their pocket. Keep this a secret. If you don’t, I’ll get you. I have immortal life. I’m disguised as the countess of Hungary when you get off the plane. Meet me at 3:00 A.M. sharp. Bring an assistant with you (only if you please) but don’t bring them to the ball. In the duel, wear your best black robe and your witch hat. We’ll dine in the best Hungarian Pastry shop for breakfast, for lunch we’ll dine in a fancy Hungarian restaurant, and we’ll do the same for dinner. Don’t worry about the money, I’ll pay, but do prepare to die. I might let you keep your wand, if I feel like it. Your plane flight will be at 11:30. My spies have no mercy. They hate you just as much as I hate you. Before the duel there will be a small party with the Count and Countess of Hungary. The Count and Countess hate you. Even though they act as though they like you (as a friend).

Yours Truly,

Cornwall

Over the coffee table in the potion room, Miss Lipe got the letter. She was so shocked that she dropped her cup of butter-beer and spilled it all over the table and got it all over the Witch’s Daily Magazine, which got on one of her witch’s assistant’s robes and that witch was quite mad. It was her- her- her SISTER CORNWALL! Her face turned pale as a white rose. She fell back in her chair and hit her head. She felt the letter and read it over and over again. Her face turned a mix of pink, white, orange, purple, gray, blue, aqua, indigo, and brown. “Wait, I need to find a way to keep my wand safe,” she said.

“Where should I hide my wand?” said Miss Lipe in a strangely obnoxious way.

“In the secret closet in the bedroom,” said Miss Tuck.

“They know where it is.”

“No they don’t.”

“How do you know?”

“I’ve been spying.”

“Really, Tuck?”

“Yeah,” said Miss Tuck.

“Great,” said Miss Lipe.

“Thanks.”

“Are you sure they don’t know?”

“Yep.”

“Cross your heart, hope to die, stick a needle in your eye.”

“Cross my heart, hope to die, stick a needle in my eye.”

The plane ride was very nice. There were sweet Hungarian pastries. The pastries were doughnuts filled with jello, and cream on the inside of the jello. Except that you can’t only eat sweets. She always ate sweets on the plane, even though the stewardess offered other foods.

After the plane ride, Miss Lipe got a very bad migraine and passed out for three hours! She was an hour late to the duel! And when she woke up, she felt discombobulated.

On the other hand, our dear friend Cornwall was very upset about that. Ms. Lipe had passed out in the trolley where you get your luggage, and everyone had seen her, but they had just kicked and pushed her around because they thought she was a dummy! When Ms. Lipe woke up, she found that she had quite a lot of bruises, and she was very upset about that.

Cornwall had made a very, very, very, long list of what she was going to scream at her sister. When Miss Lipe went to the pastry shop for breakfast, the bakery had closed, but Cornwall was standing right in front of the door and handed her a stale chocolate croissant, a roast beef sandwich with very stale, hard and thick roast beef. The bread wasn’t that pleasant either: it was moldy, a small pörkölt, and old water.

“Erm…thanks,” said Miss Lipe in a timid way.

“You’re welcome,” said Cornwall in a gruff voice.

There was a small note taped to the water bottle.

The party with the Count and Countess was canceled.

 

  • Cornwall

 

Miss Lipe was so disappointed that the party was going to be cancelled. She wanted to see the charades. The clock struck twelve o’clock midnight and she realized that she had three more hours until the duel.

She flung on her best witch robe, witch hat, and laced up her boots, and grabbed her broomstick, and dashed out the door. She mounted her broom and was off in a flash.

When she got there, Cornwall screamed at her sister because she was an hour late. At first, Cornwall said “Aredofphgzzzzaaaayyyybbbbhhhkkkabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz,” which was a spell that made you pass out. But Miss Lipe screamed “Alchercom,” which meant reject.

“Ihcfoyruftgujokploppyoiuhbtcv,” said Cornwall, which meant kill.  “Alcher. Cormbatcometikialcheerfomtomtomcom.” That meant shoot a laser into the hand, wand, and heart. The match went on for five hours until Miss Lipe screamed, “Cormbatcometikialcheerfomtomtomcoms.” Cornwall didn’t die because remember, villains never die. She just passed out.

Cornwall was put into a top witch hospital in Hungary. Cornwall had planted a curse on Miss Scott because when she came back she told everyone about her success and Miss Scott screamed at her and said that she was going to change groups and she did. Miss Lipe told Miss Scott that she was a jerk. Miss Scott screamed back that Miss Lipe was a bobblehead. The fight went on for a while, until Miss Scott took off on her broom and Miss Lipe took off on her broom and caught up to Miss Scott and jolted her off her broom. Miss Scott fell off her broom but grabbed onto Miss Lipe’s broom and then climbed back onto her own broom which Miss Lipe had jinxed so that when Miss Scott crossed the Atlantic Ocean she fell into a hungry shark’s mouth.

Dear Cornwall,

I hope your treatment goes well, so that I can kill you. I will give you five mandrakes a day, so that you will get better in two days. This time I won’t be nice and I’ll actually kill you.

Yours hately,

Miss Lipe.

P.S I will see you for a duel in London a week from tomorrow. This time, I’ll be the sponsor.

The end.

Abe Lincoln

One day long before he became President, Abraham Lincoln was selling things in a shop. Then there was a mysterious man with rags and had a barrel. He wanted to sell it. The man said that the barrel would change Abe’s life.Then he left.

Abe opened the barrel, there was a book inside. Abe loved reading so he opened the book. When he was done reading, he learned about slavery.When he looked outside, he saw the saddest thing he ever saw. He saw dark-colored people getting sold on auction! They looked very sad. They were chained together by the foot. Very, very sad, he thought. He imagined how it would be like if he was one of them and he imagined how they would miss their family if they got separated.

He wanted to stop it. But how? When he got home he tried to think about stopping it. The next day he saw more people on auction like yesterday! Now he was very mad but he didn’t have the power to stop them doing it. The people would easily kick him out! Still, he was very angry but how would he stop them? When he got home he saw a woman running, she stopped into Abe’s house. Abe’s heart was pounding. Was she the one he saw two days ago?! His mind had tons of questions to ask but nothing came out of his mouth. He was speechless.Then the woman spoke, “Hi my name is Harriet Tubman, I am a runaway slave.”

“How did you get to my house in North Carolina?” he asked.

“I was running in the woods and I found a house and I was very hungry and tired. My life on the plantation was hard because we had to pick cotton for the master, and get whipped by  the wife if I didn’t do good on weaving. I wanted to run away because of that but my husband didn’t want me to, so if he noticed me run away, he would tell my master and I would get caught.”

“Wow, so how did you finally escape?”

“I sneaked into the night while both of them were asleep. I took some food and started to head out. It was very dark and I heard the sound of squeaking noises, like mice and owls hooting. I ran for a long time until I got to the North and I saw the light on in your house.”

Then Abe said, “I want to free slaves, do you want to help me?”

Harriet said, “Sure, but we first have to try it ourselves to see if it’s safe and then we can free the slaves.”  

“Sure,” said Abe.

First they packed some food to eat just in case they started to get hungry and they took some water. Then they took off. While they were walking Abe was trying to find his compass but he just couldn’t find it.

Abe said, “Harriet I think we’re lost.”

After saying that sentence, he spoke too soon, so they found a cottage. He opened the door and they saw an old lady sitting by a fireplace.

Harriet and Abe asked the lady if she could help. “Can you show us how to get to freedom?”

The lady said, “Sure.”

“But where do we go?” asked Harriet.

“Go to the Underground Railroad,” said the lady.

“What is the Underground Railroad?” asked Abe.

“It’s a pathway in the woods that the slaves use to escape, but sometimes they still get caught.”

“Where is it?” asked Harriet.

“Five miles more north,” said the lady.

“But how do you know?” asked Harriet.

“I saw other slaves like you running through the woods and they stopped in my house too, but they got caught. It was very sad,” said the lady, filled with pity. “But I hope that you two don’t get caught.”

Harriet and Abe thanked the woman, and then started their journey again. They were in a forest and it was very cold, but they still walked and walked until they got to the Underground Railroad. It was a pathway with bushes around it and with trees. There were already footsteps there, so they followed the footsteps.

They were so happy. Abe thought he would be brave because after working so hard, going on a trip and being cold and scared, they finally found the place to lead them to freedom.

Suddenly they saw a white slave hunter and the slave hunter saw them.

Harriet and Abe were so frightened, they tried to run away but they were not fast enough.

So they got caught. They got lassoed.They were chained together by the foot walking in a straight line.                 

When they were heading to the South, Abe found a knife in the slave hunter’s pocket and Abe tried to cut the chains. Finally he broke it. It took two hours to break the chains open but the slave hunter didn’t hear them because he was deaf.

So they escaped easily.

It was still a long way to the north because they took two hours to break the chains and THAT was a big disappointment.

After a day they were running out of food but they were to the north. Finally they could free the other slaves because they knew where the Underground Railroad was. They went back to the old lady’s house and asked for a wagon.

“Can we have a wagon to help free the slaves?” asked Abe.

She said, “Sure, it’s outside in my backyard.”

Harriet thought: We can use it quicker and faster to get to the South because last time we had to walk on foot.

They took the wagon and freed more of the slaves at night. When they went back to the South, they took the slaves to the Underground Railroad. They pretended to be slave hunters so no one would think they were actually helping the slaves, and they hid the wagon with bushes.

Finally they freed all the slaves in two months. All the slaves thanked Harriet Tubman and Abraham Lincoln.

Abe said to Harriet, “If we didn’t do it together, we would have failed.”

“We did lots of teamwork the whole time,” said Harriet.

Then they built a house in the North instead of the South. They lived in the house for many years.

                                                  THE END

A Quest For Family

CRASH! A dark, furry, brown creature crashed into the clearing and ran off into the deep, dark night. It was a grizzly bear, and the forest it lived in was ablaze behind them. Plus, the grizzly (soon to be mama bear) was actually pregnant, and the cub would be out soon.

There had been a drought in California for a long time, and the forests had practically been waiting to be set on fire. And one finally had. The choice wasn’t good, as it was a giant forest filled with animals of all sorts, and the firetrucks’ sirens just made them more confused than ever. Some of them started running around and getting themselves roasted to crisps. Others ran off, trying to get out of the forest. Along with them was the Mama grizzly bear, trying to escape from the flickering flames, not to mention the loud siren noises, and making sure the unborn cub was safe.

The next morning, all was quiet. The fire was gone, but little wisps of smoke was all around the place, and everywhere you looked you would see burnt trees and scorched grass and dirt. Not many trees were left of the forest. But at the near border of the forest, there was a perfect circle of trees that had been left unscathed. In the middle of this peculiar clearing, there laid a dead grizzly bear. It had been seconds away from death, yet it still died.

When some humans came to try to clear the wreckage, they found the grizzly bear, lying down in the grass, dead. They called an animal specialist there, and it could tell that it had given birth there. No signs of the cub, boy or girl, anywhere. People didn’t think much of it. They thought the cub must have died, getting scorched by the fire by accident as soon as it was born.

In truth, the cub was alive unwell, as 1. it had nothing to eat (no mother milk), 2. it was lost, and 3. it was alone. The cub was scared, but managed to find a warm hole at the bottom of a tree to sleep in, and found a surviving bush that sprouted berries on it. After trying to eat for a bit (it was supposed to just eat mother’s milk only, not other things), it curled up and fell asleep at the hole in the tree.

After spending a few months trying to finish the berries on the bush, it could finally eat them easily and found a stream a ten minute trod from the tree home. When he visited the stream, he found some salmon and trout swimming in the water, unaware of the fire a few months ago. The cub tried in vain to catch some to eat, but only got a trout. Still, it was the most delicious thing he had ever eaten and as he ate, he thought about his mother. He wondered, where was she? Did she get burned? Did she go to heaven? Did she die because of something else? As far as he knew, she died because of the fire. All of a sudden, he wanted a family. He needed a family! Overcome by sadness, loneliness, and hopelessness, he retired to his tree, trying to hide tears, and fell asleep.

After a year living in the tree, he found he couldn’t fit in it any more. Sadly, he decided to explore the world to find a home, starting by walking along his stream. Remembering once he had overheard a little girl had sung a song about this moon river and traveling the world by his stream, he sung it in his head as he walked along the stream (He didn’t know english).

Moon River, wider than a mile,

I’m crossing you in style,some day,

La la, la la la laaaaa

(he couldn’t remember this part)

Lalalalalalalalala la,

Two (one?) drifters, off to see the world,

there’s such a lot of world to see,

We’re after the same rainbow’s end,

Waiting ‘round the bend,

Moon River and me.

After singing the song, he felt better and settled down for the night, dreaming about moons and streams and meeting a family.

The next day, he got up early and decided where to go. Would it be north, south, east, or west? He decided south. He began walking north. Soon, he realized his mistake and began walking the other way. He knew that animals could tell different directions— well, he could! MOST of the time. He wondered why they could and how. He couldn’t make heads or tails of it, so he took a little nap. The nap lasted longer that expected, as he woke up the next day.

He traveled for two years, two months, and two days, eating fish, berries, roots, and sometimes grubs. It was quite remarkable how fast he traveled, he had already crossed into South America, and into Peru at that. He found a nice forest there, and decided to settle down there for a bit, for a change from traveling. He thought about all the difficulties he had experienced, including a chase with wolves and getting battered by salmon tails. It had been a very tiring trip, but it was almost worth it-all he needed was a family to live with. Exhausted from the journey, he fell asleep….

“Hello? Hello? Can you hear me? Hello?” A voice said in a weird language (English). The young grizzly bear, who had still wanted to sleep more after the journey from California, rolled on it’s back and made a sound like this: “Grouwlllcchhh.”

“Oh,” said the voice. “Right, you’re a bear like me, so I’ll have to speak bear! Growwwllluchiaulll? (Who are you?)”

The young grizzly bear opened his eyes and saw another young grizzly bear staring down at him.

“Growwliciasuwla,” he said (I don’t have a name.)

“Hmmmm… I’ll have to teach you English!” said the other cub. “My name is Paddington, so your English name shall be Padton!!!”

He took “Padton” back to the den where he lived, and introduced him to his family. Luckily, they decided to take him in, and Padton looked around at the faces smiling at him.

He thought, Home. Yes, home. And home it was.

A Jittery Private Eye

 

There was a private eye

a jittery one

when he went on a mission

he jumped all around

Once he went on a mission

he went to the docks

the reason he did it,

was to capture an ox!

But when he did it

he jumped at a sound

the sound of an ox

made him run all around!

When he got back,

the leader said:

“Where is the ox,

you big noodle head?”

He said where it was

and he went to retrieve it

but when he got there

the ox was nowhere

He went back

to tell the bad news

to the leader,

who was in the middle of a snooze

When the leader would snore

the private eye jumped

When the leader woke up,

he yelled at the man:

“What are you doing without the ox?!!”

“I’m coming to tell you, that the ox is lost!”

The leader sent men

to go with the man,

to capture the ox

who was lost at the docks!

They went to the docks,

and saw the ox,

just walking around,

so they tried,

to capture the ox,

but instead,

they ran around the docks!

The private eye jumped,

probably 28 times,

and they captured the ox,

after at least ten tries

They went to the leader,

who said with a sigh

“wonderful job,

all of you did!”

And from then on,

when the private eye jumped,

everyone said,

“It’s nothing, noodle head!”

The leader made sure,

that the missions he went on,

no matter what,

would not make him jump.

A Great Vacation

I put the suitcase on the bed. I look around the room and it is beautiful. There is a balcony and a fireplace and even a refrigerator filled with yummy drinks.

Oh! I almost forgot. I’m Marissa and today I’m at Great Wolf Lodge for four days. I can’t wait to start an awesome vacation!

I start to unpack my things and put them in the dresser drawer. Then my little brother Andrew says to me, “You brought too many clothes.”

“No, I didn’t. You didn’t bring enough clothes,” I say anxiously.  

He looks in his drawer and there are only two pairs of everything, two shirts, two pairs of pants and socks, and two pairs of shoes. Then my mom says to us to get our bathing suits on so we can go to the waterpark at least for a little bit since we got here a little later than expected.

We are at the waterpark and the first water slide I go on is the Toilet Bowl. The Toilet Bowl is where you slide down a slide and you get in this big bowl and you go in circles. Then in the middle there is a slide. We go on a bunch of slides and then it is time to leave the waterpark. Then we go back to the hotel room and take showers.  

Then we go to look around. We see people holding wands and wonder what they were for so we ask at the front desk. They told us that it was for a Magic Quest. The Magic Quest is a game where you go on a quest or an adventure and you start at a station and it gives you points. It also gives you hints of which station is next and you keep going on and on until you’re at the last station. You even get to keep the wand!   

We ask the kids with the wands where we could get some and they said that there is a room up ahead that has things for the Magic Quest. We find the room and go up to the desk. We ask for a girl wand and a boy wand. My wand is dark pink with streaks of light pink and sparkly and Andrew’s is black with red streaks and a dragon on it. Ours both had MQ in the middle of them for Magic Quest. We go to start the quest but we can only do a little bit because it is almost time for dinner.

We go to the restaurant there and I get spaghetti with marinara sauce. Yum! My favorite!  When I get it, I eat it in two minutes. My brother has not even touched his food because he isn’t allowed to have something that unhealthy. He had a lot of junk the day before. After I finish I ask my mom if we can have dessert, but she said no so we had to leave.  

Then we get our PJs on. My brother and I both are allowed to play on our iPads for a bit. We both play Geometry Dash for a little. Then since it is early we watch a movie on Netflix called Step Dogs. My brother doesn’t want to watch it but he has to since he picked the movie a couple nights before. When the movie is over we have to brush our teeth. After I brush my teeth I read a chapter of Whatever After: Dream On. The book is really good so far. I am on chapter 11 in the book. The series Whatever After is about these two kids, Abby and Jonah, who have a magical mirror in their basement that takes them to princesses’ worlds such as Snow White, Cinderella, The Little Mermaid, and Sleeping Beauty. Then we have to go to bed. When we wake up we get dressed and get ready for a big day. I can’t wait for today because we are going to do more of the Magic Quest and go to the waterpark.  

“Hey Marissa!” says Andrew loudly.

“Yes?”

“I can’t wait for today! Can you?”  

“Yeah I’m super excited for today! I mean like we are going to do more of the Magic Quest and go in the waterpark!”

“Come on guys, let’s go!” says my mom.  

We get to the waterpark and I just get poured on by the giant bucket of water that said Great Wolf Lodge on it. I am going on the slides and they are really fun!

Then we go to eat lunch at a restaurant out of Great Wolf Lodge. The waitress comes up to our table to order food and I ask for a grilled cheese with fries. Andrew gets mac and cheese. While we are waiting for the food, Andrew and I play hangman on the paper that you can draw on, on the table. I let Andrew choose the word first because usually I always go first on everything. He finally thinks of a four-letter word.

“Really, a four-letter word!?”

“What’s the problem, it’s just hangman,” he says angrily.  

“Whatever,” I say. Then I guess the first letter.  

“M,” I say while he puts it on the paper.  

“It has to be Mine,” I say to him.  

He looks at me. “How did you guess that so fast?”

“Because all you know is Minecraft.”  

“Oh yeah, I do know Minecraft,” he says, surprised.  

Finally our food comes.  It looks so good and yummy! I can probably eat this in two minutes too. I take a bite into it and then I realize that it was so good and I want to eat more. Then we all finish and we have to leave.  

We do more of the Magic Quest when we got back. I like how when we are on one of the stations it gives you hints for the next station.  

“We did a lot today — let’s go eat dinner,” I tell Andrew.

So this time for dinner we get it delivered to our room. I get mozzarella sticks and a hotdog.  We watch the movie Boxtrolls. Then we have to go to bed.  

When we wake up, we go downstairs to eat breakfast. We wear our bathing suits under our clothes because we decide to go straight to the waterpark. I have pancakes for breakfast and they are really good!  

Then we went to the waterpark. We did more water rides and I kept going on the Toilet Bowl. That one is my favorite ride. Then we go to the Magic Quest. I finally get up to the station. It is my favorite station so far because it has fairies and I love fairies. Then we spend a lot of time on the Magic Quest and we almost finish.  

“Come on guys, let’s go. Let’s save some Magic Quest for tomorrow. It’s our last day tomorrow,” mom said loudly. We go back to our room to get dressed nicely since we are meeting my mom’s friend at a restaurant nearby. We are finally at the restaurant and my mom’s friend is already there. We say our hellos and then order our food. This time I get pasta with butter, but that means that we have to eat a healthy dinner because we haven’t been eating very well this vacation. We eat our food and it is really good. Then we say our goodbyes and leave.  

Then we go swimming in the pool. My dad is throwing us up into the pool. We play toothpaste and have races. We are the only ones there so we have the whole pool to ourselves. I have so much fun at the pool because it was our first time. Then we play on our iPads and chill for an hour or two. I text my friend Gianna because she has just moved and I want to see how the new house is going. I Facetime her and we talk and talk and talk as always.  

Then we go eat dinner. We eat at the restaurant there because we hadn’t since the first day. We get steak and salad for dinner. The steak is really good but I don’t really like the salad. We finally get dessert for a change. I get vanilla ice cream and Andrew gets chocolate ice cream. It is really yummy.  We finish dinner and go back to our hotel room. We get in our PJs and went to bed.  

When we wake up I am so sad because it is our last day and we are leaving tonight. We have to go eat breakfast so I get dressed and we went downstairs. I get french toast with syrup and chocolate milk. Yum! After breakfast we go to the pool. We play more toothpaste and I do a lot of flips and gymnastics. That is my favorite part about the pool: you can do a lot of gymnastics. I go in the hot tub and it is really warm! Andrew does the ice bucket challenge and he freaks out when he pours it on himself. He runs into the hot tub and screams.  

We go to eat lunch. I get spaghetti with marinara sauce again and mozzarella sticks. Yummy! Yummy!  

After lunch we do more of the Magic Quest. We are almost finished so we only have five stations left. We are on the last one and we finally finish it. We go to the front desk to get a prize. I get a glass snowman and Andrew gets a slinky.  

We have to go back to the hotel room to start packing. I am so sad because we are leaving in a half an hour. We are finally done packing and have to leave. I am so sad that we had to leave because I have had so much fun these four days at Great Wolf Lodge. But I can’t wait to write about this in my morning journal at school tomorrow and I can’t wait to see my friends again. We’re walking out the door and I say to myself, “Goodbye Great Wolf Lodge — hopefully I’ll see you next year!”

The End

7 Keys

A few days ago, thought Maddie, it all happened few days ago.

A few days ago, she and Sophie went into the woods and found five keys. They didn’t know what these keys did but they seemed to be some sort of magnets. As soon as they dug the keys out, the keys started to shake and rose up in the air. They zoomed forward into the woods. The five keys each had a drawing of a dragon on it. The keys led them to a waterfall but they zoomed behind the waterfall into a cave. That cave was filled with golden money and coins. They wanted to take out all the money but as soon as they got in the cave, they couldn’t get out. Where they had entered was now a solid wall. Now that they were trapped inside, they had nothing to eat, drink, or do.

She and Sophie were really far away. “We should get out,” Maddie shouted.

“Yes, but how?” Sophie shouted across the cave. Sophie and Maddie were twins and both had jet black hair. They had almond-shaped hazelnut eyes framed with bangs.

“Keep talking and shouting,” said Sophie. “Then we should be able to find each other and track where the other person’s voice is.”

They tried for hours, but the cave had an echo so nobody was getting anywhere. They didn’t know it, but they were actually getting further away from each other.

“I hear water!” exclaimed Maddie. She followed the sound of water and found the keys.

“We had five keys before, didn’t we?” Maddie called out to Sophie.

“Yes we did,” replied Sophie.

“Well, now we have seven keys,” Maddie said back. The seven keys were floating in the air and started hitting themselves against a wall.

“Maddie?” Sophie called. “Why are there wolves in here?”

“Oh, they’re just statues,” Maddie said.

“Then why are they moving?” said Sophie.

Sophie glanced at the glowing red eyes and their paws slowly moving towards her.

“Run!” Sophie and Maddie exclaimed at the same time.

They ran, but they didn’t know where they were going. They ended up following the keys but instead of going through a wall, they went through a wall of water. They hadn’t realized it, but they had been in the cave for one day. They picked up the keys which were on a rock in the shape of a circle with one key sticking up at the bottom. Since it looked like a toy that you spin, Sophie spun the keys and each of the dragons on the keys looked like a dragon moving in a circle. They picked up the keys and went home because they were able to get through the waterfall again. They ran back home and wrote their adventure down in their journals.

The next day at school, they showed all their friends their story but no one believed them. After school that day, Sophie and Maddie showed their friends the waterfall where they were yesterday. Once again, when the kids entered, the wall turned solid behind them and after one day they came out from the waterfall.

“Now do you believe us?” said Maddie.

“Yes we do,” said her friend.

That night Sophie and Maddie went home and thought about it all. They looked at the seven keys that had brought them to the waterfall.

“That,” said Maddie, “was one crazy adventure.”

“I agree,” said Sophie.

 

Part 2

 

Now that Sophie and Maddie had the keys, they didn’t know what they could do with them, but they realized that the keys could serve as entertainment. One day, when Maddie was holding the key and rubbing it like a coin, little wisps of smoke came out and said, “You have taken me out from thousands of year. I am the Wind Goddess. I have been trapped in these keys for thousands of years. Now that you have freed me, you may get one wish.”

Maddie thought and thought. She finally said, “Please, may I have three more wishes?”

“Yes, that is a wish so your wish is granted. What are the wishes you would like?”

“Firstly, I would like everybody in the world to be happy. Secondly, I would like there to be no war. Thirdly, I would like everybody to be treated equally in the world.”

“I am impressed!” said the Wind Goddess. “Most people would have asked for money. But you have asked for the good of other people.”

Maddie was astonished. “Well, I just want people to be happy. Money can’t buy everything, you know.”

“I am granting you and your sister a visit to where I live, up in the clouds,” exclaimed the wind goddess. Sophie and Maddie each took one of her hands and they drifted up to the sky.

“Why are my clothes changing?!” exclaimed Maddie.

“Up in the sky, your clothes will get very wet and moist. These new clothes that you’re wearing will make you feel light.”

Down on earth, Sophie and Maddie’s parents were wondering what happened to them. One second, they were in their room, and the next, they were gone.

“I don’t care,” said their dad. “I hope they haven’t gone to that forest again. I hope they know where they’re going.”

“I wonder where they are then,” said their mother.

“Oh I wouldn’t worry,” said their father. “They’re probably off on some goofy adventure.”

Up in the sky, Sophie and Maddie were flying all around the kingdom. It was made of rubies and silver crystal.  Inside the palace was a grand feast prepared for them.

“I have never seen so much food in my life!” said Sophie.

“Well yes,” said the Wind Goddess. “We’ve prepared this feast and kept it here for 1000 years until someone released me and asked for the proper gifts.”

They sat down and had the feast. Nobody said a word while they were eating because the food was so good, they didn’t want it to become cold. When dessert came in, then they started talking because cake could not become cold. It would stay the same temperature.

“Today we had a very interesting time,” Sophie told the Wind Goddess. “May I ask you why you were trapped in this key?”

“Okay… One thousand years ago, I was up here in the clouds and lived normally. One day, a visitor came up here for the first time. We granted him a great feast, but he got greedy and trapped me in seven keys so he could rule the land of the clouds. He didn’t know that he could get destroyed ruling this land, so one day he exploded into red dust and then nobody ruled for the rest of the time I was traveling. But now that I’m free, I can rule as a good leader,” explained the Wind Goddess.

“I think I should bring you back to your home,” said the Wind Goddess. “After all, it has been almost six hours since you left.”

“Okay, take us home,” said Sophie.

So the Wind Goddess flew Sophie and Maddie home.

“We shall never forget you!” exclaimed Sophie.

And they never did.

 

THE END

Murder on May Street

CHAPTER ONE
Dong! Dong! Dong! Shoot! Sasha thought. I’m late for class. It’s five to nine, if I run I’ll be just barely on time. But there’s no running in the halls. I hope no one sees me.

“Late for class again, Ms. Tiddid? Detention!” Ms. Eleray said as Sasha not-so-sneakily snuck into class.

“Sorry,” she squeaked. “My sister held us up getting to the…”

“I did not ask for an explanation,” Ms. Eleray said.

“I can’t believe Missy got you detention again,” said Noel, Sasha’s best friend.

“I know, but at least it was only Ms. Eleray. Think what would happen if it was Ms. Triller,” Sasha said.

“I heard somebody was five minutes late and she took their textbooks and snapped them in half so they had to buy a new ones. Yeah, that’s right, all seven of them. At. Once.”

“One time, I heard somebody asked her what a word meant, but it was accidentally a curse, so she hung them from their pinky toes for two hours.”

“Yeesh. She is one tough teacher. Anyway, now I unfortunately have to go to math and I’m going to be late.”

“I have a free period,” Sasha said, “I have a social studies essay to work on.”

“See you in advanced science. I hope there’s no homework. I already have so much it touches the moon.”

“That reminds me. I also have to do an essay on the nine moon dusts and their uses for astronomy.”

A few miles away, something dreadful happened on May Street….

CHAPTER TWO
A scream cut through the warm air. Martin Tiddid lay dead on the sidewalk. There was a cut right across the middle of his throat. The papers he had been carrying lay strewn on the ground. It had been a peaceful morning, slightly over seventy degrees. But all that had been ruined now. “Martin, oh Martin. How could she tell the kids?” Maria thought. She got out her phone and called the school. Then she went back inside.

Tears dripped from Sasha’s cheeks as she ran toward home. “Want to come in for some tea, dear?” Ms. Willow called from her porch.

“No! Family emergency! Sorry!” Sasha yelled back.

“Oh! That’s nice,” Ms. Willow said.

Sasha ran on. “She is a bit wacky,” Sasha thought, “but all in all Ms. Willow is really very nice.”

Sasha skidded to a stop in front of her house. She walked to the gate and undid the latch. She looked at the flowers and right then every single one seemed to be an insult to her father. She opened the door. Right away something seemed wrong. Her mother wasn’t there to greet her like she usually was when she came home. But she was probably just upstairs in her room crying, Sasha thought. So she went up to check on her. She wasn’t in her bedroom either. Sasha looked through the whole house. She finally found her mother stuffed under her sister Missy’s bed. She had duct tape over her mouth and her hands and feet were tied together. She kind of looked like an upside down air balloon.

“Mmm mmm mmm!”

Boom! The door of Missy’s closet flew open and five guys dressed in silver burst out. They grabbed Sasha and stuffed her in a bag. She cursed. Loudly. Then she called them a few not-so-pleasant names. “You’ll shut up if you know what’s good for you,” said a rough scratchy voice. Then came a sound like a monkey being run over by a fire truck. Sasha realized it was laughter. Sasha heard a door slamming and she got hit on the side of the head by something that felt like stone. She heard some people talking in thick Russian accents.

”We better get moving before the people from Project Rosewell get here. They’ll flip if they find out someone else got in. Remember our cover story.” Thwack!

“We know the cover story, Grandolf. Shut up or she’ll hear us!”

“God, don’t hit me at least,” Grandolf muttered.

Sasha found the pocket knife she always kept for emergencies. She started sawing a hole in the bottom of the bag. It took a long time but her kidnappers were moving slowly. Eventually, she made a hole and fell out of the bag. Quickly, she kicked the guy who was holding the sack, tripped the guy next to him, hit him in the head, did a flip, hit one of the other guys and, while doing flips, conked the other guy out on the head with her fist. When she looked up she saw that she was in a cement tunnel but she didn’t know which way to go. She turned down the left passageway, scared for what was to come.

 

CHAPTER THREE
Sasha paused for a second to look at the wall. There was a little sword painted on it. Probably just an old scribble, she thought. She kept walking. About an hour later, Sasha came to a room. There were about twenty people bustling around. She stepped back into the hallway and peeked around the doorframe. They seemed nice enough, but you could never know. Sasha had learned that the hard way. Suddenly, a lady’s head whipped around. Sasha pulled back her head, but she thought the lady might have seen her golden hair whip through the door frame.

“Hey you!” the woman shouted.

“Who, me?” said a man walking past the door.

“Not you, Arnold! Her. Show yourself!” the woman yelled.

Sasha raced back down the hall, heart pounding. She turned a corner but kept running. Her feet started to hurt. She stopped to catch her breath. The hallway split off here. Sasha didn’t know which way to go. The hallways looked exactly the same. She turned left and ran into a small room. It connected four hallways, including the one Sasha had come from. She slowly turned around. At once she saw that she had made a mistake. Now she didn’t know where she had come from. She ran through the passageway in front of her and came into another room. She saw a piece of paper on the floor and picked it up.

 

It read: Dear Martin, Happy Anniversary. 20 years! That’s a big achievement. They have another mission for you soon, but enjoy your day off. From Diego.

 

Martin was her dad’s name. It must be a coincidence. She put the paper in her pocket. Then she ran down the hallway to the left. She was about to turn right, but something caught her eye. On the wall was a small arrow drawn with a sharpie. It was pointing straight ahead. Sasha wasn’t sure what to do. Half of her wanted to follow the arrow, but the other half of her wanted to run home screaming bloody murder. She decided to follow the arrow. She went down the hallway and she came into another room that looked exactly like the other three. She saw another arrow on the wall. Again, she followed it. When she got to the next room, she saw it was much bigger. There was a grand staircase that split off to either side in front of her.

There was a huge balcony on either side of the stairs. All of a sudden, Sasha heard footsteps coming down the stairs. She saw a passageway off to the side of the stairs and went through it.

Sasha peered back around the doorway and saw a tall woman with beautiful blonde hair in red shiny heels and a black suit walking through the passageway where Sasha had just come from. As soon as the lady had disappeared around the corner, Sasha ran up the stairs. She walked across the balcony and went through a doorway that lead to a small room with walls covered with bookshelves. There were thousands upon thousands of books. She started looking at the titles: Karate for Dummies, Fiddling 101, World Records, The Diary of Jan Yavonich, and many more. She looked around for her favorite book: Treasure of the Ruby. She found it and sat down for a second to look it over. She had lost her copy of it a few years ago and had never known where it had gone. When she opened the front cover, she found, to her surprise, it was her old copy with her name in it.

“What? How did this get here?” she wondered aloud. She moved to one of the loveseats by the windows. Soon she was absorbed in the book. She didn’t move for hours. Sasha was awakened from her trance by the sound of footsteps on the stairs. She dove under her chair. A woman wearing a gray sweater and black jeans walked in. Sasha was hoping the woman would just grab a book and leave, but the woman sat down in the chair across from Sasha, picked up a book called Matters of the Mind and sat down to read. Sasha spent the next few hours stuck under that chair with a leg cramp. The woman would not stop reading. Eventually, she closed the book and Sasha thought, “Phew. Now I can get out from this chair.” But the woman just picked up another book and began to read.

A few minutes later, a man walked in and said to the woman, “Allie, we need your help in the office.”

“Okay,” the woman said. “I’ll be there in a sec.” The man left the room. The woman put a bookmark in the book and closed it. She left the book on the chair, left the library, and closed the door. Instantly, the light shut off.

“Must have an automatic light system,” Sasha thought. She crept out from under the chair and opened the door and, instantly, the lights flicked on. She walked out and closed the door quietly. Sasha walked down the hallway. As she walked, she said to herself, “Wait a second… what the heck? How could all this fit under my house?”

She stopped walking and spun around. “Aha!” she said. “I thought I saw something green behind the radiator in the library.” Behind her was a big burly guy with a handle bar mustache. He looked like a strong man that had just escaped from the circus. Sasha flipped backwards and did a cartwheel kick. The man was knocked out cold. She heard footsteps mounting the stairs and so she ran through the nearest door. This room was weird. It looked like she had just stepped into a giant fishbowl. It was giant and round like a globe with a huge hole in the top, but the hole was covered with duct tape. Sasha held her ears to the door. The footsteps passed the room. She heard a door open and then close. Sasha left the room and ran straight down the hall into another one. She was curious about these rooms now. She burst into the next room and immediately regretted her decision.

There was a long, wooden table with dozens of people around it. For a moment there was only silence. Then someone yelled, “Grab heeeerrrrrrr!!!” Everybody surged towards her. They strapped her to a board and nailed her to the wall.

 

CHAPTER FOUR

“What do you know?asked a lady in a baggy grayish brown shirt and gray sweatpants covered in dirt and dust.

“N-nothing. IhadjustheardthatmydadhaddiedsoIranhomeand…” Sasha went on and on and spilled out her entire story and ended with “andsopleasedon’tkillmeit’snotmyfault.”

“Really? Go get the truth serum, Malin.” A man came back a few minutes later with a small bottle of yellow potion. They forced a drop of it into Sasha’s mouth. It tasted like banana smoothie.

“Where are the Silvers hiding?” the lady asked.

“I don’t know. Who are the Silvers? What are you talking about?” Sasha asked.

“Oh,” the lady said. Suddenly, the women pulled out a small perfume bottle and spritzed her with it. Sasha fell unconscious. She woke up in her house, not remembering a thing from the day before. She walked to her sister’s room and kicked open the door.

She yelled inside, “Get up you sleepyhead and get ready for school!” like she did every morning. Usually her sister grunted back but today there was no reply. Sasha didn’t notice. She had seen the closet door opened and Missy’s shoes strewn all over the floor. Then, she remembered what had happened the night before. She left Missy’s room, not saying a word. She flattened herself against the wall and peered around the door frame. When she was sure it was safe, she ran back to her room, grabbed her army knife, her emergency first-aid kit, her emergency fire kit, and a jump rope she had from when she was little. She stuffed it all in her backpack. She crept back into her sister’s room and dropped through a trapdoor, into the cement hallway she had been in the night before.

She retraced her steps but when she got to the room with the four hallways on each side, she forgot which way she had gone before. She decided to bear left. She searched every nook and cranny in that room, but there wasn’t the sharpie arrow from last night anywhere. In her search, Sasha had forgotten which passageway she had come in through. She went down the hallway to the right. This room looked just like all the other rooms she had been in in this maze. “Because that’s exactly what this is,” she thought, “a maze!”

She wandered around for a little while before sitting down in one of the rooms. Sasha jammed her hands in her pockets. She felt a piece of paper and pulled it out. It was the letter from last night. She studied it. Now that she thought about it, she recognized the name Diego. Then a memory came flooding back to her. She remembered a hooded figure entering her house at night. It was about 9:00 p.m. Sasha was a little girl. She was hiding behind the door frame. “Diego!” her dad said. “How are you?”

“Great,” the man said. He pulled back his hood to reveal big eyes and bright red cheeks.

“So, how are we doing this?” Martin asked.

“Simple really, though it might hurt a bit. I take a bit of your blood with a needle and you sign the contract with it.” Then the man, supposedly Diego, took out a long thin needle. Sasha’s dad held out his hand. Diego put the needle ever so lightly on his finger and then pushed down. Hard. He pulled the needle back. Martin took the needle and signed the contract. The memory ended there.

“Diego made Dad sign something. But what?” Sasha said to herself. She got up and walked down the hallway to the right. She turned left and couldn’t believe it! She had found the staircase! She was curious, she wanted to know about what the people in the room had been doing before they nailed her to the wall. She creeped down the hallway and peeked into a door. It was the room. She recognized the long oak table. The people were there again. Sasha overheard them talking.

“Martin is in the Cropher Dome. He will come out when the time is ripe. I feel bad for Maria. She had the worst part of it,” said a high, squeaky voice.

“The most important thing is, how did Sasha get in here? You don’t think Martin disobeyed orders, do you?” said another voice, this time low and deep.

Then the first voice said, “Nah. He’s one of the best. Y’know, the Silvers probably attacked her the day Martin staged his death. They think he’s dead, after all.”

Sasha crept away from the door. She tried not to get her hopes up. But it was hard not to. Her father might be…alive?

Space Call Book #1: Battle on Mars

Chapter 1: Crash Landing

 

Once upon a time, there was a man named Mike. He worked for the Republic of Space Call. His job was to help the Republic of Space Call find new worlds.

“Your new spaceship is ready. It’s time to find new worlds,” the Captain said. Mike went to the spaceship.

“Very cool!” Mike said loudly and excitedly. He got into his new spaceship with the Captain and started up the controls. He flew into space very fast but suddenly, he lost control of the ship.

“Oh no, I just lost control of the ship, Captain!”

“What?!” the Captain said.

Then, Mike saw a red planet ahead. Suddenly, they crashed on Mars. Luckily, the Captain and Mike were alright. The Captain asked, “How are we going to get back?”

“We need a radio to get back,” Mike answered.

Mike and the Captain looked at the broken spaceship and they suddenly felt tired. There was a fire in the front of the spaceship. There was too much fire to even see the front. The wings were bent and the windows had holes in them. And inside the spaceship, there was a lot of sand. Mike said, “Did you bring the radio with you?”

“Yes, I brought the radio with me. Duh,” the Captain said.

“How are we going to find that radio?” Mike said.

“Didn’t I tell you that I have it right here?” the Captain yelled at him angrily, shaking his fist.
Chapter 2: Captured

“Let’s use the radio to get back.”

“Okay,” the captain said in a low voice, his voice sore from yelling.

The Captain tried to use the radio to get back, but it was broken from the crash landing. Then, the Captain and Mike heard voices.

“Who stands there?” the Captain said in a brave voice.

Out of a crater, a dozen aliens jumped out with axes and guns that shot sticky bubblegum. The biggest alien said, “Put your hands up, or we will attack!” The Captain and Mike put their hands up at the same time. The aliens took them to their home in a crater and put them in a prison.

Mike asked the Captain, “How are we going to get out of here?”

“I don’t know,” the Captain said.

One alien said, “Our leader is coming.”

Then, out of a big hole, the leader alien came out. The leader said, “Why are you here?”

“Your dumb aliens took us here,” Mike said.

The next day the Captain and Mike planned their escape. When it was breakfast time, Mike flipped the table over and he and the Captain ran out of a hole and onto the planet’s surface. To their surprise, there was a big ship that bore the symbol of the Republic of Space Call. It had a come from the Republic. They ran inside the ship and the pilot greeted them.

“When we didn’t hear from you, we knew you crash landed on this planet because we set a tracker on your spaceship before you left.”

The ship went back to the Republic of Space Call but Mike stayed behind. Back on Space Call, the Captain was sending information to Mike. The Republic of Space Call troopers, named the B-7 Men and the ATPTs, planned their attack on the aliens. After only one hour of planning and ten minutes of getting ready, they flew their ship to the alien planet of Mars.
Chapter 3: The Battle

When they landed their ships, they took out their weapons and loaded them with bullets. They blew the door to the alien’s home open. The alien guards called in their troops. The battle had begun. The aliens fired their bubble gum. The Captain said, “B-7 Men…attack!” The alien forces started to fall back. Just then, another group of aliens came in and fired back at the B-7 Men. Then, the Captain ordered the ATPTs to help the B-7 Men. An ATPT fired his rocket gun. BOOM! The rocket exploded, sending tons of aliens backwards. The alien leader sent in his alien tanks. They fired their bubble gum, which knocked the man who had the rocket gun backward. Then three huge ATPTs fired at the aliens, sending them backwards.

The alien leader commanded, “Fire the big guns at the legs of that thing!”

“Yes, sir!” said one alien.

Then the APTP with the rocket shot the big guns and said, “Take that!” But the alien leader jumped out of the way.

“You are too slow!” the alien leader said.

Then, the ATPTs started firing laser cannons like mad. The alien leader sent in a big tank to shoot down the ATPTs’ laser cannons. An alien fired his cannon at one of the ATPTs and he fell down. The aliens were winning.
Chapter 4: Losing

The aliens’ cannons were blasting down the ATPTs. The Captain called for reinforcements. The call came through. Then, the Captain said to his men, “Fall back!”

The men did what he said and fell back. They hid in craters so the alien cannons could not hit them. But, their heads were still sticking out. Then, the alien fighters came out of the hangar and dropped bombs on the ATPTs’ heads. The men went even deeper into the craters. The aliens started to move forward. The ATPTs set a few bombs. BOOM! The bombs blew up. The alien fighters were destroyed. The Captain’s men came out of the crater and charged at the aliens and blasted down the aliens’ laser cannons.

“Good job!” the Captain said, pumping his fist high in the air.

“Thank you!” his troops said in a loud voice.

The aliens’ big guns fired at the Captain’s troops. The Captain’s troops started dying out fast. Then all of a sudden, out of the clouds, came five space cruisers. They landed on Mars to help the Captain’s men. And out of the first ship came Admiral Vissa. He had a gray shirt with four blue squares on the top and four red squares on the bottom. He had a gun holster with DC15 pistol.

“Hello, guys,” Admiral Vissa said. “What’s going on? Are we losing or winning?”

 

Chapter 5: Three Traitors

“We are losing,” Officer Wilson said.

“Well, not for long,” Admiral Vissa replied. He commanded his troops to charge the aliens. The battle was going well for Admiral Vissa’s troops. Then, the Captain had a meeting with the other leaders. He told his troops that Mike was spying on the enemy to give the Captain’s troops information.

Later, Admiral Vissa and the Captain were alone at the base. Suddenly, the Captain pointed a big gun at Admiral Vissa’s face. The Captain was bad all along. Out of nowhere, two snipers came into the room and pointed their guns at the Captain.

“Why did you do this to us?” Admiral Vissa asked.

“Well, I had to,” the Captain said.

“But why?”

“It’s hard to explain,” said the Captain. Several aliens came into the room as he spoke.

“Oh no, this is not good,” Admiral Vissa said and headbutted one alien in the butt. The alien fell over and dropped his gun. Admiral Vissa picked up the gun and shot down the other aliens. The Captain ran out of the room and sent in more aliens. “Get down the air vent because there are too many aliens to fight back!” Admiral Vissa commanded. The snipers and Admiral Vissa went down an air vent but the aliens were too fat to fit in.
Chapter 6: Home, Sweet Home

When the snipers and Admiral Vissa came through the air vent, Mike and Officer Wilson were waiting for them.

“What happened there?” Mike asked.

“The Captain is a traitor,” a tired looking sniper said. The snipers left and went to bed leaving Admiral Vissa alone with Mike and Officer Wilson.

“And so are we,” Mike and Officer Wilson said together and captured Admiral Vissa.

“You’ll never be saved,” Mike said.

“I’m not going to be in your silly trap for long,” Admiral Vissa replied as he was put in jail. The next day, the good snipers got him out of jail with some dynamite. BOOM! The jail bars fell down.

“What was that?” Mike yelled.

Admiral Vissa walked up to him and said, “I told you that I wouldn’t be in this silly trap for long.”

“We’ll get you back!” Mike said.

“I don’t think so,” Admiral Vissa replied.

Before they opened the door, Admiral Vissa and his men set liquid tabana in the alien jail. BOOM! The alien jails were destroyed. When they got outside, one of the pilots said there were alien spaceships near Mars trying to keep them on the planet.

“We’ll have to destroy the alien fighters to get back to Space Call. For now, the aliens have retreated. And we have won.”

The Space Call took off and they went into space and tried their best to win.

 

To Be Continued…

Watermelon Specialty

Chapter: 1

 

One day, the Guardians of the Galaxy went through time and space in a portal inside Star Lord’s Milano — a blue and orange ship that looked like a huge jetpack. It had a beak-shaped front, a photon energy windshield, and all the newest technology. They were going back in time to eat a watermelon. They went back to Earth and bought a watermelon at a store named Ralph’s. The time was 11:58 PM on December 31, 1999 in New York, NY. The store was at closing time and the Guardians of the Galaxy barely made it out in time to see the ball drop in Times Square. They also didn’t get to eat the watermelon.

When the ball dropped, it emitted a strange light. The ball opened and time cops flew out and arrested the Guardians of the Galaxy.

“You are under arrest for stealing one of the priceless infinity stones. You will now be sentenced to seventy-eight years in prison,” they said.

“Hey, we didn’t steal. We just bought the first watermelon we found,” Star Lord said.

“An infinity stone? Hidden in a watermelon? Ridiculous!” the time cop said.

Star Lord took the watermelon and threw it on the ground. An orb rolled out of the watermelon. The time cops opened the orb and saw a blue infinity stone.

“How can this be?” they asked.

Thor came down to earth and said, “It is true. Only one of the six infinity stones are hidden on a planet. The others are lost somewhere in space or on asteroids.”

The time cops told the Guardians of the Galaxy that they were free to go.

Thor took the orb and the infinity stone up to Asgard and he put it in their most heavily guarded safe. When the effects of the time travel wore off, Groot felt drowsy. Drax felt like he had seen a ghost and almost fainted. Gamora fell down to the floor in shock and Star Lord said, “Well you’re all a bunch of babies, except for Rocket.” Rocket hadn’t fallen down.

Then Rocket fell down and said, “Come on, dude, get me some water.”

Star Lord gave Rocket a glass of water and Rocket said, “Ah, I was just pretending.”

Then Yondu came aboard and said, “Well, where’s the watermelon?”

Groot said, “I am Groot.”

Rocket translated. “Thor took it and put it in a vault. Apparently it had an infinity stone.”

Yondou got off the Millano and said, “Well, at least you didn’t die.”

When he got out, a watermelon fell out of the sky and landed in his arms and it started raining watermelons.

Yondou said, “What the @!??!@? This is crazy!”

And a king named Phillip XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXV said, “ I challenge you to a duel against my court magician.”

 

Chapter: 2

 

Two weeks later, he went to a Roman arena somewhere in the 5,700th quadrant where he battled with the quadrant ruler’s court magician. Yondu had many challenges ahead of him. He had to defeat a thousand men without any of them touching him. He completed that task and moved on to the second. The second task was much harder. Watermelons fell from the sky. Without letting them touch the ground he had to destroy every watermelon or make them disappear. He completed the second task by whistling and making his arrow split every watermelon. The third task was a duel. Magic against force. He was fighting an amateur magician and had to not destroy him, but just deflect his magic missiles. This task was very frightening, but he did it. By the end of the ninth task, he was a little worn out.

For his final test, watermelons rained down again. He had to complete every task, including Him. A replica of himself made perfectly from the automaton factory was meant to only destroy the real Yondu. He finished this task, but was scraped and bruised. The automaton then crumbled to dust when all of the other tasks were completed.

The magician took his turn, but when he had to deflect the magic missiles instead of casting a destruction spell, he cast a seeking spell, seeking himself. When he did that he ran around for his life. The magician was almost through, but he cast the right spell and all of the missiles dissipated. In the final challenge, he almost lost the watermelons because he didn’t have time to cast a levitation spell. Yondu had done the tasks faster and quicker so he was the winner. The court magician was banished and his powers taken away. But he learned to do other things like craft swords. And he then became a knight of the realm. He then went back to the king and said, “King, I’ve become a worthy knight, why can I not join your ranks?”

And the King said, “You were banished, you lost a fight, but if you win this time, you will be in my ranks. But if you don’t, you will never ever see the light of day again.”

This time, he fought Star Lord. He was a tough competitor but Star Lord won. He was going to be executed, but Star Lord switched him with a chicken and he was saved. He became a Guardian Of The Galaxy.

 

Chapter: 3

 

He fought with the Guardians of the Galaxy for 23 years. He retired at 83. The Guardians of the Galaxy fought without him and became famous throughout every galaxy. He watched them fight. He grew older, they stayed the same age. When He died there wasn’t a funeral. The Guardians fought for the rest of eternity.

 

THE END

Venessa and The Unknown Island

There once was a Greek goddess named Venessa. Venessa was the goddess of wisdom and war, and she was the one of the most beautiful goddesses in all of Greece. She  had a pet owl named Athendite. Venessa had long wavy hair and brown eyes with bright pink lips (she didn’t use lipstick). Her job was to watch over the animals and the Greek demons.

She was on vacation on an unknown island with her owl. She didn’t want to keep doing her goddess jobs and chores; she was bored and needed a break. The island was tropical and had palm trees and a sandy beach. When she got there, she relaxed and went for a swim. The water was a clear, beautiful turquoise with tan sandbars emerging from the water. The water was lukewarm, just the right temperature. There weren’t any animals in the water at the time.

She didn’t know that back on Mount Olympus, her home, they had noticed she was gone, and their leader, Zeus, sent Apollo and Artemis to check all over Greece to find Venessa. Finally the twins, Artemis and Apollo, found the unknown island and were searching all over it, when at last they got a glance at Venessa.

Venessa realized that they were looking for her and she ran all around the island trying to escape, but so did Artemis and Apollo. Venessa came to a wall. When she listened carefully, she heard Artemis and Apollo on the other side talking about how to catch her. She heard they were going to catch her owl at midnight, and then when she went to retrieve her owl, they would set a trap for her.

That night, using her wisdom, Venessa made a fake owl out of the goddess paper she took with her. The owl would have a potion in it and that potion would make the whoever touched it forget everything that happened that day. They would fall asleep for eight hours, just enough time to ship them back to Mount Olympus. By the time Venessa finished making the fake owl, it was 11:00 p.m. Venessa would have to make the potion in one hour. The ingredients to make the potion were yellow tiger, pink and purple seagull, and the rarest peacock-patterned flowers.  She had learned to make the potion from a goddess book because she memorized every goddess book.

Venessa was dumbstruck on where to start, but still she set out in search of a yellow tiger. In the forest, there were narrow creeks that Venessa jumped over. She went deeper and deeper into the forest and finally found a yellow tiger sleeping under the shade of a palm tree. Venessa knew that she needed a bow and quiver to kill the yellow tiger. Using all her goddess will, Venessa made a bow and quiver appear in front of her. She shot it at the yellow tiger and it was hers. One down, two to go, she thought to herself.

Venessa knew that pink and purple seagulls only came out when the time was right for them. She sure hoped that the time was right and that they were out and vivacious. When Venessa arrived at the spot where the pink and purple seagulls lived, her heart sank: there were no seagulls out. When she looked closer, she saw that actually they were perched on a tree branch, asleep. Venessa shook with excitement, for she had found the pink and purple seagulls.

Then she remembered that her goddess powers wouldn’t work because she had used them up making the bow and quiver appear. Venessa could only use her goddess powers once a night. She thought about what to do, and then she had an idea! She could tie tree bark together with leaves, and then once the chain was long enough, she could asphyxiate one pink and purple seagull.

When she finished making the chain of bark, Venessa threw it and it went down the seagull’s throat. The seagull fell off the branch. She could add the pink and purple seagull to the potion! Two down, one to go, she thought.

Once again, just like with the pink and purple seagulls, it had to be the right time for the peacock-patterned flowers, otherwise there would be no blossom. When Venessa got to the flower part of the forest, her heart sank once more: there were no blossoms. She thought about what to do, but she couldn’t think of anything to do.

Venessa remembered that her owl ate peacock flowers when they hadn’t bloomed yet. She ran back to her real owl and asked if he could regurgitate some of the flowers he ate. He agreed. When some came out of his mouth, Venessa was excited as a dog getting a new chew toy. Her plan had worked! Out came a fully bloomed peacock patterned flower. The flower came out nice and clean because she had willed it to come out clean.

When she saw the time, Venessa realized that she only had five more minutes until midnight. She hurried to mix the potion and set out the fake owl. She hid her real owl in the basement of the hut she slept in and put the fake owl beside her. At exactly midnight, Venessa heard Artemis and Apollo’s footsteps. Quickly, Venessa closed her eyes and pretended to sleep. Artemis and Apollo knew Venessa slept with her owl beside her so when they saw the fake owl, they thought it was the real owl and picked it up. Instantly, they both fell into a deep sleep. Venessa stopped pretending to be asleep and put the sleeping Artemis and Apollo on a boat to go back to Olympus.

It was then that Venessa remembered this was an unknown island and no ship captain would be able to find them and steer the boat back to Olympus. So, Venessa got on the boat and drove them back. When they got to Olympus’ shore, Artemis and Apollo awoke and Venessa quickly undid the spell. Venessa stepped out of the boat and walked through the entrance. She sat at her throne, waiting for Zeus to talk to her. Venessa felt a little nervous.

Zeus called her and she went to go talk to him.  Zeus was wearing a blue cloak and he had a brown beard.

“If you had just asked me so I knew where you were going, I would’ve said yes,” Zeus said.

After that talk Venessa realized that she loved her home and everybody else that lived there and would never try to sneak out again. She sat on her velvet gold throne and smiled.

The End

Gone

Chapter 1

 

“Girls, when you get to school, don’t forget to text us.”

“Ok, Dad,” they said in unison. They were 12. Their birthday was April 19th, and they went to Salt Lake High School (it’s a private school).

“Why do Dad and Mom have to be so overprotective?” Julia said to Sarah as they walked out the door with the same steps. They were fraternal twins and they looked almost completely different but they acted similarly. Julia had brown hair and brown eyes and a pretty face and she was slender and attractive-looking. Sarah had blonde hair and blue eyes and always had a happy look on her face no matter what. She was slender and attractive-looking as well. They both had straight hair that came down to their shoulders but they always wore it in a ponytail, though those were the only looks that the twins shared.  They were both sporty but at the same time feminine. Sarah was shy and quiet but Julia was outgoing. They both were very studious and smart. They were the kind of kids who were popular but not in a bad way. They had a lot of friends and some of them were almost the same as them and some of them were the complete opposite. The girls were always, always criticizing their parents on how overprotective they were. And they had a reason to be criticizing their parents.

Julia wanted to try out for the soccer team but her parents wouldn’t let her because they were scared that she’d get hurt playing soccer. And Sarah, when she was really young, went into the laundromat and her parents yelled at her for that because they were scared she would go into a washing machine and the washing machine would turn on and she would die!

 

Chapter 2

 

That day at recess (or as they like to call it “hang out time”), their best friend, Hallie, came up to them and handed them an invitation to a double sleepover in two weeks birthday party for her also twin sister Annie. The girls were very excited to go, but they knew they couldn’t tell their parents because their parents wouldn’t let them go. So they said that on November 15th they were going to a high school curriculum meeting at school, so they would be back late. No parents allowed. But they didn’t say the time because they didn’t want their parents to know. If they said, “We’re leaving on the 15th and we’re coming back on the 17th” their parents would say “Wow. That’s a very long curriculum meeting.”

On the 15th, after school, their friend’s older sister, Betsy (who had just turned sixteen two months ago), drove them over to Hallie and Annie’s house for the sleepover. Once they got to the sleepover Hallie and Annie welcomed them by throwing streamers in their face and popping a balloon. The eight girls stayed up till two in the morning and they watched horror movies and played truth or dare. When they finally went to sleep they were not tired at all, but embarrassed by what they said on the truths and the dares and scared because of the horror movies.

In the morning they woke up at 5 o’clock (no sleep at all) and they were very tired. They each grabbed a small mug of coffee that, by the way they were not allowed to drink. Then they sat on the lounge chairs next to Hallie and Annie’s private pool. The city was quiet. Nobody else was awake. The only sound was the wind whistling in their ears. As they jumped into the pool, Betsy declared a game of truth or dare.

“Annie, Truth or Dare?”

“Truth, duh,” said Annie, rolling her eyes.

“Have you ever been to a different continent?”

“Yah, like three!”
It went on like this for three minutes until it was Julia’s turn.

“Julia, Truth or Dare?” asked Olivia.

“Truth,” said Julia.

“Have you ever kissed a boy?”

“Ooooo,” Sadie and Betsy said together. Allison made a kissy lips face. Julia’s face turned bright red.

Julia waited about a minute before answering. “Yes,” she whispered in a little voice.

“I can’t hear you,” Olivia said in a sing-song voice.

“Yes,” Julia said stronger.

“What!?” Sarah shouted, and she suddenly stopped splashing Sadie. “How could you not tell me that?” She yelled at her twin, sounding close to tears.

“What do mean!? Why did I have to tell you?!”

“We’re sisters, we tell each other everything!!!”

“I don’t have to tell you everything that goes on in my life!” Julia cried.

The rest of the girls backed up nervously.

“But we share everything else with each other, why not this?”

“Well, I’m sure you’ve kept secrets from me too. Plenty of times,” said Julia.

Sarah tried to speak, but her voice wouldn’t work. She turned bright red. Allison stepped in front of the girls, trying to stop the fight, but Sarah just pushed her out of the way. The rest of the girls were stunned. Sarah has never done that. She’s too peaceful. Sarah stormed out of the pool in a rage of anger. The rest of girls were stunned and Annie started crying. Then Olivia started crying. “This is all my fault!” Olivia cried “If I hadn’t asked you that we would all be having fun!” No one agreed with her, but no one disagreed.

On the way home from the sleepover, the twins weren’t talking to each other and they avoided each other’s eyes. All of a sudden, a piece of paper fell down at Julia’s feet. Sarah stopped walking, too. Julia bent down to pick it up and as soon as her fingers touched the paper, she disappeared into thin air. Sarah looked at the paper and then back to where her sister had stood and then to the paper and then to where her sister had stood.

The people who were walking by stopped in their tracks. Just like Sarah, they looked at the paper and then back to where Julia had been standing. Somebody fainted. Sarah did not notice anyone around her, until Mr. Hill, Sarah’s (former) art teacher, came rushing up to her.

“Sarah, are you alright? What happened to Julia?” he cried.

Sarah thought (randomly) of what Julia had told her once when they were younger. Sarah, don’t mix other people up in your personal life. It will only make things worse.

“She’s gone.”

 

Chapter 3

 

Sarah

As Sarah ran to her house (220 Nether 56 St.), she was about to knock on her door when she suddenly stopped. Mom and Dad are going to be so mad, she thought. Suddenly she was nervous to walk in. A second later, Sarah saw her mom’s face in the window.

“Uh-oh,” she said out loud. Her mouth dropped open.

Her mom ran out the door and embraced Sarah with strong arms.

“Sarah, Julia where have you been? Me and your dad have been worried sick about you!” Her mother shouted at her. She looked at Sarah, peeking around her back. “Wait, Sarah, where’s Julia?”

“We were walking down the street and then, um, there was this piece of paper and Julia kind of went down and touched it and then she went poof?” she said,  her words kind of jumbled up hoping she didn’t sound crazy.

Her mother hurried her inside. “Sarah, go to bed,” she said in a calm, quiet voice.

“Umm… okay,” she said, uncertainly.

When she was about to close her door, she heard her parents say in a hushed whisper, “We can’t tell her yet, it’s too dangerous.”

“But we have to, her sister just disappeared!”

“We can’t, it’s not fair to her.”

Then, they closed the living room door.  After two hours of constant worrying, she finally fell asleep to terrible dreams.

 

Chapter 4

 

Sarah

When Sarah woke up from tiresome dreams, she decided that she needed some fresh air to read the note that for some reason had made her sister disappear. She thought about leaving a note for her parents, but she didn’t because she knew that she would be back before they got home from work.

While Sarah was walking down to the park, she was surprised that no one was taking particular interest into why she wasn’t with Julia even though they were barely ever apart. Ms. Figg came up to Sarah and said,

“Hi Sarah, what a beautiful day.”

Sarah was shocked. She said, “Um-Ms. Figg, have you seen Julia in a while?”

“Who’s Julia, dear?” Ms. Figg replied.

“Only my sister,” Sarah said, incredulously.

“Sarah are you feeling alright?” Ms. Figg asked, concerned. “You don’t have any sisters. You’re an only child, remember?”

“I’m not an only child, I have a sister!” She shouted.

“Now Sarah, don’t lose your temper with me. I advise you go back to your parents so they don’t worry about you.” Ms. Figg said stepping back a step surprised that  Sarah was yelling.

Ms. Figg is a bit crazy. I’m sure no one else thinks I don’t have a sister.

As she walked down the street she bumped in to her BFF Kyley.

“Hey Sarah. how y’u doing ?” Kyley exclaimed

“Not asking ‘bout Julia I see” Sarah replied. Kyley and Julia had had an argument, so she wasn’t surprised that Kyley didn’t say anything about Julia.

“Um-remind me who Julia is again,” Kyley said hesitantly. “Too many friends to keep track of,” she joked.

Sarah’s face had mixture of shock and utter confusion. It’s not only Ms. Figg, it’s Kyley too? Uh-oh.

 

Chapter 5

 

Julia

As Julia woke up, everything seemed kind of blurry. It looked like she was in some sort of cage. Huh? I don’t remember being put into prison, she thought.

“Who’s that?” Julia asked out loud. She was looking at a short, rotund woman with eyes that looked pure evil and a serpent smile.

When the woman heard Julia, she laughed out loud. “I’m Alice,” she said in a sugary, sweet voice that sounded phony.

Julia shook her head, trying to make sense of all of it. “Funny woman who’s kind of fat, round shape prison thingamajiggy, and no more Sarah,” she mumbled under her breath. “This makes complete sense except for about everything!” She declared loud enough for Alice to hear.  “Why am I here exactly?” asked Julia.

“Well, I have two reasons that I captured you,” Alice replied. “Number one is so your sister would say the magical words that I will not repeat right now or I’ll get a big headache. So, I’ll go to Earth and be able to take it over.” At that, Julia’s face got a bit of a smirk on it.

Obviously this Alice person doesn’t know that half of Earth is run by a democracy and she won’t just be able to ‘take it over.’ Julia thought.

“And my second reason I captured you,” Alice continued, while pacing around Julia’s cage, “is so you and your sister can’t use your powers to overthrow me.”

“Ummm…powers?” Julia questioned, wondering if Alice was a crazy woman.

“You don’t know about your powers?” Alice suddenly stopped pacing.

“Uhhh, not exactly,” Julia replied, still with a questioning look on her face.

“Well then, just forget everything else I said, and that was just a joke, only the first part of the plan is true. Ha ha ha, I’m a jokester,” Alice said, obviously hiding something.

Alice walked into the other room, but she didn’t know she had left the door partly open. Even though at that moment Julia didn’t know it, this changed everything. “Her parents haven’t told her yet about her powers. This may mess everything up, or it might make everything better” Alice said unaware that Julia could hear her.

What the heck is she talking about?  Julia wondered.

Alice walked back into the room. “Sooo,” Alice said pacing around Julia’s cage/prison. “Your parents haven’t told you about any planets other than Earth?” she asked casually.

“‘Course they didn’t, ‘cause there aren’t any other planets. Right?” Julia said trying to not explode with curiosity.

“Right, so your sister is going to bring me down to earth then your world will be run by me! Ha ha ha ha ha!!” Alice declared evilly

“That will will never happen, you witch!!!” Julia shouted

 

Chapter 6

Sarah

 

“You okay Sarah? You look like you just saw a ghost,”asked Kyley worriedly.

“Look, Kyley, this will be hard to explain but just listen,” Sarah said.

After she explained everything to her BFF, Kyley whispered, “That is more complicated than this!” She showed Sarah her math homework. “Simplify x[y+(2*8)] +24( xy+ 28)”

“I know, but you’ve gotta trust me on this one,” said Sarah.

She and Kyley started to walk down to the old willow tree, which had been their playhouse since they were three. The reason it had always been their playhouse was because nobody else could interrupt them. Nobody else dared to go there because it was surrounded by old mansions, which were falling apart.

They sat down on the bean bags which they had put in there and started to read the note together. The note said: “To see your sister again, you must got to the top of Mount Hood and say ‘sasi-da-la-poo’ with your hands held out. From Alice :).”

“Uhh… sasi-da-la-poo?” Kyley said, snorting. “Whoever sent this note definitely has no style at all.”

“I guess you’re right,” said Sarah, “but I still wonder why she would take my sister. And I also wonder why she would leave her name on the note. Know what I mean?”

“Well, she’s definitely a stupid witch,” said Kyley.

“We should probably go to Mount Hood,” Sarah stood up.

Kyley went to the app store on her phone and bought a map of the state.

“I wonder if Mount Hood is in Portland.” Kyley looked at her phone. “Oh lookie, it is! The only problem is that it’s 11,235 feet in the air. We can totally climb that in like two days.”

“Don’t joke, Kyley, it’s true. It’s going to take a long time to get to the top of the mountain.”

“Hey, gloomy Gus,” Kyley started shaking Sarah. “Go away we want Sarah. We don’t want anymore Gus.”

Sarah faintly smiled. “We should go get our stuff,” she said.

 

Chapter 7

Julia

 

That night, when Julia thought that Alice was asleep, Julia went to the lock on the outside of her cage, took her hair pin off and started to pick the lock.

All of  sudden, an alarm started to blare. Julia had to let go of the lock in order to grab her ears. All of a sudden, Alice appeared with a creepy smile on her face.

“Oopsies,” Julia whispered.

“Oopsies is right,” Alice said in her ‘sugary sweet’ voice.

Alice yanked her out of the cage and threw her down a trapdoor with the cockroaches. It was dark, dusty, and Julia couldn’t see anything. All she could do was feel and hear the little cockroaches and trying not to step on them. There was a cot at the end of the room and Julia had to step over and around billions of cockroaches in order to get there.

“Ugh, I think I’m going to be sick,” said Julia.

When Julia woke up the next morning, there wasn’t breakfast waiting for her like there usually was. When she yelled that up to Alice, Alice replied, “You try to escape and you get no food for three days.”

That was the first time Julia heard Alice’s real voice. It was mean and rough. It even sounded like her personality.

 

Chapter 8

Sarah

 

Sarah ran home as fast as she could, her boots tapping on the sidewalk. She burst into the house, not even thinking about why the door was unlocked. She ran into her room and started to pack.

“Hmm, what will I need to climb a 12,000 foot mountain. Gee, let me think,” Sarah said. “Umm, I have a rope, a big long rope, actually. A grappling hook, no idea why I have that in here”

She paused.

“Wait, why aren’t Mom and Dad here?” she said out loud. Then Sarah thought of how the door had been left wide open when she came home. “That’s weird. Mom and Dad always lock the door. They don’t want robbers coming in. They are crazy about protectiveness.”

She walked into her parent’s room and saw that her mom and dad’s favorite bag was out of the closet and it looked like they had left in a rush. I wonder where they went, she thought.  All of a sudden, she heard a crash from her room.

What the–oh it’s the grappling hook. She walked into her room and saw her grappling hook lying on the floor.The wood on the dresser was scratched. This isn’t going to be a good grappling hook if it always falls. Then she saw that the grappling hook was broken.

‘It’s alright. I’ll fix it at a “Pro Ski and Mountain” shop,” she shrugged.

It took Sarah 20 minutes to pack up everything she needed. This is what was on her list,

  • A very, very warm jacket,hat,scarf,and gloves
    • A flashlight
  • Energy bars (lots of them for Kyley)
    • grappling hook,and rope
  • Actual food
    • A tent
  • Sleeping bag
    • Critical sleep toys
  • Water
    • A knife and lock picking tools (to get Julia out of her cage)
  • Boots

She packed everything in her very large furry backpack, (which she could turn into a pillow). And, she went back to the clubhouse to meet Kyley.

 

Chapter 9

Julia

 

Julia was starving. She hadn’t had food for two days and she only had muddy water. Then, Julia had a lightbulb. “Ooh Alice!” she called out in a friendly voice.

“What is it?” Alice called out in a crabby voice. It sounded like she had just woken up.

“Would you like some compliments, friendly morning compliments, Alice?”
“Why would you compliment me? I threw you in a room with cockroaches and I haven’t fed you for three days.”

“Because you deserve it, Alice!” continued Julia. “You deserve it because you’re so kind, you’re so beautiful. You deserve to be the ruler of this universe. It would be better that way for everybody.”

“Well,” Alice said flipping her hair, clearly flattered, “I am beautiful. And I am kind. And I do deserve to be the ruler of the universe. But how can you help me?”

“I can do so much. I can open the portal for you without my sister’s help. I can hypnotize people and make them love you.”

“You can hypnotize people?” Alice’s eyes were as wide as saucers and she was looking at Julia like she was some kind of goddess.

“ ‘Course, I’ve never done it before because you shouldn’t be hypnotized. You don’t deserve to be hypnotized. You’re too good.”

“I’m not good, I’m evil! MWAHAHAHAHA!!!”

“You’re too good at being evil to be hypnotized. I could help you, but in order for that, I’d have to be out of this dump.”

“You promise not to kill me when I let you out?”

When Julia heard Alice say ‘When I let you out’ she practically jumped for joy, but she couldn’t because she was on the tiny bench so she wouldn’t step on a cockroach.” This is my chance to get back to Earth Julia thought.

“I promise not to kill you,” Julia told Alice.

When Alice opened the door a barrage of light entered the room blinding Julia and making her cover her eyes. Alice dropped the ladder and Julia climbed up.

“How do I know you really hypnotize people?”Alice said narrowing her eyes.

“I hipnotized my teacher into thinking that I brought in my homework the day before instead of that day, so I didn’t have to do it.”

“Okay, we’ll determine if you’re lying later,” Alice said, turning away.

 

Chapter 10

 

Sarah was so hot, but she was so cold. Kyley next to her, was huffing and puffing just like her, but both were shivering in their winter jackets. The sky was blue over them and there was nothing but mountains as far as they could see.

“Stop, just stop please,” Kyley said. They only rested once and that was at the beginning of the mountain.

Sarah cursed herself for not remembering that Kyley had asthma and got tired very easily. They sat down to rest and took out actual food–canned beans, canned soup, canned goods. Most of the stuff, as you can see, was canned.

“Kyley, come on, can we keep going? We have to find my sister soon. We don’t know what’s gonna happen to her.”

All of a sudden, Kyley got angry. “You’re lucky I’m even coming with you. For all I know, your sister could be somebody fake. This could just be a stupid joke on me.”

“I’m sorry if you feel that way, but I hope you’re not giving up on me,” Sarah said holding back tears, not sure if they were angry tears or sad tears.

She stood up and started to go up the mountain.

“I’m still coming with you, you can’t get rid of me that easily.” Kyley stood up and walked up to Sarah

***

 

For a little while they didn’t talk, but when they were close to the top Kyley turned to Sarah.

“ListenIdon’twanttofightbutyoucan’tblamemeforwondering,” Kyley said sounding rushed.

“I forgive you if you can say that again but a lot slower so I can actually understand it,”Sarah joked

“Thanks Sarah I’m really sorry. I will help you find Julia no matter what.”

***

A few minutes later, Kyley said “Hey you know that day in first grade when I lost my first tooth at recess and you took me to the nurse?”

“Yes, why?”

“I feel like someone else was there, a pretty girl with light brown eyes and hair.”

“OMG! That’s Julia! You remember her! That’s awesome!”

“Slow down, Sarah. Yes, I remember her, but not everything. I only remember bits and parts. I didn’t even know who she was. Also, it kind of hurts when it happens. Like a headache or something,” Kyley explained.

“Well, it’s something, at least you remember some of her,” said Sarah.

It seemed like they were at the top, but they couldn’t be sure with all the switchbacks. It was getting colder, and each switchback it got colder and colder. But, it was so early, and they had been walking for so long that the cold seemed normal.

 

Chapter 11

Julia

 

“These cookies are really good.” They were sitting in Alice’s room having milk and cookies.

“I know right? They’re a family recipe,” said Alice.

“We should get down to business now.”

“Okay, here’s the plan,” said Alice. “You’re going to open the portal by saying the words I’ll write down, ‘cause again I can’t say them or I’ll get a big headache. Then, when we get onto the mountain, you’re going to close the portal by saying the words again. While you’re doing this, I’ll make sure that all the security slash defences on Earth go out so nobody can stop us. And, also with my powers, I will make every weapon explode. Except for ours of course.”

“Okay, that sounds great, but number one, what are the words to open the portal to the human world,” Julia said, after Alice told her the plan.

Alice wrote down on a piece of paper the words

sasi-da-la-poo

“That’s what I have to say? sasidalapoo. That is kinda lame.”

“I know I know, but I don’t choose the spells, I just know them,”

“Okay, so I say sasidalapoo,” said Julia almost laughing, “Then what?”

“Then the portal will open and we’ll go through the portal out to earth and I’ll go straight to the king’s office and I’ll demand him to come clean or I’ll kill all of his children!”

Again, Julie almost laughed.

“Obviously,” she thought, “she doesn’t know that there’s no king and she can’t just take over the world.”

To Alice, she said, “Okay this is a great plan. We should do it right now,”

“Wow, you’re eager,” Alice said. “This is the first time one of my captives has gone along with one of my plans,”

“Yeah, well I’m special,” said Julia.

They walked to the door and Julia held out her hand and said, ‘Sasidalapoo.” A big purple swirling portal appeared in front of Julia and Alice. Julia stepped through, a blast of icy cold wind hitting her square in the face, saying, “sasidalapoo” again before Alice could jump over to the earth. When she turned around after closing the portal she saw Sarah and Sarah’s friend Kyley staring at her with their mouths open in shock.

“Sarah!” Julia yelled.

“Julia!” Sarah yelled at the same time.

They tackled each other in a big bear hug.

“Oh my god, how did you get back!? I was about to say these really weird words to get you back but then YOU said them when you came onto the peak and you know I’m really confused I’m just gonna sit down for a minute,” she said as she sat down.

“Hi Julia,” Kyley said, “Hey, I remember you now. I remember all of our memories together!” Kyley’s face lit up like she just got the best present ever.

“You forgot them?” Julie said because of course she had no idea that everyone on earth had forgotten about her when she had disappeared.

“Yeah,” Sarah said, “Everyone on earth forgot about you when you disappeared, so they’ll probably remember you now but I’m not sure”

“Well let’s go find out!” Julia said, running down the hill, eager to find her parents.

“Wait, Julie, you’re wearing summer clothes and we’re on a hill that’s below zero degrees! I brought an extra jacket but I don’t think that will help,” said Kyley.

“Okay, can I have it? I really want to get down this hill.”

“Alright.” Kyley pulled out the extra jacket out of her backpack and handed it to Julia.

Julia put it on, picked up Kyley’s bag, because Sarah already had hers on her back, and once again started running down the hill but this time with Sarah and Kyley trailing behind her. When they got home,and they ran inside their house they saw their parents who were sitting on the couch, frantically wondering where their daughters were. Kyley’s parents were sitting on the other couch.

“Julia! Sarah!” their parents cried out.

“Kyley!” Kyley’s parents cried out at the same time.

Julia and Sarah ran to their parents and hugged them while Kyley ran to her parents and started crying in their arms. When Julia and Sarah pulled out of their parents hugs, their parents said, “We should all probably go back to our houses  so we can get out explanations for why our children were gone for so long,” Sarah’s mom said.

“You’re right,” Kyley’s father said, “Our children have a lot of explaining to do!”

Kyley and her parents walked out the door. Julia and Sarah sat on the couch next to their parents. Julia opened her mouth to speak.

“Stop, it’s okay,” said the girls father. “We know exactly why you were gone and the person who has explaining has to do is us.” They explained to the children how they were actually kings and queens of a magical world. Alice had wanted to be the queen and had almost succeeded if it hadn’t been for Sarah and Julia. Alice had launched an attack with her evil followers, forcing the king and queen to take their children and flee to earth. The reason the parents had been so protective is because they didn’t want their child to be captured by Alice to be killed.

That night when they went to sleep, Sarah and Julia decided to pull out an air mattress and sleep on the floor together. Instead of talking they just sat next to each other, resting, acknowledging each other’s presence. Sarah and Julia closed their eyes, still smiling knowing that everything would be okay as long as they were together.

 

THE END

FOR NOW…

How Penguins and a Chicken Became a Dancing Group

There once was a chicken named Peamer and he looked like an ordinary chicken except he could talk and had golden feathers. Most people did not know how he had gotten to be so special, but he knew. He had been exposed to toxic waste as a baby chick but he had to keep that a secret. The toxic waste was actually melted gold, which was why he had such spectacular feathers. His mother made him walk into the gold because she thought it was corn and she was hungry. To be fair, the gold was in small chunks but Peamer’s mom still wasn’t very smart to make her baby fetch her food. As soon as he stepped into the gold, there was a quick, bright, green flash. That was the moment he began to grow golden feathers. Peamer didn’t know what happened, he was just growing golden feathers! Pop! Pop! Pop! The golden feathers shot out from his chicken skin and all of his old white feathers fell to the ground. Peamer’s mom was speechless. She wasn’t the brightest chicken in the coop, so she thought Peamer had disappeared and had been replaced by another chicken. She was so afraid she ran away squawking, “Peamer! Peamer! Where are you?”

All the while, Peamer was standing right in front of her, saying, “I’m right here.”

Finally, she stopped her noise-making because she realized Peamer was still there.

She asked him, “How come you grew gold feathers?”

Peamer said, “Because you made me walk in the pile of gold chunks you thought was corn.”

Peamer’s mom was speechless. Her beak was half-open, and she stood very still, about to faint. Peamer’s mom fainted a lot. Just as she was about to fall backwards, Peamer caught her. His golden feathers were so strong! They were his superpower. After he took her back to the big, green field where they lived, Peamer stretched his new golden wings out to his sides and took his first flight ever with his golden feathers. He felt so special.

A king saw him flying in the air and signaled for him to come down to the castle. The king asked Peamer to come and live with him in his castle covered with diamonds, gems, crystals, and all shiny things. However, the king was not to be trusted. He  wanted to eat Peamer because he thought if he did, he would turn to gold and gain Peamer’s superpowers. The king started to overfeed Peamer at dinner. He fed him vegetables, hamburgers and ice cream.

Peamer started to feel the king was acting weird and knew he was up to something. Peamer said, “Sorry, I have to go to England for a business trip. Don’t worry about me coming back because I’ll come back to you all safe and sound.”

The king said, “All right, I trust you.”

And then Peamer took off. He wasn’t really going on a business trip. Peamer was planning to build his own chicken kingdom covered with diamonds, gems, crystals and all shiny things. The first thing he needed to do was find a place where the king could never track him down. He went all the way to Antarctica. Even though it was really, really, really cold, he built an igloo kingdom. He asked some penguins to help him by putting stacks of snow together. The penguins thought he was a king already because of his gold feathers.

In his igloo, Peamer sat on his couch and thought, “Oh my gosh, I better get on a diet.” The penguins, though, were out of food because the water was frozen.

The penguins came into Peamer’s igloo and said, “We’re hungry! Can you please fetch some food for us?” They thought Peamer was strong because he was a king. They thought he could help them.

Peamer did a thumbs-up sign to the penguins and went to fetch some fish. The penguins smiled because they were expecting a good meal. First, Peamer found fishermen. He discovered his superpowers allowed him to speak in any language. To the fishermen, he spoke Mandarin. He asked them to cast their lines into the ice to catch the fish below. Peamer brought the fish to the penguins and fed them until they were full.

Peamer trusted the penguins. They became his secretaries and guards and his own igloo army. He gave each penguin a special necklace made of gems. He had installed a gem scanning system that only scanned the special gems Peamer had. The system kept the igloo kingdom safe so no one could break in. In order to enter his igloo kingdom, one needed a special gem, just like one needs a key to enter their home. Once the penguins scanned their gem necklace, they could enter. The igloo was full of things the penguins couldn’t even imagine: wooden chairs surrounding a dinner table filled with gems and a thick book about adventures so Peamer, their king, could give the penguins an experience of the whole world. There was a different adventure on each page, one adventure for every day of the year.

The first adventure they went on was to London. He looked up where to go in his adventure book and on the map he found England. Their first stop was Big Ben. Just then he remembered he told the king he was going to England for his business trip and Peamer suddenly feared the king would find him. He signed up for personal planes to fly him and his penguins back to Antarctica. When Peamer met his personal pilot, he told him to keep this trip a secret or else the royal king would  find him and eat him up. The pilot pinky swore never to tell.

“If you pinky swear and do not keep the promise,” Peamer said to the pilot, “then I will never tell you how I got my golden feathers.”

The penguins sat in the back seats and read a book about an easier way to catch fish. The book said: “You must go to King Peamer.” The penguins were amazed, and went to tell Peamer. When they told him, Peamer nearly fainted. He was shocked people already knew about him. He stopped himself from fainting by touching his chest and saying, “Superpowers!”

When they landed in Antarctica, they returned to the igloo kingdom. Everything looked just the way they left it. But the moment they entered they realized something was terribly wrong.

The king had found out they lived in an igloo! He traveled all over the world to find the mystery chicken with the golden feathers and superpowers. The king stood in the middle of the room with a giant knife and guards surrounding him. He stabbed his giant knife into the floor repeatedly and shouted, “I shall eat you now! I shall eat you now!” He instructed some of the guards to prepare the boiling water, and the rest of the guards to catch him.

Peamer used his superpowers to escape. He flew through midair and shot out rainbows from his wings across the room. He was able to change the colors of his feathers to camouflage with the rainbow. Just then, the penguins revealed their own secret: they also had powers! They could shoot through the air and blend in with the rainbow, too.

The king and his guards were speechless. They looked around the room, confused. In the chaos, they forgot about the boiling water and it exploded. The igloo started to melt as the king and the guards left.

Once everyone was far, far away, Peamer and the penguins fell back down. Peamer said to the penguins, “No wonder you’re so strong!” Together they built the igloo again. Peamer had placed a covering on their belongings, so luckily, nothing was damaged. They named this day The Chaos Adventure!

Peamer and the penguins decided this adventure was too hard, so instead of going to new places, they’d have a dance party every day. They bought big speakers, two disco balls and a radio playing pop music. They wore flowy skirts, colorful wigs, masks and underwear with ruffles. Peamer and the penguins became known as the best dancers on Earth, after the neighbors discovered their dance parties. They thought it was cool a chicken and penguins could dance, and they shared the news with the whole world.

Then, they danced and lived happily ever after!

The End

Monster Jake: Book 1

Reader, I will now tell you of a story of murder, humor, mystery and friends. It is about five brothers and sisters who have an adventure. Their names are Sarah, Jake, Bob, Joe, and JJ.

 

CHAPTER 1: Bob

 

One day, Bob was in his backyard and he figured out that he was going to have a sister. He lived with his mom and dad who were candy makers. Bob was not an average 12-year-old, because he lived in a candy factory. His room was made of lollipops, ice cream, and brownies.
He never ate dinner, only dessert, and never got belly aches. A week later, his sister was born! HALLELUJAH!!! Her name was Sarah. He was happy to have a sibling, but after a couple of days he got a little bored because the baby kept throwing stuff. The first time the baby got a hold of candy, she ate a lollipop (it was a rainbow lollipop). She ate the whole thing, even the stick, and made the most annoying sound because she loved it so much. YAAA. Bob, after four days, was so tired because the sound took five days to stop echoing in the factory. He fell asleep for three years, but thought it was an hour. When he woke up, he was surrounded by people he didn’t even know. Turns out they were his brothers.
Their names were Joe, Jake, and JJ. They were triplets. They were super super smart. Bob realized he was in his room, but it not so much a room because the triplets had eaten it. It took those three years for them to eat it. They had eaten all but one crumb, but that was already gone because Joe ate it the second Bob woke up. The triplets did not know about Sarah, because she was in their parents room and they weren’t allowed in. They finally figured out that their parents were hiding a four-year-old girl. His parents were hiding Sarah because they didn’t want their triplets to think they had the biggest family in the world. But one day, they heard a baby crying in their parents room. The parents had kept her quiet before by not giving her any lollipops. The minute after they figured this out, they broke down their parents’ door and found the toddler asleep on the bed.

 

CHAPTER 2

 

Sarah started to yell at the kids. Bob heard the commotion and came running in. He found out what happened and said, “Did you guys not know that Sarah was here?”

The triplets blinked twice and said, “Who is Sarah?”

Bob said, “How did you not know she was here?” Then Bob says to Sarah, “Why are you here, anyways?”

The triplets said, “It’s a she?!?”

Over the next day, Bob figured out what happened while he was out cold. The next day, at breakfast, he asked his parents why they never told him that they were going to have such an annoying sister. His mom said, “We didn’t know.”

The triplets were confused at what was going on. Bob had to clear everything out with everyone. He told them how he fell asleep and when he was asleep, he had a dream that he was under water and he could breathe. Then a fish came up to him and told him something that sounded like a prophecy. The fish said, “You will have a journey to a far place where no one has gone before. And at the end, one of the friends you make shall do something that you will not know.”

Bob thought it meant that he was going to go somewhere and find some friends and one of them was going to do something strange. Bob went downstairs and told his parents everything. Bob finished his story and then he said, “I have something in my room that sounds just like this.” So Bob went up to his room and pulled a ripped little piece of paper out from his desk and it said: ‘-rah will be by the…’

They all say “HUH?!?”

Bob says, “I know, right?? The paper is ripped, so I don’t understand what it says!”

His Dad said, “Well, you better figure it out in at least a week.”

Bob said, “Why in a week?”

On the back of the paper it said: “Figure out in at least a week.”

 

CHAPTER 3

 

Bob went to his room and read the note over and over and over and over and over. Okay, I think you get the point. The next day…

Bob figured something out! Something was going to happen to Sarah! He rushed downstairs to tell his family. He said, “Something will happen to Sarah! It’s a good thing she’s asleep right now. Don’t tell her about this, or else she’ll get really mad.”

Joe said, “How do you know something is going to happen to Sarah?”

Bob explained, “Because, if you look on the piece of paper and read it carefully, you can figure out it’s the end of Sarah’s name.”

 

CHAPTER 4

 

It was Saturday, and it was time for Bob’s journey to start. So he packed up the piece of paper and a sleeping bag. Then he told his parents, “You can’t come along!”

They both said, “Why?”

“Because I don’t want you to die.” Then he told his siblings, “Pack up, we’re going.” He read the piece of paper one more time and realized something. On the bottom corner of it, there was a map. On the map was the whole world and there were seven little pieces of paper on each continent. He asked, “What are these?” When Jake saw it, he fainted. There’s also something else weird, besides Jake fainting. There was an airplane growing inside the wall. It was bright green, but all of its jets were pink. It was 100 feet long. On the front, there was a robot holding a sign saying, “I’m your ride.” So they hopped in and took off!

First stop: Florida. It was only a five minute flight because this airplane had three hundred million horsepower. It should have take longer because they lived in California. While the flight was going, they took a bucket of water and dumped it on Jake. He woke up and Bob said, “Why did you faint?”

“I don’t know. But when I looked at that paper, my brain went fuzzy.”

Then Sarah said, “Why are you so stretchy?” She pulled his arm. It was 30 feet long.

“I don’t knnnow!!”

“Okay, jeez!”said Joe.

“Please stop asking me questions,” screamed Jake.

Out of nowhere, Sarah said, “Thought you might want to know, we’re there.”

They first tried to find the piece of paper in Legoland. Sarah and Joe got bored because they couldn’t find anything, so they went on the rides. At twelve o’clock at night, the rest of the kids found them in a giant hotel room. They woke up at about one o’clock, and they went as fast as they could to Disney World.

At five o’clock (they didn’t even know it was five o’clock because they were too tired to look at their watches) Sarah found something inside of the Star Wars simulator. When the rest came over, Sarah reached inside C3PO’s mouth and found a glowing piece of paper. She tried to fit it into the other one, and it fit!

 

CHAPTER 5

 

They asked Bob, “Now where?”

He said, “Europe!”

Suddenly, something strange happened. Their airplanes split into five. All of them separated. Bob’s went to London, Sarah’s went to Wales, Joe’s went to France, JJ’s went to Switzerland, and Jake’s went to Spain. A couple hours later, they all met up in Switzerland because JJ had texted, “Come here quick! I found something!” So they all came. They saw what he was talking about and he said, “See? I found this awesome little teddy bear.” They all said, “Aw shoot, we all came for nothing!”

And then JJ said, “But look inside his mouth. There’s something in there!”

Bob pulled it out and it was the piece of paper! The paper was glowing and golden, just like the first two.

“Let’s go to South America,“ said Sarah.

Once again, the plane split up into five. Bob to Brazil, Sarah to Argentina, Jake to Venezuela, Joe to Chile, and JJ to Colombia. Joe was looking all around Chile. He got hungry so he tried to find some food. He found an avocado laying in a desert. He cut it open and took the pit out. He was going to bite it and he found the piece of paper! He took the piece of paper out, ate the avocado, and said, “The avocado wasn’t as good as I thought, but it was still worth it to find the paper!”

 

CHAPTER 6

 

They all met up and they fit the piece of paper with all the rest.

Bob said,”To Africa!”

The plane split up into five once again. Bob to Egypt, Sarah to Chad, JJ to Kenya, Joe to Zambia,and Jake to Ghana.

Bob went to the sphinx. It was ten times the size of him and he went inside. He saw torches on the walls and no floor. It was dark and the air tasted bitter. He couldn’t see very well because of the dust. He was thinking, “Why did I choose to go to Egypt, why? WHY!?” He walked up to a statue of the Egyptian god, Ra. He thought he heard something. He was getting really scared. He turned around. He turned back around. He jumped up when something touched his back and he screamed for help!

“Help me!”

He saw the statue moving. It said to him, “Bob. I know your last name and you don’t. It is Candy.”

Bob said, “Huh! That explains a lot.”

The statue screamed, “Wait! I will give you the paper,” as Bob turned to leave.

 

CHAPTER 7

 

All of the Candy children met up at the plane after each five planes morphed back together. Bob said, “I found the piece of paper but we can’t get it until we get back home.”

Then suddenly a voice they had never heard in the world before said, “What piece of paper?”

They all turned and screamed, “Ah!”

“Don’t scream! My name is David. I heard you talking about needing to find something very important. I have experience with finding things that are important, too.”

Sarah said, “Why don’t you join us?”

David looked happy and he was wearing a normal t-shirt, jeans, and sneakers. So they hopped aboard the plane. Then the robot driving said, “You wanna go to Asia, sir?”

“That sounds good,” Bob said.

The five planes came again and Bob went to China, Sarah went Kazakhstan, Joe went to Japan, JJ went to India, and Jake went to Turkey.

David said, “Wait, what about me?”

Sarah said, “You can come with me every time.”

So they all went on the big paper hunt. In Japan, Joe was not having much luck. On the other hand, Sarah and David were finding some really useful stuff but not the piece of paper. They were finding treasure chests and a magic tool belt that had every tool you could find on a tool belt. Jake was eating Turkey in Turkey. All the way in China, Bob was digging through noodles and dumplings and little JJ was snake-charming, trying to see if the snake could see where the paper was. Joe got bored and he tried to ride the bullet train, and when he did, he saw something. The bullet train was see-through and had lots of reclining seats. He watched a movie and he saw people climbing up poles on trains. The movie was called “People Climbing up Poles on Trains.”

He looked through all the cars and finally he found a pole. He tried to climb it. He climbed all the way up, touched the top, and felt something like a piece of paper. He didn’t get to figure out what it was because he fell down. He opened one eye and he saw the glowing golden piece of paper, and he screamed, “I found it!” The Japanese cops started screaming Japanese curses at him. He started to run and he ran all the way back to the plane and he used the teleporter to teleport all of his friends back to the plane. Bob said, “Where are we? Wait, we’re back at the plane.” Joe had to explain everything. They fit the piece of paper, and it worked.

“Off to Australia!” David shouted.

Sarah said, “Me and David found some useful stuff! We put it in the storage part of the plane.”

“Why Australia?” said Bob.

“Because I live in Australia and I found a glowing piece of paper in the attic.”

Then Sarah said, “Why are you here?  Why aren’t you with your parents?”

“Because,” said David, “they kicked me out of the mansion.”

“WOW, YOU HAVE A MANSION!” they all screamed.

“Yes, I know it sounds crazy, but my dad is a millionaire!”

David explained everything and in no time they were off to Australia.

 

CHAPTER 8

 

The five planes came again and Bob went to Sydney, Sarah and David to Tasmania, JJ to New Zealand, Joe to the Gold Coast, and Jake to the desert. In the desert, Jake was searching through dust and sand, and he looked up and he saw a giant mountain of papers glowing. They looked exactly like the ones he was supposed to find. Then he did something he didn’t know he could do. He turned into a giant lightning bolt. He struck the pile and he hit one that didn’t get electrocuted, and he knew that was the one. When he found it, they all teleported back to the ship.

They all got in the plane, and went to the last place they wanted to go: Antarctica. “In this one, we all stick together,” said Bob.

But then David said, “But I want to split up. It will be easier.”

Bob said, “Well, you are the new one. I guess we could do what you want.”

So they split up. Bob wasn’t having much luck. He flew into a blizzard and flew all the way into the water. So did JJ, Sarah, Jake, and Joe, but not David. But before Sarah got blown away, she saw David stick out his hand out at her. All of them except Sarah landed on the ground. Sarah landed in a glacier and then the yeti came out and ate her. They all teleported back to the plane, and they all said, “Where’s Sarah?”

David just said, “Oh she’s back there. She found the piece of paper. She can teleport back when we’re back at her house.” While they were flying back it turned midnight, so they all went to sleep except for Jake and David.

David asked Jake, “Do you want a piece of candy? I made one special for you.”

He said, “No thanks.”

David said, “It’s really really good!”

So Jake ate it, and he turned into a hellhound. Then everything flashed black, and for a second you could see David as the grim reaper.

Jake thought, “That can’t be the grim reaper. My mind’s messing with me.”

Then David said, “Kill them.” And Jake did it, but when he hit his hand on the ground his hand fell apart and reformed. Then the hellhound body melted off, and so did his skin, but he was still there. He was a robot! Then Jake, as a robot, took David’s body threw it in the air. Then his family came back to life. When they awoke, they saw him and freaked out and started shooting him with their lasers, but he blocked them with his force field. But they weren’t really force fields. His robot body melted off, and he turned into this glowing strong person. He was a god! His name was Flipper. “I am Flipper, the god of monsters and death!” he said. Then he killed David.

The Everlasting Love Story

This tale starts in a world called Minecraft.

Once upon a time, there was a man named Steve (Steve is the main character in Minecraft). Steve had a house and in that house, there were two girls, Gina and Dana. Dana and Gina were in love with Steve. But Dana didn’t know Gina was dating Steve and Gina didn’t know Dana was dating Steve. But Steve was in love with both of them, so he didn’t know who to choose. It was a love triangle! (Gasp!) Steve kept dating Dana and Gina and suddenly he had an idea. He would have a contest. Since the ball was coming up next week, he would bring both of them there and he would see which one would dance with him more and whoever danced with him more would be his wife.

 

Next week

So Steve took Dana and Gina to the ball. Dana was wearing a white dress with white fabric with flowers on it, silver highheel shoes with diamonds on them, and bracelets that were white. Gina was wearing an orange dress with patches on it, brown flat shoes, and old, rotten bracelets. They went to the dancing area. Gina was the first to dance. She danced like a sick chicken. They danced for 15 minutes. Then Dana wanted to dance. Dana didn’t know that Steve liked Gina, and when she saw them dancing, she felt mad.

“Umm, Steve. Can I talk to you for a minute?”

“Sure.”

They walked to the corner, leaving Gina on the dancefloor.

“So what’s happening, I thought you loved me! Not Gina.”

“It’s probably time I give it up. Right now, I’m having a competition between you and Gina. I’m seeing who can dance longer. And whoever can dance longer will be my wife, because I love both of you.”

“Okey-dokey…wait. Are you serious?”

“Umm, yeah.”

“I thought you loved me.”

“I do, it’s just that I love both of you.”

“And besides, you didn’t even tell me that I was in this competition. And you lied to me about Gina. How disrespectful! I’m done with you!” She walked away.

“Wait, come back!” But Dana looked at him, and then turned away and walked out of the door into the cold night.

Steve went back onto the dance floor. Gina was still dancing. Now she looked like a dead cow. Steve said, “Gina, come here for a second. I want to talk to you. This whole time you and Dana were dancing, it was a competition between you and Dana. The person who danced the most would be my wife. Even if you did dance the longest, I actually wanted it to be Dana, but I didn’t know who to choose. It’s difficult to choose between two people. But now, I’m gonna go for Dana. I’m sorry. She has way more talent and danced way better than you. You danced like a sick chicken and a dead cow.”

“What?” said Gina, “What is wrong with you? You should have told me this was a competition this whole time. I’m done with you. You are rude. And first of all, I don’t even care about Dana. Why were you dating her anyway? You could have told me you were dating two people and that it was a love triangle, but you didn’t admit it to me. Don’t ever speak to me again.”

 

Next day

The next day was Sunday. Dana went to Mount Everest to ski. It was her hobby. She learned to ski from her dad. His name was Mike Modica. When she got to Mount Everest, she climbed to the top. It felt like it took her two days, but really, it took two hours. Meanwhile, she was putting new pink nail polish on her fingers and brushing her hair. Then, she saw it…a boy. A handsome boy. And he was combing his hair in such a beautiful direction, but she had a funny feeling about him. She felt like she couldn’t trust him. Just then, she felt a tingle in her head. She remembered when she ditched Steve because she couldn’t trust him. But anyway, she went over there. Suddenly, Dana tuned back. She thought to herself, “I can’t do it.”

The boy said, “Haven’t I seen you?”

Dana said, “Hey. I saw you at the ball!”

“That’s where I know you from!” he said. “Oh, I forgot to tell you, my name’s Madrid. What’s your name?”

“Dana. Why were you at the ball when no one was there with you?”

“I had no one to go with, so I just went alone.”

“Oh, you should have taken my friend, Gina,” Dana said, laughing.

“Wanna go skiing with me? I’m here all by myself.”

“Ok,” said Dana.

“Let’s go then,” Madrid said. They went up to the top of the hill and went on a triple black diamond.

Dana said, “I’ll race you down.”

Dana went before she said go, so she cheated.

Madrid said, “You cheater.”

“I’m sorry,” she said sarcasm-ly.

Then Madrid said, “Do you want to be my girlfriend?”

“Okay,” she said. “But only if you’re not judging me all the time.”

A week later they got married.

 

The End

Professor Sunglass and the Bank Robber

 

Hi, I am going to tell you a story about my professor. His name is Professor Sunglass. And just so you know, he does not wear sunglasses. He was the best detective in South America. One day a person who worked at the bank came up to him and told him that his bank got robbed. Professor Sunglass got right onto the case.

Professor Sunglass checked the bank for every kind of DNA but the robber must have made sure he didn’t leave any traces of DNA. He called the police to come help him find the robber. The police couldn’t do any better than Professor Sunglass. Professor Sunglass called the President. The President could not figure it out, so he called the Vice President. The Vice President could not figure it out, so he called the ruler of Russia. No one could figure it out and more and more banks kept getting robbed.

Professor Sunglass got an idea. He told the President of the United States to see if anybody in the country was bad. Professor Sunglass told that to every country in the world by going on TV at 10:00 a.m. every day for one week. One country, which was called the Untitled Country, didn’t answer. Professor Sunglass thought that it was suspicious that they didn’t answer, so he took a plane to it. When it was time for the plane to land in the Untitled Country, the guys in their army started shooting missiles at Professor Sunglasses’ plane. Professor Sunglass got out his laser gun and started frying the missiles in the plane’s way. Professor Sunglass’ plane landed safely and everybody started cheering for the pilots.

When everybody got off the plane, Professor Sunglass went to go find the robber. On the way to a neighborhood called Criminalville, a guy from Murdererville showed up with a gun, but did not see Professor Sunglass because he made invisible technology to make sure no one saw him. The person from Murdererville walked straight passed him. Professor Sunglass thought that no one would realize he was there. Suddenly, a person came up to him with a heat sensor. The person with the heat sensor was from Technologyville. When that person saw Professor Sunglasses’ heat, he said something into his walkie talkie and lots of people that didn’t look very nice popped out of nowhere. Professor Sunglass jumped into his teleporter not knowing where he was going, just hoping he would get away. He landed in this random person’s house. He saw a person at a table. The person was very rich because he had 1,000 bags of money on the table. He realized those were the bags of money that they had in banks in South America. He figured out that that was the robber who robbed all the banks. He arrested him immediately and Professor Sunglass lived happily ever after, until his next adventure.

 

The End

Through Time

“Where is that cake?” cried Apol.

“Be patient,” said his mother as she looked out the window.

“DING DONG!” exclaimed the bell.

“Jack must be here,” said Apol.

“Are you sure?” came a deep, low voice. It took this long to finish his sentence: 9999999999999999999999999999990675266767 milliseconds.

Then the voice said, “Only you can save the world.”

“What. How?” Apol sputtered.

“Oh, I forgot, my name is BUN.”

“Your name is BUN?”

“You got a problem with that?”

“No.”

“Good.”

Then BUN left quietly.

“What the..?”

His mother was gone.

“Weird.”

DING DONG

“This better be Jack.”

“It sure is. Heese is here also.”

They were at the table.

“Some wang,” asks Heese.

“No, yes,” said Apol.

“Oh,” said Heese.

“I thought Arrg was coming,” said Jack.

“Quiet,” said Apol quietly.

Now there was arguing; Jack was holding a coke, Heese’s arms crossed, Apol banging his fist on the table.

“I think Greek gods are real,” said Apol.

“Apol, there not real,” Heese shouted.

“I agree with Apol,” said Jack.

Bun’s voice came through the window. “Hurry up!”

“Who’s he?” said Heese.

“BUN,” said Apol

“BUN?”

“Yes BUN Jack.”

“Oh,” replied Jack.

“Hurry up,” BUN cried.

“Shut up, BUN,” said Heese.

“Fine,” said BUN as he went off.

“Weird. Let’s go,” concluded Jack.

Silently they left. They crossed light AV. Then Carckjack road. They found a car, got in, and it zipped off by itself.

“Cool,” Heese shouted over the engine.

“I didn’t expect this,” Apol cried.

“Me neither,” Jack foretold.

Now they speed along almost 1,000 mph.

“20 is the speed limit,” Jack told the car. It slowed down.

“That is crazy.”

“Stanford,” said Heese, because it was her dream to go there.

Soon they reached camps.

They crashed into History class. No one noticed them. It was as if they were invisible.

“Wait a minute,” Heese said. “I think we are invisible.”

It seemed like the teacher was talking about saving the world by traveling through time. Little did they know, every move of theirs was being watched.

”I know what we have to do,” Jack whispered. “Build a time machine.”

“How?” asked Apol.

Heese had already jumped out of the car and started putting these random pieces together. “Got it!” Heese cried five minutes later.

The machine was tall and skinny with solid gas inside. The gas wasn’t a color, it was more like every color.

“What time are we going to?” asked Jack.

“King Arthur’s,” Heese replied.

“Let’s go go go go!” said Apol nervously.

They stepped into the 5th dimension, time travel. It felt happy but also sad because you can’t have happy thoughts. It like felt hours, but it was really just seconds. It was like watching a really crucial game or race when you feel like time is taking forever. Their eyes closed, and they couldn’t see a thing. Then they felt a sudden feeling that they were alive again. They looked around. They stood before a huge castle.

“Is this Camelot?” Jack said, “Or am I just hallucinating?”

“I’m pretty sure that is Camelot. Is that Arthur?” asked Heese.

“Yeah, I’m pretty sure it’s Arthur,” Apol replied.

“I’m not sure how I feel,” Jack said quietly. “I’m not sure if this is a season. It feels like Spring, Summer, and Fall combined but it look like Winter.”

“There’s Merlin!” said Apol

“Quick, hide!” Jack replied hastily, louder then he had meant to.

Just then Merlin saw them

“Hello come to duel I suppose, without a weapon. Crazy fools.”

“Let us explain,” stuttered Apol, “I am Apol, there is Jack and Hesse.”

“Wait a minute.” he said while stroking his beard; then as if lit by a lamp he said, “from the future?”

“Yes,” said Jack, clearly shocked by what he had asked.

“Darn it, I can’t kill you know,” mumbled Merlin.

“Now where?” asked Apol.

“Nice time machine,” said Merlin out of the blue.

“Snake! Bird! Lion! Badger!” Hesse cried in fear.

Apol drew his sword. Dodging and blocking attacks, Apol herded the animals.

“Now to Pompeii!” Jack cried out of the blue.

“Into the time machine!” Apol cried, “I can’t keep them busy much longer!”

They went into the time machine not giving anyone enough time to register what happened.

They appeared at the base of the volcano…a half a split second before it erupted. They tried to run for cover, but it was too late. Apol felt a good deal of envy for whomever was safe and snug inside their house. Jack’s gears in his brain were turning like mad trying to figure out how to get out of here and save the world at the very same time. And Hesse was playing with the very last pieces of grass she found. Merlin saw a huge ball of ash coming their way.

“Watch out!” he cried.

But it was too late, it was about to hit them.

 

Author’s note: If you’re thinking about trying to travel through time and stuff like that, it’s dangerous, don’t do it. What these kids are doing, they are only doing it because they have to, well, they’re also a bit crazy.

The Famous Horn

Chapter 1 : Information

 

Once there was a girl that was eight years old. Her name was Jordan. She liked to figure out mysteries. She had a brother. His name was Jacob. Jacob was three. She was related to Louis Armstrong, and she wanted to figure out how to get his horn because she listened to his music all the time. She knew where the horn was. It was in his museum. He got it from the Queen of England. Jordan lived in Queens and the museum in Queens.

 

The next day Jordan woke up and she went downstairs to have some breakfast. Her mother was there. Her brother Jacob was still sleeping. Jordan asked her mother if they could go to the museum.

“Sure but we have to wait until your brother wakes up,” said her mom.

Jordan said, “Okay.”

Then Jordan asked for some breakfast. Her mother said, “I’ll give you some breakfast.”

While Jordan was eating her breakfast, her brother woke up. When Jordan was done with her breakfast, her mom told her to get dressed so they could go to the museum. Jordan went upstairs. Her mom gave Jacob some breakfast.  Jordan was dressed and came downstairs. She got her shoes on and her coat on. Jacob finished his breakfast and he was already dressed so he put on his shoes and coat. Her mother did the same thing. Then they went outside to the museum.

On the way, she felt nervous because she might get caught. When they got there, they went inside. They went to the part where the horn was. When Jordan got to the horn, she looked at how shiny it was. So did her brother and mother.

“Yes, now I can touch it and use it!” Then she started running towards the horn. And ran right into the plastic cage. Jordan said, “Darn it! It wasn’t as easy as it looks.”

 

Chapter 2: Getting In Trouble

 

Then her mother said, “Is that what you wanted to do?

Jordan said “Yes.”

Then her mother pulled Jordan out of the museum and onto the sidewalk. When they got back to the house, Jordan’s mother sent her to her room.

Jordan was walking to her room. Jacob was yelling and screaming. When Jordan went in her room, she turned on some music, but not any ordinary music. She turned on Louis Armstrong’s music. She heard the trumpet in the back that he was playing. She was thinking that she could be exactly like him. When her mom called her for lunch, she came down the stairs, and when she got to the dining room, she ate her lunch and ran outside to play. In the meanwhile, her mom started making one of her favorite dishes for dinner. It was also Louis Armstrong’s favorite dish, Jambalaya. Jacob was in his room playing on his iPad. When her brother was done playing his iPad, Jordan came into the house and into the dining room, and started eating.

“Wordan,” said Jacob, “I willed a wig in winecraft.” Which is “I killed a pig in Minecraft” in Jacob language.

“Great,” said Jordan, being sarcastic. “After all, that is the hardest thing to do in Minecraft,” being sarcastic again. While Jordan and Jacob were talking, her mom got Jacob some food, Jambalaya to be specific. When Jordan finished her food, she went upstairs and started reading. She was reading a series called Ellray Jakes.

Jacob was about to go upstairs. He said, “Wommy, W’m winished” ’which is “Mommy I’m finished” in Jacob language.

“Okay, you can go up now, Jacob. But just for a few minutes,” said his Mom.

 

Chapter 3: Planning Something

 

When Jordan woke up, again her brother was still sleeping.

Jordan began to blast Louis Armstrong music to wake up her brother from his sleep. Jacob started screaming, “Waaaah!” which is “Aaaah” in Jacob language.

She turned it right off so she wouldn’t get in trouble. She still really wanted the trumpet. So she started to save up money. She was trying to save up money for a jackhammer to break into the cage. She cleaned people’s cars. She set up something in front of her house. She got fifteen dollars! When she got the money, she hid it in her pocket and went to the store to look for a jackhammer to see how much it cost.

Jordan went to the hardware store on the corner of her street. She went in to ask the person at the counter where the jackhammers were. The man led her to the jackhammers. He went back to the counter to help other customers. She looked at each of the jackhammers one by one. Each one of them was over $200. She ran out of the store and went back to her house and asked her mom if she could buy a jackhammer for her.

Her mom said, “No way! I’m not buying you a jackhammer!”

Jordan went to her room to decide what she was going to do to get more money.

She decided that she has to make something.
Chapter 4: Spending More Money and Even More Money

She decided she was going to make a concert. But to make a concert she had to learn how to play an instrument.

She talked with her mom and her mom said, “You should play the cello.”

She remembered that things cost money. So she remembered that she would have to make money for a cello. She ran downstairs to ask her mom if she could buy the cello. She said she would. So her mom and her went to a music store and bought a cello.

She asked her mom if she could have cello lessons, but that would also cost money, too.
And her mom said, “Yes, but you can only have one more thing that you can ask me to buy for these next three months.”
Jordan’s mom found a great cello teacher named Eleanor. She would come to her house every Wednesday at 4:30. It was pretty easy until the harder songs came. She almost finished a book of songs that Eleanor suggested for her to do. She knew that she had to do something really famous. She decided that she had to do a Bach’s Minuet No.2 or Pachalbel’s Canon.

She was so excited to get the horn that she had to do the prettier one, and that was Pahalbel’s Canon. She told Eleanor that she wanted to practice that. Eleanor made sure that she was ready for it, but she was. She practiced every day for 30 minutes. She was pretty much ready, all she had to do was somehow make a stage. She decided she was going to make flyers and put them on every single tree that she could find in her neighborhood. Luckily, she had a copy machine, so she only had to make one.
The flyers said: “Come March 8th, 2015 to a concert in Central Park.” She was almost done, all she had to do was figure out how to make a stage. She asked her mom for the last thing she could buy for the three months which was materials to make a stage.
Her mom said that she would try to but asked, “What do you need it for?”

Jordan said that their school didn’t have a stage so they asked her if they could make one for the school. She didn’t want her mom to know she was trying to make money because she wanted to get a jackhammer so she could get the horn.

Her mom went out again for the last time for one month to buy lots of materials for the stage. Her mother bought steel, curtain, nails, lights, and all kind of things like that. When her mother and her got home, Jordan started building the stage in their basement which was humongous. When she was done all she had to do was find the space where she could do the concert in Central Park. But then she remembered that when you do something you have to pay for the space.

Then she realized that she couldn’t ask her mom to buy anything else. So she just waited a month until she could ask her mom to buy something. She asked her mom if she could buy a space in Central Park to do a concert just because she had been practicing the cello for so long. Then her mom bought a space in Central Park for her, but just a pretty small one. She asked her mom and brother and her dad who was in Pennsylvania to come help her bring the stage into Central Park to lift it in their truck. When they got to Central Park, they all helped to bring it to the space the Park gave them seats to put down.
People came when the hours passed by. Then at 7 o’clock the show started. Everybody had to pay $10 for the concert which meant she needed more than 20 people to come to the concert. Right before the show started, she counted how many people were there. She counted 20 people but she needed more than 20 people. She remembered that one of the Jackhammers cost $210. When the show was about to start she saw a face coming in. It looked familiar. It was Eleanor. She came to listen. Now she had enough money to buy a jackhammer, all she had to do was make it worth it. The concert went great, she missed a few notes but otherwise it was really good.

When she got home, her mother gave her all the money that she got. She was very proud of her. The next morning, she went to school. When she came home, she asked her mom if she could go to the hardware store. She bought a jackhammer. When she went home, her mother asked her what she was doing with the jackhammer. She said that her school needed it because they were trying to put an art studio in the school.

Then at night, when everybody was asleep, not close to the museum, she woke up, took the jackhammer, and tiptoed across the street. When she got there, fortunately the door wasn’t locked. She tiptoed in, wondering if anybody was in there. She could either go to jail or she could get what she wanted. She tiptoed to where the horn was. She looked right at it. She really, really, really wanted it. So she turned on the jackhammer and she started drilling in the plastic cage. People could hear her, but they were sleeping so they thought it was just construction. The cage was all drilled up so she could reach to get the horn.

She picked it up and quickly tiptoed back to her house, up the stairs, put the horn under the bed and tiptoed down the stairs into the basement and put the jackhammer down there quietly. She tiptoed back up the stairs into her room and went to sleep.

When she woke up, she left the horn under her bed and everything was normal. She went downstairs, ate breakfast, and went to school. Then, she came home. she looked under the bed. The horn was still there. She thought that she did the wrong thing. She felt kind of shy. She carefully took the horn, and decided to put it back where it came from. It wasn’t that easy. She had to pretend it was her own horn and she had to bring it back before anyone in the museum could see her.

Jordan left the house without anybody seeing her. In her head she thought she was one third of the way there. She looked in the Louis Armstrong Museum. She didn’t see anybody inside. She opened the door, tiptoed in, and then she turned around to make sure nobody was looking. But that made her look like she was taking it. A guard noticed her and started running after her. Jordan started running away from the guard. She ran towards her house. The guard followed her out of the museum. Then suddenly, when she was almost at her front door, the guard caught her. He called the police.

Jordan felt like she was going to get into humongous trouble. She was embarrassed and terrified of the trouble she was in. The police arrived. The police ask lots of questions. “Where do you live? How did you get inside? What’s your name?”

Jordan answered the questions with lots of “Umm’s”. When she told the police she lived there, they went to tell her mom.

But Jordan didn’t let them get to her house by being shy, admitting that she stole the horn but she was going to give it back, and saying “Umm, umm, please don’t, umm, tell, umm, my mom.”

They walked towards the guard that caught Jordan. They put him in jail for catching her for no apparent reason. The police put the horn back where it was.

Jordan went back home, which was three steps away and went to her room and went to sleep.

Book 2: The Unexpected War

Chapter 1: X’s bad day just got worse       

 

X was not happy today. His brother Double X was beating him in a game of ‘Who Can Shoot The Chicken Made of Clay?’ Double X was beating X by forty six carats. X got so mad that he wandered off to the place that he kept the portal. And his brother, Double X, was following him. They still never told Double X about the portal because they thought it would be better if Double X didn’t know because they thought it would be too dangerous for him. The reason why it was too dangerous for Double X was because when he was a little kid they lived at a swamp and then a bunch of crocodiles went into his room while he was sleeping, and when he woke up he saw the crocodiles ripping all of his teddy bears and all of his things he owned. Once they noticed that he was up, they bit his arms and legs off. But they found a potion–a very horrible tasting potion–and then they made Double X drink the potion for the next ten years, and after those ten years his arms and legs grew back and they were better than ever. But the actual reason why X think it’s too dangerous for Double X is because whenever Double X sees a crocodile he gets paralyzed with fear. But worst of all, when the crocodiles came they also killed Double X and X’s parents. And then they had to live in an orphanage for nine years until Sword and Flame Thrower adopted them. But the reason why it affected Double X more than it affected X was because Double X saw the crocodiles kill his parents, and he also heard their last words.

Their last words were, “When the hour strikes twelve on a Sunday night in the city that rests one hundred miles beneath the surface, there will be a war, and five armies will come to that war and hunt to all kill one person… you.” And then they died.

By accident X touched the portal and he got sent through the portal and Double X saw. Double X was very curious. He wanted to know what happened to his brother so he went over and touched the crystal, too. And then he noticed that his surroundings were changing and he was only seeing things that existed miles beneath the ground. And then he saw X, who looked like he was full of shame and he was never going to forgive himself by letting his brother look at this new world. Double X had never really liked things like crocodiles and so X felt like they could defeat him with ease.

Double X said to one of the citizens that was carrying a sword, “Can I borrow that sword for a second?”

He said, “Sure. No problem, bro.”

Double X said he wanted to fight to the death with X because X lied to him about this cool place. Double X wanted to kill him because Double X thought the place was cool. He liked the portal and the rock sculptures. So then X took his most prized possession out to fight Double X. It was the all-important Marshmallow Sword! And as it turned out X won because his brother couldn’t resist a good marshmallow.

And then X said to Double X, “I’m always one step ahead of you, little brother!”

 

* * *

 

Sword and Flame Thrower, X and Double X’s parents, were enjoying their day. Until they found out that Double X and X were gone! They went out of their minds and then they started bouncing up and down and then they fell into their pool full of taco ice cream cones. Except all of them were poisonous! The sad part was that there were also swords in it! But at least there was ice cream in it. But they missed the ice cream. But they also missed the swords! But they also missed the pool! So then they fell in the pool right left to it and that pool was filled with the most poisonous ice cream scorpions in the world. But luckily, they just decided to eat them. They’re only poisonous if they sting you.

And then they went, “Aaaaaaaaaaah!” And then after that Flamethrower said, “Like, totally. Aaaaaah!”

Then they had the craziest idea in the world. Sword wanted to go through the portal.

Then Flame Thrower said, “That plan is just so crazy. It just might work!”

“But,” they both said, ”we can’t do it right now. Because it’s our coffee break. Sorry!” they said through the portal. “We can’t help you right now. We have our coffee break.”

And then they poured some of the coffee into the portal and then it splattered on X and Double X’s faces.

 

*  *  *

 

X and Double X were astonished. Double X said, “Please! Spare me! … Another marshmallow, that is!”

X said, “Sorry, I can’t afford to lose any more of the marshmallows from my marshmallow sword. The marshmallow store is five blocks up, two blocks down, three more blocks down, five blocks into the air, two blocks southeast, and then you have to drill one hundred miles down into the ground.”

Double X said, “Sure! Anything for a good marshmallow!”

And then he started walking at his fastest slow pace which was five hundred and fifty six point five miles per hour. He looked like he was banging off the walls but in Double X’s point of view everybody else was moving in slow motion. Once Double X got to the marshmallow stand, he had a choice between extremely poisonous marshmallows and really good tasting marshmallows that were not poisonous. But of course Double X didn’t know the difference, so he just got a bag of each.

So then he went back to the city and then one of the people said, “Oooh, what’s that?”

Double X said, “Oh, that’s a marshmallow.”

And then the villager said, “Ohhh, can I have one?”

Double X said, “Sure, bro.”

But unfortunately he gave the villager the poisonous ones by accident. But luckily he only had one of them. But, unfortunately, he still died a very painful death and they caught it all on camera.

But luckily Double X still had enough poisonous marshmallows to kill a couple of crocodiles, which X, Sword, and Flamethrower still never told him about, but he had not yet come across any. But will he or will he not? That will remain undecided.

 

Chapter 2: Will they or will they not?

 

Flamethrower and Sword decided that their coffee break was over. So then they decided to have an ice cream because they didn’t want to go into the portal yet.

And then when X said through the portal, “Come down here,” they just threw a tub of ice cream on his face and said “There will be no mercy. There will be no mercy.”

But then, unluckily for Sword and Flamethrower, they finished their ice cream, and this time they didn’t even have an excuse for not going through the portal. So sad. They went in through the portal with all bow and arrows ready and their chocolate shield at the ready. When they went in, they were very sad because the ice cream bow and arrow melted as soon as they went in. But at least nobody was trying to kill them once they got through the portal, thankfully.

 

*  *  *

 

Double X said to the villagers’ corpse, “Sorry, bro. Not my fault. These little marshmallows did the trick. It wasn’t on my bucket list so it must have been on yours. Sorry.”

X came over and said, “What did you do this time?”

In a way, X didn’t want to know. But Double X told him anyway.

Double X said, “So I killed a guy with some poisonous marshmallows. But I didn’t know that they were poisonous marshmallows. I kind of did know that they were poisonous marshmallows, but I didn’t mean to give him poisonous marshmallows. But in a way I didn’t really know in the first place, but then after I tested them out on a couple of other villagers, and then they passed away, I figured out they were poisonous. But too late for that. But at least I know which ones are poisonous. Okay, you’re probably still mad at me right now.”

X said, “Oh, it’s okay. No it’s not okay! How dare you kill a bunch of people! Now you must suffer my wrath!”

But what Double X didn’t know was that X’s wrath was that he was going to take all the poisonous marshmallows from Double X and put them in his marshmallow sword so that his marshmallow sword was even more dangerous and poisonously awesome than ever. Double X was very sad that X took away his precious marshmallows. Double X started mumbling and then went over to the garbage dump and poured acid into it and then jumped into it like it was a super awesome swimming pool except instead of water it was made out of acid and garbage and sewer water.

Double X wanted revenge on X, so he went to find someone that would murder X when he was sleeping. When Double X was about to give up, he passed a group of crocodiles that were in disguise. The reason that they were in disguise was because they were planning to murder X (except not while he was sleeping, but while he was awake so that he could experience all the pain).

The crocodiles said, “We will let you live if you let us murder X.”

Double X said, “I have no idea what you mean, but better X dead than me dead.”

So, Double X said, “Okay, but don’t come crying back to me saying that X killed you.”

So when Double X came back, X asked him, “Where were you?!”

Double X said, “I was just talking to a bunch of people and trying to persuade them to murder you when you were sleeping.”

X said, “How dare you? I thought I could trust you. But, I also have to admit. I was also talking to a bunch of guys, trying to persuade them to throw you into a lava swamp.”

“We might as well kill them now,” they both said in unison.

So then, they first went to the guys who was going to throw Double X into a lava swamp and said, “New plan!”

“Well, we think we are going to throw you into a lava swamp right now,” X and Double X said in unison.

And so they did. And then they got it all on video tape because what’s the point of torturing people if you don’t have it all on video tape?!

When they got back to the village they showed the video tape to all of the soldiers that they knew, and then they had a party for the death of two of their enemies.  But when they were in the middle of their party they heard a strange rumbling noise, and then they saw a vulture.

They also saw a crocodile, a spider and a snake, which all said the same thing: “We are going to wage a war with you on the twenty-first of December.”

All of the humans were quite surprised that their defenses didn’t attack the intruders, but of course they had no choice.  They had to accept the challenge, or else the enemy would be allowed to take over their village.

“Yes we shall,” responded the humans, “but since you disturbed us while we were in a party, you will all be sentenced to death.  And I think you know how we sentence people to death by now.  So off the cliff you go.”

So off they went to the edge of the cliff, jumping off, never to be seen again.

 

Chapter 3: “The War”

 

All of the soldiers went to the battle station to get the equipment for the war.  As they did so, the enemy was also getting ready for war. The crocodiles, the vulture, the spiders, and the snakes were better at fighting, but this did not lower the humans’ spirits.  They sent Double X as a scout to see what the enemy was doing. When he came back, he told them that they’re all marching toward the city and they’re only 21,021.21 yards away. Double X was playing ping-pong with himself because since he was so fast he already finished making all of his equipment ready. He made diamond encrusted armor, of course. 20 swords, 35 shields, 39 packs of Greek fire, a bunch of these little strap thingies that you throw and then it makes a net and some grenades, Fishgut bombs, lice bombs, ice cream bombs, jelly bombs, spike bombs, fire bombs, net bombs, gooey bombs, water balloon bombs, laser bombs… Eh, you get the point.

X’s equipment was five hundred thousand shields, seven hundred swords, five hundred bombs, six hundred jars of Greek fire, and 25 tanks. Once he finished packing his equipment, he ordered twenty-five million of the villagers to try to destroy the enemy. But once they got there, all they saw was one crocodile.

But then twenty five million other crocodiles came and then one of the crocodiles shouted “CHARGE!”

And then all the crocodiles started running toward them. But, they had a secret weapon. Double X started to run around the crocodiles throwing jars of Greek fire at them. All the crocodiles died and then the other four armies started to pour through underground holes to attack them. Then Double X ran away, but all of the other four armies followed him. Double X knew that if he didn’t do anything then he was going to die. But he also knew that if he did do something then he might have a chance of defeating the four armies. So he changed directions and started running toward them. And then his army started to follow him. And then they started destroying the other four armies. And then there was just one vulture left, and then that vulture said that he surrendered and then flew away. So for now, they all got to live in peace.

 

THE END

Or So It Seemed……  

Izzy Momo

Once there was a boy named Izzy Momo. He lived in a cave and he had no one to play with. And he wanted a piece of dirt because no one ever had one. Except for people on Planet Dirt. So he had to go back in time because that was when Planet Dirt didn’t explode. So he had to get a lot of diamonds to make the time machine. Except he did not know how to make the time machine with the diamonds and diamonds are super rare on this planet. He had no one to go with so he was afraid he was going to be lost. So he got some diamonds because he was in a cave. It was pretty easy. He tried to make the time machine but he kept on failing. He will have to look at a magazine. But how could he find a magazine? So he thought and he thought but he never found out how. So he tried to get out of the cave but it was no use. So he tried to put a sack of diamonds and then climb up them, except all the diamonds fell and broke. So he tried to stack some iron like he did with the diamonds. Except he forgot that the ground was made out of the strongest thing in the world so the iron broke. So he tried to carry some of the strongest thing in the world. He decided he wanted a rock because the dirt people were way too rude. He wanted the rock because he hated people and no one else had a rock. He hated people because they were always mean to him. Another person was a bully and hurt him and then he hated everyone because they joined with him to stack it. And it finally worked.

He needed to go to Neptune because that’s the only way to get a magazine. But how can he get to Neptune? It was no use trying to make a ship because he had none of the ingredients. He needed some diamonds but he took all of the diamonds and they all broke. He used to use the strongest thing in the world and he used all of it. So he took one piece and made the spaceship and got the magazine.

But he doesn’t have the diamonds so he had to go to a different cave. So he went to the different cave except he only found one diamond and he needed three. He has to go to another time and that time he found diamonds. So he grabbed them and made the portal. He had to put three diamonds on the floor, then he had to put three pieces of sand around it, and then he had to throw a diamond in there.

A portal spawned right in his face. So he jumped in the portal and saw no dirt. Except he saw dirt people. And he tried to kill them. So he popped their heads off so they can get dirt and got two and banged their head together. Then the dirt people came back alive. They fell over and their mouths got stuck in the floor and Izzy Momo smacked their butts and they flipped over. Then they were mad, smacked Izzy Momo in the butt and then they killed him.

So he woke up from the dead right away and kicked the dirt people. He looked tiny, idiotic, and he acted like a dork. Since he died, he changed his personality. Except if he changed his personality, he started doing dorky things. He fell on the floor, put his head in the floor, and since he was dumb, he found some dirt and put it in his nose. He sneezed and some of the dirt fell into his mouth because his tongue was out and then he swallowed it, he died again, and he turned into a ghost. Then he finds more dirt people but now he was smart so he went under their legs then tripped them. They punched him in the face except they can’t punch him in the face because he’s a ghost.

So he hopped in the portal and it took him to the Diamond Dimension. It was all pure diamonds. He was rich for days. Except he didn’t care because he was already rich so he fell on the floor and went out of the Diamond Dimension and went to the Gold Dimension. Then it kept on happening with gold, with iron, and then he finally realized he had a question: How would he pick the rock up if he’s a ghost?

He had to get out of the portal so he can get out without them hurting him. He used rock because it could protect him. He had to carry it to Stone Dimension! Except there was only one stone and it was surrounded with a portal and he didn’t realize it. And then he fell in the portal and then he went to the Coal Dimension. It was raining coal and then coal fell on his head and it falls through him and it cracked the ground open.

He falls into it and he goes back in time until he was a baby. He sees what he looked like when he was a baby. He tries to punch the baby but he hurts himself because he’s really punching himself. Then he keeps on punching the baby but he’s basically punching himself and the baby had magical powers that turned people back into humans if they were a ghost. He turned back into a human. Then his Dad saw him and then he thought that he was evil and trying to kill the baby because he was punching the baby. Then they got into a fight. He won the fight and he didn’t feel bad at all.

He can’t get out of the past so there are two of him. He knew that he was going to have to live with the baby forever and he hated babies. He had to live with the baby because if the baby dies, he dies.

The One and Only World

Once upon a time there was a person named Hugo Steler. He was a thief and one day, he stole a purse from an old lady that had a library card so she could rent books from the public library. So he went to the library and picked out a random book. He didn’t know how it worked so he took a book and went outside, but the owner never saw so he was free. He read the whole thing and thought, “This isn’t anything important.” Then he read one page that told him about a world that was always green and exploded two trillion years ago. And so he thought, “I can make a new world, and I can live there. I can put my house there and I’ll have the biggest house in the world.” So he went looking for some clues to how to rebuild the world. He took one more book from the library. He read on one page that said if he finds a certain book, it will have a formula that creates a person that will tell him how to make the world again. So Hugo looked around and found all the ingredients. He needed a really, really special color that was called babu and then he also needed a really really really small bookcase that could fit into a glass. He put them all into a small container and he shook it and also put in a little bit of water, and after that it made a really really light yellow. Then, a little part of it exploded out so Hugo  went away and took a rag to clean it up, but it burned the rag! So he took the formula and put it in a secret container and then after a week, a new person came. That person told him everything to make the new world.

To make the new world, he had to get the best drawing in the whole world, and a piece of grass. So he was looking in the museum when he saw a giant painting but it wasn’t a painting; it was more like a scribble. It said, “The Best Painting in the World.”

But he hadn’t read the end of the directions, which was the most important part. That was, “The Best Painting in the World…for the stupid people.” SO Hugo took the painting but the guards saw him. They said, “No one can take the painting!” Then they said, “You can take that. That’s just a dumb drawing.”

Hugo said, “No, it’s the best painting in the world.”

The guard said, “That’s the best painting in the world for the stupid people!”

Hugo said, “Ohhhhh.” He looked in every single museum but he never found the Best Painting in the World. There was only the best picture for dumb people, or the best picture for people who never shut up. So, he just went to a chamber and said, “Why did I look here? It doesn’t seem important.” But there was a secret room. “Maybe it’s in here!” He walked and opened the door. It was so smelly! He almost passed out. But right in the middle of it was the painting. “If I can get past that wall of stinkiness, I can just use a portal.” So he ran to a bank and said “Can I have all your money, stupid person?”

One of the stupid bank people was writing a stupid report of how bad their bank was and there were nothing but baby stories all about the horrible bank. Hugo thought that the bank was actually the best. But they called it the Bad Bank. That was the name of that awesome place, but Hugo never was able to get money there. They were so mean, but it was an awesome place. So he ran to another place, but he had no idea where he was, so he just randomly went into a store and looked to see if there was a bank but there were none, and he went into a house and asked them for money but he was never able to find anything. So he just went to a random place that he never knew if it was even a place. It wasn’t a place. It was nothing. He started falling and falling and falling but then land came into view. But there were a million trampolines where he was. He went through 999 of them but then he started bouncing as high as the empire state building. He bounced so high he went right through all the trampolines. He crashed through the dirt and then he started falling again and there was nothing again. Then another land came into view and it was Heaven.

In Heaven, he got as much money as he wanted to buy diamonds to make a portal. The bad thing was, the only thing he needed after diamonds was impossible to get. Unless he killed  kill a million zombies! He never thought he could defeat them, but he got armor and a massive sword and so and so. Then he started looking for zombies but there were no more. So he gave up and went back to another world through a really small elevator and that world was the building world. So he just found a random house with a bed in it and went to sleep. When he woke up, he found a fake person in the room. He still didn’t feel like looking so he just opened the door. And there was the owner of the building right in front of him. But when the owner got so angry he fell onto the ground and turned into a zombie!

And then he yelled “7bytfgyrudhnygtfj8d3huyfrgrtefhiduh!”

After he said that, a million zombies rose from the earth. But Hugo wasn’t armed. The armor and the sword were on the other side. He thought, “If they look over there, then I can run.”

So he said “Hey, look, zombies!” He found the decoy on the edge of the door so he ran to get it and threw it as hard as he could. Since the zombies weren’t that smart, they thought that was him. So they ran after the decoy and jumped on the decoy. But there was one zombie that was smart enough to not run after that decoy. So, Hugo just took a grenade he found under his bed. He knew zombies in this world were really quite like dogs. So he just threw the grenade and the zombie ran and tried to get it and when he did he exploded. And then Hugo ran as fast as he could to the other side. Then he took his suit of armor that was laying on the door and put it on as fast as he can and got the sword. And when the zombies weren’t looking, he swiped his sword and since they were all bunched up he chopped off every zombie’s head.

He got the piece of paper that the ancient artist made. The piece of paper just appeared in the sky, falling down like a butterfly that had been shot by a gun. But then an evil dentist that had super shoes that let him jump super high appeared, and then he took the piece of paper and ran off.

But Hugo always had a gun in his pocket so he shot the dentist and won. That meant he could make the new world.

The Adventures of Cig and Pow

1:

Cig and Pow were best friends. Cig got hurt many times, so Pow hurt himself because he felt bad for his friend. They liked Minecraft. They were awesome, so they didn’t die, but they were wounded. Cig and Pow wanted to go inside the Volcano of Doom and they wanted to get random Pokemon cards that nobody uses anymore. The Demon of Fire, the Big Shield of Awesomeness, the Big Mountain of Trains, the Big Toy Store of Thomas, and Alice the Duck-land were all in their way!

So first they played played Minecraft for a while, and killed skeletons and stuff like that. Then they died in Minecraft because of a zombie pig man. Then they decided to go fight the Demon of Fire with their diamond swords and armor. Cig and Pow were doing this in real life, not Minecraft. They had to walk miles without water or food. When they got there…

 

2:

They didn’t see any sign of the Demon of Fire. All they saw were My Little Ponies. But when they opened the gate, the My Little Ponies formed to turn into the demon. It was 50 feet tall and 100 feet wide with 70,000,000,000 wings.

Cig and Pow were so freaked out that they almost peed their pants. But they didn’t. But they almost did. They took out their diamond things and slashed the demon in half. Then Cig and Pow slashed down the gate.

“Go, move,” they hissed at each other.

They wanted to get to the Big Shield of Awesome soon. The Big Shield of Awesome seemed like it was 1,000,000,000,000 miles away.

 

3:

With no food, Cig and Pow were melting (because they were in the desert).

 

4:

They were praying so hard that they would find some food that they were melting even more.

 

5:

After they went through the desert, they fainted.

So after they got back up, they ran as fast as they could to try and find the Big Shield of Awesome. They found it on the top of a mountain that was called Cuckooland.

After they found it, they decided they should use it to go inside the Volcano of Doom to find random Pokemon cards that nobody uses anymore.

After that, they had to travel two trillion more miles to get to The Mountain of Trains.

When they got there, the trains were coming at them like crazy people. And they had bow and arrows and they were trying to shoot Cig and Pow. The trains wanted to stop them because they knew if Cig and Pow got the Pokemon cards, they could control them with it. The trains didn’t want that. So they attacked Cig and Pow with their bows and shot both of them in the chest.

 

6:

Cig and Pow were unconscious for three hours. They were lying in the train land. They were looking around and all the trains were blurry.

“jslibodg  ueiieojeoj,” said Cig.

“Dnbdjggdwiwhdj,” said Pow slowly.

Everything got better eventually.

“Dkejduoowwyy; Fhhdddhhdj hhhhi uHhg,” they both said.

“Poop,” Pow said. “I don’t think we should be talking because I think the trains will come back.”

 

The End.

Sun or Moon: The Connection Skyway

CHAPTER  1: THE SKYWAY THAT LEADS DOWN

 

Daniel Star Palomino sat on the couch in his medium-sized apartment. His mother ran to him shouting “Get dressed, Mister! It’s almost time for school!” Daniel slowly got up from the brown couch and started walking to his bedroom. He looked in his mirror, his black hair looked distraught-like, like every morning, his blue-green eyes looked tired still, and his face expression looked so unhappy. He got dressed into a short blue T-shirt, dark blue short jeans, nice black high-tops, and a L.A. Dodgers baseball hat. He ran out of Coco Road (the street he lived on) and ran to the apartment across from him to walk with his friend Joshua Nilgin. You see, Joshua’s and Daniel’s families were cousins of sort. That was because Daniel’s great-grandpa married Joshua’s great-grandma. But there is technically another reason why. Also, because both Joshua and Daniel’s family were part of the Moon side on the star they call home, and not the Sun side. What I mean by “on the star they call home” is that they live on star called the Farler Star. And there is only one way down to Earth, and that is too risky to risk. But anyway, he ran to number eight (he was number ten) and knocked hard. A tall boy with hazel-gold hair and sparkly green eyes stood there, waiting for him to talk.

“Hey, Joshua,” Daniel finally said.

“Hey, come in.” He made his way into the wood door with Daniel following. “You know about the Open Skyway, right?”

“Yeah, but…” started Daniel.

“The one that leads to Earth. Yes,” he said. “And the Moon King is telling to the Moon people that we are going to have Eclipse War I with the Sun people because Sun people want to keep the skyway open and the Moon people want the connection closed.”

“Why in this world would the sun people want a human to find out about us? If that happened, our world would be in ashes because we can’t even stand more than ten humans in our world!” explained Daniel.

You see, we’re not aliens, we look like normal humans, but humans are so annoying. Daniel was shaking his head. Joshua’s little sister Mary came over to the two boys.

“Joshua, today is Saturday! Why are you up so early!?” she asked in a tired tone. Her green eyes looked like they were going to burst out of her head. She didn’t have the patience to hear Joshua’s answer.

“Never mind. Today we’re going to the Skyway Museum. Do you want to come too, Daniel?” (Mary had a crush on Daniel, even though Daniel was four years older than her).

“Why not,” replied Daniel. A grin spread on his face. “Not like there’s going to be an asteroid falling in the middle of the museum. Am I right?” Nobody laughed at Daniel’s joke. “Well, sorry for trying it to be funny.”

“WEIRDO IN THE HOUSE,” yelled Mary. She giggled. She thought she was the queen of everything.

“SHHHH!” Joshua whispered harshly. “Don’t wake up Mom and Dad. You know they’re sound sleepers.” Joshua sighed. Sometimes for him, having a little sister was the WORST.

“Time to go to school,” said Daniel.

“Oh yeah,” Joshua said and the two boys ran to John Moon Middle School. John Moon was the son of Matthew Moon (who is King Moon) in History of the Moon Kingdom.

Halfway on the trip to John Moon Middle School, Daniel stopped and said, “Joshua, I forgot, it’s Saturday! I’m pretty sure Mary told us that, but I stopped listening to her years ago ”

“Oh, you’re right. Let’s just go to the Ten Street Park,” said Joshua. They walked to the Ten Street Park, which was really on Northwest Avenue.  Jackson Anderson, the bully of the whole Moon Kingdom, was at also at Ten Street Park.

“Hey losers,” said Jackson. “You know Darren Milky Way (the mayor of Moon City which was in the moon side), turns out he’s my great uncle. So now, I might be related to the Moon King, since mayors are usually related to Matthew Moon.” Jackson was such a bragger. Can’t he just shut up?

“That’s not fascinating at all!” explained Joshua. “You see Jackson, maybe something like, a new roller coaster is coming up or there’s no school for the week is interesting.”

Jackson closed up to Joshua. “Are you sassin’ me punk! Because if you are, then it ain’t good.”

Just before Jackson could pound Joshua, Daniel grabbed his arms and ran to 597 East Half Street (it was the border of the Moon kingdom, and Cocoa Road was very close to the border, not to mention Ten Street Park was very close to the border, too).

“What do you think you’re doing?!” asked Daniel in amazement. “You could’ve gotten a black eye or injured yourself!”

“But I didn’t!” said Joshua. Joshua gazed away and saw something that caught his eye. “Look, something shiny.”

He ran over to the spot while Daniel was following him. He found a rockpile and started to pull something shiny out. And then, a jewel made of rubies and emeralds was in the palm of Joshua’s hand. And it on it was a carving of a crescent moon, overlapping with a sun. Daniel also looked inside the rockpile and found a letter. It read:

Dear founders of the jewel,

This my diary of the eclipse. It started like this: I was a regular boy named Salis San Palo. I was looking around when I found a jewel, the same one you found. And it was a dangerous jewel. It was wanted for the eclipse, to destroy or open the skyway. And eventually, it killed me, not to mention my brother, John Jr. Moon. (the son of John Moon). And Katherine Sun (the princess of Sun) also died. So beware this jewel, and beware the——– family.”

 

“Salis San Palo, that sounds familiar. But anyway, what does he mean by ‘And I’m still alive, but in a different place’? I need to know. And what does this jewel do?” All these things were in Daniel’s head, but the most important one he forget about.

“And which family we need to beware!” said Joshua. “The Sun family probably. And what does this jewel do to destroy most of the Farler Star. Do you think we need to go to the Redren Star?”

The Redren Star was a star planet that lead to the world of Eclipse, also the place where the portal to places unknown was. The Redren Star was a dangerous place, and Daniel wasn’t letting his best friend go there. “Are you crazy! The last person who went to the Redren Star ended up going into the portal unknown, and then nobody knows what happened to him!”

“You forget one thing. The Redren King knows everything, including what the jewel could do,” said Joshua.

Joshua was right, the Redren King did know everything. Daniel didn’t want to face it, but they were going to the Redren Star.

CHAPTER 2: THE REDREN KINGDOM

 

Daniel and Joshua went on a bus to the Redren Connection Way, where they found Emilia South, just sitting there. She had blonde hair, a dark red dress, and seaweed-colored eyes. Then she walked up to Daniel.

“What are you up to today, Dan?” asked Emilia, sounding like she knew everything about Daniel.

“Nothing, Emma,” Daniel replied in a soft tone.

“I want in!” Emilia whispered as harsh as she can. “If you don’t let me in then I’ll take the jewel from you.”

“You’re in!” said Joshua. Nothing or nobody could take something that important. “Sorry, Daniel. And how do you know about the jewel?”

“I was spying on you the whole day,” answered Emilia. “Wasn’t it obvious?” Emilia was such a little diva.

“Here we are, stopping right in front of the Redren Connection Way – get off if this is your stop,” announced the bus driver who seemed to be quite happy at the moment.

So Emilia, Joshua, and Daniel got off the bus and started walking up the Redren Connection Way. It took about five or ten minutes to get to the top. And on the Redren Star, the ground was blue, the grass was a violet, they had no flowers, and everybody who lived there was red, even the Frosties, but all people from the stars wouldn’t think it’s a big deal. Luckily, Daniel knew somebody who could take him to the Redren King, but it wouldn’t be easy. He lives in East County, but they came from the west, and the Frosties live in the East County. The Frosties were known to have ice power. Anyway, they started taking their buses, just Emilia, Daniel, and Joshua were riding on a bus until we got to Middle County, the center of the Redren Star. And the rest was walking. They walked for one day, and began to rest. In the morning, they would see the Frosties boy who knows Daniel.

 

It was now the crack of dawn, and in front of them was a door that just stood there. There was nothing on the sides or the back of the door. And on the door was a snowflake. So they opened it and found a whole different world. The snow was harsh. Everybody who lived there looked something like little blue elves. They had pointy ears, a very light lime-green eye color, and the men had scars on their faces with aqua colored blood coming out of them. The houses and buildings were the color cobalt blue, amaranth, debian red, eton blue, scarlet, or azure. The reason why the South Country’s houses and buildings were either blue or red was because red and blue were the South Country’s Honorful Colors.

“Guys, were supposed to go to the castle, not the mansion!” Daniel yelled so loud that the whole neighborhood could probably hear him. Emilia and Joshua then started to walk to the castle. Daniel knocked hard on the door.

“Who is it?” asked a man from inside the gates.

“Daniel Star Palomino, friend of Prince Icee” The doors opened for the three kids. “Told you I was friends with a Frostie boy.”

They went inside to this huge corridor made entirely out of crystals. Everything was transparent and beautiful in every way imaginable. Icee was waiting for them. Icee had sky blue hair, dark blue skin, the regular color of Frosties’ eyes.

“Daniel! What do you need?” asked Icee.

“Icee, I need your help to get connection with the Redren King. We have a special item to ask him about.”

“OK! Take a bus to the Middle County. The Redren King will be pleased to meet you,” Prince Icee got up and walked to the desk made out of ice. “Let me write you a note that will get you in the Redren Castle.” Prince Icee wrote a quick note. “Here.” He stuck out a hand to Emilia.

“Thanks,” she took the note from his hand.

Emilia’s blonde hair shined in the white snow. The three kids had to get out of Frostie County, or they would freeze to death.  They took the bus to Donut Woods (where the jello monster lives), which is also the border between Middle County and Frostie County. The bus came in under two minutes and took them straight to Redren Castle. The forest was huge, almost the size of the whole Moon Side. They saw the jello monster chasing them a little while. No one really cared because the jello monster was actually super sensitive, so Joshua yelled at him and he stopped chasing them. When they got to Redren Kingdom, they saw that it was booming. It seemed that more people from New York City and Los Angeles combined were there. The castle was huge, maybe the size of the Shanghai Tower, or bigger. Joshua saw the top: it was a statue of a star. The whole castle was the color rose. The exterior was only rose, except the gate, which was peachish. The gate was big for a gate. It was probably 555 feet, the minimum. The gate was marble, pure marble, like the Washington Monument – actually, they were the same size as the Washington Monument. When they were outside of the gate, they knocked. A voice that sounded like a tiger and a hyena combined asked, “Who’s there?”

“Me, Joshua Nilgin, Emilia South, Daniel Star Palomino, here to see the Redren King.” Joshua slid the note under the thick gate. On the bus, the kids read the note. It said:

 

Dear Redren King,

 

I am Prince Icee, prince of the Frostie County. My friends, Joshua Nilgin, Emilia South, and Daniel Star Palomino, have an important discovery to ask you about. These young kids are from the Moon Side of the Farler Star. Hope you can live happily in your big castle.

 

Love, Prince Icee

 

The doors creaked open, but it sounded like a million dogs howling. At least if anyone was asleep, they would wake up in ten seconds tops. The floors of the main hallway were made entirely out of bright rubies. When you walked into the main hallway, it would look like you were flying in a red, very red, paradise. There was a huge mural of the Redren King. He was a red-head, which Emilia thinks is cute. They walked around in that grand hallway. In the hallway, they saw runaway (from Earth) green honeycreepers, a type of bird, flying above their heads. Star people sometimes let pretty animals from earth come up into the stars. A tall man with turquoise eyes, straight red hair, and a fancy suit walked in.

“Hello, children! I am Quincy Redren, The Redren King. I am so happy you could come!” said the very cheerful and graceful Redren King. “You said you have an important discovery?”

Joshua got out the letter and the gem. The Redren King took the gem and note. “Be back in a starburst (‘hurry’ in Staranian). Did you know Staranian were ancient star people or ‘aliens’ top language?” The kids yawned to make sure he would stop teaching them. He went and came back in a nanosecond. “I found that the gem dates back to the Skyway Dynasty, where the Sun people and Moon people argued about the skyway for five centuries, five hundred years. The note belonged to Salis San Palo, whose nearest relative today is Logan Star Palomino.”

“That’s my grandpa!” screamed Daniel. “I’m the relative of Salis San Palo and John Moon Jr.”

“Wow! Oh, by the way you want to know which family to beware?” Emilia, Daniel, and Joshua’s eyes lit up like a thousand diamonds sparkling on a full moon. “You need to beware the Redren family, so that is my family!” King Redren made an evil grin. The three kids wondered what was going and if that question was going to be the end of him. “My great great grand daddy actually created the Skyway Dynasty to get the sun people and moon people hate each other. Redrenians hate people from the Farler Star, which used to be one whole star, not divided in half by the sun and moon.”

 

CHAPTER 3: BATTLE TO THE DEATH

 

“Children, I am very evil indeed. You see, girl, I believe your name is Emilia South, you are actually the great great granddaughter of Katherine Sun.” King Redren then put an angry face. He pointed at Joshua. “And you, you’re not Daniel Star Palomino’s cousin, for sure!” Joshua and Daniel looked confused. Emilia was jumping up and down seeing she was Sun royalty. Daniel didn’t care about royalty, but Joshua not being his cousin was huge to him. “My brother, Benjamin Redren, was your real father! Benjy, a real stupid guy. He wanted me to be good!” King Redren made an evil laugh. “So I killed him, like what I’m going to do to you!”

Joshua tried to sound valiant, but he felt like a baby crying because someone took his candy. “None of the things you’re saying are true!” But, Joshua knew some things he said were true, and he knew Benjamin Redren was one of them.

“It doesn’t matter because you don’t have powers, just like me!” shouted Emilia.

“And me!” shouted Daniel.

“And me!’ shouted Joshua.

“That is so, but I have weapons.” King Redren pressed a button and in his gun appeared a Redrenian gun, which has the pressure of ten waterfalls hitting you at the same place. “Say goodbye, Joshua Redren!” The second he said so, he shoot him with the gun. Joshua lay dead on the floor. The room was silent for a minute.

Daniel’s eyes and cheeks became red. He ran and punched King Redren like no tomorrow, because if he didn’t hurt him, there might be no tomorrow. His gun fell on the floor, so he was powerless.

“Emilia, shoot this bozo!” King Redren’s eyes stared at him. Daniel was jumping on his back so he couldn’t move an inch.

“Say goodbye, King Redren!” Emilia mimicked King Redren’s voice. When she shoot him, Daniel jumped off just in time not to be dead. King Redren lay dead on the floor, next to his nephew.

Daniel and Emilia had no choice but to go back home. Though, they told the story to the head guard and made decisions. He went to Joshua and King Redren where he got blood of King Redren mixed with a milk-looking drink and spilled it on Joshua. Joshua rose up. Emilia and Daniel gave him a hug for ten minutes straight, not moving. Since Joshua is technically the nearest relative to King Redren, he took over the Redren Star, and became known as Joshua Redren. The head guard, Quincy, and his wife, Brooke, said they’ll take care of little Joshua. The mayor, Darren Milky Way, was replaced with no one, because once they killed King Redren, the connection skyway and border of the sun and moon sides disappeared. So there was only one more thing to do, and that was to rub being a relative of royalty to Jackson Anderson. One day, Emilia, Joshua, and Daniel met on the border of the Redren Star and the Farler Star. It was a beautiful night. Emilia brought a picnic basket, Daniel brought some Farlanian food, and Joshua brought Redrenian food. You could see Earth, the Moon, the Sun, Mars, Jupiter, et cetera. Then they saw something special. It was a special type of shooting star called the Kirby Rainbow Star, which could destroy any planet very quickly, and the three kids saw this one hurtling toward the Redren and Farler Star, which could kill both planets. The Kirby Rainbow Star looked like a falling rainbow.The three kids knew what they had to do, and that was warn everyone about the Kirby Rainbow Star.

 

The End…..For Now

The Grandfather Clock

There was a knock on my office door.

“Come in!” I said.

An old man with gray hair and a cane walked in. He was limping and his clothes were all battered.

“Mr. McKeever,” said the old man, “I need your help. My grandfather clock got stolen. Can you help me find it?”

“Tell me what happened,” I said.

“I was getting ready to go to bed when I heard footsteps. I thought it was my cat. I went into the kitchen. The pantry was open and everything inside it was thrown out. I ran to the front door and saw that it was open. Then there was a smash. I ran to the kitchen and I saw that my prized grandfather clock had been stolen! I ran outside and saw darkness. I looked at my watch. It said 12:14 a.m. Then there was a gunshot. Pain burst into my leg. I saw blood spilling from my leg. I climbed painfully inside. I called an ambulance. In a matter of two minutes, I heard sirens.  They took me out on a stretcher. The next thing I knew I was in the hospital. My leg wasn’t hurt. In a few days I was let out. Then I came straight to you,” said the old man.

“Okay, what did the robber look like?” I asked.

“I don’t know, it was too dark to see,” said the old man.

“Can you take me to your house?” I asked.

“Yes,” the old man said.

I led him outside. There was a shiny new Ferrari parked against the curb.

Why was this man in battered clothes and owned a Ferrari? I thought. I got in the back seat and said, “Nice car.”

The old man ignored me. He started the car. He took off.

“You’re going too fast,” I said.

Again, he didn’t respond.

We pulled up to barred gates. The old man typed something in on a meter-ish thing. The gates opened. He drove inside. There was a fountain. Behind the fountain there was a huge tan-colored mansion. The old man parked the car. I got out. I went inside. There was a long hall.

“Show me where your grandfather clock was,” I said.

The old man walked to where his grandfather clock was.

There were many gunshots.

I dived out of the way. Then I saw somebody run past me. I grabbed his leg. He tripped. He was a 15-year old boy with many freckles. “What is your name, son?” I asked.

“L-Luke,” said the boy trembling.

“Well, you’re going to be arrested,” I said. I forced him up and put handcuffs on him. Then I went outside to look for the old man. He was nowhere to be seen.
“Where is that old man?” I thought. I looked inside his car. He wasn’t there. I asked the boy, “What did you do to that old man?”

“What old man?” asked Luke.

“Never mind,” I said. I looked up and down the street. Then, I heard the door bang shut. Suddenly, the boy broke free from his handcuffs. He dashed away.

“Boy, get back here!” I yelled angrily. I dashed after him. I got a glimpse of the boy jumping over the barred gates. I ran after him.  I hopped the fence and cut my hand on one of the barbed wires. I almost fell off the fence. I finally managed to get down from the gate. I ran after the boy. Then I saw an idling motorcycle. I hopped on the motorcycle and pressed the gas pedal. It zoomed into the street. Then I saw the boy. I sped up. I caught him by the shirt.

“You better not run away again!” I yelled. I forced him on the motorcycle and zoomed to my office. When I got there, I saw a wreck inside. I quickly went inside, the boy on my heels. There was the old man.

What, why is the old man here? I thought.

“Well, good job, Luke, here’s the money,” said the old man. The old man pulled out $8,000 dollars.

“Why are you giving him money? Are you working for him, Luke?” I asked. The old man ran for the door. I punched him hard on the nose. He backed away. Then I locked the door.

“Explain to me why you are paying Luke money!” I yelled at him.

“Well, I said to Luke that I would pay him if you were kidnapped, and now you are,” he said. Luke jumped at me and grabbed my wrist. The old man tied me to a wall. Then they went to open the door but it was locked.

“Give me the key,” commanded the old man.

“Never,” I snarled. I took out my knife and cut the rope. I rolled and jumped up and snatched Luke’s gun.

“You’re under arrest,” I said pointing Luke’s gun at them. I pulled the trigger. A jet of blue light shot out from the gun and shocked them both. They fell to the ground. I called 911. A few minutes later the police showed up. They took them both.Then the mayor showed up. “Good work, detective. You caught one of the most skilled criminals in the U.S. I will award you $50,000 dollars,” said the mayor. The mystery was solved!

Going to Find the Ghoulians

Chapter One

 

Once upon a time, two kids named Sam and Jack were reading a book and they found out that there were people living on Mars. But you had to go through a 78 square mile maze with trick things like a half man half ___ and a square mile of raining tanks, but they thought they could do it so they asked their mom and dad to work at the government. They printed money for 600 days and collected $500 a day so they could buy a spaceship deluxe and a driver for $300,000. They got $200,000 and then the president came and they fell down and the president saw people not printing money, but stealing it, so they went to jail.

So the two kids had to buy a spaceship minus for $200,000 but then they had to get someone to drive the spaceship because there were 27 explode buttons and 13 drive buttons so they said that they were poor and homeless and they got $22. And then they bought a spaceship minus driving book and then they got in the spaceship minus and they saw a photograph of the correct spacesuits. So they snuck into another spaceship minus and got the correct spacesuits and got in their spaceship minus and started. Then they almost got to the maze but Sam fell on an explode button and then the ship exploded. But lucky for them, they landed on the maze 56 ninety ninths through.

Just then, it rained 500 pound weights, then it rained super hot spikey pasta, then you chose coffee or vodka. One took vodka, one took coffee, so one was walking zig zag and one was jumping all around, so one jumped up and carried the other and they got there. They said “backvgvhgv tawgijg,” and they got let in and they saw a sign that said welcome to Mars, home of the Ghoulians!!! And they also saw things with 3 legs, 2 feet per leg, 16 eyes, 4 mouths that go down, 34 ears on top of there heads, 2 toes per foot and leg and 6 heads (that fight a lot). They were also very cute. They wanted to take 1 home for a pet.

 

Chapter Two

 

So they tried to get a Ghoulian, but then 2 ears of the Ghoulian sunk into their head and 2 guns came out and it shot down onto the two kids. Then they were in an unbreakable trap. They were trapped in the trap for 20 years and then they still wanted to take a Ghoulian. So, then the Ghoulians put them in the Human Zoo where Ghoulian families come to watch you play around with the wheel hanging from the ceiling from a rope and at special times get fed with carrots and some Ghoulians go into the cage with carrots from Planet Earth by taking their special magnets that got carrots. At first the carrots were amazing and then they could get tasteless

Then there was someone who got sick there and their eyeball popped out and then it died. And then, in nighttime when the Ghoulians were asleep, they took the body and hid it so they could take it back to planet Earth. After 10 years, you got let out, so Sam and Jack tried to go out and then they went out but they couldn’t find their spaceship but luckily they were in their spacesuits so they floated in space and then they realized that they didn’t have their spaceship so they had to try to go down to Earth by waving their arms up and down so then they could get back down to Earth and it worked but the problem was, you could only move 50 miles a day so they were stuck doing that for 20 years then they finally saw Earth but then they saw that they were over a volcano so they landed in the volcano and lucky for them it was a fake volcano that scientists used to check out what volcanoes are like. It “exploded” and then they got to go out but then they realized they were on a scientist island so they asked a scientist how they could get out.

The scientist said, “This is a scientist island.” The only way that we can get out is by flying on flying chickens because this is a very high room and only flying chickens can break through the roof. So, you will have to use a flying chicken, but there is a fee of fifty dollars to rent one. So then they looked around in their pockets and then they realized that they have something from the Ghoulian’s home on Mars. So, they told the scientists that this is something from the Ghoulians and the scientists loved that idea because they didn’t have something from Mars from the Ghoulians but they had a lot of other stuff like lava from Mount Vesuvius or a dinosaur. So, they accepted it and they got a flying chicken.
Chapter Three
But then, they saw other scientists on flying chickens with helmets and those kinds of gear. So, they asked the scientist if they could have some helmets and gear.

And then the scientist said, “I guess the Ghoulian body you gave us was really cool and it would be waaay more than fifty dollars, so I will give you helmets, gear, and I will also teach you how to ride on the flying chicken.”

So they followed the scientist into the flying chicken testing and training room and the scientist said, “This is the room where all our flying chickens get tested to see if they can fly and if they are more than 2 feet tall and they get trained with people and people get trained with them. There are even flying chicken teachers. So, you will be going in flying chicken #32’s room, which you will meet in 16 minutes. And, you will meet and ride with flying chicken #32”.
They went to the room for flying chicken #32. The scientist stayed with them to supervise. And, the flying chicken would give them turns and teach them tips and in the end,  they would get to ride on the flying chicken’s back and do really fun stuff like ride on the flying chicken roller coaster. But, you would have to find how you got past the loop and the tricky turns. And, the kids thought it would be really fun and easy.

So, then, they got on and then the flying chicken’s back lifted up, rocket propellers stuck up, and then the flying chicken said, “Second thoughts? Well, too bad! Get ready to scream in threee, twooo, onnne, screeeaaammm”.

And then, they went up a really fast hill. And then, they thought that there are no seatbelts. How would they stay on? And then, they realized that there were a couple of buttons on the flying chickens pressed a button. but, they pressed the wrong one. It was the we’re going on a loop button. So, then the flying chicken tried to push up so it could stay on the loop. So, then the kids freeeaaakked out. They almost screamed their heads off. And then, they pressed the bumpy road button. So, then suddenly it went up and down and up and down and they didn’t know what to do and then they finally pressed the going up the hill button. But, it was almost at the top of the hill and it was ready to go down a really bumpy hill. And then, so they knew where the bumpy road button was. And then, they thought that the going downhill button would be next to the going uphill button. But, they pressed it and they were wrong. Now, they were going underwater. So, then, the flying chicken was pushing down while it was going up and down and the flying chicken almost exploded! But luckily, it didn’t.

The going under water button was a very bad choice, but it pushed them so hard that the track broke. Lucky for them, they pressed the going under water button and it was the part when they were going over water so then all they had to do was press the bumpy road button again. And then, it was only the going under water button. And then, the next part of the roller coaster was a loop, but they couldn’t go on it. So, they looked for a button differentiating paper so they could press the steering wheel button. Now the knew how to steer so they steered to an island but that island was part of the roller coaster and that part of the roller coaster has the worst part because it was the part for people who wanted to escape. For example, there is a REAL shark, DEADLY PINEapples and weird holua men who shoot XXXXXXL bullets from their belly buttons.
When Sam saw the pineapples he didn’t want to go so he thought that all scientists must have underwater labs. So, he looked at the button, differentiating card and he looked for the ‘going underwater’ button. So, they pressed the “going underwater” button and the flying chicken pushed down. And then, before they knew it they were underwater. And then, they also pressed the “going downhill” button so the pressure on the sand on the bottom of the ocean was even harder. So, finally they got to the scientist’s underwater labs. It was a modern place, shaped like a dome and it was made out of glass. So first, Jack tried pressing the “zombie’s crossing” button, which makes you go really fast so no zombies catch you. But, they couldn’t push through the glass because the glass was unbreakable. And then, after that, they looked in and they saw a few robots going around like really weird people screaming, “People trying to break in, people trying to break in!”

There were sirens going off and they were really loud. Sam and Jack both felt scared. And Sam said to Jack, “I know how to get in. All I have to do is look at the button differentiator card because I think I saw a chicken and riders turn invisible.” So Sam looked at the button differentiator and he saw the “flying chicken and riders turn invisible” button so he pressed it and they turned invisible .but the robots can see invisible people and the robots shot 1,000,000,000,000 pound people at them.

They hit the robot octopus, which was used for many experiments. And they also hit the remote control coral. There was a big explosion. And when something explodes, the water turns pink and then the water’s texture gets weird. Very weird. And now it’s hard for the robots, animals, and the remote control seashells to swim. Jack thought that the chicken was a very fun thing, so he decided to ride on its head. And he also thought that standing on its head while jumping and saying made up words when he thought that they were real English words. Then, the very heavy and sweaty sumowrestlers were sumo wrestling in air and almost hit him. Just a little armpit hair touches him. Jack is thinking, ew gross this is disgusting. He was also thinking, I can’t believe that I didn’t get killed.

Meanwhile, Sam was thinking a lot and he opened the secret door on the flying chicken’s back. So he uses the button differentiator and suddenly he sees this great button, an “operate by your brain” button. It had a big picture of a biiig brain. He pressed that button and it does whatever your brain thinks. And he’s thinking, please, just…get..me..and my friend…out of..here…

and then the flying chicken suddenly shot the bunch of de-energy bullets.  I(t’s the only kind that can kill robots because it takes out all the energy of the robots.

Jack was saved.

After the biiig mistake Jack was so mad he almost killed Sam but he shot all the robot and they all died because it is the only bullet that can kill robots. After that they got into the lab and they found flying chicken #32’s operating lap top and made the roller coaster stop and made them return to the end of the roller coaster and then the scientist saw that they had passed the test and that they could go home but he still stayed with them just to make sure. first they had to take the shuttle to to flying chicken airport there were 527 flying chickens (including theirs).They were thinking so much that they felt  like their brains were oozing out of their heads.They were also worried.

Finally they got there.They were sooo worried.The scientist left.

Chapter 4: The Flight

They were there at the airport at the runway.They were going to be taking off after 76 chickens.

“This chickenport is busy!” Said Jack. It felt like 100 whole years before they took off, but they reeeaaally wanted to get home so they had no choice. They finally took off.

When they took off they saw that it was going to be fun and scary.the first place they saw was Hong Kong. They noticed that something had changed because Hong Kong was more modern. After that they saw a robot dragon. It was like a real dragon.They had a big battle.The dragon breathed fire and unburnable butcher knifes. This is terrible” said Jack. Then the dragon flew to kansas they followed. He tried to land on a volcano but he landed in a volcano then they flew to their hometown Nebraska.

They got home and saw their mom and thier mom said, “Hi kiddies! Where have you been?”

And Jack said “It’s a long story, honey” doing a perfect imitation of his dad. If his dad was there he would of been in trouble for imitating him but he was at Mah Jong restaurant a Chinese restaurant he made a lotta money because people love buying Mah Jong’s specialty stuffed rats stuffed with rotten shark. And Sam said “Yeah I agree.”

And they went into their house and their mother gave them each a big kiss. Then the next day they had a special public ceremony in there town and at the ceremony they had everything that they liked like XXXXXL iPads and limited edition candies.

Twist in a Tale Because of a Portal

Prologue:

Once upon a time, in a land far away, there was a mushroom. A big mushroom. It covered the trunk of an old, sturdy oak tree looking as if even a hurricane or tornado couldn’t blow it apart. It was true, for even the strongest natural disaster couldn’t push it down. Why? Here’s why. A little girl named Abby had came here and sat underneath the mushroom. Everyday she would flip through pages of a fairy tale. The goddess of trees, Hellenore, blessed the tree with the mushroom. The tree would be healthy as long as Abby would sit under it. Over the years Abby will grow into a lady and the tree will remain healthy.

 

Chapter 1:

One day as Abby sat under the large oak tree which grew right behind her house, she heard a glistening sound like jewels clamoring against each other. She looked behind her and saw a crystal blue creek with shiny white stones almost like pearls. She gaped open mouthed as the water trickled over them making them sparkle radiantly. For a moment, nothing mattered. The stones shone so brightly and looked like it was full of magic. Abby suddenly came to her senses. As if in a trance, she picked up two of those pearl like stones and shoved them in her pocket. As she ran back home, the stones felt as heavy as a block of gold.

“Mom! I found these pearl-like stones near the tree.” Her mom looked at her wondrously. The lines on her face creased when she squinted to take a look.

“Why, those are the rarest stones on the earth!” she exclaimed. “ Where did you find those?”

“In the little creek behind the tree,” Abby replied wondrously.

Her mom and Abby raced to the creek. But, like magic, the magnificent creek with the shining stones was gone!

“Where are the stones? And where is the creek?” Her mom demanded impatiently.

“They were there when I came to read!” Abby cried disappointed. “They might have gone somewhere, I don’t know!”

So they walked home anxiously.

That night, Abby couldn’t sleep. She tossed and turned thinking about the creek and the beautiful stones she had found. I know it was there, it can’t be a dream, she thought, struggling to remember everything. Had she led her mom to the wrong place? She definitely knew she had not. She fell into sleep in a baffled expression.

 

Chapter 2:

“Good morning, sweet cakes,” her dad said smiling widely at at her with his eyes twinkling merrily.

“Good morning, Pa,” Abby smiled.

Her mom (also called Ma) was in the kitchen making waffles with blueberries and strawberries.

“Good morning, sweet potato,” she said cheerily as if nothing had happened last night.

“Um, good morning, Ma,” Abby said, baffled why her mom was acting different than last night. “May I go read at my tree?” Abby asked politely.

Her mother nodded. So Abby grabbed her book and raced towards the tree. As she was reading silently, she heard something. Something that sounded so radiant and wonderous. She was drawn closer and closer to the sound until she saw the giant mushroom. She stared at it as it began to glow. Wow, Abby thought. Then, in a second it turned into a giant portal with winds so strong it could blow the Empire State Building down and  with a scent of fresh daffodils, it was so strong her book shut tightly. Abby had no idea what it was but still she jumped in. In the portal, it only took three seconds, but it felt like a rollercoaster with no seatbelts.

As she descended from the portal, she found a village. The houses were a colorful paradise compared to Abby’s own home but instead the houses were giant mushrooms! From dotted mushrooms growing from a carpet of neon green grass that covered the whole village to the dry brown dirt outside of the village and wild brown mushrooms that looked as if a little breeze would blow it down.

As she finished looking at the miraculous village, Abby saw two short long-eared gnomes planting in their garden as big as a piece of paper.

Abby quickly ran to them and asked, “Hello, I’m Hermione and I was sent here by a magical portal. Can you help me get back home?”

Abby didn’t like to reveal her real identity.The two gnomes looked up and looked as if they were surprised that a human was standing right in front of them.

“Hello!” they squeaked like a baby chick. “Who are you?”

“I’m Hermione,” Abby replied politely. The gnomes returned it with a bow.

“There is only one way to get back home, Madame. You will have to ask the wise old goblin of our kingdom!”

“Thanks,” Abby replied gratefully. So she set off down the peaceful village of the gnomes to approach the Great Goblin.

 

Chapter 3:

The Great Goblin was sitting in his castle, bored of the gifts the ambassadors of other lands were giving him. Out of all the lands, he was the most magnificent and wise one. The fairies were only pretty, the witches were only evil, and the dragons were only fierce. He, the greatest of all, was all of that, and wiser than an owl.

As he was trying to hold his yawn, a servant rushed up and quickly announced, “My lord, there is a girl that is coming your way!”

“Ah,” the Goblin answered, smiling. “That must be little Abby! Let her in!”

It really was Abby, for after a minute she came skipping in. She quickly bowed and asked, “Mr Great Goblin, your gnomes have told me only you can send me home.”

The goblin answered shaking his head, “The only way to do that is to see the queen of the heavens for even I don’t know how to take you home.

“How will I ever see the queen of the heavens?” inquired Abby.

“Easy,” said the Goblin. “You must please her with your wits. Only then will she answer your question.

The Goblin must have noticed the sad and wearied look on Abby’s face so he told her, “She will see you soon, I promise.”

 

Chapter 4:

Abby walked out of the throne room and out of the castle. She was stumbling over every step, thinking in despair. She began to cry. Suddenly, as her tears fell off her face and on the ground, a image like a big platter/plate appeared in front of her. A woman appeared, with peach blond hair and sea green eyes.

“I am Victoria, Queen of Heavens. If you answer all my riddles correctly, I will grant you a wish.”

“Ok,” Abby replied excitedly.

“First riddle. What has four legs, but can’t walk.”

“I know this one, it is a table!”

“Correct,” Victoria replied. “What is an astronaut’s favorite food?”

“Easy, space chips.”

“Correct again!” after a while Abby got all the riddles right and Queen Victoria finally said, “You may ask me a wish.”

“How can I get home?” Hermione (from now on let’s call her Hermione until further notice) answered quickly.

“I’m sorry, but that is beyond my powers. Only the Great Goblin can answer that!”

“What!” Hermione cried. “I just went to see him. He just said I had to ask you, the Queen of the Heavens, for a way to get back home.”

“I know,” the Queen said smiling brightly and widely, “He always tells people to come to me, so I could test them to prove them worthy. Now let me kiss you and the Goblin will see you and know you passed the test.”

Hermione smiled.

“Now,” the Queen said, “Go in the palace and tell the Goblin that you’ve passed the test and he can take you home.”

“Bye, and thanks,” Hermione ran into the palace and cried out loud, “I’ve passed the test, Mr. Goblin please take me home!”

“Okay,” he smiled and said. “Close your eyes.”

Hermione did. And when she opened her eyes she saw herself under the tree. She heard her mom yelling for her.

“Coming,” Hermione said and raced back home happy for a normal life without magical creatures. But that didn’t last long.

 

Chapter 5

The next day when Hermione was reading, the portal opened again but took her somewhere else. It was the world of Tangled. As she was strolling around the busy streets full of merchants and customers buying and selling fruit and vegetables, she saw two people starting a dance that drew everyone’s attention. One was a young girl no older than 17. She had golden hair that was about twice as long as a cobra and twinkling sea green eyes. She was jumping and dancing around playfully and grabbing everyone to join her. The other person was a young man, with short, brown hair and chocolate eyes. Hermione was smitten by this dance and was drawn closer and closer until she could smell the rose scented aroma of the girl.

The girl smiled at her warmly and said, “Hello! My name is Rapunzel and this is my friend Eugene. We were coming here to find the light that floats at night.”

“Oh, you mean the lanterns that honor the lost princess?” asked one of the village people obviously overhearing what Rapunzel had said.

“Yes, whatever they were, but definitely not stars,” Rapunzel said dreamily. “I want to see them. They appear only on my birthday. My mom doesn’t let me see them so I ran away.”

Then, for some reason, the people ran all directions. Then Hermione gasped. An old woman had walked into the streets wagging a finger at Rapunzel. Rapunzel screamed and Hermione ran for her life. Down the streets she ran until she ran into a half-giant.

“Who are you?” he boomed and Hermione replied

“I-I a-am Hermione and I am lost.”

“Well, I’m Bob and these are my friends, Adam and Casey.”

“Casey Weasley!” Hermione stammered. “I’ve read about you. You’re Ron’s son. May I have your autograph?”

Adam, with dark eyes wearing glasses smiled and said, “Sorry, too busy tracking down Horcruxes. Maybe next time.”

Casey burst out, “I’ll give you my autograph!” And he wrote on a sheet of paper: “Casey Weasley.”

“For goodness sake, Casey, write neater,” said Adam.

So Casey took the paper and scribbled out his “messy” name and replaced it.

“Much better.” Adam turned to Hermione said, “Hi, my name is Adam Malfoy and this is Casey Weasley as you can see. “

“Hi, I’m Hermione and I want to go home.”

Adam gestured towards the street. “Come, we’ll take you to Hogwarts.”

 

Chapter 6:

Hermione was so happy that she fainted. She heard shouting and then nothing. When she awoke she found herself in a bed. In Hogwarts. As soon as she awoke, she saw Casey and Adam staring down at her. “We were so worried about you.”

“How long have I’ve been out?”

“At least 15 minutes,” answered Casey.

“Well, I hope you are smart,” answered Adam grimly. “Because we are stuck on a problem. How do we get into the Ministry with Death Eaters crawling around it?”

“No problem, can’t you use polyjuice potion?” Hermione replied, smiling.

“That’s a great idea!” Casey said brightly.

“Thank you and now you can go home,” Adam replied quickly.

Casey must have saw the look in Hermione’s eyes because he cut in, “Are you kidding! We won’t last five weeks without her! She is so smart, she thought of polyjuice potion in two seconds!”

“Well, I guess she could stay for a–”

Hermione cut Adam by wrapping him in a big bear hug.

“THANK YOU SO MUCH! I’VE ALWAYS WANTED TO TRAVEL WITH THE FAMOUS Adam Malfoy!” she yelled at the top of her lungs.

After she finished yelling, she looked around. Casey and Adam were rolling on the ground covering their ears.

“Control it, please,” they said in unison.

“Ok, ok, I was just excited that I got to join you.”

“Now for for the Polyjuice potion…” Casey stammered

“Does it taste horrible?” Hermione asked.

“I’m afraid so,” said Adam clutching his throat like he was going to barf.

 

Chapter 7:

They were making the potion when a portal opened up and sucked Hermione in. Adam and Casey yelled but it was nothing compared to the roaring of the portal. Hermione was sucked in and she landed under the great tree she was sucked into in the first place. She ran into a house that looked liked her own house. She saw her mom crying in the kitchen and her dad on the phone.

“Mom! I’m home!”

“Oh honey, we were so worried about you! Where were you?”

“I’ll tell you about it,” said Hermione smiling.

 

Chapter 8:

“First tell me, WHERE WERE YOU? WE WERE SO WORRIED RIGHT WHEN YOU CAME IN WE WERE ABOUT TO CALL THE POLICE!  THANK GOODNESS YOU CAME BACK!” Then she said calmly “ Tell me the truth. Where were you?”

“Umm…” Hermione was hesitant.

Suddenly a portal opened up (again) and Ma fell down.

“Ma!” Hermione cried.

“Don’t worry,” said a voice that sounded like tinkling bells on Santa’s sleigh. Hermione looked up. She saw a beautiful women that looked like Queen Victoria but had cheeks as red as a rose and a silver crown that looked liked the moon. Her dress was a pink paradise topped with moonstones and corals on the necklace.

“Who are you?” Hermione asked baffled. “And what happened to my mom?”

“Don’t worry, we’re just erasing her memory of you missing so you won’t get in trouble.”

“And done.”

“So I won’t get in trouble?” Hermione asked excitedly, “But is my mom all right?”

“She will be. And sorry. I haven’t introduced myself. I’m Glinda, the Good Witch of the North. And you are?”

Hermione didn’t want to tell Glinda her real name so she said, “Dorothy.”

“Oh, hi Dorothy,” Glinda said sarcastically. Then she whispered, “I know your real name. It’s Hermione isn’t it.”

How did she know? thought Hermione.

“Anyways, Dorothy. You LANDED ON THE EVIL WITCH OF THE EAST! Anyways. Here are her magic shoes. It can take you wherever you want.”

“I want to go home!”

“Done.”

Hermione found herself in her own room on her bed.

“Hermione! Hermione! Dinner time!”

“Coming Ma!”

And she lived happily ever after.

 

The Dwarf Plan

 

The tiger went into a house that had a door that was too small for the tiger to fit through. It was a dwarf house so he ripped through the chimney, wanting to destroy the house. He destroyed the dwarves with explosives. But, one of the dwarves survived and, boy, was he angry. He ran from the burning remains, a plan of revenge coursing through his brains.

The tiger jumped off of the roof and scratched the dwarf hitting him down. But he missed and the boy kept on running and the tiger got really mad. So once he got up, the tiger chased him all the way up to the dwarf’s house since the door was too small the tiger went to locked the door then he went through the chimney. Then the tiger went to a tree and hid there so when the dwarf came he could attack. A wizard stopped it but the tiger dodged the attack. Then the wizard got really mad at the tiger because the tiger was destroying the world so the wizard went through a portal.

When he came out of the portal, he flew to the Potomac River and landed with a splash. It was a stormy night and the water was in big waves. The wizard couldn’t swim and he almost drowned. But, a ship came and picked him up and brought him to land. Then he got out but the tiger was running right towards him and pushed him down.

When he got up, he was back in the water so he swam to the shore and got up and ran to his house. The tiger snuck up into a tree before the wizard got in his house so he was already waiting for him. The tiger pushed him down and ate his wand. “Shoot!” The wizard knew he had to make the tiger spit it back out. How does one get a tiger to spit what it’s eaten? he asked himself. I could tickle him, he thought, or I could kick him in the throat he thought. I should probably tickle him, since I don’t want to make him any angrier than he already is.

So he tickled him and the tiger fell over because he was so ticklish and the wizard got his wand back and destroyed the tiger but he had a problem. The dwarf turned back on the wizard and the dwarf evolves but the wizard doesn’t know that and the dwarf knew were the wizard was so he ran into the woods and found him and ran out and tackle him and started fighting him.

First the dwarf began running circles around the wizard. He ran so fast, the wizard didn’t know that he was making a trap. Suddenly, the dwarf went underground and he cut a circle under the wizard’s feet. The wizard fell down and then dwarf covered up the hole with dirt. The wizard blasted open the top of the hole and yelled, “Diffindio!” which was a spell that spun the dwarf around until he fell unconscious. Then the wizard smashed him down into a huge hole and covered it up. But the dwarf was too strong and he broke out of the hole and punched the wizard in the face, then he saw the wizard’s wand on the ground. Then he picked it up and made the wizard vanish to another dimension.

At the other place, the wizard looked around confused. Where am I? he thought. Oh! I’m in another dimension. Trash was falling on him. Banana peels, old gallons of milk, and rotten cheese all fell on his head. Then he heard a shaking of an earthquake him. What on earth is going on? He looked around. There was metal dinging on the ceiling. With steel boxes as big as the Eiffel Tower! “Ah! I’m in a garbage truck! Where on earth is it taking me?! I’ve got to escape! Now!”Just then, he remembered that he had four seconds to get out or else he would be crushed. So he took a laser out of the trash and cut through the box. Then he used the laser and cut through the truck. He jumped down to the ground while the garbage truck sped away.

Then he went to a wand shop and bought a new wand. It was made of metal and titanium which was different than his other wand. When anyone tried to eat it, it would taser him or if they tried to take the wand it would taser them then too. “Expolamos,” he cried, making a circle with the wand above his head. He shot up into the sky into Earth.

Meanwhile, the dwarf had been looking for the wizard’s secrets. He was searching for the wizard’s actual name. Then the wizard came out of nowhere and shot his wand at the dwarf and the dwarf fell back onto the ground. An hour later the dwarf awoke but the wizard put on a spell that turned the dwarf into bell. It hurts because the kids were ringing the bell. So one day, when there was no moon, the dwarf broke out of the bell by using his super strength that came whenever the moon had disappeared. Then he started looking after the wizard’s secrets.

“I can see you’ve not learned your lesson,” said the wizard.

“You’ll learn yours!” said the dwarf. Then Evil Max came to save the dwarf. Evil Max looks like a huge monster. He has a good relationship with the dwarf because they’re both neighbors. His powers are invisibility, laser eyes, and jetpack feet.

“Oh, what do we have here? A wizard? Or a fish?” He laughed really hard.

The dwarf said, “A wizard!!!”

“Oh,” said Evil Max.

The whole time they were debating, the wizard was setting up a trap for both of them. Then when they both finished debating, the wizard was done with his trap. The trap was invisible so they couldn’t see it. So they walked right towards the trap and fell straight into the ground. They hit a spaceship that was flying underground and they flew into outer space and into another galaxy.

The wizard said, “Oh, he learned his lesson.”

 

THE END

Jack and She-Jack and Shredder

EXTERIOR: PARK, NIGHT

 

Shredder: So who do you want to mess with?

 

JACK, who looks like an eagle with white wings because he liked eagles. He had diamond armor on. He is a bad guy. SHREDDER wants to kill him. SHREDDER has claws and he pulls them out and tries to snap him. He punches his claws into JACK, but the diamond armor saves him.

 

JACK does a backflip and kicks SHREDDER right in his tush. SHREDDER goes flying out and hits himself on the back and then suddenly Jack runs, runs, runs, does a front flip ten times, jumps on a giant MARACA, picks it up.

 

JACK: Wahhhh!!

 

He slams it on SHREDDER’S head. But SHREDDER has silver armor, which isn’t as good as diamond armor but still good. So he’s still alive, and cracks his head a little. Then, suddenly, his mask pops off. He looks in the mirror and goes:

 

Shredder: What did you do to me? You made me have a wide bloody eye and half of my face is messed up.

 

SHREDDER then jumps off and and takes the mirror and says,

 

Shredder: Look at my face. What does it look like?

 

He attacks JACK, JACK backflips and dodges it. He picks up a giant wristband and tries to cut SHREDDER’s head off but it doesn’t work because his head is made of metal!

 

Pedestrian: Ohhhhhh!

 

INTERIOR, COURT: DAY

 

JACK and SHREDDER are in court.

 

Jack: He tried to kill me!

 

Shredder is slammed into a cell.

 

Shredder: Noooo! I Will come back for you in seventy years!!!!!

 

Seventy Years Later…

 

EXTERIOR – JAIL HOUSE, DAY

 

The police guards give SHREDDER all of his weapons, clothes, food, and water back to him.

Then SHREDDER gets out of jail. He starts walking down the street. As he walks he sees JACK on the sidewalk on his right. He follows JACK.

 

JACK senses him with his eagle sense.

 

Then JACK does a backflip right behind him! He tries to stab him with his golden sword. But then, the SHREDDER suddenly notices him doing a backflip and then moves! Then JACK super speeds all the way in front of him and tries to stab again, because he knew the SHREDDER was going to try to kill JACK!

 

SHREDDER did not kill JACK. But they walked away and had a fight – in TEXAS!

 

EXTERIOR – TEXAS, NIGHT

 

We are in the desert. They have a big duel to see who see who kills who. At dawn they will take ten paces and then turn around and try to shoot the other person. Whoever is the slowest, may lose and die.

 

SHREDDER cheats, and counts 1-2-3-BANG! But SHREDDER doesn’t have diamond armor, but JACK does. It takes 3 shots to kill him. It takes two shots to kill SHREDDER.

 

Shredder: Oh, this should have killed him…

 

[Voice over of Screenwriter]

 

Screenwriter: This is a story about…wait-wait-wait wait a second!  We’re almost at the end of this story. Okay, let’s get this over with! This is the illustrator, his name is Adi.

 

Illustrator: Let’s just end this right now.

 

Screenwriter: Oh sure, let’s do this.

 

Illustrator and Screenwriter:  THE END

Life as a Gymnast

Prologue:

One day when I was two years old, I was on my couch watching the Summer Olympics with my mom. That’s when I knew I wanted to be a gymnast. I started just a few weeks after the fact, and only progressed. In beginner’s class, I met my best friend, Cammie. We go to the same gymnasium now, and have been besties ever since.

 

Chapter One: Spotted

“I don’t know if this is such a great idea…” I said.

“Come on, it’ll be fine!” Cammie said, trying to reassure me.

Sorry, I’m Katherine Fisher. I have dark brown hair with crystal blue eyes and I’m about four and a half feet tall. My birthday is on March 17th–Saint Patrick’s Day! I was practicing routines at our gym with my best friend, Cammie. I’m ten years old and in level seven, the seventh highest competitive level at our gymnasium. Each level gets more challenging than the one before, and each level has different/harder routines and skills. I have a 12-year-old swimmer sister and a 14-year-old baseball/tennis brother. I also have a mom and a dad, and a medium chocolate labradoodle named Mak. My family’s talking about fostering another puppy, but our parents say that’s a long process. Anyway, my team shares a gym with the Golden Girls, our rival team, and they completely wrecked our supplies! Cammie and I were trying to think of a way to get back at the Golden Girls, but I wasn’t so sure about it…

* * *

I had to get home to finish my homework, so as soon as the Golden Girls walked into the gym I left for home. When I got there, I started my homework quickly so I wouldn’t get into trouble with my parents — I wasn’t even supposed to be at the gym! Cammie was still at the gym, doing whatever she was doing. I kept thinking about her because Cammie (alone) plus the Golden Girls equals…uh-oh! I just couldn’t help myself! Finally, I couldn’t take it anymore. I raced out the front door, leaving everything behind.

* * *

Of course, I was going to the gym. I had to find out what Cammie was doing. I had entered through the front door and was peeking through a window. When I got there, Cammie was trash talking to the Golden Girls.

I couldn’t let her do this! The Golden Girls had taken it way too far, but Cammie knew Coach Jasmine had told her if she did this to the Golden Girls again, she wouldn’t be able to compete in the next meet! Our team, Shooting Stars, needed Cammie! But then, I noticed Raven, a Golden Girl, was cursing back.

Instantly, they saw me. I tried to hide, but it was too late. I was dead meat. I’d been spotted.

 

Chapter Two: The Conversation

When Raven noticed me, that’s when I really started to freak out. She’s the “head” of the team at age eleven. Coach Jasmine believes everyone is the best on our team. I knew I’d have to come over sooner or later, so I chose sooner.

Raven smirked. “You brought your only friend — sorry, idiot — with you?!?! Such a baby!” she proclaimed.

“Excuse me?!?!” asked Cammie.

“Yeah, like, that’s right. I don’t care about, like, your stupid team. Like you’ll ever get sixth place in, like, our next meet, the Spring Classic. You do know the judges, like, give you tips, right? You might want to go practice to try to get, like, 80th in all around!” retorted Raven.

“You do know we got first place at the last meet that somebody forfeited? In fact, I’ve actually practiced, unlike someone I know. To be clear, there are only 78 people at the next meet! And there only are six teams, so technically what you’re saying is that we won’t get last place,” I told her.

“Oh, I know there aren’t even 80 people at the meet. That was my point. And, like, I meant you wouldn’t even place since, like, they might only give out five places,” Raven said, trying to give me a good comeback.

“How dare you,” I said and gasped, flabbergasted at her cruelness.

“You’ll get it this time,” Raven responded.

And with that, she grabbed me by the arm and pulled me away. I tried to fight her off, but Raven sure had a good grip. My parents would know I was missing.

 

Chapter Three: Missing

Raven was running off so quickly, I didn’t even realize what was going on! Then I realized, I was locked in Raven’s closet! At least she had lots of popular clothes and was rich, so to me, Raven’s closet was like a room. At least I had breathing space. Also, this is the only time I’m actually glad that Raven’s apartment is on the same floor as mine so I could hear my parents talking through the vent!

I could hear my parents saying, “Where’s Katherine? She’s not in her room! I better call Cammie’s mom. I bet Katherine’s with Cammie,” said my mom, trying to stay relaxed.

“Ok. I’ll try to reach KK on her cell,” replied my dad, worried as ever. I felt really worried for my parents too since they didn’t know where I was. And unfortunately, I left my phone on my desk so it wouldn’t interrupt me during routines. Suddenly, I could hear my phone ring from my room.

“She’s missing!” wailed my mom, after she and Dad had called everyone and looked everywhere.

“No, she’s not. We will find her,” promised my dad. “She’s old enough to take care of herself.”

* * *

Since I could hear my parents, they would be able to hear me, right? You might think I’m stupid, but I’m just not the kind of ten year old girl that causes all that commotion. I just stay calm and think of all the ways to get out. Thankfully, I’m a stickler for when my bangs come out of my ponytail in gymnastics, so I always keep a bobby-pin in my gymnastics pants, which luckily I was wearing coming back from the gym. It was my favorite one, but it would get me out so I bent my bobby-pin back and clicked it into the lock to push the lock back out.

As soon as I heard the click, I sprinted out to the window and looked down. Oh, great. There was a ladder, but it was about eight feet from the window. As brave as I could be, I pushed out Raven’s window screen and climbed onto the windowsill. I had to leave before Raven’s family finished dinner, so I stepped out over the front door, and slipped!

Swiftly, I gripped the sill just in time without being seen. Luckily, I’m a very strong gymnast, so I pulled myself back up into front support and then stood back up, horrified. So close, I thought. I took about five more steps, and had reached the ladder. I quickly climbed down, jumping onto a snowbank, and ran home to my parents, as proud as ever. After I had told them everything, my parents told Raven’s gymnastics coach, Casey, and Raven was disqualified from the Spring Classic.

 

Chapter Four: Another Side-Mate

I could tell that when Raven got back to her room, she must’ve checked on me but was horrified that I was missing. Suddenly, Raven’s parents received a phone call from Coach Casey, explaining everything. The next day at the gym, I could overhear Raven telling a teammate that she was grounded.

*       *       *

The next day at practice, Raven’s “sidekick” Amelia walked over to me! I was worried she’d come to strangle me or something. But she actually apologized!

“For what?” I asked, literally puzzled.

“For Raven. Listen, I heard what happened, and I don’t want to be her little ‘robot’ anymore, but I’m way too scared to admit it to her. Imagine what would happen! It’s bad enough that I’ll have to train with her, but I’m on your side now, and it’s not a trick. I did bring a copy of the blueprint of her next comeback, to make you scratch yourself from the meet by calling in using a voice modifier that she has copied your voice on. Would it be okay if I helped you prevent that from happening? I mean, if you think it’s totally dumb, that’s fine, I understand. But just to let you know, I deleted your voice and ripped up Raven’s copy of the plan,” Amelia proclaimed quickly.

“Of course!” I replied, overjoyed. “Under one condition–Cammie can help. No offense, but you guys kinda sorta really ruined our event stations. We were already trying to think of a comeback. You purposely raised the parallel bars to a height that not even Sara, the five feet and three inch tall girl on our team, could reach! You also lowered our vault to rec level, removed the screws from the best beam, and took out the springs on floor! And guess who had to fix it; us! Listen, I’m really sorry. I’m sure it was probably Raven’s idea, and I shouldn’t even be yelling at anyone. Please forgive me,” I begged.

“First of all, what are you talking about? We didn’t wreck…RAVEN!!!” Amelia yelled, angrily. “Sorry, I’m just mad. Raven must’ve done this without us knowing and was secretly practicing in her private gymnasium at her house so she could win first in all-around in the Spring Classic and get that middle school scholarship! I’m really sorry about everything. Of course Cammie can help, and I forgive you,” she proceeded. I thought about Raven for a moment. I realized right then, that her name fit her perfectly. She was cruel. She was horrible.

“Thanks so much!” I said, hugging Amelia. I felt so relieved that that moment was over. I’d been dreading the asking for help part for days.

 

Chapter Five: “Katherine!”

“I can do this, I can do this, I can do this…” I managed to utter.

“Don’t worry. You’ll do great!” replied my dad.

“That’s just what parents are supposed to say. Listen, I’m just really nervous because this is a really important meet, and I’ve never had a meet since I learned my new routine with a back layout in it,” I proclaimed.

I was at the Spring Classic and it was right after bars. I had already done beam. After floor, I only had vault left, a full on. That’s where you sprint down the vaulting runway and when you get to the table you jump off the springboard, push off your hands at the end and twist off. Even though Raven was DQ’d, she didn’t even come to cheer her team on!

“KATHERINE FISHER; FLOOR; LEVEL SEVEN,” I heard over the loudspeaker. Oh, great. My turn.

As I stepped onto the floor and presented to the judges, terrified, I could feel Amelia watching me. She wasn’t Raven, but I still felt nervous. I guess I didn’t feel horrible that Raven was disqualified.  All of a sudden, my music started to play. I felt really good until my back layout. I had very angry butterflies in my stomach that were eager to escape into puke!

Everything seemed to slow down, but I stopped. I knew I was off-beat and I couldn’t afford to lose any more points, but since it’s my tumbling pass (one of the major tumbles in a routine, but you must run) I counted to three: 1…2…3! I hadn’t yet completed my back layout at a meet yet. Jasmine had spotted me and I had only completed it at practice three times alone, but she said I was ready. I started to sprint down the floor into my front handspring front tuck. After I presented, I started to lean forward and flipped back, keeping my knees straight and together. As I landed, I heard a loud snap and felt a fiery pain in my ankle! The music stopped and Jasmine, my parents and the nurse ran out onto the floor, while I had tears in my eyes.

“Katherine!” Jasmine yelled.

“Ow…” I managed to get out between gasps.

“Let’s get you to the ER, quick!” said my mom, horrified. But I was a little embarrassed for interrupting the whole competition.

I started to cry. In fact, I cried a whole downpour of tears! My brother, Matthew, broke his ankle once, and had a cast for a month. My sister, Alice, broke her wrist once, and had a cast for one month. There were two more meets until Nationals, and we had a meet every weekend. It hurt so much, I knew it was broken, and the doctor agreed. I would miss Nationals.

 

Chapter Six: The Plan

When I had finally come back from the ER, I was resting in bed with my leg up on my chair, reading. All of a sudden, the doorbell rang. Ding-dong! Dang it! I thought. I had lost my spot in my book. By the time I had found it, Cammie and Amelia were up in my room. If you hadn’t already figured it out, they were the ones that rang the doorbell.

After we had talked and I had answered many questions about my leg and the whole experience, Amelia handed me flowers-made of chocolate! The card tied to the bouquet read:

“Dear Katherine,

Feel better soon!

Cammie and Amelia”

“Aaawww! You sure know the way to my heart,” I said, sweetly. “CHOCOLATE!!!”

It turns out, Cammie got first place for all around in the Spring Classic and Amelia got second! They didn’t give out scholarships because of “the incident.”

“Amelia and I were thinking we totes need a good plan to get back at Raven. We need your help!” Cammie explained, implying they needed time with me to think of one.

“Of course,” I replied, willingly.

After about ten minutes of contemplating, we finally thought of a plan: to sneak into Raven’s house before the next meet that I can compete in and pour flour down Raven’s leotard. Then when she put it on, she’d have to leave for the meet and wouldn’t have time to change, since she always procrastinates and she wouldn’t have any extra time. She’s always first at every meet because her last name is Arango (the only person on our team with a last name that starts with an “A”). Our teams always competes in this order: beam, bars, floor and vault, so Raven would be on beam first. We compete in the same division every time because we practice at the same gym. Then, the flour would be so itchy Raven wouldn’t be able to resist scratching. You get points off for itching/scratching and touching your leotard during a meet so Raven would get her score lowered and maybe (if we’re lucky) she’d be so itchy, she’d fall off and get even more points deducted!

“We can’t let anyone find out, though,” I proclaimed.

“Duh,” replied Cammie.

 

Chapter Seven: Removed

ONE MONTH LATER:

“Honey, I think we’re better off waiting until tomorrow to get your cast off because it’s supposed to be warmer and some of the snow should be melted by tomorrow,” Mom explained to me.

“But, Mom! The sooner, the better. Also, I want to actually be able to practice some simple skills. Please, can we do it today! If we want to do it today, we have to leave now!” I replied, trying to reassure my mom.

“Fine,” she answered.

We had just driven to the doctor to see if I was ready to get my cast off. I was in the waiting room at the doctor’s office. When the secretary called my name, then my doctor, Dr. Blart, would check my ankle to see if my cast was ready to be taken off! I mean, it’s been on for a month and I’m pretty sure it’s ready because I’ve been resting it a lot.

“Katherine Fisher; ankle injury; Dr. Blart; room 117,” I heard the secretary, Rachel, call out.

Yes, yes, yes, I thought.

TEN MINUTES LATER:

“Congratulations, Katherine. You’ve been caring for your ankle so well and now you’ve been rewarded with the joy of no cast! I’ve officially taken it off,” said Dr. Blart.

“Thank you!” I replied, joyfully. All of a sudden, I sounded a little too happy.

“Oh, don’t thank me. You’ve taken terrific care of it!” Dr. Blart answered.

After Dad drove me home I three-way called Amelia and Cammie.

“How’d you guys do at Nationals? I just got my cast off!” I told them.

“We have something to tell you,” Cammie said joyfully. “Nationals were postponed because of the snow and now you can compete!”

“Really!?!?” I asked.

“Yup,” answered Amelia. “We think it’s time to put our plan into action,” Amelia informed me.

“Let’s do it at the meet in two days!” I suggested.

“Perfect,” both Cammie and Amelia answered at the same time. We all started to crack up.

 

Chapter Eight: (The Not So Sweet) Sweet Revenge

TWO DAYS LATER:

I was at the meet and had all the ingredients in my drawstring backpack. Cammie, Amelia, and I were ready to put our plan into action.

Finally, after stretching, it was time to go to beam. We were all very nervous, and I was almost starting to regret it. But if we were going to do it, now was our chance. We had all snuck over to Raven’s house before leaving for the meet and luckily she had her team leotard laid out. I had been the only one that dared to pour the flour in, but whatevs.

After the judges had set up, they called her name. I could tell by the flabbergasted look on her face that she had definitely noticed the flour. Well, she couldn’t quit now. Raven had to compete.

In her back-walkover, Raven’s foot slipped and landed just off of beam. Yes, I thought. Unfortunately, she was fine for the rest of her routine. As a result, she got 9.27.

Then she asked Coach Casey if she could go to the bathroom, with her sweet face. Of course Casey said yes and obviously (to Cammie, Amelia and I) Raven was actually changing into her other leotard, the one that’s an exact replica of her other one. The rest of the meet went went by so swiftly, I honestly didn’t even know what was happening.

On the floor I fell on my butt during my back layout but at least I didn’t die.

When we got home, my mom had a very stern look on her face. I wondered why — actually, no I didn’t. I knew why. Raven had told her parents, and now my parents knew. I’m sure they told Jasmine.

“What happened?” my mom demanded, sternly.

“I’m sorry. I couldn’t help it! You just don’t understand,” I replied, sobbing.

“Yes, I d-” mom was cut off.

“No, you don’t!” I assured her, sniffling. “You don’t know what she does to us. I know it was wrong of me, and I really regret doing it now, but I’ve tried ignoring Raven, trying to teach her that it’s wrong, everything! It was my only choice.”

All of a sudden, Mom held up her phone. “I do know,” she said, softly. On the screen, I saw our gym. It was a video camera! “I haven’t told you this, but Jasmine installed video cameras in the gym and sent us the link of footage. I’ve seen what you did to help, and what she did to hurt you. I understand. I’m glad that you realized what you did was wrong — because it was wrong — but I’ve seen it all, and I apologize to you. Just ‘cause I feel so bad that you have to handle this alone.”

“But I had Amelia and Cammie by my side!” I said.

“Yes, but next time you’re bullied, you need to tell me! Parents are here to help,” she told me.

“Okay,” I promised.

The next day at practice, Jasmine called Cammie, Amelia and I into her office. We all knew we were in trouble.

“I can’t believe you guys! You’re the best behaved kids on the team. Why did you sabotage Raven? Listen, I’ve seen what she did from the video cameras, but I heard about the meet. I need you for nationals, but if this happens again, you are benched from meets for one month! Do you understand?!?!” Jasmine scolded.

“Yes,” the three of us mumbled.

“Alright. Go warm-up. I’ll keep an eye on you guys,” Jasmine replied with a face as hard as rock.

 

Chapter Nine: Nationals

“I’m really nervous,” I told Cammie on the phone. “I don’t know if I can get my back layout.”

“Don’t worry. You’ll do great. You’ve done it at practice a few times, you just need to concentrate.”

“Thanks. I guess you’re right. Why do you always have to be so logical!” I said, sarcastically angry.

“Bye,” Cammie said.

“See you in three hours,” I replied.

Then Cammie hung up. Nationals were in three hours, and I was freaking out about my back layout. Now that my foot was better, I was physically able to do it, and I needed to prove I could move up to level eight!

* * *

When Cammie and I were at Nationals, it was already time to stretch! But, Raven wasn’t there, and she’s always first! Since my last name starts with an “F”, I always compete second, right after Raven. If she’s not here, I’d be first on floor! I’d completely screw up. All of a sudden, she walked in the door of Galaxy Gymnastics’ gym. Pheeeww! I thought.

Time flew by so fast (only like a half hour) so we were already on our second event-floor. There Raven was, doing her “little perfect routine,” with her “little perfect moves.” Then it was my turn. There I went, away with my dance. When I got to my first tumble pass (front handspring front tuck), I was glad I would get it over with soon, but then as I presented to the judges I realized it was now or never. I sprinted across the floor as fast as I could, thinking about what I had to do for my back layout. As of now I was on my roundoff double back handspring back tuck (a new skill in my routine even though I’d been doing them since level three). Here goes nothing, I thought in my head. I bent my arms and legs, and swooped my body backwards, keeping my legs straight in the air. I felt nothing as I landed, and had no idea what was going on. Suddenly I realized I HAD JUST COMPLETED MY BACK LAYOUT!!! As I finished my routine (with the biggest smile ever), Raven’s score was displayed. 9.55. Oh great, I thought. How am I ever supposed to beat that score? Then I presented to the judges for the last time and walked off the floor as my score appeared. 9.85!!! OMG!!! I couldn’t believe my eyes as I practically exploded. I couldn’t stop smiling, even during awards.

* * *

“FLOOR: THIRD PLACE, A TIE. CAMMIE GOLDFIN AT 9.45 FROM SHOOTING STARS AND RACHEL RICCARDI FROM GALAXY GYMNASTICS. AND SECOND PLACE, A TIE FROM THE GOLDEN GIRLS, RAVEN ARANGO, AND ALSO FROM GOLDEN GIRLS, AMELIA GOLDFIN AT 9.55. FIRST PLACE, KATHERINE FISHER FROM SHOOTING STARS AT 9.85!” I heard the speaker announce.

On and on she went. I got fourth on beam, second on bars, sixth on vault, and first AA (all around)!

All of a sudden, I heard the speaker say, “RAVEN ARANGO, YOU HAVE WON A MIDDLE SCHOOL SCHOLARSHIP!!!!!”

Then my heart sunk.

“EXCUSE ME, THERE WAS A MISTAKE…KATHERINE FISHER FROM SHOOTING STARS HAS ACTUALLY WON THE SCHOLARSHIP!!! WOO-HOO!” the announcer continued.

There was something about how she said “woo-hoo” that made me feel the best. I wasn’t trying to boast, but it felt like magic as I walked up onto the podium.

And the happiness continues! As soon as I walked into the front door of my house with all five medals, there was a giant banner and balloons everywhere! Someone must have told my parents about the surprise. All of a sudden, Amelia and Cammie slowly peeked out from behind a wall. I knew what they had done. Then I saw a tiny goldendoodle walk out of the bathroom behind Cammie and Amelia!

“We’re fostering a puppy!” my mom said, holding out a ‘Congrats!’ cake.

My phone started to ring upstairs in my room. I ran upstairs and picked it up on the fourth ring.

“Uh, I’m so sorry; please forgive me!” someone stammered on the other end.

“Excuse me, who is–Raven, is that you?!?!” I asked, stunned.

“Yeah, it’s me. Listen, I’m really sorry about what I’ve been doing all this time!”

“Oh, and you just realized that now?” I asked, upset.

“Well, after Nationals, Jasmine had a talk with me, and I guess she’s made me rethink my actions. Please forgive me,” Raven begged.

“You’re lucky I’m–never mind. Okay, I forgive you. But don’t you dare think we’re friends after what you’ve done to me! Listen, I’m sorry I’m yelling, but you need to prove to everyone that you are nice inside,” I commanded. “Why did you go through all that trouble anyway?”

“I was just…jealous. I mean, you have such a nice family. You’re so good at gymnastics, and you have friends! And, uh, you did an amazing job at the meet,” Raven complimented me.

“Uh, thanks. I’m sorry if I’ve been bragging about stuff that I have and you don’t. But if you didn’t act so jealous, you’d have way more friends than anyone else in the world. You’re really nice inside, you just need to show it on the outside, too. Don’t worry, I go through the same family problems as you, but with my siblings,” I replied with a laugh. I’d never really gotten a compliment from Raven before.

I hung up the phone as I ran back downstairs and gobbled up the last of the vanilla/chocolate swirl cake with mocha frosting.

Amy and the Mystery of the Gold Vault

Once there was a girl named Amy. She hated it when people called her by her real name, which was Amelia. She was a curious 7-year-old girl, and loved to explore the streets of Paris. Everyone knew her — everyone knew the girl who had short, tangled red hair, and big blue eyes. Everyone knew the girl who always wore a long plaid skirt and a ruffled shirt.

It was June 5th, 1957, and Amy was causing trouble again. She lived in a large, fancy apartment building/hotel with a large ballroom, a banquet room, restaurants, and lots of room to cause trouble.

“Amy!” The cry could be heard all over the building whenever Amy was around. On this particular day, she was in the lobby staring at a tall, very fancy woman with ostrich feathers in her hat and all over her long gown. The woman was startled when she saw Amy, looking at her down through her spectacles. (She was visiting from New York and thought that a little pest like Amy should not be tolerated in this very fancy hotel/apartment building.) Amy didn’t care, she curtsied and pulled on the feathers. Hmm, this person’s feathers are VERY suspicious! She thought. She took the woman’s hand and pulled her into the broom closet. She took an electric torch and turned it on in the woman’s face.

“Where were you on the night of the…um, yesterday!?”

“Little girl, you must be joking! I have places to go!” she said.

Amy let her go after five more minutes of interrogation. The woman walked off, muttering things to herself. Amy was seven, so she wanted some adventure. She asked her mother if she could go onto the streets and look around.

“Yes, yes, but make sure Cecily comes with you.” Amy’s mother was always busy with work, so she usually made Amy’s annoying older sister babysit her.

As soon as they stepped out onto the street Amy took off, leaving Cecily in the dust. She knew her way around Paris. She decided to stop at the bank and chat with the people who were there. When she got there with Cecily far behind, panting and yelling, she overheard two people talking. “Jo, I don’t care. I won’t believe it. There is no gold vault behind that door!” one person said.

“I think that there is, Bill. I heard the bank people talking about it!” Jo wouldn’t budge, neither would Bill. Amy knew that she just HAD to interrogate Jo. She grabbed his hand, and dragged him into the alley next to the bank.

“What vault? Tell me tell me tell me! Ahem, I mean what do you know about said vault?” said Amy.

“Kid, leave me alone!” said Jo.

“Hmm, I wish that I had an electric torch…” said Amy.

“Alright, fine. We heard that there was a gigantic vault of gold behind the employees only door,” said Jo.

“Hmm, I suspected as much,” said Amy. She let go of his arm, and he ran off.

Amy was excited. She had a mystery! When she knew that there was no one passing by, she did her victory dance. She skipped back to the bank, where Cecily was waiting to give her a stern lecture. “I am going to tell mom that you ran off and that you were interrogating agai-” Amy passed her a One Direction t-shirt. “Squee! This will complete my collection of fan merchandise!” Aw, that was the last of my merchandise!

(Amy used One Direction when she was in trouble with Cecily. One time she put salt in Cecily’s tea, and when Cecily got mad at her she said that One Direction would hate her if she was mean.)

Cecily ran off to her One Direction temple in her bedroom and worshipped for half an hour, which gave Amy time to escape. Amy ran home — it was almost time for supper. When she got into bed, she told her puppy, Bartholomew, everything about the vault, and how she had tactfully interrogated Jo. Bartholomew told her about how he ate her toy bear by going into Cecily’s room and throwing up. That night Amy dreamed of golden chewed up toy bears.

In the morning she went with her mother to the bank. Her plan was to slip in the door and open the vault with her high tech “open sesames.” But she saw that someone already had that plan. A person in a trench coat had slipped into the employee’s only room. Amy decided to follow him. She turned the knob, and…

“Hey! Hey you! You’re not allowed to go in there!” an employee said. “That’s highly confidential!” Amelia was so disappointed. But she knew that if it was highly confidential (whatever that meant) it probably wasn’t a broom closet! Now she had a clue! She wasn’t exactly sure if it was gold, but it was something! The disappointment started to go away as her mother took her hand and dragged her out of the bank, muttering things that Amy could barely hear.

“You can read, Amelia! I don’t know why you would ever break the rules and go through that door!”

“Sorry. Please call me Amy, mother.”

“You are in so much trouble! And Cecily asked me to tell you that you have to clean up the vomit in her room! It’s your dog!”

“It’s her room.”

“You ruined her One Direction T-shirt!”

“Bartholomew ruined her One Direction T-shirt!”

“Why did you ever choose that silly name!”

“I like it. And why are you being so nice to Cecily! It was my bear that Bartholomew ate!”

“I thought that you outgrew that bear!”

“Bye.”

“What do you mean, ‘bye’?”

Amy took off. She ran all the way back to their apartment/hotel building. “Top floor, please.”

“Yes, ma’m.”

“Guess what, Bob! I found out that there is something amazing behind the employee’s only door at the bank!”

“What, a golden mop?” Bob joked. His name was not Bob, but Amy liked that name ever since she visited America and saw “Bob the Builder” on television. When she came back to Paris she said to Bob (Pierre) that she just had to know someone named Bob. So of course she chose her third best friend. (She wasn’t allowed to name her second best friend because it was a girl and she met Bartholomew before she saw Bob the Builder.) “Thank you, Bob.”

“Anytime, Amy.”

She hopped out of the elevator and into her apartment. Her family was very rich, so they owned the whole floor. She wanted the penthouse, but her father said that they shouldn’t spend their money on some foofy penthouse.

“I hope that you are here to clean my room,” warned Cecily.

“Nope. I want to speak with father,” said Amy, annoying Cecily. Amy ran to her father’s study. “Father! Can we go get bagels? I have a mission!”

“Did evil Mr. Squid come back?”

“No silly, this is real! I need as many danger sesames as possible!”

“Wait, I never heard the whole story of Mr. Squid!”

“Oh of course, you must hear! It was quite a battle. It was last month. I was sitting on my chair, and suddenly, Mr. Squid was in battle armor. I thought that he might have been playing dress up with Mr. Octopus, but I was wrong. He was getting ready to attack! I got ready. I ran to you, and asked for a dozen sesames. We bought them, because when I was little I had tons of charm.”

“I thought that this was last month!”

“Oh, but that is so long, cherie! Do not interrupt! Now where was I…ah, yes. I came back to my bedroom. Mr. Squid was in battle stance. I got into battle stance. I uttered the command. ‘CHARGE SESAME!’ I threw the bagels swiftly. They flew like bullets toward Mr. Squid. They hit him. Mother charged in. ‘Young lady, Mr. Squid is not a bowling pin,’ she said. I knocked her out of the way just in time for Mr. Squid’s ketchup packet bullets to whiz by. Mr. Squid was rushed to the infirmary by Mrs. Octopus, Mr. Octopus’ mother, who was a nurse. I defeated him in triumph. That is how the story goes.”

“You are very brave!” said father, laughing and clapping. “Yes, we will get the bagels.” Amy and her father walked down to the American shop, where they sold great bagels. They ordered a dozen sesame bagels.

“I’ll take it from here,” said Amy.

“Alright.” Amy’s father trusted her. “Now I must get back to work, dear.”

Amy went to the bank. The person in the trench coat was not there, but the employees only door was open, and in the progress of swinging shut! She made sure nobody saw her, and slipped in. What she saw did not amaze her. Aw, It’s just a dumb vault. She thought. But she slowly realized that the gold must be in the vault! The door was slightly open. The person in the trench coat had forgotten to shut it completely. It wasn’t enough to see inside, but it was open. Amy pushed as hard as she could on the gigantic door, and finally opened it enough to slip inside. There was one piece of gold.

“The person in the funny coat!” she said.

The next day Amy went to the bank early, before anyone was awake. She had her bagels ready. No one was in the bank except for the woman behind the counter, but she was in the back. But the employees only door was open again. Amy slowly walked in. The man in the trench coat was in the vault, just making sure that he didn’t forget anything. Amy fingered the piece of gold in her skirt pocket. She threw a bagel at him.

“Hey!” For a second he just stood there in surprise. “Ah! I’ve been shot! I’m getting weaker and weaker…hey…a 6-year-old angel…”

“I’m seven! And you just got bagelpulted!”

“Wait, what?” He bent down and picked the bagel up. “Hey kid! What’s the big idea?”

“You’re a thief! I’m telling!”

“If you tell,” he whispered threateningly, “I will shoot your brains out.” He pulled out a gun.

“A bagel gun?” Amy said.

“No, ya stupid kid, a lead gun.”

“Is that a kind of bagel? I only use sesame as a weapon.”

He pointed the gun at Amy. She screamed and ran out. He ran out the door into the streets of Paris. Amy followed. He ran to a sewer. He climbed in. Amy followed. There were thirty-nine other bandits. The sewer was overflowing with gold.

One of the bandits said, “Hey! There’s a little girl! Look!” Everyone looked at Amy.

“Hey kid! You’d better get out!” said the trench coat person.

I know a song that gets on everybody’s nerves, everybody’s nerves, everybody’s nerves I know a song that gets on everybody’s nerves, here is how it goes, I know a song…” Amy sang.

“Kid get out and if you tell anybody I’ll shoot you!” said funny coat Bob, as Amy called him.

“Funny coat Bob, please don’t shoot me with your lead bagel gun! I’ll leave!”

“H-how did you know my name was trench coat Bob?”

“Oh, I thought it was funny coat. But anyway I’m psychic, so bye.” Amy left.

At dinner, Amy’s mother asked, “What did you do earlier, Amy? I haven’t seen you all day!”

“I solved a crime! I am going to go see the police and tell them.”

“What crime?”

“Trench coat Bob says that if I tell he’ll shoot me with his lead gun which he told me is not a bagel gun.”

“T-trench coat Bob? Oh my, I’m so glad that you’re okay! People have been trying to catch him for months! He is from Venice, and — oh! Tell me everything!”

“What about his not bagel gun?”

“He won’t shoot you behind bars, honey.”

“Okay, so there’s a gold vault behind the employees only door and he stole the gold and he put it in a sewer with other bandits, I think that there were a lot, and I guessed his name.”

The next day Amy and her family went to the police office. They told the whole story, and Amy showed them the sewer where the gold was. She showed the the piece of gold that she found. “You’ll be sorry, little girl!” trench coat Bob screamed as he and the other bandits were dragged along to prison.

 

The End

Read the next one!

 

Horse Academy

Horse Academy

 

Chapter One

 

My name is Scarlet Brook. I have been waiting all school year for this day. Summer! All school year, it’s all about work, work, work! But in summer, just do whatever you want! Well, at least that’s what I thought. The first day of summer, I thought I would be going to hang out with my friends or something, but instead my mom forced me to babysit my annoying little sister, Sydney. Sydney wasn’t too happy herself.

“But, Chelsea! I want Chelsea to babysit me! She’s better!!” she whined.

“I told you! Chelsea is going on her honeymoon!” mom said.

“Can I at least hang out once today?” I said.

“Of course! The whole summer will be fun. Remember? I signed you up for riding camp!”

Oh, I forgot to tell you. I live in a magic land: a place where there are unicorns, wizards, and dragons. Usually normal people don’t have flying piglets as pets. Well, those normal people don’t live here.

 

Chapter Two

 

The next morning, I woke up still exhausted from what happened last night. First Sydney wanted water, then milk, then orange juice, then candy, and finally she wanted to watch a movie. But she wasn’t finished yet, then she wanted popcorn, and to go with popcorn she wanted soda. How does Gabriela do it? Well, she had ruined the first day of summer but not all the days! Then I just remembered. I had riding camp today! I hopped out of bed and into my riding gear. I brushed my teeth and brushed my hair. Then I ran out of my room and I thought, Wow! Am I doing well today!

 

Just then, I spotted Pip, my flying piglet’s mud footprints splattered across the floor. Uh oh, I thought. Then mom came out and screamed.

“Take Pip into the bath tub! Stat!!!” I slipped on the mud and grabbed Pip. I put Pip into the bathtub and ran out. I grabbed paper towels and slid them across the floor. When I saw mom slip, I couldn’t help but laugh. With her hair all tangled, her body all muddy, and veins popping out of her forehead, she looked just like an angry witch! Mom glared at me and made herself calm down. She sighed. “Wow, what a great start of a day!” she said sarcastically.

“Umm…mom?” I said, “Don’t I have riding camp today?”

My mom nearly fainted. “Go! Go! Go!” she screamed.

I ran out the door. “Wait!” she ran after me. She handed me my lunch and gave me a map to the camp. I ran all the way. On my way there, I thought to myself, Wow, I’m late on my first day of camp!

When I got there, I saw a bunch of riders on their horses. I ran to the coach and explained what happened. I could hear people whispering about me. The coach told me to take a seat on the line. I sat down.

“Listen up, kids! my name is Betty. Get a partner, we will be practicing jumps on our horses,” said Betty. Betty paired me up with a boy named Henry.

“Hi,” I said. He didn’t say anything to me. He just hopped on his horse. I looked at him.

“Well?” he said. “Don’t just stand there! Get on your horse!” he yelled. I jumped. I don’t know why, but I felt mad. “I don’t have a horse!” I screamed. Henry must have been frightened because he started backing away from me. Betty came over to see what all the commotion was about.

“What’s going on here?” she asked.

“That girl’s crazy and she doesn’t even have a horse!” Henry cried. He bumped into a girl that had dirty blonde hair worn in a low ponytail.

“Ow!” she said, turning around, “What was that for?”

“She made me!” wailed Henry.

“Calm down, riders!” Betty yelled.

“She’s not even a rider!”

“Quit screaming!” yelled a girl with brownish hair held in a tight ponytail. I had a feeling today was going to be a long day.

 

 

Chapter Three

 

When I came back to riding camp the next day, the girl who had screamed “quit screaming!” came over to me.

“Henry’s such a jerk,” she said to me.

“Tell me about it,” I said.

“I’m Bryn,” she said. I smiled.

“Thanks for being the first one to tell me their name. Well, besides Betty.”

Bryn laughed.

“Emily!” she called. The girl who Henry bumped into ran over.

“Hey, aren’t the one who got into the fight with Henry yesterday?” she asked. I shrugged.

“Nicely done!” she said, smiling.

“Huh?” I said. Emily and Bryn started laughing.

“Henry’s a pain,” said Emily. I joined in the laugh too, even though I didn’t know why we were laughing. When I got home I told mom all about it. Mom said she was happy I made friends. But I left out the part with Henry in it because I knew mom would ask all about it, or she would get mad at me for getting into a fight or call Henry’s mom telling her what happened.

Mom told me someone moved in next door. I was so excited! Maybe she would become my best friend! We could send flashlight notes to each other at night. And we could have sleepovers whenever we wanted! Oh. What if it was a boy? My heart dropped. I crossed both of my fingers.

“Mom,” I asked, “is it a girl or a boy?”

“A 13-year-old boy.” I felt like someone had dropped a heavy ball on me.

“And a 12-year-old girl named Jane.”

Yesss!!! I thought.

“They also have a 3-year-old named Taylor.”

“When are they coming?” I asked excitedly.

“Oh look! There they are right now!” she said, while pointing out the window.

“Moooom!” I moaned. “I wanted to greet her when she came!”

“Oh, doesn’t matter! Go!” she said. “I wanted to make her cookies!”

My mom sighed. After we made cookies, I fixed my hair and put on a blue blouse and a white frilly skirt. I walked out of my house to their house they had a porch that had white paint that was peeling off. I rang their doorbell and a big jolly lady opened the door.

“Hello,” she said.

“Hi!” I almost screamed. “I live next door. I came here to give these cookies to your children.” Hey, I know it was cheesy, but I was trying to be friendly!

“Oh, my!” she said.  “That would be lovely!”

Score! I thought. Just the response I was looking for.

“Right this way,” she said. “Jane! Someone’s here to see you!” she yelled.

“Really?” I heard a girl’s voice yell from upstairs. Then I heard footsteps coming from the stairs. Then I saw a girl with brown hair held in a braid on her shoulder.

“Hi,” she said.

“Hi, I’m Scarlet. I brought cookies,” I said, feeling kind of stupid wearing my Hello Kitty bag.

Jane’s eyes lightened up when I said cookies. “Cookies!” she repeated. She grabbed my arm and brought me to the kitchen. There I saw a little girl with light brown hair with a butterfly clip in her hair, smashing a toy against the table.

“Taylor, stop smashing your toy against the table!” Jane looked at me. “Little sisters are so annoying,” she said, glaring at Molly. “Oh, and that’s not all. My older brother Henry is such a pain. He just started riding camp.” Just then a boy came out of a room. My jaw dropped. It was Henry.

 

Chapter Four

 

Jane showed me her room with her adorable little sparkle bunny. Sparkle bunnies are bunnies that can jump super-high and sparkle when they are happy. It started shooting sparkles everywhere. My mom said I couldn’t get one because they are too messy. But I love Pip. She’s the perfect pet for me. Okay, well, you didn’t get a good experience of Pip on my first day of camp, but she is a wonder to have around.

Her sparkle bunny was named Fiona and was light brown. Whenever I looked into Fiona’s eyes, she was squinting. Then she would bend down and put her paws on her head like she was trying to scratch her eyes. “Why is she doing that?” I asked after the third time she did it.

“I think there’s something wrong with her eyes,” answered Jane, while planting a kiss on top of Fiona’s head. Fiona looked at me with her sparkling deep-hazel eyes. But when I looked at her, she did it again: squinted and then rubbed her eyes.

But then I noticed another cage next to Fiona’s. Jane must have saw my reaction because she said, “That’s Millie’s cage.” She put her hand on top of the cage.

“You have another bunny?” I asked. She opened the cage and pulled out a white bunny with it’s eyes closed. Fiona jumped on Jane’s shoulder and looked at Millie. Both of them sparkled.

 

Chapter Five

 

Henry came into Jane’s room. “What are you doing with that, crazy girl!” he asked. Jane looked hurt. “What do you mean?” she asked, signaling for him to go away. Then a tiny spike dragon came out behind Henry. Spike dragons are dragons that can protect you by shooting fire spikes from their mouths. They never turn against their masters. They can also fly. They are awesome! But they are also very rare. “You have a spike dragon!” I exclaimed without thinking.

“You mean Rex? Nah, he’s a thorn dragon.”

“Oh,” I said. Thorn dragons can turn invisible. They turn into a thorn when they sleep.

“Anyway, what are you doing here?”

“I live next door,” I said. His face got big.

“What?!” he asked like the world was ending.

“Umm…” I said. “I should go home.”

“Yeah, you should,” said Henry, kind of doing a sideways smirk.

 

Chapter Six

 

The next day at riding camp, I finally got a horse! It was light brown and had a beautiful brown mane. It had strong silver wings. I named it Miracle because it was a miracle that I got such a beautiful horse. Henry had a black horse with a black mane and black wings. It was ugly. He named it Spike. Bryn had a white horse with silver wings and had a beautiful brown mane. She named it Lucky. Emily had a brown horse with a brown mane and big silver wings. She named it Beauty. She was a beauty. The first time I got on Miracle, I felt like I was flying. I felt like Miracle was talking to me. Like she was telling me I was going to be okay. A couple times I got nauseous but when Miracle looked at me with her beautiful brown eyes, I felt like everything was going to be fine.

 

Chapter Seven

 

I didn’t even know we were going to have a competition! But I was totally surprised we had a competition in three days! I mean, who would do that? Just put a competition six days after the camp even started! We practiced what we were going to do in the competition. Betty said we were competing against other riders too. We were going to race. I had to memorize the obstacle course. I thought I thought I was going to win.

When I got home I thought I was home alone because it was so quiet. It is usually very loud. Since I thought I was home alone, I started freaking out.

“Momm!!!” I screamed. “Where are you?!”

“Booo!” someone cried behind me. I felt like I had a heart attack. I turned around and saw…

“Aunt Audrey!” I screamed. I hugged her.

“Hey Scarlet! I’m taking you out for dinner today!”

I squealed.

“With Sydney!”

I stopped freaking out. “Awww…” I said.

“Hi auntie Adwey!” Sydney said. Aunt Audrey took us out to my favorite Japanese restaurant, “Tatany.” I ordered my usual (udong, dumplings, and miso soup). Sydney ordered her usual  (miso soup, and tofu teriyaki).

 

Chapter Eight

 

The day of the competition, I had my riding gear on and we were playing in a stadium. I couldn’t believe we were going to be on TV! My family was here. So was my aunt Audrey, in her “I love NYC” shirt, my uncle Tim, my other aunt Mary, and my uncle Jeremy. I was surprised to see my cousins, Salina, Curtis, Alex, and my baby cousin, Molly.

We took our places in the stadium. I looked at the guy with the gun. I held Miracle’s mane tightly and she looked at me. I looked over at Bryn and she winked at me. I looked at Henry, and for the first time ever, he smiled.

“Ready, set, boom!” went the gun. Everyone went, including Miracle. I think Miracle was startled because she almost tripped when the man shot the gun. We flew up a hill. I passed a rider on a brown horse, then a black horse. I could see Bryn and Emily behind me. Then came the big hill. Miracle tried going up the hill but when a couple horses passed us, Miracle fell down the hill. “Miracle!” I yelled. Then Henry stopped near us. “Wow,” he said. He helped up Miracle.

“Thanks,” I said. I kept going. “Come on, Miracle, we can do this,” I said. Miracle flew up the hill. “Come on,” I said, “We’re almost there. I could see the finish line from here. Miracle went super fast and we saw a black horse that was about to cross the finish line and… zoom! Miracle passed the finish line! After the finish line, Miracle slipped and I fell off Miracle. Everything went pitch black.

 

Chapter Nine

 

I woke up in the hospital. Mom was kneeling next to me. “You won,” she said quietly.

“I won,” I repeated.

“Look,” she said pointing out the window. I looked out the window and saw Miracle! She had a gold medal around her neck. Then I saw Betty holding another medal. Then I saw Henry. I remembered how he stopped to help up Miracle. Maybe he wasn’t so bad after all. I smiled. It felt good to be a rider. I felt like it was going to be a long, great, awesome summer.

 

The End

Adventures of Emily

“Go outside, Emily. Go outside.”

 

Emily heard the voice in her dream. Emily was a girl that was blonde and had bright blue eyes. Emily went to a regular school, had a regular family, had a regular dog, and had a regular house. “Go outside Emily. Go outside.” Emily was hearing this for the fifth time so she decided to go outside. When she was outside in her yard, she saw a statue that she had never seen before. It looked like a statue of her grandfather that she never met, it told her, “Tomorrow, go to the graveyard at noon…”

 

The Next Day…

 

As the statue told her, she was there at noon. She saw the statue on top of her grandfather’s grave open and she saw a staircase leading downwards. She decided to follow it. It was a very twisty and slippery staircase. Once she reached the bottom, there was a big room covered in moss. She saw a shadow that looked a little bit like a ghost. She saw something glow and she decided to clear away the moss. After a little while, she saw a plaque that said…

 

“The 25th daughter of Quadricles will discover that her power is stronger than the power of Varniduca.”

 

Emily got scared when she saw that, and she thought, Who is Varniduca, and what powers is the plaque talking about, and who was Quadricles? Then she heard that same voice that was in her dream say, “Varniduca is an evil witch, Quadricles was a wizard, you are the 25th daughter and you must discover your powers on your own.”

Who is that? Emily wondered as she looked around, and suddenly she saw a shadow walking towards her.

 

“Hello, I am your grandfather, Anderson. I will help you learn to use your powers.” Then the shadow took off a cloak and Emily saw an elderly man.

 

“You will be able to walk through walls, turn invisible, read people’s minds, see the future, fly, and you will have laserbeam eyes.”

 

I have powers!? thought Emily.

“How did you talk to me in my dream?¨

“I have magical powers.¨

Emily asked, “How come everyone thought you were dead?”

“I hid down here to make a plan.”

He showed her a piece of paper that had a picture of the witch’s house and a bunch of lines and x’s.

“What’s this?” asked Emily.

“This is our plan,” he said, and then he explained that Emily would go inside the witch’s house and hide until the witch fell asleep, and then Emily would get the gems. She would have to get the two gems that control time. She stole the one that controls the sky and the one that controls the sun.

 

The next day…

 

“We have to work on the plan.”

“Why right now?” Emily said.

“Because we have to get ready for the big day.”

After working on the plan for three hours, they were finally ready.

 

The next day…

 

After walking for two hours, they finally made it to the darkest part of the forest where all the evil creatures lived.

“Where’s her house?” asked Emily

“Just a little bit farther forward.”

“Why do we have to hide?”

“Because if she doesn’t know we’re here, we’ll have a better chance of capturing her.”

“What’d she steal?” whispered Emily.

“She stole two of the five jewels that control time in the magical world.”

“Is that her house?” asked Emily pointing to a big purple and black mansion.

“Yes, be very quiet.”

“Is that her?” asked Emily, pointing to a lady looking out the window.

“Yes.”

“Should we go now?” asked Emily.

“Five…four…three…two…now!!”

Emily ran towards the house and knocked the door open.

“WHO DARES TO ENTER MY HOUSE!!” shrieked the witch.

Emily hid behind the bench as the witch started to search. Emily turned invisible and read the witch’s mind.

She was thinking, “Is it Tommy’s cat again?”

Emily thought, “Phew, she doesn’t know I’m here.”

Emily silently walked forward.

Emily went behind the witch.

Emily tripped over the back of the witch’s dress and made a loud sound.

“WHO IS INSIDE MY HOUSE?”

Emily hid behind a closet while the witch put a forcefield around the house so that nobody could get out once they were inside and the power of invisibility didn’t work.

“I seee you,” said the witch.

As the witch started to look for Emily, Emily quickly searched the house for all the hiding spots possible. Emily hid under the witch’s bed and hoped that she wouldn’t look for her there. After searching for three hours, the witch said, “Whoever was in here must have left. They couldn’t have stayed in here without food or water. I will take off the barrier.”

 

After waiting for three hours, Emily heard the witch start to snore. Emily decided to take a chance and come out of her hiding spot. Emily silently tip-toed away from the bed and searched the house for something that might look like a magical gem. After searching every room in the house, she found a pattern of stones on the floor of an empty, very small, dusty room. After thinking for a little while, Emily thought it was a code. She recognized this type of code from books, I have to step on the correct stones for something to happen. Emily also noticed that there were clues for which stone to step on. They were: Blue is the fifth color of the arc of seven colors.

The bright yellow sun is the closest star to the earth. The midnight sky seems far, far away. White is the center of all the colors. Grass is the middle of the sun and the water. The bright color of royalty belongs in second place. The color of ever-lasting fire belongs on the third mark of seven. Emily thought and wrote in her notebook and came up with the answer. Purple, gold, red, white, blue, green, yellow. Emily stepped on the stones in that order, and she found herself inside a huge room. I have to get the stones. But then she thought, What if she catches me? Emily chose to search for the gems. After searching everywhere, she found the gems in a big box. Emily was about to grab the box and run, when the witch said, “I found you.”

“I see you too,” said Emily.

“I know you see me,” the witch said. The witch made a bubble around her and Emily so that they had to move in that small space. Emily made a laser net around the witch and after a little while, the witch gave up and said, “I give up, you can have the gems.” So Emily took the gems and with some help from her grandfather, the forest animals, and the birds, they brought the witch to the magical prison, where she would stay for one hundred years. Emily also returned the gems to their spots in the magical rainbow castle where they belonged, and everything was normal again.

 

The End

The Night Before School in Texas

Once there was a family, the McKnight family. They moved from Utah to Texas during the summer. Here are the people in the family. Mindy is the mom of the family who has her own youtube channel called The Mom’s View. Shawn is the cameraman for the youtube channel. He’s also the Daddy’o. Brooklyn is the popular girl, was head of the cheerleading squad(in Utah), who makes friends very easily and is super nice. She is 14 years old. Bailey is Brooklyn’s identical twin who is 2 minutes younger and is super shy and funny. Obviously, you know how old she is. Tyler is very cute and is going into his sophomore year. He is 15. Kayla is the little daredevil of the family and is going into 4th grade. She is 9. And Riley is a very quiet soon-to-be-kindergartener, age 5.

So here’s the story. They were all eating dinner at the dinner table and talking about the first day of school tomorrow.

“Is everybody ready for their first day of school tomorrow?” said Mindy.

“I am!” said Brooklyn. “I’m ready for new friends and I hope to be the head of the cheerleading squad at Presner School.”

“I’m not,” said Bailey, looking annoyed and folding her arms.

“Why?” said Riley with her quiet, tiny, five-year-old voice.

“Because I’m not going to make any friends and I’m going to be a solid-D student and have the worst time ever!”

“I bet you’re not!” said Kayla.

“Bailey isn’t that nice that Kayla thinks you’re gonna have the best day tomorrow as a freshman.”said Mom

“I care,” said Riley”.

“Uhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh I do too?” Tyler said, obviously confused.

“But, I care the most,” said Brooklyn.

“No you don’t!” said Bailey. “You always take all the attention away, you entered to be class president because you knew that you would get more votes. When I’m trying to make a friend you takeover, YOU RUIN MY LIFE! I’m done with dinner, Mom.”

“Me too,” said Brooklyn.

Brooklyn went up to her room and saw that Bailey was on the right side of the bed. So Brooklyn was about to get on the left side of the bed when Bailey flipped over on the left side.”I think you’re having trouble getting comfortable,” Brooklyn said .

“Yeah, Well it’s kinda hard to sleep when there’s a knife in your back,” Bailey said. She used her body to try and cover the entire bed so Brooklyn didn’t have any room.

“I think I’ll just sleep on this chair,” Brooklyn said as she sat on the armchair next to the AC.

”But if I get up to get a glass of water, you’ll steal the bed! LIKE YOU STEAL EVERYTHING ELSE!” Bailey said.

“Bailey I didn’t know I was hurting your feelings, and I am so sorry,” Brooklyn said.

“I thought you were my friend,” Bailey said.

“I AM your friend!” said Brooklyn.

“Well, I hate to see what you do to your enemies!” Bailey said.

“I don’t have any enemies!” Brooklyn said.

“You do now,” Bailey said.

“Ladies, ladies,” said a voice. It was Lucas. Lucas had a  crush on both Brooklyn and Bailey but, Brooklyn and Bailey didn’t have a crush on him.

“How long have you been here?” Brooklyn said.

“The whole time,” Lucas said. “I hate to see you two fighting! I want my future first and second wives to get along,” Lucas said.

“Get out!” both girls said.

 

September 4 ,2015 10:20

 

I’m trying to fall asleep but I can’t!

 

XO,Bailey

 

So Bailey hopped out of bed, went down the hall and to the left, into Riley’s room. She slowly opened the door and pinched Riley to wake her up.

“AH!” Riley said. “What are you doing here?”

“Riley, I’m nervous about my first day of school tomorrow. Do you have any advice for me?”

“I’m only five! Go to sleep!” Riley said as she got under the covers, hiding her entire body.

“Fail number one,” Bailey said as she closed the door slowly and headed into Kayla’s room. Bailey opened the door slowly and pinched Kayla to wake her up, same as she did to wake up Riley.

“Hey!” Kayla said. “Shouldn’t you be in bed? With Brooklyn?”

“I need some advice for school tomorrow because I’m nervous. Do you think you know anything about a freshman year?”

“I’m nine, I’m not an idiot,” Kayla said.

“I never said you were nine, or an idiot,” Bailey said.

“Just go to sleep,” Kayla said.

“Fail number two,” Bailey said. She closed Kayla’s door slowly and headed in Tyler’s room, thinking that he wouldn’t be such a big help. But she went in Tyler’s room anyways. She pinched Tyler to wake him up.

“Huh what huh?” Tyler said. “You’re so annoying ,” Tyler said. “Why can’t you just chill out for one minute? You’re exhausting,” Tyler said. He pulled the covers over his head and went back to sleep. Bailey didn’t even say Fail number three, because that was barely a try. So Bailey went into her parents’ room and opened the door. They were watching Odd Mom Out in their bed.

“Mom? Dad?”

“What are you doing awake?” Mom said.

“Shouldn’t you be in bed with Brooklyn?” Dad said.

“I can’t sleep. I’m nervous about my first day of school tomorrow!”

“You have nothing to worry about!” Mom said.

“You’re going to be just fine,” Dad said. Just then, the three of them heard footsteps. It was Brooklyn.

“Mom, I need my nighttime pills. I forgot I left them in your bathroom.”

“You didn’t take your nighttime pills tonight?” Mom said.

“No, I didn’t,” Brooklyn said. “And Bailey, what are you doing awake?”

“I feel like you guys should have a little talk,” Dad said.

“About what?” Bailey said.

“You know what, honey,” said Mom. “

Fine,” Bailey said.

“Brooklyn, you get your nighttime pills. Bailey, hop into bed,” Mom said.

“I’ll be waiting,” Bailey said to Brooklyn.

When Brooklyn came into the room, she said, “I don’t know what’s up with you, usually at the dinner table you’re telling jokes or listening to stories others are telling.”

“I’m just nervous I’m not gonna make any friends, I’m gonna get bad grades and I’m gonna be lonely and scared. I’m gonna have no one to hang out with.”

“You can hang out with me!” Brooklyn said.

“Wouldn’t you rather hang out with your friends that you’re gonna make at school?” Bailey said.

“The only reason I make friends easily is because those people are nice to me. I don’t know if the people in the new school will like me,” Brooklyn said.

“The truth is, I’m kind of a little shy. Not that many people like me.”

“But how did you get to be so popular? And how did you get to make so many friends at our old school?” Bailey said.

“The only reason I got so popular was because I was head of the cheerleading squad, and I was class president last year. The only reason I had so many friends is because a lot of people liked me.”

“Oh” Bailey said.

“I’m sorry about our fight earlier. I shouldn’t have told you that you ruined my life. Cause you really didn’t. Now I understand. I’m sorry for taking all the attention away,” Brooklyn said.

“You didn’t,” Bailey said. “I was just jealous.” They hugged each other.

“Let’s rest up for our big day tomorrow,” Brooklyn said.

“I’ll be right there,” Bailey said. “There’s just something I have to do.”

 

September 4, 2015 10:35 PM

 

Dear Diary,

 

Everything worked out just fine. Everythings ok, for now…

 

XO, Bailey

Dragons vs. Dracula: Book 5

The dragon brothers carefully entered the cave full of bats. They found out about the cave from Fred the Dwarf, a friend of the dragon brothers. They were exploring the cave, searching for the crystal of death. The Crystal of Death would give them the power to revive dead things, so they could revive friends and use it for good. When they entered the cave, bats charged at both of the dragon brothers, but the two dragons burned the bats by breathing fire.

“What just happened?” said the older brother.

“Don’t blame me, I didn’t do it!” said the younger brother.

Suddenly, a pack of robotic bats with lasers came charging at them. They shot at the dragons. But then, one of the dragons created a burning shield that bounced the lasers off and reflected them towards the bats and destroyed them. The dragons together kept walking in the cave until they fell into an electrified cage. They quickly flew out before the cage closed shut.

The dragons kept exploring the cave looking for the Crystal of Death. After several days, they finally came to a dead end, and Dracula flew down from a hole on the ceiling with an army of indestructible bats.

Dracula commanded the bats to hold him up in midair so that Dracula could turn the dragons into vampires. After the bats held him up, Dracula tried to bite them. He opened his mouth, showing his teeth. They burned his teeth by breathing fire, so then Dracula changed his mind about turning them into vampires. He wanted to destroy them.

Dracula wanted to make the fight harder in order to impress the bats, so he let down the dragons and fought them fist to fist. First Dracula grabbed a rock shield and a metal sword and swung it at the dragon. The older brother dragon flew up then dived down while breathing fire, but Dracula dodged him. But the younger brother flew under and punched Dracula, knocking him down.

But then the older brother said that Dracula isn’t powered by life, he’s powered by death. After thinking about that, the brothers figured out that the Crystal actually powers Dracula and they would have to destroy him in order to get it. And so they hid behind the rock and created a plan. The plan was: the younger dragon would go to to Dracula as bait and while he did that, the older would create a formula out of the materials that they had. So after the plan was formed, they tried it. The younger dragon went in as bait and started to fight Dracula, and meanwhile the older dragon brother was making the potion. They kept on fighting until the potion was done and Dracula made the younger brother fall to the ground. Just as Dracula was about to destroy him, the older brother threw the potion and destroyed Dracula. The brothers found the Crystal, but they tested it first and threw a rock at the it. And the rock dissolved into ashes. So they had to wear a thousand rocks on their hands so their hands wouldn’t dissolve, and they put it in a container at their home in space. They decide that they will use their undissolvable tweezers to touch it.

They touch a button that points it towards what they want to heal. And that heals their friends.

Last Stand

Chapter 1: End of The World

Agent 37 patrolled the streets of New Nerf City. Agent 1 defended the city’s banks. Agent 99 scouted for Agent 37 and Agent 10 was the head of a Nerf army!!!

“Move it troopers, move it troopers,” said Agent 10.

 

Chapter 2: Reinforcements

“No!!” said Agent 1. “A grenade landed in a bank! Agent 1 was mortally wounded because he was next to the explosion.”

 

Chapter 3: Streak

Clash cing xing stab slash boom kick bam ka bam hi yah!

“Ouch, that hurt,” said Agent 45.

Agent 12 defeated Agent 67, Agent 75, Agent 56 and Agent 45 with fists guns and swords!

 

Chapter 4: Snipers

Pew pew pew pew! Ah! Unh! Nooo! Oof! Ahhhh.

Snipers picked off a lot of the insurrectionists.

 

Chapter 5: Recruits

A hobo finally found a cheap apartment room and was shown into his first personal room for years. The room was very nice. There was already a bed there, a lamp, and there was a table with a TV. The bed had pillows already, and some covers already. He also had a washing machine in there. So when his clothes were dirty he could just wash them right away while sitting in his pajamas reading a book. The first few days, he could sleep by himself. He was very happy because he could get a job, and he could stop panhandling. But there was a problem. Soon he couldn’t sleep by himself. He saw a Chinese movie that scared him so much that he couldn’t fall asleep. So he slept in the living room. Everybody else teased him, because he couldn’t sleep by himself. For example, like, “Oooh, this guy can’t sleep by himself!” or “Nerd!” or “Stop getting scared!” He went back to his apartment feeling humiliated, sleepy, and finally, upset. People called him names so much, he decided to lock his door and stay in there forever, and called it home.

The hobo was reading the news when he saw an advertisement for a new agent replacing Agent 1. He didn’t want to at first, but he thought Agent 1, if he retires, he could get a lot of money. Then he decided to join the agents. He walked right towards the headquarters. The headquarters is so high-tech, one button could already shoot ten thousands lasers out of it. It looks platinum and can transform into anything. There’s a secret hatch underground, and the hobo went through it. The secret hatch is for when you can’t enter the main entrance because people are attacking. The hobo asked about three million questions at headquarters, so he knew where the hatch was. The main entrance is only for high level clearance.

He found himself in the toilet. They had changed the pipes so he would end up in the toilet instead of the command center. He was so wet, he couldn’t go into the command center, because they restricted any wet people. But he found a small agent training center three hundred miles away right next to his house. He went there and signed himself in, and now he’s Agent Infinity.

Then he went through hard training courses. He had to lift three million pounds, run a twenty-five-mile lap, swim three hundred miles, and finally, jump rope right into some water and swim back up, but you can’t get your jump rope wet. He failed everything except for the twenty-five-mile-lap and a jump rope, and the swimming. He failed to lift three million pounds; he got crushed. He got promoted to Agent 2.

He thought that the people who called him nerd would pay, because now he would be in the news and they would read the news. And he was in the news. The article was, “Fat Hobo

Promoted to Agent 2 After Completing Three of the Training Courses.”

 

Chapter 6: Badge

When the hobo got sent to fight Zelltrax, he got defeated and the monster took his badge. Hobo passed out and he woke up in an emergency center. He got wounded so much that they had to amputate his arm. Hobo was asleep and didn’t feel the pain at all.

 

Chapter 7: Lose Your Rank

Hobo got demoted to Agent 27, which is pretty bad.

 

Chapter 8: Losing

1234567890-0987654321234567890p987654321234567890p9876543 was the password to blow up the world.The insurrectionists blew up the world.
THE END

The Ghost in the Haunted Mansion

One evening, the haunted mansion had just risen from the ground. Werewolves were guarding it, and if they bit you, you’d turn into one. Zombies were guarding it too, and if they bit you, you also turned into one — unless they devoured you. The zombies and werewolves were all people who used to work in the house. There was a ghost who was the king of the house because he had once owned the house until it sank into the ground. He was the man that had run the house. This house was not just your ordinary house. It had gone down in 1849. It had fancy golden arches all over it, and it was covered in vines. There was a second ghost who was not king of the house, but he was the king’s servant. He would look around for something to eat. Sometimes he found ghost nibblets and sometimes he found seeds and berries. For dessert he’d have a cookie pie.

One night he was looking around for something to eat when he bumped into one of the werewolves and said, “Are you a ghost nibblet or a berry?”

The werewolf said, “Get out of the house if you’re not a ghost!”

The ghost said, “I am a ghost, you rotten berry!”

The werewolf replied angrily at the ghost, “I am not a rotten berry! I am a werewolf!” The werewolf was huffing and puffing and had jagged teeth.

“Try and eat me!” yelled the ghost. “Oh wait, you can’t, because you’re a werewolf, not a ghost. I could actually be inside you if I wanted to.”

“Oh yeah? Try it!”

So the ghost went inside of the werewolf. Once he got out of the werewolf he said, “Oh, you’re never going to be my dinner…” So he went back into the mansion. He realized that he wouldn’t find dinner inside because he had eaten all that was left, so he ventured out into the woods surrounding the house. He had seen the trees but he’d never gone in one.

“What’s this?” he said. “Is it called a hardly bargly? Or is it called a tree? I’ll go with tree! Yeah, tree would be the good name.” He went out and he saw something. It was a panther, but the ghost did not know that. “Oh, you must be one of the werewolves that I’ve heard so much about!” But the panther didn’t say anything because he wasn’t dead yet. So he couldn’t see the ghost, but he could hear him.

The panther thought, What’s that sound? That must be my head talking to myself…

He walked on to ghost’s property and was killed in seconds by the werewolves. The ghost of the panther ran into the forest, saw the ghost and said, “You mangy little thing! You made me go to the werewolf place!” He was running around, but the ghost just floated on.

The ghost kept going until he saw some quicksand. He thought the quicksand was ghost pellets and he tried to pick it up, but he couldn’t because it was just regular quicksand. “Bah! Not ghost pellets.” He moved on until he found an old wood shack. He went through the walls and he saw a little boat. “What is this thing?” It was a canoe made of three logs that were all put together to make a little…it wasn’t really even a boat – it was more like a raft. He moved it without anyone seeing, put it in the water and started paddling. “This is so cool!” he said. He rode it down the river until he reached a waterfall. “Why doesn’t this thing fly?” The raft went over the waterfall while the ghost was still flying. “I guess I’ll just have to keep flying and follow the river,” thought the ghost. He decided to follow the river because he thought it would lead him to food.

He got to the end of the river and walked right into a trap. It was just a table of ghost pellets with a cage on top. The ghost said, “Finally! Ghost pellets!” He went to the table and ate all the ghost pellets, but then the cage dropped and he found the King Ghost standing outside.

“You’re coming back with me,” said the King Ghost. He took him back to the haunted mansion, threw him in a cage, and said, “You will be punished for going outside of the property!” The servant ghost knew he wasn’t supposed to leave the property, but he hadn’t known that the King Ghost would find him.

After the King Ghost left, the servant ghost bent the bars of the cage and went outside. The servant started dragging his rags home, but he accidentally went to mansion of silly stuff, not the haunted mansion! The mansion of silly stuff was next to the haunted mansion, and it was where all the bad ghosts went.

The mansion of silly stuff looked exactly the same as the haunted mansion — it even had the same address. When the servant went inside, he saw a clown that popped out with two kitchen knives in his hands! The clown had a creepy smile painted on his face with sharp teeth, and the little ghost walked through him. He saw that there were ghost crocodiles, ghost sharks, and ghost orcas! He tried to fly up, but then he saw that he couldn’t fly — he had to surf across the water in the mansion. This place was very cold and he rode all around it. Then he found the worst thing of all. It was the ghost trap that held every single ghost that had died there. Then he saw a ghost that he recognized in the trap — it was his father hanging upside down. He had blood all over his face and he was hanging from a rope.

“Ahh! What is that thing?” said the servant ghost. Then he saw another trap that had ghosts parts in it. “I could’ve gotten my father out of the trap if I was the strongest ghost on Earth, but I see that little trap and I’m not falling for it,” he said.

He moved on and then he saw something…it really was the worst thing in the world. He saw a beheaded monster! The monster was squiggling around with arms like an octopus and had fifteen heads that had all been popped off. This monster was black with wings and breathed fire. It was 30,000 feet high and it was all bloody. The monster was so big it barely fit in the house, and it was trying to eat the ghost for a snack. It was drooling blood and was soaking wet with blood. It had orcas that could eat you as a tail. It was screaming like crazy, “Rawr!”

The servant hid behind a rock and said, “That’s gonna take awhile for me to defeat…so I’m just going to sneak around it if I can.” The monster had heads all over its back so it could see everything around it. The ghost tried to sneak around it, but one of the heads saw him. The head breathed fire at him and just barely missed him.

“Well, that was an unexpected party favor,” said the servant ghost. He snuck away and then he saw that there were lots of dead ghosts on the floor. He saw a sword, picked it up, and chopped off one of the heads. Blood and organs exploded from the neck. The monster screeched and the ghost had to cover his ears.

“I’ll just kill the main head,” said the servant ghost. He chopped off the main head with a sword and the monster fell down to the ground. “Well, at least that’s over.” He flew all the way out of the house. “Hey, I’m out in the forest again…oh boy. Now I just have to run away from the King Ghost.” He didn’t know that outside there was a trick. The King Ghost had made the bars of the first cage out of ghost gold, but this time, he made them out of diamonds and iron so that the servant ghost couldn’t bend the bars. The servant ghost stepped on the trap, but he got out of the way of the cage at the last minute. And then, there was more blood! The King Ghost had brought a dragon that ate everything that he saw, including plastic. The dragon’s tail was made of blood, and its face was made of blood — the whole dragon was made of blood — nothing but blood! The blood was red and so fresh that it was streaming. He was making an ocean of blood that nobody wanted to cross because it had orcas in it. The blood dragon was made out of magic blood and had sharp blood teeth.

The servant ghost said, “Blood! Yay! I love eating blood with my noodles…but I still like tacos better.”

The King Ghost yelled, “What? You crazy ghost! I will kill you!” Then he took out his humongous carving knife and threw it at the servant.

The servant caught the knife. “Oh? Was that your best throw?” He threw the knife back at the King Ghost and hit him in the heart. The King Ghost died. But the servant ghost became King because once the King Ghost dies, the servant becomes King. Once the servant became King, he said his first word as the King: “This was the worst day ever! But now that I’m King, I will search for all the old King’s secrets. I will search for the secret lever…”

He found the lever on top of a painting. He pulled the lever, and it opened up a passageway that led all the way to the basement. When he reached the basement, he walked down a hall full of spiderwebs, and there was a very faint light that only bats could see in. Only the old King Ghost had ever been to the basement. It was very creepy with a lot of blood on the pictures and walls. Once the new King Ghost made it down in the basement, he saw there was another lever! On the lever it said, “If you pull this lever down, this mansion will sink down to the ground.”

“Hmm, that’s probably how this mansion sank the first time!” said the new King Ghost. Then he saw the old King Ghost’s bones lying where he had died for the first time. They were in the shape of a human and had goosebumps all over them. Then the bones came alive.

The bones said in a dark, low voice, “Who has made me alive? Whoever has made me alive must be the King!”

The new King Ghost said, “It is I, the servant ghost.”

“What the heck!” said the bones. The bones were so surprised that they almost broke into a million pieces. “What happened to the original King Ghost?”

“Oh yeah, yeah,” said the new King. “Well, there was a knife in his heart…and now he’s dead…and I don’t have a heart, so you can’t kill me. Yeah.”

“Why! What! You killed me? Well, you killed my ghost, not me, because I’m bones…but you killed the GHOST OF ME!”

The new King went back towards the lever. He thought that if he pulled the lever, then it would take him to an Evil Land of Evil, where he belonged. So he went back to the lever and pulled it. The house shook like there was an earthquake. It was like a tornado sucked it underground. It got darker, and darker, and darker, until it was so dark that he realized he was in Ghost Land. All the zombies and werewolves had disappeared. The King wasn’t in the Evil Land of Evil. He was in Ghost Land, where he would sleep forever.

The Lonely Woman in the Kitchen

Once upon a time, a woman closed the door with a smack. She took some flour, milk, and butter out of the closet door. There was no one else in the room. She felt kind of sad. She started to mix the flour, milk, and butter. Once she mixed it, it made a really yellow gooey mix. She just wanted a friend. She put the mixture in the oven and set the timer to 40 minutes. Then she sang:

I don’t have a friend

I want a friend

whaa whaa

I’m feeling blue

 

When the timer rang, she took out the cake and let it cool by the window. When it was cool she ate it all up.

 

The Sweet Family

There was a dog named Boa-Boa that lived with an owner named Alexandra. Alexandra had a baby named Margot. The baby was two years old. Boa-Boa wanted her owner to stay at home. Alexandra was always going to work. Boa-Boa was sad, because she didn’t have anyone to stay home with. She would go in her bed and sleep until Alexandra came back home. She woke up and jumped up and down when Alexandra came back. They played with each other. They played fetch outside and they did some tricks. Boa-Boa’s favorite trick was jumping to get a treat. When Boa-Boa was done with her treat, she went in her room. Alexandra went into Boa-Boa’s room.

The next day when Alexandra went to work, Boa-Boa went to get a sheet of paper and a pencil. She wrote down what she was going to do to stop Alexandra from going to work. Her plan was to tell Alexandra why she didn’t want her to go after she came home. When she came home, Boa-Boa gave Alexandra the paper.

Alexandra asked Boa-Boa, “What does this letter say?”

Boa-Boa said, “Arf arf arf arf arf!”

But Alexandra still didn’t understand. Then Alexandra turned Boa-Boa to speaking the English language, and Boa-Boa said, “This letter says that you cannot go to work anymore, because I love you. I mean, I mean you love me.”

Then Alexandra tried to turn Boa-Boa back into a regular dog because Boa-Boa sounded really silly. But Alexandra couldn’t turn Boa-Boa back into a regular dog, and Boa-Boa started to say crazy things, like: “***-a-doodle-doo, I love you, Alexandra and her dad loving and peeing, they’re walking together and says they’re ugly, but then they trip and pees on their head…” Boa-Boa kept on saying the same thing again and again. Alexandra kept shooting Boa-Boa with the laser, but Boa-Boa kept saying this:

“I love chickens, but chickens pee…”

Alexandra made Boa-Boa back into a dog, but there was a mysterious mouth on the back of her head, and the mouth started to say, “You are a poo. What a poo you are!”

And then Boa-Boa came up with a different strategy and started to walk like a human and acted so sassy. “I’m going outside and playing fetch — oops, I mean, I’m playing ball — oops, I mean I’m playing with my friend — oops! I mean I’m drinking coffee — oops, I mean I’m eating a cupcake, too!”

Alexandra was laughing so hard at what Boa-Boa was doing that her pants fell off outside. Alexandra said, “Oops!” and pulled back up her pants, but her pants broke open. When she went back home she tried to look for her pants, but she had no more pants because all of her pants were broken. Then her shirt and her underwear fell off and she was naked. And she was also bald because her hair fell off. She was naked and she needed to go outside, because she had to go to work, and she dared herself to do it, and she did.

She went outside and there was no one outside, and she went on the sidewalk, and then a million people came running toward her, and brought her back to her home. They cut her fingers off to make chicken fingers. Boa-Boa was crying and making a flood in the town.

Then Alexandra grew back her fingers, and her hair, and her shirt, and her underwear, and her pants really fast.

Then, Alexandra ran all the way home. On the way, she saw her dog Boa-Boa on the street. She picked her dog up. Alexandra took her dog Boa-Boa back home. When they got home, Boa-Boa started to act like she had been before. So Alexandra asked Boa-Boa why she was acting very strange.

Boa-Boa answered in a funny way, like: “fgfgfgfgharuiopoooppptaywgdsjjkcdiXCFHBFFGHhhhJJJAKE!”

Since Alexandra was annoyed by her dog, she gave it away to the best owner named Kuipi Lam. Alexandra walked to Kuipi Lam’s house on Tuesday. She opened Kuipi’s front door and saw Boa-Boa. “I will miss you,” Boa-Boa said in a funny way.

“I don’t care,” screamed Alexandra. Then she walked away.

“It will be okay,” Kuipi said in her house, and she petted Boa-Boa on the back. She let Boa-Boa go in her house and gave him some bones to chew on. Then Boa-Boa started to like Kuipi as her owner because Kuipi did not have to go to work because she had been fired, and she had lots of money so she was rich. She was very nice. Boa-Boa kept on chewing her bones when Kuipi was talking. Boa-Boa didn’t hear what Kuipi was saying. Kuipi was saying that it was time for dinner, but Boa-Boa didn’t go, so she didn’t eat dinner. Kuipi kept on telling her to eat dinner, but she didn’t go cause she was too busy chewing on her bones.

After Kuipi ate dinner, she called Boa-Boa to dinner again, but Boa-Boa still didn’t go. Then, Boa-Boa tried to find Kuipi, but she couldn’t find her. So Boa-Boa just went to bed.

The next day, Kuipi saw Boa-Boa not alive. She was so sad. She kept on crying and crying. Now that’s what I call a sad story. But now Kuipi can buy another dog that she will always take care of.

THE END!

P.S. I love Boa-Boa!

Forever Folding

Forever the word everyone said

it was echoing in my mind

on repeat

creasing folding becoming a piece of me,

forever.

Forever that word was folding creasing

making a documentation of itself

waiting along with all the other slips of paper

creased folded memorized sitting there untouched

a piece of paper lying on the ground

folded, waiting to be Unfolded

but no, I won’t let it unfold

for if I do

it will slowly slip away from my mind

touched but only once

only one time it was touched

because that fold, that crease wasn’t strong enough

but no,

no, I won’t let it slip away

because it is important

my past, my life documentation

that was carefully slipped into the P section of my memory

not loose, left to bounce around inside

but crammed in there along with the others left tight

then slammed shut

a nightly formation of memories

dreams

dreams were memories that were loose

and usually by morning they were

unfolded, read taken ahold of and flung somewhere else

ready to be folded and reopened then flung again

and sometimes only occasionally

things were slightly opened

and slipped someone’s mind quickly

and lay loose for a while

then finally crammed back in.

 

The Worst Sister Ever!

Chapter 1 just getting started

 

My name is Zayel Smith. I’m ten years old. I live in New York. I go to Hunter. I have four siblings, two brothers and two sisters. Their names are Kennan, Alex, Hannah, and Daniella.  Here are some adjectives about my siblings: Hannah: mean and bossy.  Kennan: thinker and chatter box.  Daniella: dumb and weird.  Alex: Focused and humorous.I’m  the youngest. Some of us do not get along. I like Alex the best because we’re almost twins and he’s very funny.Hannah is the worst because she’s the oldest. She’s bossy and annoying. For an example, one time Hannah stepped on my ankle because I stepped on hers by ACCIDENT and then she stepped on mine ON PURPOSE. Sometimes she kicks me out of the room when she’s watching a show that she thinks is too inappropriate for me.

When summer comes, I want to go to sleepaway camp because I want to get away from most of my siblings. I like my mom and dad because they don’t get mad at me that much. But it’s fall, and that means it’s three more seasons to go! The good thing about fall though is that I get to do things that my older sister doesn’t get to do, like tennis practice, and Hannah is old enough to walk home by herself, so I get time away from her. Like we go to a different school. I like my school because I really like math and they give a lot of math and their food/lunch is very good. But lots of the time the math is really easy. At school I have a lot of friends. My best friends are Isabella and Caroline. We get along pretty well. It’s different from my older sister because they’re not bossy to me and they don’t do things that my sister would do. Isabella is forgiving and Caroline shares.

Right now I’m having dinner and so far it’s been pretty good, and we are eating burritos. And we haven’t been fighting.

“Today we found out all the mistakes we made on our math test, and I got two wrong,” I said.

“That’s horrible,” said Hannah. That made me feel mad.

“But you got four wrong and that’s even worse,” I said.

Then Hannah said, “But our math is harder and I’m only four years older.”

Mom said, “Let’s talk about something else.”

But we didn’t listen to Mom.

Mom said it again then Hannah had an idea and then went silent because she was thinking if she would do her idea or not.Her idea was…

 

 

Chapter 2 bad for Zayel and good for Hannah

 

Hannah went in my room when I was in my bed (i’m the youngest so I go to bed first.)Looked around my room and then saw what she was looking for. She tiptoed to my desk and gently picked up my homework and ripped it! Then she tiptoed/ran out of my room. Then she pretended to be like she didn’t do anything. Then she did some of her own homework and then went to the living room to watch a show. The next morning, I woke up and started getting dressed. I was walking to get out of my room and I realized that I saw strips of paper on the ground. Then I looked on the back of some of the strips and it looked like it had some typing on it and some handwriting on it. I didn’t realize that it was my homework until it was the afternoon. I looked around in my desk and I couldn’t find it and I asked my mom and dad to help me find it, then they couldn’t find it. Then I asked my sister where it was and she said, “I don’t know where it is but I went in your room to check on you.” Then I still didn’t realize that it was my homework and Hannah had ripped it up. When the school day was over, I came home with a bad attitude because that was the homework that I had finished and it was due today. Then I went to the living room and my dad and my mom were on the living room couch. I told them about my day and they almost forgot to tell me where my homework went. They said that it’s on the floor because I don’t think you realized it because the scraps of paper on the floor are the ripped up homework.

“But I don’t know who ripped it up.”

“Ask all your siblings if they know who ripped it up and tell them to be honest with us or else they will get punished.”

I went to all the rooms and looked for all my siblings. I found three of them but I couldn’t find the last one. I found Alex and I found Kennan and Daniella. Alex was in his room. He said he didn’t do it. Kennan was in the living room watching TV and he said, “I didn’t do it!” Daniella was in her room. I asked her, “Did you rip up my homework?” Daniella said, “I don’t know what you’re talking about.” I believed her because she usually tells the truth.

I still didn’t know who it was. I counted on my fingers and said out loud, “Kennan, Alex, and Daniella but not Hannah. Now I think it might be Hannah.”

 

chapter 3 getting closer to the end of the homework mystery

 

I looked around the whole entire house and couldn’t find Hannah, but then I finally found her. And I said, “Did you rip my homework?”

And she said, “I’m too old to do things like that.”
Then I walked away and then I remembered that the adjectives that I think of all my siblings are Daniella – dumb and weird, Kennan – a thinker and chatter box, Alex – focused and humorous, and Hannah… mean and bossy. I went back to my mom and dad and told her that I think it’s Hannah.

“I think you should go talk to her,” I said to my parents.

“we’ll go talk to all your siblings, just in case,” they said.

“I think that’s a good idea,” I said.

Then I went to my room and looked in my desk. I found more ripped up homework. I looked around my room and I found more. Then I went back to my parents and said, “I found even more ripped up paper.Can you come look?”

Then my parents came to my room and said, “That sure is a lot of ripped up homework. I think I should go talk to your siblings right now.”

My parents went to Kennan. He said, “No.” They went to Alex. He said no too. Then they went to Daniella and she said “No.” Then they went to Hannah and Hannah said, “I thought that was regular paper.”

“Shut up, Hannah!” said her dad.

“YOU shut up!” said her mom to her dad.

My parents kept on arguing. In that time Hannah snuck out of her room and went outside to play. I didn’t see.

I tried to stop my parents from arguing. “You’re supposed to argue with Hannah, not each other!”

Then I pushed my parents aside. When I did it I punched my parents by mistake! I ran into my room and went under the covers of my bed. I heard my parents’ footsteps coming closer and closer to my room. Then I finally heard the door open and I heard my name being called.

 

 

Chapter 4 Actually getting Hannah in trouble

My parents came into my room and they picked up the blanket that I was hiding under and threw it across the room. I was surprised that they didn’t get me in trouble. Instead, they were actually looking for Hannah.

They asked me, “Do you know where Hannah is?”

I said, “No. I didn’t see.”

So my parents went in all of the rooms and hiding spots. As many places as they could possible find. But they didn’t find Hannah. Then they started to get a little bit worried. Then they went downstairs and asked the doorman to see if he saw Hannah come out.

“Yes, I did see Hannah,” he said. “I’m pretty sure that she went northeast, which is the way to the park.”

In the meantime, I called Caroline to see if she had the homework and she could email to me. Caroline came over and brought me a few pieces of the homework that I needed.

Caroline said, “I’m sorry I didn’t bring all the homework that you needed but I brought a few pieces.”

So they both called Isabella and Isabella came over and brought her the rest of the homework that I needed.

I said thanks to both of my friends for bringing me my homework.

Downstairs my parents went northeast, knowing that was the way to the park. Then they found Hannah. Hannah was running and playing soccer with her friends. My parents ran onto the field that they were playing on and grabbed Hannah out of the game.

“Let go! I’ll walk by myself if you let go!” Hannah screamed at the top of her lungs.

They let go and as she started to walk by herself she went back to her game. My parents ran back and grabbed her again and didn’t let go this time. Then Hannah felt embarrassed because her friends saw.

Hannah said, “I’ll say sorry if I can go back to my game.”

“No,” said my parents. “First apologize to Zayel. And we might let you play with your friends.”

Back at the house, I was playing with my friends, and I heard a knock on the door. I got out of the room and went to the door and said, “Who is it?”

My parents replied, “Your parents.”

I opened the door and there were my parents and Hannah. Hannah apologized and then tried to go back downstairs to the park. But my parents didn’t let her go. They grabbed her arm. In the meantime, I was making a sign for her room that said “Hannah Keep Out!” But this entire scene took a long time.

Hannah’s behavior got better and better as the year went by. She stayed out of my way. For example, Hannah always left my room when I was ready to do my homework. I ended up getting a good grade in math class.

And now it’s finally summer! Now I get to go to sleepaway camp! But I might miss my family a little bit. Even Hannah.

 

The End

 

 

The Explosion of the World

Henry had to sneak into the store and break into it at night. They had to prepare, to make weapons, like spears and guns. They were all busy working into the middle of the night until they broke in. They went to the orphanage and they started building these things in secret so that way the guardian didn’t see them. They were molding and making metal and very busy melting it, getting supplies to melt it. All of this stuff. They took the radiators out and put them under and started them working again.

They were all super tired by the middle of the night.

Henry said, “It looks like we’ll have to break-in tomorrow night until the fourth day comes.”

His friends said, “Yes, we must do that. We are too tired.”

“We can all sleep in my bed since we’re in my room,” said Henry.

 

The next morning, somebody starts to scream because they find out that there are guns in Henry’s room. They think that a robber broke in and that the boys killed the robber. So, the guardian ran out of the room and went to go tell the headmaster of the orphanage. While she was away at the office, they picked up their guns and spears and thought there was a robber in the house. The boys heard screams coming from the office. They ran to the office and the headmaster said, “What are you doing up? You know it’s only 6:30am. You know you’re only supposed to stay in the rooms until 7am!” He was super surprised, his mouth was dropped wide open because they had guns and spears. And the headmaster said, “You naughty boys, did you make them?”

“Yes,” They all said.

“Give them to me.”

“No! After we break into the computer store, we’re going to leave earth.”

“Ha ha ha, you’re not going anywhere until you turn 18. You crazy boys! Get back into your rooms, right now, before we start picking you up and throwing you in bed! Now leave!” yelled the headmaster.  “Now!” So, they left Henry’s room through the window, and the guardian made them throw them out the window. Then, when the guardian left, the boys bent and stretched to get through the window. They got their weapons.

“Why do we have to wait until then tonight to rob the the computer store? It’s still closed,” said Start.

They all agreed because it was only 6:40 AM and it was still dark out because it was winter. It was snowing, and they had white snow coats, so no one would notice them. They painted their weapons white, so they would look like snow falling, too.

They had to use the A train to get to the computer store. They used their white-painted hammers to bash into the windows. The alarm did not sound because it was too wet and the snow got into the alarm. The electric circuits went out.

The security guard said, “Halt! Who goes there?”

“It is us. The new security guards!” said the boys.

“Well, while you’re the new security guard, fix that window!”  The security guard yelled. “A robber must have broken in last night.”

“Do we have to?” said the boys.

“Yes you have to,” said the security guard. So they picked up the blow torches from the security guard’s room which were there to fix the window if somebody broke in and started working.

After they fixed the window, John said, “Let’s just steal the computer when the security guard’s not looking.”

And Henry said sarcastically, “That’s a great idea. We’re here to rob the store, not fix a window!”

Then they took the computer off the shelf and out the door so they didn’t have to fix the window again and took the train back to the orphanage. And then they looked up how to build a rocket ship to get away from Earth. They took their big pot out to make the metal for the rocket ship. They took out the radiators once again and started melting their guns to turn them into flat pieces of metal and that was enough metal to build the engine, but they still needed more metal. They snuck into people’s rooms to steal their radiators to melt more metal. And then they got to work hammering the metal, bending it into shape, making the pipes for the rocket ship, and putting in the leftover radiators so that it wouldn’t get too cold. They went to the water room and they took a bucket with them and they took out scoops of water to make steam to heat up the rocket ship, and then they went to go get some paint at the corner ‘cause there was a paint shop there. They bought red and white paint with the money they took with them that they had earned doing chores. Then they took some wood and ashes to make the fire and it became morning and they were allowed to come out of their rooms, but they had already come out of their rooms 33 times that night and they were so tired because they had been roaming around all night that they went to sleep. The maid woke them up an hour later and said, “Time to get up, lazy bones! You know you have to go scoop some water. Your buckets are right on your night tables.” The rocket ship was safely hidden in the closet. They had drilled holes in the ceiling so that it could extend out to the roof. And then they went out and got their buckets and did all of their chores. They got $10.  They said, “We’d better go to a different place, now, because it’s the 3rd day already.

“Ok, 3…2…1…blast  off!” said the boys.

As they were flying away, they felt the rocket ship shake because the Earth had blown up. It shook the whole universe. They knew that Earth was gone. The boys weren’t sad about the people, but they were sad that their homeland was gone and they had to go to a different land.

So, they blasted off to Planet OOsiki BOOsiki. They met some aliens. They landed on the most scary place on OOsiki BOOsiki. There was so much fog, and aliens saying, “We need your braaainnss,” like alien zombies. They looked like human zombies except that they looked like a Hershey Kiss, and they’re made of chocolate like a Hershey Kiss. They said, “We are the rottenest chocolate in the worrrldd!!”

Start says, “I have a great idea! RUN!” So they start running as fast as they can with the rotten chocolate right behind them. They found a little cave and they hid in it. The rotten chocolate ran right past them.

They said, “Phew! That was close. What’s that hole over there?” They went to check it out and they accidentally fell into it! That’s where all the good, yummy, delicious chocolate was.

“Let’s eat,” said John.

And they dove right in. But then, the general said, “What are you doing in that ice cream house?”

And then the general said, “Not another mistake or else you’re gonna go to the dungeon.”

And they said, ‘We can’t go to the dungeon, we’re only 17 years old!”

“No, you’re going to the dungeon. Right now, actually, ‘cause you just complained to the general. Guards, take them away!”

Then, they were locked up in the dungeon. They didn’t really care because the walls were made of chocolate. So, they said, “Eh, we’ve got plenty supplies of chocolate. I don’t know why they call it the dungeon because the candy cane bars look so delicious!”

Little did they know, that the aliens were actually alive there and they would be baked if they tried to bite into one of the walls. The aliens that live there are made of that wall, so they were looking at the boys every single second. John was about to bite into the dungeon, but Henry stopped him and said, “These walls look like they’re trying to look down at us. Do not eat them, no, no, no!” Henry saw a pair of eyes on the ceiling.

“At night we will chomp through the candy canes. We can eat those because they are just stabilizers,” said Henry.

It was getting darker and darker, until finally it was night. The boys hadn’t slept for 33 hours and they were feeling tired and gloomy, but they still said they needed to escape. They chopped into the candy cane bars and they began to escape, but then the guard came. Then they said, “Attack! Eat the guard!”

And Henry said, “We should wipe this place clean and we’ll make it safe for us to live on! We’ll eat every single alien on this planet, including this general. Three, two, one, attack this place!” said Henry and John and then they  tried to attack, but they failed and got sent back to the  dungeon with their rocket. They had a saw in their rocket.  And John said, “these  Ooskee Boosceeins  are stupid.” Start and Henry agreed and said, “We should cut a hole in the top of this dungeon.” Then John said, “You know that’s a bad idea, you know all the rotten chocolate is up there. We need to make weapons out of the candy cane bars if we want to go up there.” The reason they didn’t get sent back to their other dungeon was because it had a loose candy cane. This dungeon didn’t have any hershey kiss things that had ovens looking down at them.

“Okay,” Henry said. “But we don’t have anything to make the weapons.”

John said, “Henry’s right. We don’t have anything to make the weapons with.”

And all the boys agreed. They said, “Let’s make fire, we can burn bars in there.”

And then John said, “We have enough candy cane bars that we can start a fire with them.”

“Okay,” said Henry. “But, we need to build the fire circle. We’ll make a fire circle out of dirt.”

They said, “But, we have to choose somebody to be the fire tender.”

John said, ‘I’ll be the fire tender.”

“Let’s get this fire started!” they said.

They took away the candy bars and rubbed them together until they made a fire and then they took chunks of candy cane bars, about ten or twenty in it, and then they melted it and they had good spears. And John put in another chunk of candy cane and they went to their rocket. They opened the door to their rocket and they blasted off the planet Ooski Booski. They killed all the rotten chocolate and they were out of Ooski Booski.

They were in the middle of space, where they didn’t know where anything was. Their water supply was low. They needed to find another planet fast. Their food supply was freezing.

John said, “What do we do? We don’t have any food or water! We should use the radar.”

They used the radar to look for a planet. They plugged it in and turned on the switch that makes it spin super fast and send vibrations out to find planets. There was a vibration right away. They found a planet, one mile away.  They went to the planet. It was called Hazzumidoom. There was a sign that said, ‘Welcome to Hazzumidoom.’

And they went all the way to the middle of Hazzumidoom until John said, “This planet looks deserted. Does it have another hole like Ooski Booski? I hope not.”

It was cloudy and foggy and there were no people to be seen except for them. Nothing to be seen.

“Now how are we supposed to find food and water? It’s time we took out the super secret supply of food and water. I know we shouldn’t use it, but we have to use it now, we don’t have any food and water.                        ”

But then, they were walking all the way to the middle and they accidentally fell down a hole.

“Ahhhh!” they all screamed.

And then they fell down to the real planet of Hazzumidoom. It looked like it had so much food and water.

They said, “This is the perfect place! Better than Ooski Booski!”

There were red trees and milk streams. There were honey puddles and water bottle trees.

They said, “This is the most perfect ever, perfect, perfect, perfect place in the whole world.”

“Well, much better than Ooski Booski,” John said.

They found a town, a village, that looked very weird. It was in the middle of the forest and there was only a stone house.

There was a person standing outside in the middle of the woods.

All of the boys walked over to him and said, “How are you doing? What’s your name?”

He said, “My name is Mooshi.”

He was an alien that looked human. They knew he was an alien because he was from three galaxies away.

He said, “Welcome. Come in. Have a drink.” His voice sounded like a person that had just choked on a duck. “You shall be my pets.”

John said, “Okay. Um, we don’t want a drink.” He turned to Start and Henry.                           “Anybody have good ideas?”

Start said, “RUNNNN!!!”

They ran and ran until they found the best supply of everything they needed. The guy just let them run. They took some mangoes that were growing on a tree nearby, and then they went back to their rocket.

 

Chapter 2: Searching for the World

“I think we should really take out the supplies and the secret food,” said John. “But we don’t know the password. The only person who knows it is the headmaster because it’s the heating code to make the heat go.” The boys stole the headmaster’s lock to his office door and made this secret supply cabinet.

Next at the rocket, they found another person looking at it. The person was peering through the window. The boys were freaked out.

“Ahh, help me, save me!” They thought it was the same alien, but it wasn’t.

“Maybe we should blast off,” said John.

“No,” said Henry. “We’re not going anywhere until we get everything that we need.”

The person knocked on the rocketship, and John said, “Maybe we should blast off into the hole.”

Henry agreed. They went to the hole of Hazzumidoom. They went back up to the hole where they went last time. But, this time it had a sign that said, “Hole of Hazzumidoom.”

“How did that sign get there?” They said.

“Maybe it was that person we saw!” John said. “Let’s just go in the hole anyway.” They went back down because there were no food and supplies on the upper level, so they had to go back down, and when they got back down the hole, they decided to go far away from the house with that evil person alien. Now, they arrived at a pond with a duck. The duck could eat them in one little slice. It had sharp teeth. It had laser eyes. It was chopping down a tree with his eyes.

They got out of the rocket and dodged the laser eyes. There was a golden beak behind the duck. The golden beak would do any wish they wanted. They read about it in a book. Then, the duck tried to bite them. It shot out its razor teeth, still attached to the gum. The boys went behind the tree to hide.

John said, “That was very weird.”

“I agree, that was so weird,” said Henry.

Then, the duck was sitting peacefully in the pond.

“We should get that golden beak. One of us can distract the duck in the pond and the other can get the golden beak,” said Henry. “Two of us will be on one side, and Start will be distracting the duck because he’s a very fast runner.”

“No way, no how, I’m not going even near that duck!” said Start.

“You’re doing it or else I’ll throw you into the pond with duck,” said Henry, mad at Start.

Scared, Start said, “Okay.”

So, Start went right over to the duck and said, “Hey Duck, here I am, bet you can’t catch me!”

It glared its eyes at Start and ran after him. Start said, “Come on, you’re too old to play the game ‘Try and Eat the Human’, you waddley old duck!”

By now, it was so angry, it didn’t use its gum technique, it ran after him and tried to use its laser eyes at him.

The two boys stuck around the pond and went in the water and got the beak, and sneakily made their first wish.

“I want that duck to be gone.” And it was gone forever.

Start got safely back to the boys. But then, the golden beak disappeared. They didn’t notice the writing that said, “If you make the duck disappear, the beak will disappear with it. It will wither away to dust!”

“Oh my gosh, this is horrible! I wanted a wish that I could be king of Hazzumidoom!” John said. He was going crazy.

“That’s not important right now. What’s important is that we go lie and down and find some supplies before night,” Henry said.

They had to relax, they sat in the shade of palm tree, sweaty.

John said, “Hmm, it’s been a long time since we’ve been away from earth. I wonder what happened to that spicy korean food that we used to eat Saturday night.”

“Yeah, I wonder what ever happened to the movies we used to watch,” said Henry, sadly.

“I sure miss the video games!” Start said.

They all sighed.

“And I miss the animals,” Start said, as they ate a mango.

They stood up, and Henry said, “We should maybe get a fire going, it’s almost night.”

They made the fire. They cut down a tree with what was left of their saw, and they sat by the fire.

“Are there any animals on their planet? I haven’t had meat in so long,” said John.

Henry volunteered to go hunting. The other two started getting pails of water and getting fruit. When Henry came back, he had a sheep in his hand and said, “I found it over a hill. Let’s roast it.” Then, they all roasted it. They used the wool of the sheep and make beds and they slept all night.

 

Chapter 3: Exploding Every World

 

The next morning, they found something very particular. They found footprints on the ground and followed them all the way back to the stone house.

Henry gasped and said, “We can’t go back into this house again! We know it’s haunted by that creepy person who is standing right outside the door like last time.”

John said, “Maybe we should just sneak in the back and he’ll never know we were in and steal the supplies.”

Henry said, “We’ll have to put new supplies in so he doesn’t notice.”

John said, “Whatever, he’s never going to notice that we stole the supplies.”

They saw the person standing right outside the door. He didn’t notice them because they were hiding behind a tree. They took their hammer and broke in. They shattered glass of the window. It looked like a normal house but with lots more food! They took food supply, the guy’s bed, and they snuck off with it.

“Okay guys, I think it’s time to leave Hazzumidoom.” John said.

They went to the top of Hazzumidoom and went out!

 

They took the radar again, turned it on, and looked for another planet. They went to the planet called Razamkidam. But a cat alien stopped them with slime balls shooting at their rocket! It had an antenna and it was green with no hair. It was about the size of a sheep.

When they saw the cat, they were so surprised that they jumped out of their seats and fell on the floor!

“Get the missiles ready!” said John. “Get ready to fire in 3, 2, 1, fire!”

Then they saw a whole army of cats!

“Uh oh, we’re going to need a lot more stuff,” Henry said.

John said, “No we don’t. We have a lot of water bottles and cats are afraid of water!”

“We don’t know that. These are alien cats, not pussy cats!”

Henry gets so mad at John for always bragging about himself that Henry finally punches John.

John said, “Oh! So you’re being a smarty pants. You get back here and I’m going to punch you in the face again.”

“No you don’t!”

Start yelled, “Stop! You guys stop it now. You know there’s an army of alien cats trying to shoot slimeballs at us! Get… to… your… stations!”

Henry and John stopped fighting and went back to fighting the cats. They saw so many more cats. John decided to blow up the planet Razamkidam in midair. It blew up in a circle and asteroids came flying out.

“Oh no! We just made another asteroid field,” Henry yelled, mad at John for firing the missiles at the planet.

“Oh, somebody’s mad at me for firing missiles at a planet, you big idiot!”

“You are the one that’s stupid for exploding the planet and making the asteroid field!”

“Okay, that’s enough!” Start yelled. “You’re both getting thrown off this rocket!”

Henry and John both stopped fighting.

They steered their way out of the asteroids and the boys started fighting with each other again.

“Okay, if you’re going to be idiots, then get out of this rocket,” said Start.

“Oh? You want to join the fight?” Henry said. “You get out of the rocket, you fatty!”

“Maybe you’re wrong, Henry. And he’s good, you’re bad.” John said.

“You’re the worst one! You’re worse than him, idiot.”

“You think that you’re going to throw me out of the rocket?”

“You’re such a big idiot that you’re going to be thrown out of the rocket, and you’re so faaat,” said Henry in a mean voice and stuck out his tongue at John.

Start said, “You boys! You stop it now! Now! Now! Now! There’s another planet on the radar called Razamkikalagam. We’re going to see if it’s good. We need to stop fighting if we’re going to find another planet.”

When they see the planet Razamkikalagam, they see an army of happy people. They look like they’re smiling and that’s their worst and meanest faces, smiling. The boys try talking to them, but it doesn’t work.

The happy people say, “You will be killed!” The happy people wanted to kill the boys because the boys weren’t smiling which means they weren’t happy.

The happy people saw them, flew over to them and the boys said, “We’re going to take you down with our high-tech guns!”

They shoot the happy people and go onto the planet. The planet looks like a cherry with a stem and lots of red. Everybody on the planet is a cherry except for the happy people.

They talk to one of the cherry people, the wisest of the cherry people and the wise one said, “You can only turn into a cherry if you do not smile. You turn into a happy person if you do smile.”

“But there’s so many cherries and smiley people, I really think this is not the planet for us,” said John.

“Yup!” said Henry. “I think we should leave.” And they left the planet.

 

They found another planet in the shape of a donut! They landed on the planet, but all they saw for food was donuts. They saw the biggest donut tower in the world. It was 30,000 feet tall. One of the donut people welcomed them to Donut Land and said, “This is a place of donuts. All you can eat is donuts!” He was smiling.

John groaned. “Oh no, I can’t take all that sugar…”

Henry said, “We cannot last off these donuts. We have to get off this planet right now!

They blasted off. Then John said, “Maybe we should go back and see if they have some fruits and vegetables.” They got back on the planet and then they saw their little donut friend walking around the streets. He saw them and he recognized them at first sight. He was jumping up and down.

“Ooh! Welcome back!” he said. “Maybe you should have a donut, because that’s the only thing on the planet.”

Henry said, “We can stay at your house, but we’re not gonna eat any donuts.”

“Okay, fine, go ahead, leave, I don’t need you here anymore…” He was frowning and his hands were hanging below him. “Get off the planet…I guess I’ll just go to being alone again…”

Start said, “Maybe we should help him…”

And John said, “No.”

And Henry said, “No.”

They blasted off the planet. They found a new planet in the shape of Earth. It looked like Earth, it had things on it like Earth, and it was just like Earth.

Henry said, “Hey, I think we should stay on this planet.”

The people on the planet said, “That spaceship looks very weird with three boys that look seventeen.”

When the boys got off the spaceship, the people asked, “Where did you come from in that rocket?”

The boys said, “We’re from Earth!”

The people said, “You can’t be. This is Earth! We’re the biggest planet in the solar system.”

The boys gasped.

“Welcome to Earth,” said the people. “Since you are human, you are allowed to come on this planet.”

They stayed on the planet forever.

 

THE END

 

coming soon…

THE RETURN OF THE DRAGONS

 

Yorkout, Part 1

CHAPTER ONE: The Water Wheel

 

On top of Mount Forgetfulness, a hooded figure looks down to the bottom. He is looking through the Ultimate Water Wheel, which is just like a regular water wheel except it has scoops on it and uses lava instead of water. The lava travels down and curves around to a place called Town Town where the lava is used in furnaces to make something for a secret government project called Pain. I’m not going to tell you what Pain is yet… because it’s a secret government project.

This is a time where aliens live among humans. A lot of the humans don’t like it and are trying to destroy the aliens. They do not like the aliens because they think that these beings are more intelligent and they want to be the most intelligent beings on earth. Although humans or Yorks are not the most intelligent beings on earth. Humans are only the third most intelligent beings on earth. Number two is dolphins and I haven’t finished reading The Hitchhiker’s Guide to the Galaxy so I don’t know what number one is. There is a growing resistance of people with the organization but plotting against it.

The hooded figure’s name is Jongon. He is part of the resistance. He is going to tell officials from Yorkout – the name of the government organization – that Pain has finally been finished. Though as he gets there, he does not only find government officials…

 

CHAPTER TWO: The Meeting

 

Jongon is like an acrobat spinning through the wheels. He puts his foot on the top of the wheel so that he never touches the lava. At the bottom there is an abandoned warehouse to his right. The door is blocked off but that doesn’t seem to stop him. He ducks into a nearby grove of trees where there is a secret entrance. Inside, the government officials, Eamon, Honmon and Sumamon, are waiting and all wearing cloaks.

“Son says Pain is done. I have seen it myself,” says Jongon.

Son is another government official. Jongon is his messenger. Son is one of the few government officials that knows about the resistance but he doesn’t know that Jongon is a part of it.

“We saw,” Honmon says.

Sumamon had his tongue cut out. That’s another story. Eamon was having a panic attack. She has those.

“It’s so…” says Eamon

Jongon and Eamon zeta. I don’t know what zeta means so I need to get a dictionary. I’m back and here it is…

Chapter 2 ½ : The Dictionary

 

zeta – when two people are able to read each others mind.

zoom – to go fast.

 

Okay, it’s missing a few words, but it has what I need.

 

 

Chapter 2 ¾ : Meanwhile back in the book…

“You sure you want to say that?” says Jongon.

“Yeah no,” Eamon says.

“Let’s go!” says Jongon.

And so they set off to the balcony around the corner overlooking Pain. Pain is a lopsided idea to have humans mate with Yorks, but there was an accident in the lab (they thought that they were hostile so used DNA). Somehow insect DNA was mixed in and the result was the basis for Pain. Yorkout thought they could use them to intimidate the Yorks. In short it yorked.

 

Before Jongon can say something, Eamon turns into her normal look, a York, and flies away. He never sees her again. A York is an alien that can fly and has four points at each of the corners of its body with claws on the ends and a flap of skin connecting the four together which work like wings. They have whiskers and their eyes are red parallelograms, points facing in. The only noise it makes is a kind of high-pitched mechanical raspy screech. Yorks can also shape shift to look like humans wearing cloaks as long as they don’t take their cloaks off, because the cloaks turn into their skin, so they can’t take their cloaks off, because taking their cloaks off would be like taking their skin off. They have a chrome finish to their body except for a small rhombus on their chest. The top triangle is red and the bottom triangle is blue.

 

As Jongon turns to go he hears a thwomb. It sounds like an arrow being fired out of a bow. He does not turn back. That was no ordinary arrow. It was an arrow with a net at the end, capturing Eamon! Cue dramatic music. Dramatic muuuuusic? All right, skip the music.

 

 

CHAPTER 3 by Jongon

 

A little chat with the governor of Pain: uh, I don’t like to write, so I’m using a recorder thing. And then Mr. Narrator can just write it in for me.

 

Jongon: Pain is doing well!

 

Governor: Good. Recently, we caught a York flying in from the balcony overlooking Pain.

 

Jongon: What have you been doing with him?

 

Governor: Actually, it’s a girl that goes by the Eamon.

 

Jongon: Hey, I saw her turn into a York! Guess I forgot to sound that blare alarm that you gave me.

 

Governor: Then you shall have to oversee the workings of Pain near the balcony for one day. Also, that’s where the York is going.

 

Random Guy Walking In: I’m gonna use this mind reader to read Jongon’s mind!

 

 

CHAPTER 3 ½

Random Guy Walking Into Mind-Reading Device

 

He is currently thinking: “Oh yeah! I get to save that girl that I met! I wonder if she likes me!

 

CHAPTER 3 ¾

 

Meanwhile, back in the conversation recorded on the recorder thingy owned by Jongon:

 

Jongon: I told you never to use that mind reader thing on me! Let me see that! (Jongon destroys mind reader thingy).

 

Governor: Great. Now you have to be there for an extra ten seconds!

 

Narrator: Cue dramatic music.
Governor: Hey, narrator! What are you doing in our meeting?

 

Narrator: I have a name, ya’ know.

 

Governor: Yeah, what is it?

 

Narrator: Uh… narrator.

 

Jongon: Alright, alright. He’s narrator and you’re governor, and can we just get on with this meeting already!!??

Governor: For that, just go straight to your sentence. And mind-reading guy? Fix the mind reader thingy already!

 

End recorder thingy recording.

 

CHAPTER 4

Let’s Rescue Eamon!

By Game Show Host

 

First off, Jongon, you can either rescue Eamon or would you rather have a neeeew caaaar?! Now let’s get serious, and start working and as Jongon’s back at his job still rescuing Eamon (even though I’m pretty sure a new car would be better). In Pain, there happens to be a bunch of chains hanging from the air, which I was planning to use to lower his new car, and there happens to be a space where you drop stuff in where I was thinking of dropping in his new car, and – the best part is – there’s a Toyota dealership in Town Town. And Jongon is making sure everyone is working as hard as they can, waiting for Eamon to come around, and probably thinking, “Man, I wish I had taken that new car. Then I could’ve used it to get Eamon out of here.”

Ok, out of his mind now… And look! Eamon’s shift is coming around and she happens to be holding the car keys to a new car that she did take, which happens to be parked in the York prison parking lot right next to the Mazarati of Esasopa.

Jongon has just swung into action, taking Eamon’s chains off. And now all of the creatures created for Pain are chasing them, and I’m pretty sure Jongon is thinking, “Man I’m pretty sure I really wish I had that new car now.”

Eamon says, “I’ve been studying you for the last twenty five minutes I’ve been here and I realize they’re afraid of fire and I know where the other Torturons (that’s what they call themselves even though we all call them Flaming Webions) keep all their self-igniting flaming whips.” They are now running to the small cabinet with the flaming Webions next to the chocolates. Time to get my Toyota. I’ll get them. I have picked up them and I am escaping. We are now at Yorkin headquarters. I have handed the mike to Eamon…

 

CHAPTER 5

Agent Time

by Eamon

 

So I have escaped Pain. Yay! Yay! Happy day! Somebody get out the cupcakes! I hate it in there. There was, like, zero light except for those, like, Flaming Webions. By the way, have you ever felt a mixture of the lash of a whip and the burn of fire? It’s not a very pleasant feeling.

Now that Game Show Host guy is flying away on his car, which has magically turned into a pony, he has left us with the leader of a secret government project within a secret project within a public government organization. In other words, lots of these people work in Pain except for the people who worked to make Pain and now try to destroy Pain. The man says that if we manage to take out Pain we would take out much of Yorkout. Pain is the new center of the bull’s eye. I am in human form because these chairs are too small for a York to sit in. Plus we can’t really sit. We can just waddle around in York form. This man is trying to employ us as partners to try to destroy Pain and thus destroy most of Yorkout, except for Panic and Anger. The leader of Yorkout is a man named Son.

We obviously say yes and are immediately taken to agent training.

 

To be continued in Part Two…

 

 

The Book of Awesomeness

There is a ten-year-old girl, her name is Brittany. Brittany lives on a planet named Mars and she is a vampire. She has blonde hair, blue eyes, and if you can imagine her, she would have pale skin. Sometimes, she gets mad and angry and she gives people bad, bad dreams on her planet. Giving people bad dreams is beyond her control. These people don’t know that she has powers so they just don’t bother to say anything about it because they don’t know.

Her mom is also a monster, and her dad has many brothers. They have another child named Alex. He is a werewolf. Brittany always does experiments on Alex. Her experiments are games for them. One of the experiments is blowing him up. She goes to the store and gets potions.

So Brittany one day Brittany went to the store to get potions. When she was going to the store, she sees a six-year-old girl. She was crying because she was afraid of the dream she had. And she said, “I wish I never had bad dreams.”

Brittany was really sad about it.

So Brittany finally got to the store. She felt bad that she couldn’t do anything about giving people bad dreams. She said to herself, “I wish I didn’t give people bad dreams.” She was sad when she came to the store.

When she was at the store, she bought some potions for her experiments with her brother. And then she saw another monster. He was bluish greenish with yellow in the middle. He was six feet tall! He wasn’t from her family.

She asked, “Who are you?”

And then he said, “I’m a kidnapper,” and he kidnapped her.

He had four arms, he had six eyes, and he had a huge mouth. Brittany was screaming and screaming. The monster put duct tape on her mouth.

So finally he got home and he taped her to a chair. And he wanted to steal all the powers from her family and all the money. That’s all he wanted, and then he would let her free.

She said, “No!”

The monster said, “Huh?” He was very mad. He let her watch TV and then when she got distracted, he pulled her hair and put her in a box she couldn’t escape from the box. She used her magic. First she kicked the box and punched the box, then she pushed the box with both hands and accidently burned the box. She got out, but then she saw the monster walking by.

She had to fight the monster. She was feeling angry because she had two obstacles. The monster was very hard to fight. Since he had four arms, she had to grab onto his arms and swing him around so he could fall. She needed to throw all his air out of him so he could die. She tried to use her powers. It worked. She destroyed the monster and she felt for it and she was mad that she felt bad for it. Once again she gave people bad dreams. And she said, “Oh no, oh no!”

She went back and she got cornered by the monster. She had a knife and she used it to slice all his eyes open. It was very painful and disgusting. It made her feel awkward. She grabbed all four arms and swung him around. When he fell, she put her foot on him and he didn’t have any air left in his body.

So then she went home and saw the magic hourglass in her room. She said, “What can this do?” A crystal ball surrounded the hourglass. She had to wait until the hourglass flipped over three times. Each time it was done, she flipped it over. Then she finally got the most powers in her family and she used her powers to take away one of her powers that was giving people bad dreams. Then she moved to a planet named Mn and she loved it so she could control her powers.

 

THE END

 

 

Sophie Style 1: The Big Move

Hey you,

Do you want to hear a story about a girl (me) with an extremely pathetic life? If yes, you have come to the right place. So sit back and relax, and make sure to strap on your seatbelts because here we go.

 

 

Hi, I am Sophie, and let me tell you some things about me:

 

  1. I live in a family of four kids.

 

  1. My dad and mom passed away.

 

  1. My best friend lives far away so I email her a lot.

 

  1. Nothing is more important to me than my pet puppy named Sweetie Pie.

 

So anyway, I was sitting on my bed Friday night petting Sweetie Pie and listening to the song “22” on my newest edition record player, until I heard my grandpa call, “Dinner time kids!” and we all came down to dinner. Here are my siblings, all in order, and how they act: My big brother, Andrew is so lucky. He is nineteen and hasn’t moved out yet. He will go to college late because no one accepted him. He is lucky because:

 

  1. He has a girlfriend. (Hey, I tell you, it is kind of fun to have a girl in the house that is not my annoying big sister.)

 

  1. He is the oldest. (You know, being the oldest sounds cool. If I didn’t know my grandpa any better, I would think he liked Andrew the best.)

 

  1. Because my grandpa MIGHT like him best. (He can be bossy, yell, get what he wants, break the rules, etc.)

 

My big sister Talia, is, like, so annoying! She can really bug me. And worse, she doesn’t REALLY care. If she did care, she would blame it on Andrew when she does something wrong like drop me on the stairs when I was a baby. Andrew and Talia. The thought of them in the same sentence makes me say, “Uh-uh.” Anyway, all she cares about is her BFF Georgia, boys, and makeup. She is eighteen and will attend college soon. She is going in the middle of the year. Grandma wants to carry on the tradition because our dad moved in the middle of the year and so he attended college late, so we are doing that to Talia.

My brother, David, is, like, just there to be there. In my own words, I just call him selfish. All he does is eat, sleep, talk (not much), feel things, and talk on the phone. He is not a normal person at all. He is seventeen and is wierd.

Then comes me, the awesome sibling, who saves the day and turns the saddest day into a happy one. Who makes Grandma smile and Grandpa laugh. And yet, they don’t do it to anyone but me. Except when Grandpa mumbles, “Dangit, Helen, do I have to be nice to this brat?” and I don’t know why. I’m fifteen. The age of all ages. Taylor Swift even wrote a song on it.

“Sophie! Dinnertime now,” Grandpa yelled. I grunted. He was not – N-O-T – in a good mood.

“Why Edward, was all good in business at the corner store today?” asked Grandma.

“Eh! Barely made fifteen dollars,” whispered Grandpa. I ran down the stairs. Not that I was interested in their conversation, but I was hungry, very hungry.

“Hi, Sophie,” smiled Grandma. See? I make it work.

“Hi, little mouse,” frowned Grandpa.

“Hey, Soph. Soph, what’s up, girlfriend?” shouted Talia.

“Umm, hi?” I said.

“Smooch!” Whoops! Not a scene I want to look at. Andrew and his girlfriend, Valerie, were kissing. I wasn’t in the mood for some love and cracka-lackin in my meal so I acted with attitude and groove. As Talia says.

“Kissy kissy! Is that my hello?” I asked with attitude.

“Oh. One second Val, I need to greet my sis. Hi Sophie. Kiss kiss,” he said. Sometimes, I just HATE that guy. Smoochin away.

“Pork is dinner,” announced Grandma.

“Thanks for the quote-unquote ‘announcement’ but I got a diner date,” Talia said sarcastically.

“Alright if no one will ask me ‘who?’  then I’ll say it. Since no one bothers to ask what happened in summer school you missed the excitement that I am president of student council. I am interviewing someone. I am pretty upset that even Sophie, the obnoxious one, didn’t ask me what I am wearing,” whined Talia.

“That’s wonderful, Talia,” smiled Grandma.

“Except the part where you accused Sophie and Andrew of being obnoxious. What did they do wrong? So grow up,” frowned Grandpa. See? He’s got my back. In a good way. I ate my dinner.

“Okay, guys, I’m leaving. Love you, Grandma. Grandpa, I’ve got to say, for your second granddaughter. Give a woman her respect.” And with that she turned around. Grandpa raised his eyebrows.

“Yeah, I’ll give you respect. I’ll hold the door open so any time you want,  you can exit the family,” snickered Grandpa. Did I mention that it’s tradition that when Grandpa raises his eyebrows it means he is mad? Oops! “Helen, do me a favor. Prepare some mulligan stew so I can crush my anger away?” asked Grandpa.

“Coming right up,” smiled Grandma.

Whoops! Not the scene I want to see. This means we will have a family talk.

“Valerie,” I bugged.

“Hi, Sophie. What’s up?” answered Valerie.

“Hey, Sophie. Could you do me a favor? Just stop bugging my girlfriend?” chuckled Andrew.

“Oh, I like it,” smiled Valerie.

“I like it,” changed Andrew. Well, that was odd. We went upstairs. Oops! I forgot to tell you my secret. Before Valerie and Andrew were boyfriend and girlfriend, me, my bff Gina, and Valerie were all BFFs. Just to not upset Andrew, hahaha! We haven’t told him.

“Whenever Grandpa asks for mulligan stew he wants to discuss something. I have a secret device where I can hear what he is saying without getting an angry face at me,” I explained.

“Cool. But Andrew?” she asked.

“We’ll let him suffer,” I answered.

I took my special two-person earphones, plugged them in to the phone, and we listened to his conversation.

“Guys, please put Talia on the phone,” we heard on the secret device and guessed that was Grandpa talking.

“Hey guys. You know, it’s my job as interviewer to…” we knew that was Talia.

“Take her off,” Grandpa commanded.

“That’s the face I don’t like to see,” I nodded.

“So we have some exciting news for the family,” Grandma announced. We couldn’t believe Andrew and David (not really David) weren’t talking. They were probably speechless. Since when is family talk exciting?

“Your grandmother got a job in California as a waitress!” we thought that was Grandpa again.

“California.” We guessed it was Andrew’s voice. “No, Grandma, don’t leave us in Westport,” he whined.

“Guess what? You are moving with us!” Grandma said.

I unplugged my earphones immediately.

“Gina!” Valerie and I both shouted. She lived in California! If we were moving there, we could all see each other!

“Pinch me,” I cried with joy. She pinched me. Wow, that wasn’t a hard pinch.

“Let’s email her,” I suggested.

I grabbed my laptop.

 

To: Gina Forgeive

From: Sophie & Valerie

 

Dear Gina,

Please reply immediately because this isn’t just a hello from Westport. You will NOT believe this but my grandma just announced she got a new job in California and we are moving. We love you and we can tell you the detes (Town, address eg).

Sincerely,

Valerie and Sophie

 

“Good?” I asked.

“Perfect,” she replied. Now there was only one more thing to do: call Talia and tell her the great news. I hope I mentioned I HATE my sister. But I thought it was the right thing to do.

“What are you doing?” asked Valerie.

“Telling Talia,” I answered.

“Haha funny joke. Really, what are you doing?” she asked.

“Shh. Hi Talia,” I said.

“Hey guys, you know, as an interviewer and president for city council I am sometimes busy. It would be my honor to read your voicemail. If emergency, call at 914-327-2419. Thank you.”

Ugh. So that’s the stupid voice mail my sister has.

“Talia. This is an emergency! We are moving to California because Grandma got a job. If you think you are thinking this in your mind I will repeat… we are moving to California! So bye,” I messaged.

“Let’s go,” urged Valerie.

“Shh,” I whispered as we headed down the stairs. They were still talking. We listened.

“We are moving in August to Los Angeles and I feel bad that the two people not at the meeting are Sophie and Talia because their friends live in the same neighborhoods,” smiled Grandpa.

I gasped. Valerie gasped. We ran upstairs and emailed Gina again.

 

To: Gina Foregeive

From: Sophie

 

I am moving to Los Angeles on August 1st. Looking forward to seeing you.

 

-Valerie and Sophie

We went downstairs.

“Hi guys,” I smiled.

“I’ll email you and Talia the big news,” Grandma assured.

Then, after a little chitter chatter, this is the story of us playing monopoly. And somehow Grandpa always makes us play his way. Rules of his way:

 

  1. Jail:

If Grandpa gets put in jail, he can pay one dollar to the bank. If anyone else goes to jail, they have to pay fifty dollars to the bank.. If Grandpa wants to automatically pass jail three times, he puts ten dollars in the bank. Anyone else pays two hundred dollars.

 

  1. Properties:

If Grandpa wants to buy a property but he has no money, he doesn’t have to do any type of math like mortgaging. He may just grab 200 dollars from the bank. Anyone else has to mortgage.

Mortgage:                           

If anyone but Grandpa would like to buy a property, they must do the math of subtracting their properties on the board to find the exact amount.

 

Houses/Hotels

When you buy a property, it will give you the information of the cost. If you have a monopoly, you may put on a house or hotel. The cost depends on the property. It will say it on the card. However, for Grandpa, he may put houses without a monopoly for only the brown, blue and orange properties.

 

What Grandpa needs:

Three dice

20 of 1, 5, 10, 20, 100, 100 of 500

He always is the money bag

 

What you need:

Two dice

5 of 1, 5, 10, 6 of 20, 100 1 of 500

Multiple choice pieces

 

I know, right!?!? He is so unfair. I don’t even have to tell you who always wins. Whenever you know who wins first he shouts, “Monopoly!” and then he says “Go to bed kidlets.” But to top all that, at the same time Talia came running in.

“Hey Grandma, congrats to the job! So psyched to move!” smiled Talia. I had never seen her so happy since… ever! Except. well, maybe when I was born. And I always love to hear the story when she was so loving that she was having a baby sister that when I was one years old, she put eye-shadow on me and told my mother that I should get the hang of it because when I’m older I should be a make-up freak like her.

“What are you guys playing? Some Grandpa monopoly?” asked Talia.

“Yes, Lia, now put your stuff down and you can tell us all about the meeting,” chuckled Grandma with joy.

“Okay, I guess I will hear all about the meeting,” I fakely grinned.

“Go to BED!” screamed Grandpa. I went to bed. Upstairs I could hear Andrew watching the football game and Valerie was sitting there eating popcorn. I felt bad for Valerie. She could do so much better picking a boyfriend. If I had to pick someone right now you know who I would pick? I always love to prove my friends wrong inside my head so to be funny I took out the list of my dream man and started to stare at it:

 

Notes on dream man:

 

Dreamy blue eyes+

Wavy blonde hair+

Cute smile+

Good sense of humor+

Likes me as much as I like him+

Can take my pathetic life and flexibility even when I goof = Eric

 

Eric IS NOT my crush but we share some pathetic coincidences. He fits all these details and I know they are very rare to fit (at least the last two sentences). I mean, he is a prince and I’m a girl who has fantasies about him. But to Eric, I am a princess in disguise. I think. But I am in the mood for fantasy. “Me and Eric kissing in a tree, goodnight, princess me,” I muttered.

“Buzz! Buzz!” Ugh! Shut up computer. I needed to sleep. My eyes flickered open. Sweetie Pie licked me. “ Love you, Sweetie Pie, but why did they ever program it to do that?” I asked myself. When I was younger, me and Gina programed my computer to say when I got an email, “Buzz! Buzz! You got mail! You got mail!” now I regret it. Speaking of Gina this was her email:

 

To: Sophie Resnick

From: Gina

 

OMG! So sorry for late response, there is this boy, Theo, and he can’t stop emailing me so I decided not to bother checking my email. So psyched. My same neighborhood! Email me the following when you can:

What time is the flight:

Which airport will you land in:

What is the address:

When I know all that, we can visit each other. Also, I meant to tell you someone named Rosa will call you. Don’t ignore. She is my BFF in my California school. But when you move to my school, we can all be BFFs!

Love,

Gina

 

With all that in my brain, wow, was I really confused! Reasons:

 

  • I think she forgot it was not all about her.
  • She is too obsessed with me (I kind of want her to take a chill pill so we can hang out).
  • Who is Rosa and did she replace me?

 

I quickly called Valerie.

“I have news,” I said.

“Ugh! Sophie! It’s 6:00. What’s up? Good news or bad?” she asked.

“First of all, Gina responded. So at 7:00 come over and read it. Second of all, we might be replaced by someone as BFF,” I told her.

“Sounds like an emergency. See you in a few! Also, when I get there, I will have to spend time with Andrew. He is feeling left out. Okay? I’ll get to you,” shouted Valerie.

I hung up on her. Whatevs. She was not seeing the point. Suddenly, I got a call from Rosa.

“Hi,” Rosa said with what sounded like a smile.

“Hey,” I answered.

“So I hear you are Gina’s OLD friend. I feel so bad. I felt like I was teaching a dog to talk. You probably told her nothing about the real world,” she said sarcastically.

“Oh, okay. Gina is such a good friend. She told me about you. She talks about you a lot,” I smiled back.

“I know, right? I am so cool as a friend. I think you are now her and my BFF. When we were doing our handshake, which is so clever of Gina to make up, boom chicka BFF, right?, so anyway, she said she missed you but I remind her of you. And to get over you, she has me as a replacement,” boasted Rosa.

I started to cry. I made up the boom chicka BFF for me, Valorie, and Gina! I was being replaced. I quickly said, “Talk to you later. Got to go,” and hung up. I cried and cried. I went into Talia’s room and knocked on the door.

“Yes,” answered Talia.

“I need advice,” I whispered.

“Braces look better than retainers,” interrupted Talia.

“No! Have you ever been the third wheel?” I asked.

“Yes! I have never been a second wheeler on a bike for like ever. You know I have training wheel difficulties. Don’t bug me Sophie!” answered Talia.

“No like in a threesome of friends,” I explained.

“Math and friends in the same sentence? You must really need advice,” smiled Talia as she FINALLY let me in!

“So I have two friends,” I started.

“Ugh! Are you and Sammie STILL friends!” interrupted Talia.

“No! Not since kindergarten. Talia, listen. So my friend Gina moved to California and she met a girl named Rosa. Now I am being replaced,” I explained.

“Two questions. First of all, what does this have to do with Sammie and Gina?” asked Talia.

“It doesn’t! Just my other friend and her were all friends,” I whined.

“Okay. Number two, why do you need advice? Great, Rosa sounds like a foolish name and is not very punctual but I don’t see MY part in the story!” answered Talia.

“Ugh! What should I do?” I asked.

“I say be BFFs with Rosa and forget Gina. It sounds like she forgot you!” suggested Talia.

I shrugged at her. It wasn’t a bad idea. But again, she didn’t know who she was talking about.

“GINA? No no no no no she is my best friend. But thanks,” I smiled.  I emailed Gina.

 

To: Gina Forgeive

From: Sophie

 

Got the call from Rosa. Call me when you can!

 

-Sophie

 

I wanted to tell Gina how coconuts she was that she even thought about talking to Rosa at all. She so betrayed me. I couldn’t believe it, so to express myself I wrote her a letter in the mail.

 

Dear Gina,

 

I got Rosa’s call. I thought the ‘boom chicka BFF’ was OUR handshake. For starters, you replaced me and told her all of me, you and Valerie’s secrets. I know it is rough stuff in California but could you please, please, please tell me why this is happening?

 

Love,

 

Sophie

 

I tried not to cry. Sweetie Pie barked. “Oh good girl!” I sniffled, grabbing a tissue. Sweetie Pie went over to my desk and grabbed a piece of paper. I turned it over. It was a picture of me, Valerie, and Gina. I crossed Gina out and put the words “With Rosa” under her name.

“Sweetie Pie! You want me to walk you, don’t you?” I guessed.

“Arf!” barked Sweetie Pie. So I grabbed her leash and went for a walk.

Along the walk, Sweetie Pie saw a dog, the same breed as her. They looked so similar.

“They like each other!” exclaimed the owner of the other dog.

“Her name is Sweetie Pie. What is yours?” I asked. The owner looked exactly my age and was so pretty.

“Her name is Angel Pony. And I am Lily. What school are you going to this fall?” she asked.

“Hi Lily. I am Sophie.  Are you new in the town? I am going to be going to this school called Rumbling Acres. You?” I asked.

“I am new! I am also going to Rumbling Acres! Gee, I thought I would never make a new friend but here I am,” explained Lily.

Angel Pony licked me. Sweetie Pie licked Lily.

“Hey, what’s your email? Mine is LilyLargsburg@yahoo.com,” she said.

Sophie922@gmail.com,” I answered, smiling.

“I’ll email you” said Lily.

“Okay, bye Lily!” I grinned walking back towards my house. I was so happy that I wanted to scream. When I got home, Valerie was with Andrew.

“Hey Sophie,” greeted Valerie. I pulled her towards the stairs.

“So what’s this Gina business?” asked Valerie. I told her everything that had happened today.

“And she was so friendly to me, her name is Lily” I explained.

“Lily? Largsburg? You have got to be kidding me! I know a Fifi Largsburg I met just yesterday and wow! She seems so cool!” shouted Valerie. My computer buzzed.

 

To: Sophie Resnick

From: Lily

 

Dear Sophie,

 

What is your address! I might be able to come for breakfast tomorrow morning? Nice meeting you with Angel Pony and Sweetie Pie. Your dog is the cutest! Since this is my first year at Rumbling Acres, could you help me out with answering these questions?
Who are the kids I should watch out for?

Who should I sit with at lunch?

 

What are the classes that I should pay attention to?

 

Do I need lunch money?

 

-Lily Largsburg

 

Valerie read the email and I wrote back,

 

Dear Lily,

 

My address is 1245 Ocean Beach,  Solana Beach Cove.

  1. Don’t worry who you sit with. I am always open.
  2. Don’t ask me! Whichever subjects interest you. Just pay attention in math because they have this test and I got a C for not paying attention.
  3. Luckily, our cafeteria lets us use our accounts or gives checks on our lunch. No money needed.

 

-Sophie

 

P.S My friend knows your big sister

Jackson 5

Chapter 1

The Buying Day

 

Michael, Jackie, Tito, Jermaine, and Marlon Jackson wanted to get Nerf water Super Soakers and frisbees so they can take a break from singing but all the Nerf water guns were sold out/expensive. The frisbees were so big that they only had a big size. And it’s too expensive.

Michael, Jackie, Tito, Jermaine, and Marlon Jackson were looking for another thing. They were looking at some nerf super soakers. They wanted to buy them so they could have a water gun fight. One was little, one medium, and one was big. You could take off the bottom and the back of the big one. The bottom was where you put the water and the back just made it look bigger or smaller. The small one looked like you could do it with the trigger but you couldn’t. You just pump it and water comes out. You put water in at the very top and back. The medium one had a very long aimer. It also shot with the pump. They all did. It had effects that made it look long.

Michael, Jackie, Tito, Jermaine, and Marlon Jackson wanted to buy the guns but they ran out of money. They spent all their money on the Xbox 360. It was $249.99. That’s like nine hundred dollars!

 

Chapter 2

Aladdin’s Cave

 

The Jackson 5 left the store. Their voices hurt. That was good because they wanted to buy water guns because it hurt to talk. They were going to a cave that was rich so they could find Aladdin. If they found Aladdin, he could get them money so they could buy all the toys in the mall. They went to a cave near the store and found a magic mirror that said, “To Aladdin’s Cave”. Michael, Jackie, Tito, Jermaine, and Marlon jumped through the magic mirror and it came with them. Michael picked it up. When he pushed it against his hand it shrunk.

“It could do that?” said Michael.

Michael picked it up and put it in his pocket.

He was looking for Aladdin in the cave with the Jackson 5. It was full of treasure and they were looking all over the cave. It was 300 miles wide and deep. Then they walked 300 miles deep and 150 miles, because of a magic mirror. They saw a magic lamp. Michael picked up the lamp and poured it out like a magic teacup and Aladdin came out. He said,” You can only get three wishes,” in French.

They found a speaker to translate English into French. The speaker was in an emerald and Michael got a pickaxe so he could pickaxe the emerald. He got it.

They all made their wishes. Everyone wanted at least $300. So they wished for all that money. The second wish was a ginormous frisbee. Their third wish was a big castle.

They became king, king, king, king, and king and knight, knight, knight, knight, and knight, and bishop, bishop, bishop, bishop, and bishop, and prince, prince, prince, prince, and prince.

 

 

Michael, Jackie, Tito, Jermaine, and Marlon played with the frisbee. They played fetch. They all took turns throwing and fetching.

When they had finished playing with the frisbee, they went to the mall and bought every single super soaker.They brought all the toys from the mall to the castle. Yo it’s big, it’s rad, it’s brown and it’s made out of everything. It’s a thousand feet in every way, high to the side, wide… The castle can teleport. They went inside and played frisbee.  They were hot from playing frisbee, so they used their nerf super soakers to have a water gun fight. Everyone lost and everyone won.

They were having so much fun they didn’t even miss singing.

 

Chapter 3

The Breaking Toys

 

The Jackson 5 were playing with their toys. They had a cloning machine they bought with all the money they had and then when they were playing with their toys, something very, very, very, weird happened. The toys came alive! They all went in the cloning machine, even the Jackson 5. Then all the clones were doing the same thing as the people who cloned them were. They had a big fight. One person got hurt. It was Marlon, because he broke his bone. The frisbees were throwing themselves like a blade in the sky! The water guns were shooting like a bullet!

They were glad they cloned themselves. They wanted to get out because they missed singing. They wanted to go back to Aladdin. The toys were trying to block them so they couldn’t get out the door!

 

Chapter 4

The Happy Ending

 

They couldn’t get past the door. They went up to the tippy top of the castle and they found a secret ladder. They tried the lamp up at the tippy top of the castle and the only words said, “too high up. You can only do it in Aladdin’s cave.” They tried to go down the ladder and it was Aladdin’s cave! The same as they always went in. But Aladdin moved the cave under the castle. They used the lamp and it worked. They wished that all their toys would not be alive anymore. And for a thousand parachutes so they could freefall. And their last wish was all their voices back!

Once they got their voices back they went on a concert stage and sang.

“ABC! Easy as 123! Simple as do-re-mi, ABC, 1-2-3, baby you and me, girl!”

 

The End!!

 

 

The Question Mark Asks One Question

First a question mark went to work and got one hundred dollars a day. Then he asked everybody one question, and everybody kept getting it wrong. The question was, “What candy cannot go anywhere on time?” The only one who got it right were the presidents. Everybody else on earth got it wrong.

Then, he asked a kid a question. The kid’s name was Jacob.

“What candy cannot go anywhere on time?” the question mark asked.

The question mark also said, “If you get the answer right, you will get a lot of dollars!”

Jacob said, “Can I have all the dollars?”

But, question mark said, “No! You have to figure out the answer first.”

So, Jacob didn’t answer it.

Then question mark asked all the other kids, but they got it wrong.

One kid said, “A candy cane because he can’t walk.” But, that was not the right answer, because he could get on a wheelchair and go on a school bus and go to the school so that was not the right answer.

Another kid said, “M&Ms but he can slide.” The third person said, “Air heads, but he can fly.” Then the question mark asked a parent and the parent said, “Taffy. But, the taffy can get wheels and then he could drive like a car.”

“That was not the right answer. You do not get a lot of dollars. It’s time to say bye-bye.”

Then question mark asked another parent and said, “Ice breakers. He’s a wheel, so he could just use one wheel to get there.”

The third parent said, “Gum. But he can make an airplane.” So, the question mark said “That was not the right answer.”

So he asked the presidents and all of them said, “Chocolate! Because at the end it says l-a-t-e. Late!”

Then the question mark gave an equal amount of money to each of the presidents. He felt good because the presidents should know everything because they had a good education.

 

The End

 

Emily Spivonson no. 1, Emily’s Full Name

Chapter #1  No! Not Ruby!

It was Saturday, and Emily was tired. “Emilia!” cried one of the orphanage ladies. The orphanage ladies mostly spoke spanish, which was very difficult for the orphanage girls. Emily was 8 years old, her birthday was September 12, and she lived in an orphanage. It was the year 1890. She’d been there since she was 2. Her parents were killed by the latest invention, the hair dryer. It fell in the bath and her parents had forgotten to unplug it. The name of the orphanage was Ragged Orphanage. The orphanage was in New York City on the Upper West Side. The orphanage lady always woke her up very early to do her chores. She needed to sweep the floors and scrub the windows.

At the orphanage, all the girls had to wear the same clothes. Their clothes were gray dresses. All the girls slept in a big room on beds made of itchy wool.

Emily got out of bed groaning. She got dressed and went to go fill her bucket with water. She watched as the other orphanage girls went to fill up their buckets. Emily was friends with all the orphan girls except for one girl. Her name was Joanna. Joanna was bigger and older than Emily. She had red curly hair and brown eyes. Emily was always being bullied by Joanna.

“Hey!” yelled Joanna. “Thats my bucket!”

“No, it’s mine!” Emily yelled.

“Niñas!” cried one of the orphanage ladies. All of a sudden the door opened. Everybody stared. Somebody walked in the door. Not many people came to Ragged Orphanage. It was a lady in very nice clothes. She was wearing a big yellow dress and a big hat with flowers on it. She had lots of freckles and very blonde hair. She was also very tall.

“Hello,” she said. “My name is Jane Wreath.”

“Hello!” said the girls in unison. They all wanted to be the one to be adopted that day.

“I want a girl with blonde hair,” said the lady.

Half of the shoulders in the orphanage dropped.

“And I want the girl to have curly hair and blue eyes,” said the lady.

Did Emily have blue eyes? But curly hair? No. Emily was very sad. The lady looked at Emily’s best friend Ruby. “That one!” she said. “I want that one!”

Emily felt her heart stop with pain. When somebody got adopted at the orphanage, the girls had to clap, but not many of them felt like it. Ruby smiled.

“Go pack your bags!” said the lady.

All the girls came with her as she went to pack her bag. When they got up to the room, Emily said to Ruby, “I’m so sad you’re leaving!”

“It’s okay! I’ll come to visit,” said Ruby.

But Emily was not so sure. Many of her friends had said that but never came to visit.

“Well, I really have to go now,” said Ruby. Then Ruby, carrying her bag, went downstairs. After a moment, Emily followed. Everybody clapped as she left. Joanna gave Emily a long, mean, smile. She could tell what Emily was thinking. Emily was thinking that she would never see her best friend ever again. Tears started to well up in her eyes.

“I guess it is time to start my chores” whispered Emily. She picked up her bucket and her mop and started cleaning.

Emily was mopping the floor of the bedroom that all the girls slept in, when one of the orphanage girls, named Haddie, stopped what she was doing because she saw that Emily was really sad. She came over and gave Emily a hug.

“Thanks,” said Emily.

“Sure,” said Haddie.

Haddie was new to the orphanage and she didn’t have many friends yet. Haddie was 6 and she was a small girl with very blonde hair and blue eyes, just like Emily. She had a small squeaky voice, too. She was very shy, but she was also very kind. They hadn’t really talked much before.

“You know, you’re not so bad,” said Emily.

None of the girls were really fond of Haddie. They all complained that she was so small, but Emily didn’t mind. They thought it was strange that she was the one that had to clean the high windows and not the tallest girls. It was harder for the taller girls, but Haddie was so small and light that it was easier to climb on the ladder to the higher windows.

“What do you mean?” said Haddie. “All the other girls like me, too, don’t they?”

“Well, honestly, they’re really jealous that you’re the one that gets to clean the high windows and not them.”

“Oh,” said Haddie in a small voice.

“But don’t worry, I’ll be your friend,” said Emily.

 

All the other girls were jealous of Haddie because when somebody cleaned the high windows, the orphanage ladies prized them by giving them their own bed for the night. Because not only did all the girls sleep in one big room, but two girls had to sleep in one bed. But for Haddie, sleeping in bed with two people was no big deal. The other girls tried complaining to the orphanage ladies that they needed the bed more than Haddie, but it didn’t work. The orphanage ladies just sat there, nodding their heads no, while munching on chips.

During the day, all the other bigger girls tried to trip Haddie and make the orphanage ladies think that Haddie was clumsy.

“Stop tripping me,” Haddie would say.

And then, the orphanage ladies would come and the bigger girl would say, “I didn’t do anything.” The orphanage ladies still didn’t believe any of the bigger girls. The bigger girls were Sophie, Casey, and even Joanna. Joanna was the worst of all. She wouldn’t just trip Haddie, but when the orphanage ladies came, she would pretend that Haddie had hit her.

She would moan and clutch her hand to her arm. She would yell, “She hit me, she hit me!”

The orphanage ladies would just yell in their Spanish accent, “Back to work!”

Emily was very tired of Joanna. She tried explaining to the orphanage ladies what really happened, but the orphanage ladies could not understand a word and thought that that meant she wouldn’t listen and so they yelled at them, “Back to work!”

One day, when the girls were all taking a stroll in the park, as they did every day, except for in the winter, Emily found a little lizard. Emily had a brilliant idea. She put the lizard in her pocket and they headed off back to the orphanage. They ate their dinner and then Emily went upstairs to master her plan before Joanna came up.

The next morning, Emily woke up to Joanna screaming, “There’s a lizard in my pillow, there’s a lizard in my pillow!” Her face was so red, it was like a very ripe apple.

Joanna ran downstairs screaming to the orphanage ladies, but since they always knew that she was faking Haddie hitting her arm, they didn’t believe her. Joanna came back upstairs stomping. “I’m going to get you back,” she said to Emily. Joanna knew it was Emily because in Joanna’s opinion, everything that went badly was Emily’s fault. But Emily didn’t believe she would do something just as bad.

They did all of their chores and went to the park again that day. Then, it was time to go to bed. Emily knew that Joanna was planning something bad, because right before she went to bed, Joanna gave her another one of her long, mean smiles.

 

Emily woke up in a pile of the orphanage ladies’ pickle chips. She was so angry at Joanna because Joanna knew that Emily was allergic to pickle chips.Emily knew that Joanna had done this because there were crumbs all over her face. Emily’s face was covered in red and her arms and legs stuck out into thin air. Emily got out of bed and stomped over to the bed where Joanna slept. Well, at least it seemed like she was stomping to Emily, but she was really limping on one foot.

“Joanna!” She screeched.

Joanna woke up, pretending to act normal. “I didn’t do anything. Oh my goodness, look at you! What happened?”

“You know what happened,” Emily said. “You were the one who did this.”

All of a sudden, the orphanage ladies came into the room.

“Emily!” They yelled. “What were you thinking?” They said again in their Spanish accents.

Emily pointed one wrinkly finger at Joanna. Joanna gasped in a very unreal way. The orphanage lady shook her finger ‘No.’ Emily gave a sour look to the orphanage lady. The other orphanage lady pointed toward the bathroom. Emily knew what they meant. Everytime she got all weird because of the pickle chips, she had to take a bath with not water, but tomato juice. She thought the tomato juice was so stinky that she always had the orphanage ladies give her a clothespin to put over her nose.

They had Emily sleep in the backyard that whole week while Joanna got to sleep in Emily’s bed and the person who slept in the same bed as Emily had to sleep with the person who slept with Joanna, so that Joanna got her own bed. The orphanage ladies were mad at Emily because they thought she was blaming it on Joanna, but they didn’t really know that it was really Joanna’s fault.

Just then, Emily had an even better plan. After she took the bath in tomato juice, she went and got a paper and pen. Then, she wrote on the piece of paper. At the top, she wrote: Advertisement. Then, after that, she wrote: Joanna (orphanage girl, $ 1,200) Hurry! Before she gets sold to someone else! When she was done, she went downstairs laughing and pinned the sign up to the pole next to the orphanage. Surprisingly, the next day a tall, plump lady came to the orphanage.

“I saw the sign, and I want to adopt this Joanna. Here is the money, now give me the girl.”

Emily had done it. She was so surprised and she was so happy. This time, she was happy that Joanna would leave, and so she did not clap, even though the orphanage ladies said they had to. This whole time Joanna was pale in the face.

 

Chapter #2  Carrie

The next few days were a dream come true. But not for very long. A couple of days later, a new girl was delivered to Ragged Orphanage. She was very tall and skinny. She towered over Emily. Her hair was very curly and blonde. She had very sharp, brown eyes. Emily knew she would be competing with this girl too.

“Hello,” said the girl in a very sharp voice. “I am Carrie Brown.”

“Why do you have two names?” Emily asked.

“What do you mean?” said Carrie. “Everybody has two names, a first and a last. Don’t you know that? Everybody knows that.”

“I don’t have a last name,” said Emily. “But I might get one when I’m adopted.”

“What do you mean, ‘adopted’?” said Carrie. “I was told I was coming to a palace. Not an orphanage! Lead me to my room, immediately.”

Emily led Carrie up to the big bedroom where all of the girls slept.

“Well, where’s my room?” said the girl.

“Well there’s your bed. You’re going to share a bed with me now.”

“What?! This is the worst place I’ve ever been to. How long have you been here?”

“Six years,” Emily said.

“Well, I’ve been here six minutes.” Carrie took her large suitcase and unpacked her beautiful clothes that many of the orphanage girls didn’t have.

“Here’s your uniform,” Emily said, handing her a grey dress.

“I don’t wear uniforms,” she said.

“Well, you do now,” Emily replied.

Carrie snorted. “Fine,” she said.

“What is that?” Asked Emily, pointing to a pile of coins that Carrie had.

“Money! Doesn’t anybody have some here?”

“I’ve never seen it before.”

“Well, I’m rich,” said Carrie. “Or was. I come from London. My building burnt down. I lived in one of the most beautiful houses in the whole country. Now, I’m in an orphanage in New York. This place is filthy! You use this money to buy things,” said Carrie. “For example, food.”

“I get my food at the orphanage by paying with these,” Emily scooped up a handful of the buttons she had in her bag. Carrie looked disgraced.

“This place should be better by the time I get adopted,” said Carrie.

“Mind if I give you a new nickname?” Emily asked,

“Like what?” Carrie replied.

“Mrs. Fancy Pants.”

“What do you think?”

“Um, yeah?”

“No!” Carrie yelled.

“Oh, and here are your buttons,” Emily said, smiling. That night Emily fell asleep watching Carrie sleep in her very formal way. For her first day, Carrie was not so bad. Emily woke up to find Carrie sewing a flower on her grey dress. Now Emily liked Carrie even better. After a few days, all of the other girls were sick of Carrie and Emily, because every day they only hung out with each other. Every time one of the orphanage girls saw Emily and Carrie, they groaned and buried their heads in their hands. Emily just smiled while Carrie went red with rage. The next day, when the girls went on their stroll through the park, Emily found the most cutest thing she had ever seen. It was small and fussy. Then Emily realized it was a hampster. She scooped it up in her hands and pet its head.

“I am going to name you Mis. Alice Fur…”

“— KK!” (Emily had nicknamed Carrie). “When you have two names, what do you call the last one!?”

“A last name.” Carrie replied.“Anyway, I am going to name you Miss Alice Furball.” The little hamster squeaked. “I am going to have to sneak you in,” Emily said again. That night Emily woke up to find the hamster running around like a mad dog all over the orphanage bedroom. It was squeaking like the loudest hamster she had ever heard. Everyone else was awake staring at Emily. Everyone knew it was Emily. It was so obvious because as soon as she woke up she gasped, “Miss Alice Furball, my hamster!”

Carrie was frowning the most out of all of them. As soon as she glanced at Carrie, Emily saw how upset Carrie was. She gave Carrie a little smile that made Carrie even more upset. All of a sudden, things got even worse. The orphanage ladies came into the room. The hamster all of a sudden jumped on Carrie. Carrie screamed and hollered. “Oh, what have you done, this hamster, ow ow ow!”

Now the hamster was going mad like all he ever wanted to do was jump in the orphanage and scare all the girls to death. All of a sudden, the hamster leaped on one of the orphanage ladies and bit her right on the finger. The orphanage lady shrieked and hollered in pain, just as Carrie had done. The orphanage lady fainted; all the orphanage girls except for Emily rushed over to her. The other orphanage lady walked over and grabbed Emily by the neck. Then, she noticed why the orphanage lady knew it was her. Carrie was pointing with her trembling finger straight at Emily. Emily burst into tears. She wished that it was still 8 days ago when Joanna was there. She wanted things to go back to normal.

The orphanage lady tossed Emily out the window. “Run away!”

Emily had damaged her leg very badly from falling out the window and could not walk. All of a sudden, the orphanage lady was still watching out the window, this other lady came over. She leaned over Emily. “Are you hurt?” she said.

Carrie came racing out the door to Emily’s side, as well. “Are you okay?” she added as well.

“I’m fine,” Emily said. “But, who are you?” she said, looking up at the other lady.

“My name is Mrs. Victoria Spivonson.”

Emily smiled up at her. “My name is Emily. I”m from the orphanage up there.” It seemed to be very high because Emily was lying on the ground because she couldn’t get up.

“I know,” Mrs. Spivonson said. “I watched that lady throw you out the window. I will take you if you like.”  Mrs. Spivonson decided to adopt Emily because she saw how badly the orphanage ladies treated her. “I will take you both.” Emily and Carrie both smiled at each other. They had very big smiles.

After a couple minutes of silence, Emily added, “Can I bring Miss Alice Furball, too?”

Mrs. Spivonson gave her a questioning look.

“Oh, just the hamster I found in the park.”

“What side of the park?” Mrs. Spivonson said.

“Umm, the West side, I think,” said Emily.

“How did you ever find her? And how did you ever guess her name?”

Emily gave Mrs. Spivonson a questioning look in return.

“Oh, that hamster belongs to me. I lost it in the park yesterday. But, you can have her now. Well, now I found my hamster and two girls while I was looking for my hamster,” Mrs. Spivonson said.

Mrs. Spivonson went inside the orphanage to adopt them. Carrie turned to Emily, “I”m sorry,” she said. “That just really hurt when that hamster bit me. And why didn’t you tell me about that hamster?”

“It’s okay, Carrie. I should have told you about the hamster sooner. I was just afraid that you would tell the orphanage ladies even then.”

“You know I wouldn’t do something like that,” Carrie answered.

 

That night, Emily and Carrie found themselves on their own beds in their own room. They said it was the happiest day of their lives.


The End

The Return of the Dragons

One day, in a land far away, there was the spookiest town of all. The town of Dendrum. There was a person named Doctor Heesagam. He was the most evil person in the town. He used to run around and steal from people. But then one day, a dragon lived in a mountain just around their town. Doctor Heesagam couldn’t go outside as much as he used to because the dragon was looking for meals every day. When someone would go outside, he would snatch them up for a snack. The dragon was evil and red with blood all over his teeth. He had blood-red eyes. He always had a good view from the top of the mountain. So, whenever people went out, he would go snatch them up with his dripping blood teeth. He used to be a nice blue dragon until somebody tried to kill him. It turned blood over his teeth, blood over his eyes, and he turned red. Then he started attacking people.

He would always fly around the city, looking for something to eat. His bloody teeth used to make puddles of blood. Then, one day, in a graveyard, a zombie came out from a grave. It was climbing out of the dirt and went into the town, but the dragon saw it and ate it for dinner! Nobody in the town ever saw the zombie.

Then, one day, out of nowhere, came another little thing. It was the most scariest thing, a green thing with wings. Another dragon! When the red dragon saw the green one, it flew down and said, “This is my territory. Run off. Get another town.”

The green dragon said, “No! I called it. I saw it first.”

“I’ll battle you for it!” said the red one.

Then they had a fight. The green one turned as red as the red one, and as bloody as the red one. The people in the town saw from their houses and said, “Woah, that is so cool!”

“I wonder who will win?” said one of the town’s people.

They both were as strong as one another. So they said, “Hmm. I think it’s time we bring out some weapons.”

They brung out some dragon weapons. Dragon missiles, dragon everything. They had a fight with those, but neither of them won.

The green one said, “Ugh. You made me so bloody. I’m leaving!” The green one left and the town’s people learned that the dragons were hurt, but not very much hurt. But they had more blood than ever. They were making the lakes blood red.

Doctor Heesagam said, “This is so bad for the town! I can’t even go outside until the blood dries up. Which is going to be a million years because of these fighting dragons! They’re not even dead and look how much blood they’re making!”

Doctor Heesagam went outside and the red dragon swept down and took him to his cave.

“I’ll go get the carving knife ready,” said the dragon.

“Hmm… nice place here,” said Doctor Heesagam. “I wonder if the dragon has any jewels for me to steal.”

The cave was dripping water because there was a lake right on top of the mountain. There was lots of rocks hanging down from the top of the cave. It was kind of spooky because there were bats flitting around everywhere– vampire bats!

Doctor Heesagam was very scared because the dragon said he was going to get his carving knife. He was shivering. He was running from wall to wall but he was not screaming, so that way the dragon didn’t know what he was doing or what he was up to. He said, “Hmm…” and ventured into the dragon’s part of the cave. He thought that maybe he should jump out of the cave, but it was 3,000,000,300 miles down to the little town. “I can risk getting hurt, or getting eaten,” he thought. “I’d rather get hurt than be eaten!” Then he jumped down.

The dragon came out and said, “What! Where’d he go? Oh, whatever… I’ve had enough meals today.”

While the dragon was talking to himself, Doctor Heesagam was falling at a very intense speed for a very long time. He fell for about an hour and then he hit the ground. He wasn’t hurt because his coat was like a parachute. “Oh boy, I better get inside right now!” he thought. He went to his lab where he was experimenting with lava. He was trying to make iron with this lava but the materials kept melting. So he said, “I guess I’ll just experiment with lava just to see if it can melt every single thing in the world! `Hmm, what if I test it on one little scale?” He found the scale of the dragon outside and he dropped it in the lava. It melted faster than 1000 and 25th notes! “Hm,” he said, “I wonder how long it would take to melt the whole dragon? I can’t climb the mountain, because it’s 3,000,000,300 miles high! It’s too high. It’s a google plex. How am I ever going to get up there? The hovercraft won’t get there… The engine would be out of gas once I got to the foot of the mountain! So I just have to climb. And I don’t know how to do this but I’m going to do it.”

Doctor Heesagam went and tried to find the elevator in his humongous underground house and he found it in his closet and it was buried underneath a pile of dust; a dustinator which makes people sneeze! He took the dustinator and he said, “Won’t need this again!” and threw it in the lava. There was a secret passageway in the closet that leads to above ground. He found the escalator and said, “Up you go!” He pushed the tub of lava on the escalator and the escalator did the rest of the work. Outside he said, “Oh boy, now I have to pick up an escalator… like that’s going to be easy! I don’t even have my grappling hand anymore, it’s buried in the cemetery somewhere…” Then he realized that he didn’t have his remote to make the escalator shrink! He said, “Well, the tub of lava won’t help… so I guess I just have to pull it up.” He took it step by step. First, he took the leather off the escalator, then he took the metal. Then he put it all back together again by the side of the mountain. It was the middle of the night, so Doctor Heesagam knew the dragon was sleeping, because he could see the smoke from the dragon’s snore. He put the escalator next to the mountain and pulled up the lava. It took him about 30 minutes to get up the mountain on the escalator. He poured lava all over the entrance of the cave and said, “Nighty nighty, dragon. It will be your last!”

It was daytime and one of the dragon’s legs burned off because of the lava. “Ahhh! You got to be kidding me! I am going to destroy the whole town until I find the person that did this!” screamed the dragon. He gets a peg leg made of diamonds and gold and he starts flying. “I feel like a bat that’s carrying a zebra. Ugh, this has got to be the worst day after. I am going to get the person who did this! And I think I know who it was… Doctor Heesagam!” Then he dove into town and said, “Hmm, maybe I should start with this house.” He ripped open this shack that had nobody inside, just these old logs. “This must be a lumber place. Looking for the person that did this could be very hard… I need a better searching team.” The dragon had no friends, but he knew he needed help to find Doctor Heesagam. Doctor Heesagam was down in his lair, sitting and relaxing on his nice warm, sofa. Meanwhile, the dragon was out in the town ripping up all the buildings.

Dr. Heesagam thought, “Wonder what all that noise is? Maybe I should use my telescope. Eh, whatever… it’s Saturday. Relaxing day. And hobby day. Maybe there’s something I’m forgetting… Oh yeah, I have to send the bomb to space to blow up a satellite. Hm, I think that maybe I’m not so sure about this, but I think I should send a missile to the dragon’s cave. Oh yeah, that’s perfect.”

He aimed the missile right at the mountain while he was still sitting in his chair.

The dragon was like, “Hm, I wonder what that is?” He flew toward the missile but dared not touch it because he was afraid it would attack. “I wouldn’t want to touch it on the tip, but look! There’s fire coming out of the back, oh wait, that’s air. It’s probably not a dragon, probably just human technology.” The dragon flew down, but little did he know that the missile was heading for his cave! Once it hit, the explosion was so loud, the army thought that they were being attacked so they got out their tanks and missiles and aimed it right at the dragon. 3, 2,1, and all the tanks fired at the dragon! But the dragon flew off just time.

The dragon was, flying, flying, flying. Dr. Heesagam saw him and fired another missile but it missed him again! But it hit his cave again.

The dragon wasn’t too upset because his usual home was up in space. But this cave was his summer home, so he said, “Let that cave be blown up! At least I still have a home on Planet Reese.”

The dragon was so mad because he saw another missile going toward the cave, so he picked up a tank and threw it at the missile. The missile split in half and all the explosives fell out.

Dr. Heesagam was walking outside. The dragon saw him and was like, “THIS IS THE LAST TIME YOU WILL SEE PLANET EARTH AGAIN.” The dragon’s voice was so deep that it froze Dr. Heesgam’s blood. He was so nervous that he nearly fainted. But he had something in his pocket: it was a shrink ray. He took out the shrink ray, and although his hands were shaking, he pointed the shrink ray at the dragon. But it missed! It hit the mountain and shrunk the mountain to the size of an ant. The dragon picked up the mountain and said, “How am I supposed to live on this thing! It’s the size of an ant and it has a steaming spot on it.” The dragon threw away the mountain and it flew up in the air and landed on a satellite which destroyed the whole town’s radio, television, and lights. Everything went out; it was a blackout.

“What have I done now?” Dr. Heesagam groaned with his hand on his face.

The dragon was stomping around but he couldn’t see anything because it was midnight and now the town had no lights. So it made it super hard to see Dr. Heesagam. Then Dr. Heesagam tip-toed away from the dragon. He was shivering when he got inside his house and he sat on his sofa which was freezing!

“This is the worst blackout ever.”

The dragon was stomping around saying, “Why do I have to walk around? But it’s the only thing to do…” He was walking in circles. He was so mad that he almost crushed a house! He was walking, walking, and then he found this little house that had not been crushed. It wasn’t Dr. Heesagam’s house, but he thought it might have some supplies, so he crushed the house and saw what was inside. There was a humongous axe that was about 5 feet long, with a blade that was about 7 feet long.

“Hmm, this could do,” he said. And he walked and walked and found a small patch of the town which had not been destroyed. It was sitting there perfectly. He said, “One of these two homes are Dr. Heesagam’s.” So he opened up a house that had nothing in it, it was just a wood supply store. He opened up the next house, it was just cement. He didn’t know this, but he thought that underneath those 5 layers of cement was Dr. Heesagam’s house. Though he was underground, Dr. Heesagam had plenty of air.

The dragon thought, “What is a layer of cement doing there? This must be Dr. Heesagam’s roof, because if there’s nobody on top, he must be on the bottom!”

He starts digging. His claws dig up five feet of dirt. He sees something creepy. A skeleton! Just a skeleton with handcuffs on it. He didn’t know, but he was digging up a house that used to be an old prison. He saw 15 people that had handcuffs and were dead.

“Ugh, I dug up the wrong house.” But little did he know that under the prison was Dr. Heesagam’s house.

So the dragon walks along the road, stomping around like a maniac, so angry that he breathes his fiery breath. He sees something, a commercial sign that says, “Kill the Dragon! Go to the Army and sign up now.” He got so mad that he picked up the sign and threw it at a tank. Of course, the tank exploded. But then another tank came and fired at the dragon’s diamond peg leg. He screamed, “Ahh!” and falls down.  “You will be killed, Doctor Heesagam, once I get my claws on you! You shall never be alive. You shall not be in the cemetery. You will be in my mouth!” The dragon was so mad that he nearly destroyed the whole town. He seized this other town that was sitting there peacefully, and they were even more scared than the other town. The dragon thought that Doctor Heesagam was hiding in the other town, but really he was under the jail cell.

All Doctor Heesgam was doing was sitting in his ice chair and trying to go to sleep but he couldn’t because it was too cold. The lights came back on and the heat came back on.

“Oh that’s great,” said Doctor Heesagam. “Now my ice chair turned into a molten lava chair. Well… I better get working on the invention that I must finish.”

He took a tube of lava from his lava tub and he poured it into a gun.

“This gun will be good, because it will be called The Molten Lava because it will turn the dragon into molten lava.”

He left his house and went in to the woods to find the dragon. He couldn’t find him in the woods but he could find him in the next town over. He saw the dragon ripping out the houses.

“That silly little fool dragon… he has no idea what he’s doing. He’s just ripping up his own strength. I’ll aim this gun at him…”

He aimed it by accident at a house and he shot it. It hit the house. It turned into molten lava.

The dragon said, “Hmm maybe Doctor Heesgam’s mansion finally blew up and now he’s dead!”

But little did the dragon know that the house was abandoned and nobody lived there. So  all the explosion did was burn off the dragon’s skin and turn it into a blue dragon.

“What? I’m blue?” The dragon said. “Now I have to be nice… And eat vegetables.”

Doctor Heesagam was like, “Hmm, I didn’t think he would turn blue. But now I can’t kill him.” He walked home very mad.

THE END

The Banana Man Candy Lizard Mix-up

Once upon a time there lived a banana man. He was stuck in a swamp. It was muddy and slimy and squirmy. It smelled dirty and mushy. He wanted to get out. Then suddenly he saw a big lizard and he was so scared that he wanted to jump out of the swamp right away and behind him was a whole pile of candy. So he wanted to stay in the swamp for a little bit longer. He was nervous to jump over the lizard, because it was so big and had sharp teeth.

Banana Man wanted to eat the candy and the lizard wanted to eat him. He tried to go around the lizard but he couldn’t move that fast. He tried going under the lizard, but he couldn’t see anything and then the lizard got stuck too so he couldn’t eat the banana man and the banana man couldn’t eat the candy. Then the lizard pulled on the ground so he got unstuck and then almost caught the banana man. But the banana man got unstuck too and grabbed the candy and ran out of the swamp. But the lizard was still following him. The lizard caught the bag of candy but not the banana man. The banana man caught his tail but he didn’t catch the candy.

“I don’t think that’s a regular banana afterall,” said the lizard and he heard the banana man scream and then he grabbed the candy from the lizard’s mouth and jumped off the lizard and ran. “Oh man,” said the lizard putting his hands down, touching his feet with his tail curled up.

When the banana man ran, some of the candy fell out and when the lizard ate the candy he realized that it was better than a banana man. And the banana man realized that the lizard thought he was a regular banana but the lizard did not care because he had candy.

Mouse Story

Isabelle likes cheese and she is a white mouse. She wants to be the best gymnast in the world so she can get a cheese trophy. It is real cheese and you don’t have to peel the wrapper off first because it comes off for you. And then you could eat it yum yum yum.

There is a competition one day and you have to jump over the obstacles to get to the trophy. If someone gets stuck in the obstacles they can’t win so whoever gets there first wins. The mouse thinks she will win because she’s already done something like that and she knows how to do a full back handspring with no mistakes.

Some people think she’ll win like her family and her friends.

This is what the obstacle course looks like: there’s a spring board at the beginning and one person stands on one side and one person stands on the other side and when someone jumps on it the other one swings up. After that there are the bars and after that you have to swing on the rings  and after that you have to get on the first ledge and then you have to stand up and climb the rock wall and then you get to the cheese trophy!!! But there is another part where you have to do whatever they tell you and if you don’t you are out.

Isabelle has been practicing for five years.

On the day of the competition Isabelle felt excited. She stretched and warmed up. Her family and friends came to the competition. Isabelle thought she would win, but there were other mice there that were good gymnasts. At first the judges tell them all to do a round-off. Then they told them to do a back handspring. She made no mistakes! Then she started, and swung up on the springboard. she did a good job. The mice clapped! When she got to the two bars on the side that you had to push up on, she got up. But then when she got to the rock wall, she fell! She had gotten to the fourth rock, and her hand slipped. She fell onto her feet.

Isabelle still thought she could win. There were rock walls on the side so she could climb up the rock wall and they’re very short so she got up and she went again. She finally got up the wall! She was so happy! She won, even though she’d fallen! People clapped! Her family stood up and cheered and yelled her name.

Then she smelled cheese. The trophy was as big as a mouse! She was the same height as it! She took it home. That day, she had it for lunch.

She was going to do gymnastics next year, too.

 

THE END

Home of the Aliens

BOOK ONE: The Endless Fight

 

There once was a planet called Bobo, and the planet was a very happy planet and everyone there had a lot of fun but there was this other planet named Nani that only had junk on it and wanted to take over Bobo.  However, the Bobos were the bad guys and the Nanis were the good guys.  Bobo didn’t have any heroes or anything but Nani had a hero called X.  He had all the powers you could think of, so Bobo decided to make a fighter robot and it took them a year to make it.  But the Nanis saw the robot so then the Nani king called Nani declared war.

They had a huge fight but more of the Bobos got killed than the Nanis because X was more powerful than the robot.  So then they made a bigger robot that could fit all the people on Bobo. They called the robot BoboBot. It was bigger than X though he was still more powerful.  The robot blocked all of X’s strikes so X made this machine that shrank someone, so he shrunk the robot and all the Bobos still in it. But the robot could still do a lot of things but its strikes were too little.  X was going to step on the robot but it could move very fast, so X was busy chasing the robot but the people started to get tired of using their hands to move the controls. X trapped them in a corner and he crushed them but Bobos ran out all over the place.  X killed so many that there were only 15 left so the ones that were left made a huge invisibility cloak and they put it over all of them and they shot at X with invisible bullets.  But X was still too powerful so he made something so that if you hit him with a powerful bolt he gets stronger, so he defeated the 15 Bobos and the Nanis won.  The Nanis went to war because the Bobos stole all their gadgets and everything because they wanted to be powerful. But a pregnant woman who was special because she could glow in the dark had had X as a baby, but then the Bobos captured X’s mother and they killed her so that’s why the Bobos are the bad guys.

After the Nanis defeated the Bobos, they rescued X’s mother and X gets married to a superwoman whose dad is Nani. So X becomes a prince. Nani is a powerful planet, and Bobo blows up.

 

The End.

 

BOOK TWO: A New World Is Born

 

The Nanis lived happily ever after but what they didn’t know was that the Bobos had put a little seed in the equator of their planet that would make another planet grow when Bobo blows up.  As a consequence that became a very powerful planet, almost as powerful as Nani.  So Nani built a lot of robots in case X died, because the planet, called The Underworld, was very powerful. X prayed to God that he wouldn’t die, then he went out and fought without anyone noticing and he blew half of the planet up with his powers. But X’s servants were really mad because he didn’t let them know that he was going to fight the planet on his own, and he got badly injured and they sent in their Xbots. They could fly, and they had so many gadgets and they have 1000 lives and there were a million of them. They all went into battle but the Underworld didn’t know that the second half of their planet was going to be blown up, so while the Xbots were heading toward the planet, the king – called the Evil Lord – saw them in his tower. His tower was so high and you don’t know how high it goes. Up high, he saw the Xbots and he crawled into a secret cockpit and then he took 2 machine guns in his hand and he blasted all the Xbots.

Luckily, X had a great idea; he put force fields around Xbots. Chunks of the other half of the planet started falling and many people died.  No one was ready, except for the Evil Lord, so the whole planet blew up and X got 1000 more wives and they had a big party with a lot of food and all the people became fat.

 

The End.

 

 

BOOK THREE

 

After everyone gets fat—the only person who wasn’t fat was X and the Nani king—everyone just kept eating more and more so they blew up. After that, there were only two people on the planet; the Nani king and X, so it was a very lonely planet, and other planets thought that Nani was an evil planet. They thought it was a junkyard planet. They threw all their junk on half of the planet.  X and Nani were in trouble so they had to come up with a plan because even though  X had a lot of powers, he did not have enough to destroy all the other aliens on the other planets.

Unluckily, they found a baby left right next to the equator, but then X touched the baby but it rolled into the equator and all of a sudden the equator blew up and there was only 3/4s of the planet left.  Nani and X kept searching for the baby for 12 years until they came to a piece of light which got bigger and bigger until it was a person made of fire, so he became X’s son. Soon Nani died and the planet was no longer called Nani; it was called                            because it didn’t have a name.  That planet would explode in 10 minutes because it had nothing on it, so X and his son named Lava Boy left the planet when it was about to blow up. But then they found a planet that was captured and it was called Lava World.  All the people were made of lava so X took over the world, and then one of the scientists freed the world so nobody was locked in cages. They thanked X for rescuing them.  They turned him into Lava X.  They had a big celebration and the planet was renamed Lava Nani.

 

The End.

 

End OF Series!

 

The Little Dolphin

Chapter One

Once upon a time, there was a dolphin that lived in the sea. Her name was Ginger. Then she saw an octopus coming close to her. Then she saw a bunny on the shore. And then she went back under water. She looked for seaweed. She couldn’t find any. She didn’t have any breakfast, so she was going to starve if she didn’t get this seaweed. She dug all the dirt on the ocean floor, but she still didn’t find any seaweed. Then she looked up on the surface to see if there’s any seaweed, but she still couldn’t find the seaweed. Then she saw a stingray. Stingrays were her enemy. She swam far away from the sting ray. And the stingray couldn’t find her.

“Maybe I’ll go back to the stingray and talk”, said Ginger. She wanted to talk to the stingray because she wanted the seaweed first. Then she talked to the stingray.

She said, “Can I have the seaweed first?” But the stingray already found the seaweed. The stingray ate half the seaweed, and put all the others on the ocean floor. He just put them on the ocean floor. Then Ginger ate the other half.

And then Ginger swam back to her parents. She wanted to have a sleepover with her friends, but her parents said no. Then she asked five more times, and her parents still said no. They said no because they thought she needed to wait a little more to go to a sleepover. She could only go to a sleepover with her cousins. She was disappointed. Then she went back to bed.

Then the next day came. Then she asked her mom again, and dad again. It was her birthday. She turned five. Her grandma and grandpa bought them food. She didn’t want her mom and dad to see that she was getting food then, so she took it to her friend’s house. If she was gonna go with her parents then she was gonna tell them that she wanted to go to her friend’s house, so she wanted to use the new food to lure her parents. She ate her breakfast, and she played a puzzle. And then she went to the playground. She ate her lunch. Then she got her mom and dad’s favorite food, to lure them to her friend’s house. Mom and Dad’s favorite foods are salad and spaghetti and meatballs. They recognized it was the friend’s house and they take her back home. Then she got her mom and dad’s favorite food and tried to lure Mom and Dad to her best friend’s house again. But Mom and Dad recognized it was her friend’s house, so then they took her back home again. Then she ate dinner. Then she went to bed.

Then she saw a shark, and she ate her breakfast quickly. Then she ran away from the shark quickly. The shark chased her when she tried to sneak over to her friend’s house. Then the shark chased her back to her house. Then she tried again but the shark chased her back to her house again. Her parents were eating breakfast and they didn’t see it happening. Then she tried to chase the shark away but the shark kept chasing her away. And then she gets her mom but her mom was talking on the phone. Then she asked her dad but her dad was having some coffee. Then she tried to chase the shark away again but the shark kept chasing. Then she swam away from the shark and the shark kept chasing her. So then she tip-toed quietly and the shark didn’t see her.

So then she went to her friend’s house. She already packed all her stuff so she could go. Her mom already called her friend’s mom so she could go but had to wait two more years. But Ginger didn’t want to wait. So she went to her friend’s house and when she got there she said hello to her friend and her friend’s mom asked, “Are you seven yet?” and Ginger said no.

“I thought your mom told you you have to wait till you’re seven.”

“But I already packed all my stuff!”

Then she said, “Go back home and keep your stuff till when you get to be seven.”

 

Chapter Two

 

Ginger’s friend was already seven but they were still friends. Then Ginger’s friend’s mom said, “Just go back to your home now.”

Then Ginger said, “What about I stay here until I’m seven. I have all my clothes here.”

“Just go back home now!” Ginger’s friend’s mom said.

Then Ginger went back home. She felt really disappointed. Then she asked her parents if she could go again.

They said, “No no no, wait until you are seven.”

So she tried again, but her parents just said, “No, no, no wait until you are seven.”

Then she ate lunch. She had carrots and celery. So then she tried to tell her mom and dad she’d do all her chores but they said no no no. Then she promised she would clean her room and she would do everything for her mom and dad.

And they said,”Yes but clean your room now.”

But she didn’t want to clean her room and they said, “Then you will not go unless you clean your room. If you clean your room right now you will go the day after tomorrow and you will stay for three nights.

So she cleaned her room and her mom said, “In neat piles not under the table and over the table.” Ginger cleaned her room and made it into piles. Her mom said, “Don’t put piles on the pathway to your bed.” Then Ginger put them on the place where no one will check not on the pathway to her bed. And her mom said, “You can go to the sleepover. But here are the rules: no tickling under their chin, no running and pretending to get hurt, no ripping their pillows when you want the feathers of the pillow to come out, and no jumping on the bed. And those are the rules you have to follow. If you wanna go stay with rules if you don’t want to go then don’t stay with the rules.”

Then Ginger said, “I’ll stay with the rules.”

Then she went to the playground. Then had naptime. Then had playtime. Then had snacktime. Then she had dinnertime. And last but not least, she had bedtime. She slept very well. Then she woke up her mom and dad.

“It’s the day! It’s the day!” She said.

“Not today,” her mom said,” tomorrow is the day.”

“Hooray hooray!” Ginger said.

Tomorrow.

“But that takes too long!

“It won’t take so long,’ her dad said, “just a double 24 hours.”

It was five o’clock in the morning then five o ten and five o twenty and five o thirty one.

Then Ginger said, “But I don’t want to wait too long.”

“Don’t worry,” her dad said, “I promise you will be going to your friend’s house tomorrow.”

Then she got very disappointed. Then she talked to her baby sister. Her baby sister’s name was Valentina. Her baby sister was six months old. “Ga ga ga” she said to her sister.

Her sister said back, “Ga ga goo goo.”

Then her dad drank coffee and her mom talked on the phone. Then she shook her rattle.

 

Chapter 3

 

Then she ate breakfast and then she played with the puzzle. It was a safari puzzle. After the puzzle she read a book. The book was about nursery rhymes. She liked Twinkle Twinkle Little Star and The Wheels on the Bus. Then she went to the fair with her mom and dad and baby sister. There was apple juice and seaweed. You had to grab the seaweed out of the apple juice. She lived in a cave.

She went on the ferris wheel. Then she went on the roller coaster. She was not scared at all and she went on a ride called Tornado that was spinning a lot and spun really fast and then she went to eat ice cream. Her baby sister ate ice cream in a cup. Ginger got banana ice cream. Her baby sister got lemon sorbet. Valentina was scared of some rides but some rides she wasn’t scared of. Then she had lunch. After lunch she went on more rides. Valentina went on the little truck ride. Valentina’s favorite color was purple. Ginger’s favorite color was yellow. Then Valentina went on the little Indian Beach ride. Then Valentina went on the car ride. Then Valentina went on the train ride. Then Ginger went on the rollercoaster again. Then the mommy and daddy went on the little truck ride with Valentina. Then they went on the rollercoaster with Ginger. And then they went home. Then they ate dinner. Then Ginger went to bed. When she went to bed, she thought about the sleepover. She was so excited.

 

Chapter 4

 

Then it was the day of the sleepover. Ginger was going to stay at her friend’s house for three nights. Then Ginger’s mom and dad put Valentina in her high chair. Then her mom and dad ate breakfast. Then Ginger put her stuffed animal in her bag. Then she went outside.

Her mother said,”Not yet. At three o’clock.” Then it was one o’clock. Then it was two o’clock. Then it was three o’clock. Then Ginger’s dad took Ginger out to the car. And he drove Ginger there. Ginger’s mom was sitting next to Ginger’s dad. And Valentina was sitting next to Ginger. Then they arrived at Ginger’s friend’s house. Then Ginger opened the door. She said bye bye to her parents and bye bye to her sister. Then Ginger’s parents took Valentina to the car. Then she went up the stairs.

Then she saw her friend, and Ginger’s friend’s mom asked,”Are you seven yet?”

And Ginger said,”No. But my mom said that I can stay three nights here.”

“Unroll your sleeping bag,” Ginger’s friend said. Ginger’s sleeping bag was green with yellow polka dots. Then they played tag you’re it outside. Then they swam in the pool. Ginger’s friend had a pool. She felt happy. And her friend felt happy. She was excited.

 

Chapter 5

 

Then they ate lunch. She felt happy and excited, but sometimes she had to go to bed and not play in the pool. It was bedtime, so she couldn’t go to the pool. Then it was the next day. She ate breakfast. She had cereal for breakfast. Then they played with the puzzles.

Then they went to the fair. First, they went to the bouncy castle. Then they went to the ferris wheel. Then they had two snacks. Then they went on the roller coaster. Then they went to the obstacle course. Then they went to her friend’s house. Then they ate lunch. Then they played in the pool. Ginger felt happy and excited. And then she played with five more puzzles.

She felt happy about the sleepover, but she also wanted to go home, because she had a jacuzzi. She missed her family, and she had a backyard. Then she had dinner and then she went to bed. Ginger already knew that she had a family, and she learned that she wanted to go back to them, and to play with the jacuzzi.

Injustice

Once upon a time, there was a boa constrictor with fangs as sharp as swords, and he had wings that could make him fly. He lived in a secret fortress. He wanted to destroy everything and rule the world. He wanted everyone to follow his orders. His name was Pythor.

There were a bunch of seeds and a special plant in an enchanted garden – a lot of those special plants. But Pythor asked his army of snakes to destroy all the plants. But he and his army didn’t notice one seed that was not cut, and then the seed started growing and it turned into a boy who could fly. He could disappear somewhere and reappear somewhere else, and he had laser-eyes. His name was Nightwing. Nightwing had a lot of gadgets and weapons because he found materials to make them. He found leather and then he made leather pickaxes and leather swords in case some broke, and he dug for diamonds and then he went right back up and crafted the diamond into a diamond sword. Also, one time he dug for iron so he could get enough iron to make iron leggings, iron boots, an iron chestplate and an iron helmet. And then he built a diamond mansion in the enchanted garden.

Nightwing knew about Pythor and his army. After he had been born from the seed, he watched Pythor and his army as they left, and saw all the destruction they had caused. He decided to put a disguise on, pretending to be a pizza man, and he delivered pizza to them, and then he asked to go to where all the remote controls and weapons and gadgets were. They said, “If you give us eight slices of pizza for free.”

And then Nightwing gave them all the pizza for free and he went to the remote control, weapons and gadgets room, and then he turned off all the remote controls because they were on and that was charging all their computers so they could look at whichever place they wanted to destroy next. Also, he put a pizza in the remote controls and it jammed the machine so you couldn’t turn it back on. Then he disappeared and reappeared in his diamond mansion.

Meanwhile, Pythor was eating his pizza. He was thinking of his next step. He pulled out a map for back-up. He didn’t feel like going to his remote controls. He was tired. He thought he could take over the USA. And he wanted to use all his weapons and gadgets to hypnotize the president to help destroy the USA.

Nightwing was having a baby. He used some of his powers to put into the baby’s heart. Nightwing named him Redhood. He wanted the baby because he was lonely. He had no one else like him. Redhood quickly grew into a boy. Then Nightwing put a forcefield around the galaxy, and his son was busy protecting the president. He traveled to the US and went to the White House in Washington, DC. He disappeared from the enchanted garden and reappeared in the President’s office. And he told the president to put on super spy binoculars. The president said that he would because he heard about Nightwing and Redhood in the newspaper and he knew that they were good and that they were trying to fight for justice.

Meanwhile, Pythor was launching his ships to the White House and Redhood was protecting the president. But then the president’s army attacked Pythor’s army. Pythor’s army was using weapons like swords, shields, and daggers. They were using all their vehicles. Meanwhile, Nightwing was looking at the battle and he knew he had to help, so he went over to the White House and used his weapons to help the president’s army and Redhood. Afterwards, Nightwing had a big battle with Pythor, and they were fighting with all kinds of weapons like swords, shields, and daggers. Nightwing took his steel rod and let him have it! Then Pythor hypnotized Nightwing. He told Nightwing to kill Redhood. But then one of the guys from the president’s army knocked Nightwing out and he wasn’t hypnotized anymore. Nightwing tripped Pythor and electrocuted him, so then he said, “I must regroup, but I’ll be back someday!”

Then he disappeared forever.

 

Excellent Adventures

One day a girl named Alice and her mom wanted to go for a walk. They saw an ice-cream truck.

“Can I have ice-cream?” she asked nicely.

“No way we haven’t even had dinner,” said the mom.

“Can we have ice-cream after dinner?” she asked nicely.

“Maybe if you eat all your dinner,” said the mom.

The girl believed her and so she ate all her dinner. They had mashed potatoes, spinach and spaghetti.

“Now can we get ice-cream?”

“No,” said the mom, “let’s go to the playground, maybe while we’re going if there’s an ice-cream truck, we can get some ice-cream and eat it at the playground.”

 

But on the way, there was no ice-cream. She looked everywhere. She saw an ice-cream truck but it was too far from where she was. Maybe I’ll get ice-cream tomorrow, she thought.

 

So they went to the playground for one minute. They only played on the swings. She felt ok about not getting ice-cream because she might get ice-cream on a different day.

 

They went home. She went to bed.

 

The next day, after they ate breakfast they played in the playground. They played for one hour. They went on the slide and the swings and the monkey bars. She was tired and she went home and took a nap.

 

They ate lunch: peanut butter and jelly with broccoli and mashed potatoes. After lunch, her mom said, “Let’s go out for a walk.”

 

They saw an ice-cream truck and started walking toward it, but the girl thought they were going somewhere else.

 

“Surprise!” said the mom and dad.

The little girl got mint-chocolate chip and the dad got cookies and cream and the mom got double chocolate. They went to the playground and ate their ice-cream. When the dad was done, he went home and got a blanket for a picnic for dinner. After they were done with dinner they had mashed potatoes again and then they got ice cream again. They got different flavors. The little girl got double chocolate. The mom got mint-chocolate chip and the dad got cookies and cream again. They went to a different ice cream shop. The mom and dad didn’t surprise the little girl, she knew they were getting ice-cream. They all got the same flavor. They all got strawberry. No one had stomach aches because they said yes, because they didn’t get ice cream yesterday.

 

They went home and had no more ice cream. The girl felt happy. They had a happy time. They went to bed.

 

The next morning they ate breakfast and they had pancakes with waffles.

 

“I don’t want ice cream today,” the girl said.

“Good,” said the mom, “because you’re not getting ice cream today after yesterday.”

 

The End

 

 

The Epic Gorilla

Gorilla EX knows every single karate move in the world. He does this special move where when he lays his finger on someone they turn into stone. He has a lot of muscles and all the girls like him. He has a six-pack and abs. He lives in a mansion with a pool and water fountain, and he is very rich, and he’s awesome at a lot of sports like basketball and baseball and snowboarding. When it’s winter he turns his place into a hockey rink. He got rich even though his parents were very poor. In his childhood the only thing he could do was inventing. So he tried out for inventing because inventing was the cheapest thing people could do in those times, and he was very young. But he learned how to invent and he invented this thing that makes people’s mind turn on him. He could control them.

As a high school student he went to visit India for a summer vacation, but there were a bunch of bandits and he didn’t know what to do. He got trapped with a bunch of bandits and fell off a cliff, but luckily he always carries a parachute with him. He fell to a surface and he found his way back to the hotel. But then he checked in his closet where he kept the machine and he saw that it was gone and that’s when he found out about the bandits. They had turned only five people’s minds on them, so now there were fifty-seven bandits (there used to be fifty-two). Now the whole world was going to be filled with bandits, so Gorilla EX started practicing so many karate moves in his mansion and he got stronger and stronger, until he actually looked like a real gorilla. He started inventing a machine that makes him stronger so no one could defeat him. He made a hypno-ray that makes him stronger so he just types in how strong he wants to be and what he needs. So he typed in “Ultra-Strong Gorilla EX” and then he got so strong that when he punched through diamond or brick or bedrock with his bare hands it doesn’t even hurt and it just goes straight through.

The bandits made a villain that was unstoppable. When he touches lightning all of a sudden it zaps and breaks apart and there’s no more lightning. He can control the lightning. The villain looked exactly like Gorilla EX so then everyone started liking him instead of Gorilla EX, and he had an even better mansion with a hockey rink inside and even if it was the summer you could still go on the hockey rink. It made Gorilla EX even more jealous. The villain’s name was Evil X, but everyone thought he was Gorilla EX.

Gorilla EX wanted to find out who was under that costume. He had to spy on him, and when he was spying he saw a poster on Evil X’s mansion that said, “If Anyone Wants to Fight Gorilla EX Then Step Right Up Because Gorilla EX Will Pound Them To Death.” The fight was supposed to happen in his mansion in an arena made of gold.

Gorilla EX got ready. Soon enough he was stepping onto the arena, but there was no Evil X. And then, all of a sudden, something whacked him in the face and almost knocked him out. And then he found out that Evil X could turn invisible, but Gorilla EX couldn’t. So Gorilla EX had to keep his hands up at all times so he didn’t get another punch to knock him out. After a while Evil X got tired of punching and fighting Gorilla EX. Gorilla EX felt that there was no one punching him and kicking him anymore so then he started punching air and feeling if there were any objects in the air. Soon he punched out and all of a sudden he heard a “yowl,” so he started punching to knock Evil X out. All of a sudden he heard Evil X fall to the floor so he felt around for a body. He grabbed him and then he felt his belt and then felt what does what and he turned Evil X back so he wasn’t invisible anymore. He took him to his mansion and put TNT in his mansion and it exploded, and all the people who were rooting for Evil X died. So now it was Gorilla EX’s turn to find out who was under that costume.

He took off all the clothing. He pulled it off and he saw that it was a robot, and then he took his shoes off and saw on the bottom of his foot, “Signed by the bandits of India.” After he found out it was the bandits, he took Evil X’s belt and turned invisible. He snuck into the crooks’ lair because he found out on his belt that it said “Go to lair.” There was a portal that opens up and sends you right to the bandits’ lair. So then, all of a sudden, he got the bandits and then he tied them up and then the bandits were like, “Who the heck did this to me?” As they lay in confusion, he used a special move and turned all of them into stone except for the robot. He sent them flying into an Indian volcano with a thousand pounds of dynamite all around them and they were attached to a man-eating shark. They were sent into the volcano and when the lava touched the shark – which they shot on a rocket – the sharks would eat them because they were sharks that when they get in the lava it makes them meaner. They would eat the crooks when they were all covered in lava. So he sent them off. He also put some lava jellyfish with them so jellyfish would sting them to death if the shark didn’t find them. So the bandits and the robot got double beaten up.

But the people still liked Evil X so he used the mind machine that he got back from the bandits of India and he turned all the people’s minds back so they liked him. And then Gorilla EX became popular again.

The Epic Story

King has a money machine and everyone likes him. He’s really good at sports, like basketball. He’s even better than Lebron James. Usually people want Lebron James’ signature, but Lebron James wanted King’s signature. He has more than enough money to make a robot or a rocketship that has a stink bomb and also there’s green smoke that blasts out when it’s launching that stinks. It’s like skunk stink. He has a ferrari that can change into four things: a jet plane, a battleship, a submarine with harpoon missiles and a car that goes in the sewers without being stinky. He can also race the dead. He chooses wisely who he raises. He also has special powers like being invisible and running faster than a speeding bullet, and flying.

Before he got the money, some people were alive before him that were crooks and criminals. By the time he was alive, though, a ghost told the crooks and criminals that a person would have all the money and that he would defeat the crooks and criminals. So then the crooks and criminals went away and became good people. His parents were rich and they bought a money machine, and they let him have it for his birthday. He made a chewable tablet and he gave it to everybody so everyone could live forever.

But there was another team of crooks that didn’t hear the ghost’s warning. They had another team captain. They were worse than bandits. They had special powers. For example, one crook can turn into ice. One guy can disappear some place and reappear somewhere else. And another can shoot fire at heroes. The crooks heard about King and they wanted to destroy him because they knew that he had a lot more money than anyone else had, and he would never give away his money machine, and they wanted all the money in the world. They had money, but they wanted more.

Some people knew they were coming, and they told King and he was not scared. He went to a place where they teach karate and he learned all the karate moves. He even punched a hole in a punching bag without a boxing glove. With just his bare hand.

The crooks lived on another planet. The whole population came to King’s planet. The spaceship landed somewhere near the end of the world. And then they came to fight King at the end of the world, but he had a machine that makes things in one second and he just typed something in and it made a big sword. The big sword cut off the end of the world and the crooks fell down, and he made a replacement of the part he cut off. And all the crooks were falling down and they couldn’t reach. They had hooks that when they push a button it goes on something. They go far, but there was nothing for them to grab on to. They fell to the end of the universe, and they died.

King built a forcefield and he put it around his whole planet to protect everybody forever.

 

 

The Candy Baby

I like sweets because I’m three. My mom never lets me have sweets because I’m only three. She really does not want me to have sweets, but when I grow up then she will let me because she won’t know if I’m walking by the street and there’s a candy shop and I want some. And then I will keep walking until I find the biggest candy and then I will want to eat it. I like candy because I’m a candy baby. I’m a baby that loves candy so much that that’s the only thing I eat.

I’m on the street and I see a big a piece of candy, as big as a giraffe. It’s pink and it smells like candy made of chocolate and lollipops and sugar and gum. It’s a giant gummy. And then I want to eat it, but there’s bad people that stop me from eating it. They are the owners of the candy. They want to stop me from eating it because it’s their candy and they don’t want to share. That’s why they’re bad.

Then, when they’re gone for a second, I carry it home and eat it. My mom doesn’t see me because I’m in a locked room. It tastes like a gummy, sweet as an orange. I eat the whole thing and I don’t get sick. And then I shrink and then I’m only a one-year-old. I turn from a three-year-old to a one-year-old, and then I eat my mom’s gum. The candy made me shrink! Now that I’m a year old, I will stay in my candy room forever so my mom doesn’t see me.

Then I go on another adventure. I’m in New York and I go on an airplane to Disney World and it is so fun. I just enter and I walk five blocks and I take a car for two hours and I find a man holding a giant piece of candy in Disney World. It looks like it is made out of gum, which is my favorite thing. The man is also made of gum, so I eat the man and the piece of candy. And then I come home and eat it all, and then I stay home and then I go to Long Island. I find the biggest piece of candy in the world, bigger than all of the other candies. It is also made of gum, but then it shrinks. It is tinier than a butterfly. It is purple. It has candy glass, and then I eat it and it is better than all of the candies. It is smaller. It tastes like cotton candy. And it is so good! And it turns me back to three years old!

Then I want some of the best candy. There is such a big piece of candy on the street. It is very dirty. I never knew it was dirty. The people who own the candy will give it to me because I act very old but I’m really little. I act like I’m fifteen.

“Can I please have some candy?”

“Yes.” And they give it me for free because I act like I’m an old lady. I’m three but I act like I’m fifteen and I look like I’m older. I have powers to look like I’m older. My mom gave them to me. She doesn’t know I’m a candy baby because I’m always eating this candy in the special room. The dentist doesn’t know I eat candy because I brush really well. I brush really well so that nobody knows that I go to these places and eat all this candy.  Also, I have the power to never forget things. I was born with it.

The next day I go to the dentist, but I do not want to. The dentists might know that I’ve been eating a lot of sugar, and when my mom is talking to the dentist I go away to somewhere else but then everything traps me. The only shop that is there is actually a net that traps me, because the net knows that I love sugar so it closed off all the sugar. But then it traps me because it doesn’t want me to find the sugar. Luckily I had brought scissors and I cut through the nest.

I had to go back to the dentist but then I stole all the sweets from the dentist.

Then I leave the dentist and I go to Disneyworld. And I find another big piece of candy, but it isn’t real candy! So I don’t eat it. Then I go to Italy and I find not candy, but sweets. So I eat them. They are good. Then I go back to New York and I find a new piece of candy, the biggest piece in the world. It smells like gummies and fruit snacks and chocolate chips and candy.

 

One morning, I get older! I turn into a toddler. I am four! Then it is my brother’s birthday and he is 17. So I go to Disneyworld and I eat a dirty piece of candy and I get sick. I throw up. I throw up every hour for ten days!

So then I don’t like candy anymore. So I never eat candy anymore.

After that, I listen to my mom all the time. I eat broccoli, carrots, beans, and pasta. I am happy to eat what my mom tells me to. I feel better and more healthy. Nowadays when I’m sleeping and I see candy in my mind I just go and sleep with my mom. I dream about candy like every day, but I never eat it.

Then I live happily ever after.

 

THE END

 

The Lost Treasure

Once there was a goose named Gawen. Gawen worked for the king, King Basil the bear, as a guard. Gawen loved the king. But something happened a few days ago, when 28 rubies were stolen. King Basil and Gawen were the only ones that had the keys to the castle treasury. And then a couple days ago, 4 pieces of gold were stolen. And then two pieces of silver were stolen. After that, the King wanted to get to the bottom of it, so he called all the guards to tell them about the news. After King Basil had told them the other eight guards looked at Gawen with suspicious eyes. Gawen said that he didn’t do it, though. But King Basil trusted Gawen. One of the guards who was a rhino named Robert stared at Gawen for a long time and stopped to go back to his duties.

It wasn’t really Gawen because a couple of days before, a mouse named Tuck was looking around the village and found himself in the castle where his friend Gawen worked. Then Tuck found a little hole in the floor and went through. He found out that it was a mole hole that was made a long time ago. Then Tuck went right through the hole and he found himself in the treasury. As soon as he got out of the hole, he saw shining gold and silver on an old dusty table in one of the corners of the room. When Tuck saw the rubies, he thought of himself as not a thief but a small, little borrower. And he thought that nobody would notice because they were always left in there, so he took 28 of them and left. He put them near his bed. Tuck’s blanket was an old piece of Kleenex that he found. It wasn’t much. He decided to put one of the rubies at the front of the door when people came in to see them. He fixed up his house by paying people rubies. He bought a better blanket, a little table and a fridge.

The next day, Tuck went back to go see the treasury again. When he came out, he saw the treasure but there was something new there. Instead of a clear room now there were red shiny lasers. Since Tuck was a mouse, he could go through the lasers easily. He jumped over one laser and through another. He jumped over one and ducked under one. He came to a laser that was harder than the others, but behind it he could see the treasure.

Tuck said, “This is going to be harder than the others. Hopefully, I can make it through the lasers.” Luckily, Tuck made it through the lasers.

After Tuck came out of the other side of the lasers, Tuck saw piles of gold and silver. They were piled in different groups. Then Tuck saw something hidden behind a leg of a table that the gold was sitting on. Tuck ran to the yellow, shiny thing that he saw. He noticed that light was bouncing off the yellow object. The light made it look very shimmery and sparkly. Tuck pounced on the yellow shiny thing that he saw and realized that the object was a diamond. But Tuck wondered if it was fake because he had never seen a yellow diamond. Then Tuck realized that it was a yellow diamond. Tuck wondered if it was special because it was a yellow diamond, instead of a clear-whitish diamond.

 

Then Tuck thought to himself and said, “I think that I could use this myself. I doubt that the King and Gawen will mind if I take one of their precious stones for… I don’t know… myself, because I’m important, too.”

Tuck ran home to get something to carry the diamond. He brought a magic spray bottle that would help him make the alarms disappear, so he wouldn’t set off any alarms. He started to think about what he was doing because if anyone found out, or suspected that Gawen was doing it, he or Gawen would get  in trouble with the King. But then he thought that no one would suspect Gawen to do something like that because he was such a good goose.

He took the yellow diamond and took out another spray can and sprayed it in the air. The lasers appeared again. He then decided to keep the yellow diamond in a very special place. He kept the diamond in a room behind a painting. That secret room was in his bedroom. When he moved the painting aside there was a door behind, and when he closed the door the painting went back in place. Then there were stairs that went down into another room that held special things like the 28 rubies that he had also stolen. He also kept gold that he had stolen from the treasury there. Tuck wished he had someone to share his secret with, but his friend John couldn’t keep secrets.

John was Tuck’s best friend, but he couldn’t keep secrets because he was a blabbermouth. John was a lemur and they met when Tuck was running away from a mountain lion. They bumped into each other and became friends. John helped Tuck get away from the lion and that began their friendship.

The next two days after that happened, the King was getting suspicious and doubtful of Gawen because he was the only one who had the keys beside King Basil. Then the last day that Tuck stole the stones, the King was very suspicious because his mother, the former Queen, told him that she didn’t think that Gawen was trustworthy and that maybe he was the one stealing all of the precious items. She thought maybe that Gawen was trying to make King Basil look funny and bad in front of all his subjects. She didn’t want to think of Gawen as her grandchild because her son was grown up. It was just really hard for the former Queen to take all of this in.

Then the next day, an F.B.I agent came in to solve the mystery of the missing jewels. The king had told him to come and try to find the thief that stole the jewels. King Basil did not want to believe that Gawen was the one who stole the jewels. The F.B.I agent stood near the castle every day. The king told the other guards that he was just a new guard for the caste because the  jewels were stolen even though he was really a F.B.I agent working for the king. King Basil didn’t even tell Gawen that the new guard was actually a F.B.I agent because if it was Gawen he didn’t want him to know that the new guard was actually a F.B.I.agent. The F.B.I agent was a lion and a very fierce lion. The king really did want to tell Gawen but right now he couldn’t tell anybody just in case it might be that animal because then they would know to be more careful so they wouldn’t get caught. “I can’t tell anybody,” King Basil mumbled to himself.

 

Now today EVERYONE thought it was Gawen. And now the king did, too. They took him to court and everybody was there who was Gawen’s friend. They were all disappointed to see him in court because they thought he had always been such a good friend and helped them out a lot. But maybe they were wrong. Gawen could not believe what was happening to him. He had also thought he was always a good friend to all of his friends and was very nice and tried to be as helpful as he could, and polite. Gawen was also upset at the king and didn’t understand why he was making him go to court because he had always loved the king and Gawen had thought the king had always loved him.

The judge was the king, and he said, “What happened? Why are you here today? Rest your case now or there will be punishment as in YOU WILL GO TO JAIL,” yelled the king. “Confess already.”

Finally, Gawen said “ I told you I didn’t do it your highness/judge” demanded Gawen. “Why don’t I believe you, duck?” Gawen knew the king really knew his type of animal wasn’t really a duck but he had probably said that because he wanted to act rash like a judge and demanding. But Gawen said “Maybe you just don’t know what’s true and isn’t true. That’s sad king and isn’t fair that you are the king and the judge at the same time. I demand that we have a different judge to make it a fair fight,”  Gawen said strongly.

“Are you saying that I’m the one who stole the items? Or are you saying that I’m not being fair to you as a king? Because that is very rude to say to me, the king.”

“I think we have solved our case and a non-FBI agent will take care of you- as in put you in jail- because you have been rude to me and you probably stole the gems.”

His friends got up from where he was sitting and they left. They were disappointed as he was handcuffed and led out the back door by two guards. They couldn’t believe he would do such a thing.

The guards looked at him with daring and suspicious eyes while they wondered why he betrayed all of his friends and the people who loved and trusted him. As they walked out, Gawen realized that his handcuffs were no match for his awesome wings. They were slick enough to slip out of anything. He quickly, gently, and quietly slipped through the handcuffs and flew into the deepest and darkest parts back and forth. He thought that it was a trap but, when Gawen looked out all he could see was the forest. He looked back and saw the guards were following him. They gathered bombs, pitchforks, and bows and arrows to chase after him. The guard contacted the king and he looked out for Gawen at the top of the courthouse.

The king was also disappointed, yet he had this vengeful look on his  face.

The king screamed, “You will rue this day!” His voice echoed and weakened. “I don’t know why you did this. I thought we were best friends. How could you betray me and the subjects?”
He saw all of the guards and their weapons chasing after Gawen into the forest.

Tuck the mouse also wondered what he had done. He thought, “My friend will die because of me. What have I done? I am the one who is actually hurting my friend. Why!!! I betrayed my friend and I am a thief and a horrible person. Why was I so foolish? I am the dumbest person in the world. Definitely. I have to tell the king it was me.” No, I can’t because I need to tell Gawen that I was the one who was stealing and if he wants to tell the king that it was me or I will tell the king it was me.

“I will definitely tell the king what I did, even if they have to chop my head off!!!” declared Tuck. As Gawen entered forest, he could smell damp leaves because it had recently just rained near the forest. Gawen now did not know where he would stay and if he should just admit that he was guilty. He didn’t know what he should do either: if he should turn himself in or just stay there and try to stay hidden.

Gawen decided that he would stay one night to see if he could survive. He bet himself his life if he couldn’t stay alive for one night because if he was caught by the king’s guards that night his life would be over anyway. That night, he heard leaves blowing in the wind. He now knew what people felt like if they were poor. Suddenly, he heard a guard coming close to where he was hiding. Gawen’s heart sank into him.

I am dead meat, thought Gawen.

But then everything was silent. All Gawen could hear was the leaves swishing see was a tail that may have looked like a familiar tail in the leaves.

Gawen quickly scurried out of the cave he was hiding in and he poked the tail he had seen. Gawen heard a tiny, squeaky voice that he recognized as his friend, Tuck. When he looked down he did see Tuck had a cute, little sad face that stared at him with big, brown nut eyes. He wondered if Tuck  was scared of him because he thought he was accused of stealing.

But Tuck wasn’t scared. He slipped out of Gawen’s soft wings and ran up his right wing and sat on his face. “ I must tell you some …. news,” Tuck whimpered.

“If its about the king or anything like that I’m not interested,” complained Gawen angrily. Tuck just kept talking and pretending he didn’t hear that.

“Ok, I was the one who stole all of the rubies and jewels, I am really sorry but you guys are rich and I just wanted to borrow some stuff and I guess I didn’t realize I was stealing until  you were accused guilty.” muttered Tuck.

Gawen gasped as Tuck finished his sentence.

“Now you can tell everybody that I was the one who stole everything,” Tuck said, ashamed.

“I am a little mad at you but you didn’t realize it, so it’s ok. I have a idea,” said Gawen as he whispered the idea into Tuck’s ear.

“Ok,” answered Tuck. That night, Tuck snuck into the castle. Tuck had a walkie-talkie in his little pocket because Gawen had given it to him for his plan. But when he was going into the treasury he didn’t want to sneak in the treasury how he did before because now he realized that he was being a thief before.

But then Tuck heard Gawen talking to him through the walky-talky and saying, “You can do it, Tuck. Just don’t give up!” Tuck did not want to do it again, but he knew it was for his friend so he took a chance and went in the mole hole but this time when he entered it the gap was paved over with cement. Tuck though that maybe the cement guys had come in and cemented the floor in the castle to make it better looking. Tuck wasn’t going to let that bother him because he was doing it for his friend, so he decided to go in a different way. Maybe through the guard’s door. He thought to himself, “Hopefully, I can fit so I can do this for my friend so he can come back and feel safe.”

Then Tuck saw a guard near the front entrance to a door and he thought maybe that could be the treasury door. Tuck saw a bird near him and he asked the bird if he could have one of his feathers. The bird said yes and plucked out one of his loose feathers and gave it to Tuck. Tuck had an idea. He could go up and tickle the guard and grab his keys quickly or try to slide under the door. He decided to try to slide under the door first before trying to get the keys from the guard. He walked over slowly and quietly, so the guard wouldn’t see him, and said to Gawen through the walkie talkie, “Plan 1 didn’t work, so I’m going to try plan 2.”

Now he went more swiftly and smoothly and tried to slide under the door. Then he heard a voice and he looked, but quickly he put his head under the door so it didn’t hit his head.

“Wow,” Tuck said, “I almost didn’t make it, and would’ve hit my head.” This time, there were no red lasers but there were invisible baskets of poisonous food that all animals liked, so if that animal ate it, they would die. Tuck loved eating food, and smelled something, even though  he didn’t see anything. His nose led him to a delicious-smelling food. It was familiar and smelled like cheese but he thought his nose was just tricking him so he tried to walk ahead even though his nose kept smelling delicious food. Then he smelled something that smelled like the total opposite of delicious food. He covered his nose to try to get the smell away. He  thought it was an illusion because the treasury looked almost 40 miles away and before it only looked like a couple of steps away. Even though it looked really far away, he still did the obstacles that he saw ahead of him.  Now there were lasers but instead of red they were blue.

Tuck just wanted to give up because doing obstacles was really annoying, He knew it was for his friend, so he decided to not give up and try to do it even faster. He was going to try even harder and really fast. Tuck jumped over one blue laser, then another. The last two were the hardest because they were crossed and it would be hard to get through. Tuck decided to try to be a lot tougher. Then Tuck said, “I am a ninja!” and then he said, “I can do this!” He did it for his best shot and his body went through but all of a sudden his tail touched one of the lasers because he was so excited. It hit the laser because he thought he was almost through, and an alarm went off and he was terrified. All of a sudden he saw a little hole that he scampered into fast. Then he peaked out and waited to see what would happen. Then he saw the food come up and it wasn’t invisible anymore and all he saw was pastries and cheese and all the stuff he loved but it was still poisonous but Tuck didn’t know that. Tuck couldn’t help himself. He went over and took a bite of the cheese that was his favorite and then ran back into the hole and then there was a passage that he saw that now had appeared and he went in and then he saw a mother mouse and her children and then he said, “Oooo. I don’t feel so good.”

And then she said, “Oh no! Did you eat the food outside? I knew that because one of my family members once did that and got tricked! His name was Peter Fudge Cheese!”

“What poisonous food?” Tuck asked. “I just ate some good looking cheese back there. Hold on, I hear the cheese calling again!” And then he said, “I can’t be late for my date with destiny!”

The mother mouse said, “Oh no! It’s happening faster than I expected!” And then she held up a piece of cheese that was not poisonous and put it in a small box and he went in there fast but he acted very weird and he was like, “Is that you Cheese Goddess?” After he scampered into the box she closed the box tightly so Tuck wouldn’t get out.

Then she said, “Eat the cheese!” So he put his head down and started eating the cheese. It had a kind of medicine in it that made you fall asleep. When he finally fell asleep the mother mouse said, “Kids, can you go get a Kleenex blanket and put it on top of this mouse?”

The little mice said, “Yes, Mama Mouse!” and they scampered along to get the blanket. Then the Mama Mouse went in the cupboard and used her tiny paws to dig inside the cupboard because there was lots of stuff and then she said, “I found what I was looking for!” She pulled out a little, little needle that looked like a tiny, sharp staple. She took it out and waited for her children to get the blanket, then when they came back she said, “Children can you please place the blanket on top of this mouse and I will try to help him.”

Her children put a blanket on Tuck and then went into their room to go wrestle. She took out the needle and gently stuck it in him, but not too deep. She took a blood sample. Then she took it out, quickly but she didn’t thrust it out. Then she tested the blood sample to see what was happening and she saw that it was getting worse and worse, so then she took a version of a turkey baster and put medicine in it and opened his mouth and put a little drop or two drops of medicine in it. He swallowed and woke up and he was fine except he didn’t remember anything about what happened to him. He said, “Hello Miss Mouse! Where am I?”

The Mama mouse answered, “You were asleep because you ate some poisonous food and then I saved you, but you must not remember anything.”

Tuck did remember his mission, he just didn’t remember what just happened to him. Tuck realized something weird must have just happened if he was now in a mousehole that wasn’t his. Tuck went out again and said, “Thank you,” and grabbed the walkie-talkie again and said to Gawen, “plan two has partly worked. There were a couple of mistakes that I made, because I got poisoned, but now I’m okay. So what should I do now? I don’t see the light to the treasury like I did before when I stole the items.”

Gawen replied, “Maybe something’s blocking it, like a picture, so try throwing something on each wall and it’ll fall and the treasure will be behind it. Maybe it’s an illusion or something.”

Tuck asked, “What should I throw on the walls?”

Gawen replied again, “You should throw a torch or something that lights up, maybe, or just try throwing something that’s harder than a stick because a stick could easily snap.”

Tuck looked around and found that there was something hanging in the dim light and he took it down. Tuck said, “It might be the last time I’ll be seeing you if this doesn’t work because the fire spreads all over, it might burn me and the mouse who helped me.” He threw it at the wall, but sadly nothing happened and the fire started spreading. He threw it at the one next to the door but not near the door and it finally worked. A passage opened up and he walked through the passage and the passage door closed. He walked through the dark passageway and then saw the shimmering light of the treasury and took some more things to show the king it wasn’t Gawen and then went back out, and snuck out again with a couple of small things.

The next day, news spread that it wasn’t Gawen and somebody else must have stolen the jewels. Tuck was so happy to be free and alive, he ran back to Gawen, who was still in the same place that he was before. Tuck was alive and had done his mission. Tuck was very satisfied with himself.

Gawen said, “You did good. You may keep the items you just found but when somebody’s not looking, return the other items you had stolen.”

“Can I keep twelve and return the rest,  if that’s okay with you Gawen?” asked Tuck.

“Sure,” answered Gawen, happy.

Just then, Gawen and Tuck realized they had made the king aware that it was not Gawen who stole the jewels, but the guards probably had stopped looking for Gawen and King Basil was probably thinking that he would never find Gawen ever again. Gawen decided to run away because he didn’t know how to fix their problems, and also he wanted to be free and not stuck up in the castle doing duties for King Basil anymore even though he used to really like the king.

“Tuck, do you want to run away together?” Gawen asked.

“Sure!”
They both started  planning to run away. Gawen looked back at the castle where King Basil sat. Gawen wrote a letter and slipped it under the door. It said:

DEAR KING BASIL,

THIS IS FROM YOUR HONORABLE GOOSE, GAWEN. I AM WRITING TO TELL YOU THAT I AM NOT THE ONE WHO STOLE THE JEWELS. I AM ALSO WRITING TO TELL YOU THAT I DO KNOW WHO HAS TAKEN THE GEMS, BUT  I WILL NOT TELL YOU THAT INFORMATION. YOU HAVE DISRESPECTED ME AND I DO NOT WISH TO BE FRIENDS ANY LONGER. I WILL ALWAYS REMEMBER THE GOOD TIMES WE HAD AS FRIENDS. I WON’T DISCLOSE WHERE I AM GOING EITHER. TUCK AND I ARE RUNNING AWAY TOGETHER.

SINCERELY,

GAWEN GOOSE

Gawen returned to Tuck and asked, “Are you ready?”

“Let’s go.”

 

THE END

 

Epilogue

Twenty years later, Tuck and Gawen are successful scientists and heroes. They are now known throughout many lands and KINGDOMS, including King Basil’s…

 

DUN DUN DUN!